AS400 Operations Basic

AS/400 Advanced Series

IBM

Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems

SC21-8384-01


IBM


SC21-8384-01

Take Note! Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under “Notices” on page ix.

Second Edition (November 1996) |

This edition applies to the licensed programs IBM System/36 System Support Program Products, (Program 5716-SSP), Release 7 Modification 5; IBM Operating System/400, (Program 5716-SS1), Version 3 Release 7 Modification 0, and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions. Make sure that you are using the proper edition for the level of the product. Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch serving your locality. If you live in the United States, Puerto Rico, or Guam, you can order publications through the IBM Software Manufacturing Solutions at 800+879-2755. Publications are not stocked at the address given below. IBM welcomes your comments. A form for readers’ comments may be provided at the back of this publication. You can also mail your comments to the following address: IBM Corporation Attention Department 542 IDCLERK 3605 Highway 52 N Rochester, MN 55901-7829 USA or you can fax your comments to: United States and Canada: 800+937-3430 Other countries: (+1)+507+253-5192 If you have access to Internet, you can send your comments electronically to IDCLERK@RCHVMW2.VNET.IBM.COM; IBMMAIL, to IBMMAIL(USIB56RZ). When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1995, 1996. All rights reserved. Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

Contents Notices . Trademarks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems (SC21-8384) Who Should Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What You Should Do Before You Use this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . Where to Go for Other Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ix ix xi xi xii xiii

AS/400 System Operation |

| |

Chapter 1. AS/400 System Operations Tasks . . . . What You Need to Know about Your Control Panel . . . IPL Types and Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninterrupted Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference to Operator Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Information that Applies to the AS/400 System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 1-1 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8

OS/400 for the SSP Operator Chapter 2. Starting the System Unit and OS/400 Operating System Using the OS/400 Sign On Display during an IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3. Stopping the System Unit Stopping the AS/400 System . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5. Handling OS/400 Messages . . . . Most Common Types of OS/400 Messages . . . Displaying OS/400 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying Messages from the System . . . . . . How to Handle Break Messages . . . . . . . . . . Displaying OS/400 System Operator Messages . Working with OS/400 Message Queues . . . . . . Handling OS/400 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . Understanding OS/400 Keyboard Error Messages Sending OS/400 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1 2-3 3-1 3-1 4-1 4-1 4-1

5-1 5-1 . 5-1 . 5-5 . 5-7 . 5-7 5-10 5-14 5-15 5-16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6. Using OS/400 CL Commands to Do Tasks CL Commands — Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Operational Assistant Displays . . . . . . . . . . . Using Assistance Levels and User Profiles . . . . . . . . Doing Specific Tasks (GO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

 Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4. The OS/400 System Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Name of the System Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How the System Console Display is Different from Other Displays

Chapter 7. Printing with OS/400 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding OS/400 Printer Output . .

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-9 7-1 7-1 7-3

iii

Managing Printed Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with All Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparing System/36 Print Commands to OS/400 Print Commands Chapter 8. Working with OS/400 Subsystems Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with a Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 9. OS/400 System Security Levels of Security . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Passwords . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10. Controlling OS/400 Jobs Submitting Batch Jobs . . . . . . . . . . Working with Batch Jobs . . . . . . . . Looking at Job Queues . . . . . . . . . Working with Signed-On Users . . . . . Displaying Detailed Job Information . . Changing How a Job Is Run . . . . . . Working with Job Logs . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11. Working with OS/400 Devices and Communications Displaying and Changing Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Device Displaying and Changing a Device Description . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Local Device Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating Communications Lines and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Remote Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Switched Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 12. Saving and Restoring OS/400 and OS/400 Objects Saving the Entire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Entire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the OS/400 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the OS/400 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving AS/400 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring AS/400 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Individual OS/400 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Individual OS/400 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13. Working with Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 Program Temporary Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS/400 Program Maintenance Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering LIC and OS/400 PTFs and PTF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 14. Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using TFRM36 . . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using the STRM36PRC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine using STRPASTHR . .

iv

AS/400 Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems R7.5

. . .

. . . . . . . .

7-7 7-10 7-13 7-14 7-15 8-1 8-1 8-2 9-1 9-1 9-2

10-1 10-1 10-5 10-10 10-12 10-14 10-16 10-19 11-1 11-1 11-2 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 12-1 12-1 12-2 12-2 12-3 12-3 12-3 12-3 12-5

13-1 13-1 13-2 14-1 14-3 14-6 14-7

SSP for the OS/400 Operator Chapter 15. Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . Starting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Command line Starting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Automatically . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 16. Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State . . . . . . Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the SSP System Console Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 21. Working with SSP Subsystems Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting an SSP Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . Ending an SSP Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Status of an SSP Subsystem . Chapter 22. SSP Security Password Security . . . . . Menu Security . . . . . . . . Badge Security . . . . . . . Communications Security . Resource Security . . . . . Working with SSP Security

15-1 15-1 15-5

.

16-1 16-1 16-2

. .

16-3

. .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 19. Using SSP Commands and Procedures to Do Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Help for Commands and Procedures Chapter 20. Printing with SSP . . . . . . . . . Finding SSP Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Printer Output — Command Summary Managing Printer Output — Complete Details . Working with Spool Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Printed Output — Selected Examples Configuring Printer Options . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

. .

Chapter 17. Operating the SSP Console and SSP Subconsoles . . . . The SSP Console: A Way of Controlling the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine The SSP Subconsole: A Way of Controlling SSP Printers . . . . . . . . . . Transferring the SSP Console Function to an Alternative SSP Console . . Using the SSP Console Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Subconsole Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 18. Handling SSP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . How You Know That You Have an SSP Message . . . . . . . . Types of SSP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole Replying to SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole Sending SSP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSP Keyboard Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Keyboard Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17-1 17-1 17-1 17-2 17-4 17-5 18-1 18-1 18-2 18-6 18-7 18-9 18-10 18-11 19-1 19-1 20-1 20-2 20-3 20-3 20-6 20-8 20-8 21-1 21-1 21-2 21-2 21-2 22-1 22-1 22-1 22-2 22-2 22-3 22-3

Contents

v

Chapter 23. Controlling SSP Jobs Working With Current Running Jobs Working with the History File . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24. Working with SSP Devices and Communications Displaying and Changing Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Local Device Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Communications Lines and Controllers . . . . . . . . . Configuring Remote Communications Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 25. Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving and Restoring an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . Saving and Restoring the SSP Operating System, Licensed Programs, and Other SSP System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 26. Working with SSP Program Temporary Fixes AS/400 Advanced 36 Program Maintenance Strategy . . . . . Ordering SSP PTFs and PTF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying or Printing Cumulative PTF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Cumulative SSP PTF Packages Corrective SSP PTFs (Patches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping the TC Device ID to the CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What to Do if the Mapping Failed Changing the TC Device ID Back to a Tape Cartridge Drive .

23-1 23-2 23-2 24-1 24-1 24-1 24-1 24-1

.

25-1 25-1

.

25-2

. . . . . . . .

26-1 26-1 26-3 26-3 26-5 26-5 26-16 26-17 26-17

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 27. Establishing a Communications Link for Remote Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Remote Work Station Support

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27-1 27-1

AS/400 System Common Operator Tasks Chapter 28. Problem Handling . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Problem Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Error Codes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 29. System-to-System Communications - ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Default Startup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Starting the ILAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Starting ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . Disabling Automatic Startup of ILAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name . . . . . . . . Stopping ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILAN Communications Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Out Why ILAN Is Not ACTIVE or VARIED ON . . Using Display Station Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 30. Using CL Commands to Manage AS/400 Advanced 36 Configurations and Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command . . . . . . . Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration Command

vi


. .

28-1 28-1 28-9

29-1 29-3 29-3 29-3 29-6 29-7 29-8 29-8 29-10 29-13 29-15

30-1 30-1 30-8

Summary Table of CL Commands for Managing AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration Configuration That Exists Immediately after Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Communications Line or a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Diskette Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Tape or CD-ROM Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Device Mapping . . . . . . . . Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Controller Mapping . . . . . . Changing a Workstation Controller from Controller Mapping to Device Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls SSP Printer Output . . . . . . . Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls the Display Station . . . . . . . Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 32. Displaying Information About an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration and Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a Configuration Displaying a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30-13 31-1 31-2 31-4 31-8 31-10 31-12 31-17 31-22 31-26 31-36 31-39

. . . . . . . . .

32-1 32-1 32-2

Other Useful Information Appendix A. System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference System/36 Procedures to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference . . . . System/36 Control Commands to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference System/36 OCL Statements to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference . |

. . . .

A-1 A-1 A-27 A-32

Appendix B. Displaying and Setting the IPL Mode For a 9402 Model 436 Displaying the IPL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the IPL Mode

B-1 B-1 B-3

Appendix C. Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . Understanding Server Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Prestart Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Attributes For the AS/400 Advanced 36 Server Job Setting attributes for the AS/400 Advanced 36 SLIC Tasks Setting Attributes for the AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Jobs

C-1 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-5 C-6

Appendix D. Using Electronic Customer Support Reporting a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Status of an Open Problem . . . . . . . . Ordering PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-1 D-1 D-3 D-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-1

Appendix E. Preparing SSP for Dedicated State Bibliography Index

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

vii

viii


Notices References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Subject to IBM's valid intellectual property or other legally protectable rights, any functionally equivalent product, program, or service may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594, U.S.A. Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact the software interoperability coordinator. Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee. Address your questions to: IBM Corporation Software Interoperability Coordinator 3605 Highway 52 N Rochester, MN 55901-7829 USA This publication could contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. This publication may refer to products that are announced but not currently available in your country. This publication may also refer to products that have not been announced in your country. IBM makes no commitment to make available any unannounced products referred to herein. The final decision to announce any product is based on IBM's business and technical judgment. This publication contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental. This publication contains small programs that are furnished by IBM as simple examples to provide an illustration. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. All programs contained herein are provided to you "AS IS". THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED.

Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both:


ix

Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking Advanced Function Printing AFP Apple Application Development Application System/400 APPN AS/400 C/400 CICS DisplayWrite FORTRAN/400 IBM IMS Information Assistant IPX PSF

OfficeVision/400 Operating System/400 Operational Assistant OS/400 Q&A Question RPG/400 RM/COBOL-85 SystemView System/36 System/38 SUN TRN Ultimedia 400 486

Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows 95 logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company and is used by IBM Corporation under license. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. C-bus is a trademark of Corollary, Inc. Other company, product, and service names, which may be denoted by a double asterisk (**), may be trademarks or service marks of others.

x


About Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems (SC21-8384)

Who Should Use This Book | | | | |

This book is intended for use by a system operator who operates an AS/400 system on which SSP and OS/400 operating systems are both installed. For information about operating an AS/400 system that is running the System Support Program (SSP) operating system, where the SSP operating system is the only operating system installed see the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297. For information about operating an AS/400 system with only OS/400 installed, see the System Operation book, SC41-4203. That part of the system that contains the SSP operating system and related data and programs is referred to as an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Many of the tasks that were done on a System/36 work the same on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The tasks that were previously done using OS/400 are unchanged. However, there are some things the OS/400 operator will need to know in order to do tasks with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. There are also additional OS/400 CL commands. As the system operator, you have many responsibilities. This book provides information about day-to-day tasks, such as how to do the following: Work with jobs or printer output. Respond to messages sent to the system operator message queue (QSYSOPR), change message queues, and respond to error messages. Use the support functions available on the AS/400 system. Clean up your system periodically to improve performance and maintain good running condition. Save and restore all of the important data that you keep on your system. Work with the system unit control panel and OS/400 console. Start and stop the AS/400 system. Start and stop each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Pass through to SSP or OS/400 Handle OS/400 and SSP messages.

|

Install program temporary fixes (PTFs). Use OS/400 commands to do tasks. Print. Work with subsystems.


xi

Change security levels with OS/400. Use security with SSP. Transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Run SSP procedures from an OS/400 display station. Control SSP jobs. Use System to System Communications. Change your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. Display and set the IPL Mode. Use Electronic Customer Support The book is divided into several parts: Part 1: AS/400 System Operation

|

– Contains information on how to use the system control panel. – Contains a quick reference table of where to find operator tasks. Part 2: OS/400 for the SSP Operator – Contains information on tasks you can do to manage the OS/400 part of the system. Part 3: SSP for the OS/400 Operator – Contains information on tasks you can do to manage the AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that are on the system. Part 4: AS/400 Advanced 36 Common Operator Tasks – Contains information on handling problems. – Contains information on managing AS/400 Advanced 36 system operations. – Contains information on managing system-to-system communications using an Internal Local Area Network (ILAN). – Contains information on managing AS/400 Advanced 36 machines and their configurations. Part 5: Other Useful Information – Appendix A: System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference – Appendix B: Control Language Commands – Appendix C: Displaying and Setting the IPL Mode – Appendix D: Performance Considerations – Appendix E: Using Electronic Customer Support

What You Should Do Before You Use this Book To use this book effectively, you should have: Completed the installation instructions in the Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377. Read the General Information for SSP Operating System book, SC21-8299.

xii


Learned how to interpret the display indicators and the control panel on the display station that is attached to your system. Learned how to use the keyboard that is attached to your display station.

Where to Go for Other Information For operating instructions for your display station, refer to the operator's guide for the display station that is attached to your system. For information about OS/400 system operator tasks that are not included in this book, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. That book contains information about: Loading Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) for (OS/400) Problem Handling (for OS/400) You may need to refer to other IBM books for more specific information about a particular topic. For information about Advanced 36 publications, see the Advanced 36 Information Directory book, SC21-8292. For information about other AS/400 publications (except Advanced 36), see either of the following: The Publications Reference book, SC41-4003, in the AS/400 Softcopy Library. The AS/400 Information Directory, a unique, multimedia interface to a searchable database containing descriptions of titles available from IBM or from selected other publishers. The AS/400 Information Directory is shipped with the OS/400 operating system at no charge. For a list of related publications, see the Bibliography. Note: AS/400 book numbers start with SC41. SSP book numbers start with SC21. If you are using your AS/400 system in a System/36 environment, start the AS/400 system using an attended initial program load (IPL), and select the kind of environment you want to use. When you have completed the IPL, see the following manuals for information about the System/36 environment: System/36 Environment Programming, SC41-4730 System/36 Environment Reference, SC41-4731

About Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems (SC21-8384)

xiii

xiv


AS/400 System Operation |

| |

Chapter 1. AS/400 System Operations Tasks . . . . What You Need to Know about Your Control Panel . . . Control Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPL Types and Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninterrupted Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Reference to Operator Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Information that Applies to the AS/400 System


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 1-1 1-2 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8


Control Panel

|

Chapter 1. AS/400 System Operations Tasks This chapter contains information on: The system control panel The uninterruptible power supply A quick reference to OS/400 and SSP tasks

What You Need to Know about Your Control Panel System operators and service representatives use the control panel to: Do an initial program load (IPL) Do problem analysis Stop the system if the system cannot be stopped from a workstation. | |

Figure 1-1 shows the control panel for a 9402 Model 436 with the cover closed. Other AS/400 models can differ in appearance.

D

C

RV3P218-0

Figure 1-1. Control Panel with Cover Closed

When the control panel is closed, two lights are visible: The processor activity light .C/ The system attention light .D/ These lights are defined on page 1-3. To use the control panel, you must open the cover. To open the cover, do as follows:  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

1-1

Control Panel

1. If you have a lock on your control panel, unlock the cover. 2. Find the place on your control panel cover on the side of the machine that is indented. If you have difficulty locating the indentation, look at the diagram in Figure 1-1 on page 1-1. 3. Use your thumb to open the control panel. Figure 1-2 shows the control panel for a 9402 Model 436 without the cover. Other AS/400 models can differ in appearance.

| |

B

A

C

D

Function/Data

E

Enter

G

F Function 01 Display Selected IPL 02 Select IPL 03 Start IPL 04 Lamp Test 11 System Reference Code

RTSP035-2

Figure 1-2. Control Panel Without a Cover

Control Panel Details .A/ Power On light: The light comes on and stays on when there is power to the system unit. The Power On light blinks when: The system is being started up The system is being manually turned off Note: When the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command or the options on the Power On and Off Tasks (POWER) menu are used, the Power On light does not blink. .B/ Power pushbutton: Use the power pushbutton to start the system and stop the system. To start the system, press the pushbutton once. To stop or power off the system, press the pushbutton twice.

1-2


Control Panel

Power on is allowed in Manual or Normal mode. Power off is allowed in Manual mode only. Note: In most cases, to stop the system, use the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command on any command line of your OS/400 display station after stopping all AS/400 Advanced 36 machines. If you use the Power pushbutton to turn off the system, errors may occur with data files. For more information on stopping the system, see “Stopping the AS/400 System” on page 3-1. .C/ Processor Active light: The system unit has one Processor Active light. The light blinks when programs are running that use the processor. .D/ System Attention light: This light comes on when the system requires operator attention, such as correcting a severe system failure. For information about correcting system problems, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. .E/ Function/Data display: The same display and pushbuttons are used for both function and data. When you press a Select pushbutton (.F/), the function numbers on the Function/Data display increase or decrease. For example, 01 becomes 02 and A M becomes B M. When you press the Enter pushbutton (.G/), displayed data may disappear. Note: For example, when you press the Enter pushbutton, 02 becomes 02.

B M

Only the numbers that can be used in the present mode are displayed. The Function/Data display can display up to 8 digits. The selected function is not processed until the Enter pushbutton (.G/) is pressed. System reference codes or other information from the processing unit or control panel are also shown in the Function/Data display. Note: If the system attention light comes on, it indicates the system requires operator attention. In this case, a code of 11-3 becomes the System Reference Code (SRC) when you push the Enter pushbutton. An example of an SRC is A6ððð9ð2. .F/ Select pushbuttons: There are two select pushbuttons. These buttons are used to increase or decrease the number shown in the Function/Data display. The select pushbutton on the left increases the values in the Function/Data display. The select pushbutton on the right decreases the values in the Function/Data display. Either pushbutton can be used to change the data shown in the Function/Data display when you are selecting an initial program load (IPL) type and mode. The IPL type (A, B, C or D) and the IPL mode (M or N) can be selected by using Function 02. To select IPL type, do the following: 1. Press one of the Select pushbuttons until 02 is visible in the function/data display area. 2. Press the Enter pushbutton (.G/). 3. Press one of the Select pushbuttons until the IPL type and mode you want is visible in the function/data display area. 4. Press the Enter pushbutton.

Chapter 1. AS/400 System Operations Tasks

1-3

Control Panel

5. Press one of the select pushbuttons until ð1 is visible in the function/data display area. 6. Press the Enter pushbutton. ð1 and the IPL type and mode are displayed in the function/data display. Attention: Do not use Function code ð8 unless it is an emergency. This is the emergency power off code. Use of Function code 08 may cause unpredictable results. .G/ Enter pushbutton: The Enter pushbutton is used to send function information shown in the Function/Data display to the processing unit or to save the type of IPL type and mode you selected. Note: You can also display the IPL type and mode. To do so, follow steps 5 and 6 on page 1-4 described under the .F/ Select pushbuttons topic.

1-4


IPL Types and Modes

IPL Types and Modes The IPL types and modes are: AM

Performs a Manual IPL from the A side of the disk. This mode may be used when applying or removing Licensed Internal Code (LIC) PTFs. It can also be used to power off the system. Use this type and mode only under the direction of your support representative.

AN

Performs a Normal IPL from the A side of the disk. This mode should only be used when B N does not work and you are told to do so by your support representative.

BM

Performs a Manual IPL from the B side of the disk. This mode should only be used when an attended IPL must be performed or you need to power off the system. This type of IPL is used when you need to change the system date and time permanently.

BN

Performs a normal IPL from the B side of the disk. This is the type and mode used most of the time. It is also the mode the system must be in if you want to do an unattended IPL.

CM

Allows service representatives to perform a special IPL. This mode is for use only by service representatives. Never IPL in this type and mode.

CN

Allows service representatives to perform a special IPL. This mode is for use only by service representatives. Never IPL in this type and mode.

DM

Performs a manual IPL from either CD-ROM or tape. This mode is used to install Licensed Internal Code and the OS/400 operating system in attended mode. This is the most often used IPL type and mode for installation.

DN

Performs a normal IPL from either CD-ROM or tape. This mode is used to install Licensed Internal Code and the OS/400 operating system in unattended mode.

Manual

When the mode is set to Manual (M), the system allows you to do all manual IPLs, such as an operator-attended IPL from disk, CD-ROM or tape. Manual mode also allows you to do some manual control functions, such as selecting an IPL type and mode or displaying the kind of IPL that the system is set to run. However, in manual mode, you cannot do a remote IPL, an IPL by date and time, or an IPL after a power failure. Note: You should set the mode to Manual only when it is necessary. This ensures that no one accidentally presses the Power pushbutton and causes the system to stop.

Normal

The Normal mode allows you to turn the power on and then automatically start the system in any of the following ways: IPL remotely IPL by date and time IPL after a power failure


1-5

Uninterrupted Power System

Note: Your system should be in Normal mode most of the time. The table in Figure 1-3 on page 1-6 summarizes what operations you can do in the Manual (M) or Normal (N) IPL modes: Figure 1-3. Operation Summary for Manual and Normal Modes Manual Mode

Normal Mode

Turn on system (Power pushbutton)

Allowed

Allowed

Power off (Power pushbutton)

Allowed

Not allowed

Display Selected IPL

Allowed

Allowed

Select IPL

Allowed

Allowed

Start IPL

Allowed

Not allowed

Display system reference code

Allowed

Allowed

Remote IPL

Not allowed

Program control allowed

Timed IPL

Not allowed


Restart IPL (after power failure)

Not allowed


Power Down System command



Operation

Note: You can display the kind of IPL the system is set to do when the system is in any mode. If you want to stop the system when the mode is set to Normal, use the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command at any display station after you stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machines. You must have QSYSOPR authority to use the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command.

|

Uninterrupted Power System The AS/400 system supports an external uninterruptible power system (UPS). You can install UPS to protect your AS/400 system from temporary power loss. Your AS/400 system unit and the OS/400 console should be connected to the UPS. If the UPS is installed, it automatically activates when there is a utility power loss. The UPS provides full operating power to all system components for a short time.

|

1-6


Quick Reference

Quick Reference to Operator Tasks This table provides information on where to find out how to do OS/400 and SSP operator tasks. Figure 1-4 (Page 1 of 2). Quick Reference to OS/400 and SSP Operator Tasks Operator Task

OS/400 Operating System

SSP Operating System

Starting the System

Chapter 2, “Starting the System Unit and OS/400 Operating System”

Chapter 15, “Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine”

Stopping the System

Chapter 3, “Stopping the System Unit”

Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine”

Understanding Consoles and Subconsoles

Chapter 4, “The OS/400 System Console”

Chapter 17, “Operating the SSP Console and SSP Subconsoles”

Handling Messages

Chapter 5, “Handling OS/400 Messages”

Chapter 18, “Handling SSP Messages”

Using Commands to Do Tasks

Chapter 6, “Using OS/400 CL Commands to Do Tasks”

Chapter 19, “Using SSP Commands and Procedures to Do Tasks”

Printing

Chapter 7, “Printing with OS/400”

Chapter 20, “Printing with SSP”

Working with Subsystems

Chapter 8, “Working with OS/400 Subsystems”

Chapter 21, “Working with SSP Subsystems”

Understanding Security

Chapter 9, “OS/400 System Security”

Chapter 22, “SSP Security”

Controlling Jobs

Chapter 10, “Controlling OS/400 Jobs”

Chapter 23, “Controlling SSP Jobs”

Working with Devices and Communications

Chapter 11, “Working with OS/400 Devices and Communications”

Chapter 24, “Working with SSP Devices and Communications”

Saving and Restoring

Chapter 12, “Saving and Restoring OS/400 and OS/400 Objects”

Chapter 25, “Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information”

Working with Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs)

Chapter 13, “Working with Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 Program Temporary Fixes”

Chapter 26, “Working with SSP Program Temporary Fixes”

Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine

Chapter 14, “Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine”

Not applicable

Establishing communication with a remote workstation

Not applicable

Chapter 27, “Establishing a Communications Link for Remote Workstations”

Solving Problems

Chapter 28, “Problem Handling”

Chapter 28, “Problem Handling”

Establishing Internal System Communications

Chapter 29, “System-to-System Communications - ILAN Communications”

Chapter 29, “System-to-System Communications - ILAN Communications”

Managing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines and Their Configurations. (For example, creating, starting, or deleting an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine)

Chapter 30, “Using CL Commands to Manage AS/400 Advanced 36 Configurations and Machines”

Chapter 30, “Using CL Commands to Manage AS/400 Advanced 36 Configurations and Machines”


1-7

Quick Reference

Figure 1-4 (Page 2 of 2). Quick Reference to OS/400 and SSP Operator Tasks

|

Operator Task

OS/400 Operating System

SSP Operating System

Changing an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration

Chapter 31, “Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration”


Displaying Information About an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration and Machine

Chapter 32, “Displaying Information About an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration and Machine”

Chapter 32, “Displaying Information About an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration and Machine”

Using Media

Chapter 4 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.

Chapter 7 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297.

Additional Information that Applies to the AS/400 System Other Useful Information is included in the following:. Appendix A, “System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference” Appendix B, “Displaying and Setting the IPL Mode For a 9402 Model 436” Appendix C, “Performance Considerations” Appendix D, “Using Electronic Customer Support” Appendix E, “Preparing SSP for Dedicated State”

1-8


OS/400 for the SSP Operator Chapter 2. Starting the System Unit and OS/400 Operating System Using the OS/400 Sign On Display during an IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3. Stopping the System Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping the AS/400 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing to Stop the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the POWER Menu to Stop the System . . . . . . . . . . Using the Power Down System Command to Stop the System Using the Power Pushbutton to Stop the System . . . . . . . . Chapter 4. The OS/400 System Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Name of the System Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How the System Console Display is Different from Other Displays

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5. Handling OS/400 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Most Common Types of OS/400 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying OS/400 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Additional Information about Your Messages . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying Messages from the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Severity Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Handle Break Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying OS/400 System Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your User Profile Message Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Responding to OS/400 Messages Working with OS/400 Message Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Message Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling OS/400 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling Important System Messages in the QSYSMSG Message Queue Creating the QSYSMSG Message Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages on Menus and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Work with Problems Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding OS/400 Keyboard Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending OS/400 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Send Message Command to Send a Message . . . . . . . . . Using the Send Break Message Command to Send a Message . . . . . Chapter 6. Using OS/400 CL Commands to Do Tasks . . . CL Commands — Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Operational Assistant Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Assistance Levels and User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Assistance Level Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Assistance Levels Temporarily — Examples . . . Changing Assistance Levels in Your User Profile . . . . . . . Using CL Commands with the Operational Assistant Displays Doing Specific Tasks (GO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus for System Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7. Printing with OS/400 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . .  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

2-1 2-3 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 4-1 4-1 4-1

5-1 5-1 . 5-1 . 5-3 . 5-5 . 5-5 . 5-7 . 5-7 . 5-8 . 5-9 5-10 5-12 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-16 5-17

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-9 7-1 7-1 7-1

Printer Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Finding OS/400 Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Getting to the Work with Printer Output Display Using Operational Assistant 7-3 Getting to the Work with Printer Output Display Using a CL Command . . . 7-3 Using the Work with Printer Output Display to Find Output . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Understanding Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Printing Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Managing Printed Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Holding Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Releasing Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Deleting Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Changing Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 What to Do if the Printer Output Is Not Already Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Assigning Printer Output to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Working with Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Starting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Stopping a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Restarting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Answering Printer Messages Changing Forms on a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Working with Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Working with All Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Comparing System/36 Print Commands to OS/400 Print Commands . . . . . 7-15 Chapter 8. Working with OS/400 Subsystems Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OS/400 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSP Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with a Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Subsystem Descriptions . . . . Chapter 9. OS/400 System Security Levels of Security . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Security Level . . . . Changing Passwords . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10. Controlling OS/400 Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submitting Batch Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submitting a Batch Job to Run Immediately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling a Batch Job to Run Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Job Schedule to Run at a Different Date or Time . . . Scheduling a Job Using Job Schedule Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Job Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving a Job Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Job Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Job Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Holding and Releasing a Job Schedule Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling a Batch Job to Start an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Working with Batch Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Batch Jobs of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying All Batch Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Batch Jobs by Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS/400 Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems R7.5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-2 9-1 9-1 9-1 9-2 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-4 10-5 10-5 10-5 10-5 10-6 10-6 10-7

Holding a Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing a Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending a Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Job Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Looking at Job Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Holding a Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing a Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Unassigned Job Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Signed-On Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Signed-On Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Customized Work with User Jobs Command . . Signing Users Off the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Signed-On Users and Sorting the User List . . . . Finding Additional Information about Signed-On Users . . Sending Messages to Signed-On Users . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Detailed Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Job Status Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Job Definition Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Job Run Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Call Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Open Files Changing How a Job Is Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Job’s Priority on a Job Queue . . . . . . . . . Moving a Job to a Different Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . Changing How an Active Job Is Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Job’s Print Priority Assigning a Job to a Different Output Queue . . . . . . . . Working with Job Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing a Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Logging Level for a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Messages from the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Job Log Output Files to a Separate Output Queue

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11. Working with OS/400 Devices and Communications Displaying and Changing Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Device Status Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Considerations for Renaming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying and Changing a Device Description . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Local Device Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating Communications Lines and Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Remote Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Switched Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Manual Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Manual Answer for Countries Other Than the United States Chapter 12. Saving and Restoring OS/400 and OS/400 Objects Saving the Entire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Entire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the OS/400 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the OS/400 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving AS/400 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-8 10-9 10-9 10-9 10-10 10-11 10-11 10-11 10-12 10-12 10-12 10-13 10-14 10-14 10-14 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-16 10-16 10-17 10-17 10-18 10-18 10-19 10-19 10-19 10-20 10-20 10-21 11-1 11-1 11-2 11-2 11-2 11-3 11-3 11-4 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-7 12-1 12-1 12-2 12-2 12-3 12-3

OS/400 for the SSP Operator

Restoring AS/400 Storage . . . . . . . . . . Saving Individual OS/400 Objects . . . . . Saving Objects in Directories . . . . . . Saving Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Configuration Objects . . . . . . Saving Changed Objects . . . . . . . . . Saving Documents, Folders, and Mail . Saving Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Licensed Programs . . . . . . . . Saving Specific Objects . . . . . . . . . Saving Security Data . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Individual OS/400 Objects . . . . Restoring Objects in Directories . . . . . Restoring Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Configuration Data . . . . . . Restoring Changed Objects . . . . . . . Restoring Documents, Folders, and Mail Restoring Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Licensed Programs . . . . . . Restoring Specific Objects . . . . . . . . Restoring User Profiles . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Object Authority . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13. Working with Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 Program Temporary Fixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AS/400 Program Maintenance Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventive Service (Cumulative PTF Packages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrective Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering LIC and OS/400 PTFs and PTF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .

| |

. . . . .

Chapter 14. Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . Important Information about Transferring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions on Transfers using the TFRM36 and STRM36PRC Commands Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using TFRM36 . . . . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the TFRM36 Command — Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Allow for Automatic Sign-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Correct User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using the STRM36PRC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the STRM36PRC Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running an SSP Procedure from OS/400 — Examples . . . . . . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine using STRPASTHR . . . . Running the STRPASTHR command: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using the STRPASTHR Command — Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


12-3 12-3 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-7 12-7 12-7

13-1 13-1 13-1 13-1 13-2 14-1 14-1 14-1 14-3 14-3 14-4 14-5 14-5 14-6 14-6 14-7 14-7 14-8 14-8

Starting System Unit

Chapter 2. Starting the System Unit and OS/400 Operating System

|

This chapter contains directions on how to start a system unit for a 9402 model 436 that contains both the SSP and OS/400 operating systems. For directions on how to start other models, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.

|

Note:

| | |

|

You can run OS/400 simultaneously with as many as three AS/400 Advanced 36 machines.

|

When you start the system unit, you are starting OS/400 and any AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that are set up to automatically start. For information on starting AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, see Chapter 15, “Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.”

|

Note: To perform the tasks in this chapter, you must have OS/400 installed on your system. If you have SSP installed on your system and OS/400 is not installed, see the Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377.

| | |

To start the system, turn the system power on by pressing the white power pushbutton once. This does an initial program load (IPL). During an IPL, system programs are loaded from the system auxiliary storage and the system hardware is checked. When the IPL is finished, the AS/400 Sign On display is shown on all workstations available to OS/400. For information on assigning workstations to OS/400 or SSP, see “Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls the Display Station” on page 31-36. The following situations typically require an IPL: Starting normal system operations Starting a remote system Changing configuration options Recovering after a power failure When your system is sent to you, it is set to do a normal or unattended IPL. An unattended IPL is done automatically by the system after the power to the system is turned on. An attended IPL shows various displays on the display station used for the OS/400 console and allows you to change configuration options or change certain system values to affect how the system runs. The table in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1 is a summary of how to do IPLs and what the IPL mode should be set to on the system control panel.


2-1


Figure 2-1. Performing IPLs System State Running

Unattended IPL

Attended IPL

1. Set IPL mode to Normal.

1. Set IPL mode to Manual.

2. Stop any AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that are running.

2. Stop any AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that are running.

3. Set QIPLTYPE system value to 0 (Unattended).

3. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES) on any command line and press Enter.

4. Type PWRDWNSYS *IMMED RESTART(*YES) on any command line and press Enter.

4. Follow the display on the console to complete the IPL. 5. Set the mode to Normal.

Not Running

1. Set IPL mode to Normal.

1. Set IPL mode to Manual.

2. Power on all devices.

2. Power on all devices.

3. Press the Power Pushbutton Once.

3. Press the Power Pushbutton Once. 4. Follow the directions on the OS/400 console to complete the IPL. 5. Set the mode to Normal.

Note: Always set the mode to Normal after the IPL is finished. For more information on the following IPL options, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. Setting Up Your Automatic Power On and Off Schedules Starting a Remote System Changing Your System during IPL System Password

2-2



Using the OS/400 Sign On Display during an IPL à@

ð

Sign On System . . . . . : Subsystem . . . . : Display . . . . . : User . . . . . . Password . . . . Program/procedure Menu . . . . . . Current library .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

SYSTEMð1 QBASE DSPð1

__________ __________ __________ __________

Figure 2-2. Sign On Display

To sign on the OS/400 system: 1. Type your user ID, your password (if security is active), and fill in any of the optional entry fields you want to use. Use the Tab key to move the cursor from field to field on the display. Notes: a. The Password field is shown only if password security is active on the system and the security level is higher than 10. b. In the top right corner of the Sign On display the following are shown. The name of the system you are using The subsystem the system is using For more information on OS/400 subsystems, see Chapter 8, “Working with OS/400 Subsystems.” The workstation identifier (ID) 2. Press Enter. If this is an attended IPL, the IPL Options display is shown. The IPL options display is used to clear job logs or spool files and to set the system time and date fields. For more information about the IPL Options display, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. If this is an unattended IPL, (depending on what options you select on this display or what is defined in your user profile), one or more of the following occurs:

The AS/400 Main Menu is shown. Another menu is shown. A program or procedure is run. A current library is inserted into your library list.

If you specify a program or procedure to run and a menu to be shown, the program or procedure is run first and then the menu is shown. Now that your system is up and running be aware that: The Operational Assistant* displays are now the default.

Chapter 2. Starting the System Unit and OS/400 Operating System

2-3


The system cleanup functions are automatically started with default values. For more information about customizing the cleanup function, see chapter 8 of the System Operation book, SC41-4203. The Attention key program defaults to display the Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu. For more information on signon displays, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.

2-4


Stopping the AS/400 System

Chapter 3. Stopping the System Unit This chapter contains directions on how to stop the system unit. When you stop the system unit, you are stopping OS/400 and any AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that are not already stopped. Attention: If you power off the system unit without stopping the AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, Jobs running under SSP will end abnormally. SSP files will not be closed and may be in an unknown state. For information on stopping AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.”

Stopping the AS/400 System You can stop the system in several different ways: POWER menu Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command Power Pushbutton

Preparing to Stop the System 1. Make sure all batch jobs are finished and all users are signed off. 2. Check to make sure no AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are currently active. a. Type WRKM36 M36(\ALL/\ALL) b. Press Enter. The Work with M36 Machines display appears. c. From the SSP console, stop all AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that have a status of Started and return here. For directions, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.” d. From the OS/400 console, stop all AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that have a status of Starting or Job Queue. To do so, use the End AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (ENDM36) command. For information on using the WRKM36 command to stop AS/400 Advanced 36 machines which could not be stopped in the usual way, see “Ending an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine” on page 30-7. e. From the OS/400 console, press F3 (End) to end the WRKM36 command. 3. Unload all media in the devices before the system is powered down to ensure the integrity of data on the media.


3-1


Using the POWER Menu to Stop the System To power off the system immediately: 1. Follow the directions in “Preparing to Stop the System” on page 3-1. 2. Type GO POWER on any OS/400 command line. 3. Press Enter. The Power On and Off Tasks (POWER) menu appears. From this menu you can: Display the schedule Change the schedule Power off the system immediately Power off the system and then power on Examples of using options 3 and 4 are included in this chapter. 4. To keep the power off until the next time the system is scheduled to power on: a. In the option field, type 3 to select Power off the system immediately. b. Press Enter. The Confirm Power Off of System display appears as shown in Figure 3-1.

à@

ð

Confirm Power Off of System System: Next scheduled power on: Date . . . . . . . . . . . : Time . . . . . . . . . . . :

SYSTEMð1

ð5/19/95 ð5:4ð:ðð

To confirm immediate power off, press F16. To cancel, press F12.

Figure 3-1. Confirm Power Off of System Display for Immediate Power Down

c. Press F16. When you press F16 (Confirm), an immediate power down occurs that causes the subsystems to end all active jobs. Note: Do not turn the modem on or off when the system is turned off and is made ready for remote IPL. Otherwise, the system may start unexpectedly, then turn itself off in a few minutes. 5. To power off the system and then restart the system immediately after it powers off: a. In the option field, type 4 to select Power off the system immediately and then power on.

3-2



b. Press Enter. The Confirm Power Off of System display appears as shown in Figure 3-2.

à@

ð

Confirm Power Off of System To confirm immediate power off and then immediate power on, press F16. To cancel, press F12.

Figure 3-2. Confirm Power Off of System Display for Immediate Power On

c. Press F16. When you press F16 (Confirm), the system stops running and then starts again automatically. Note: Do not turn the modem on or off when the system is turned off and is made ready for remote IPL. Otherwise, the system may start unexpectedly, then turn itself off in a few minutes. Important Note If you stop the system using the automatic power schedule or one of the options on the Power On and Off Tasks (POWER) menu, the IPL date and time system value (QIPLDATTIM) is checked and, if necessary, reset to the next scheduled power-on time. This checking does not occur if you power off in another way, so the system may not power on automatically. To force the power schedule to update the QIPLDATTIM system value, enter the following command on any command line and then press Enter. CHGPWRSCDE DAY(\TODAY) PWRONTIME(\SAME) PWROFFTIME(\SAME)

Using the Power Down System Command to Stop the System The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command prepares the system for ending and then starts the power-down sequence. All active subsystems are notified that the system is being powered down. No new jobs or routing steps can be started by any subsystem. For example, jobs that are on a job queue as a result of a Transfer Job (TFRJOB) command are not allowed to complete. During the subsequent initial program load (IPL), they are removed from the job queue and their job logs are produced. Note: All media in the devices are unloaded before the system is powered down to ensure the integrity of data on the media. The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command can be used on any OS/400 command line. To use the PWRDWNSYS command: 1. Follow the directions in “Preparing to Stop the System” on page 3-1. 2. On an OS/400 command line, type PWRDWNSYS 3. Press F4. The Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command prompt appears.

Chapter 3. Stopping the System Unit

3-3


4. Specify the options you want and then press Enter. Note: Positioning the cursor on one of the input fields and pressing F4 displays the values that can be specified for that parameter. Pressing the Help key or F1 provides additional information about that parameter.

Using the Power Pushbutton to Stop the System If you cannot use option 3 (Power off the system immediately) or option 4 (Power off the system immediately and then power on) on the Power On and Off Tasks (POWER) menu or the PWRDWNSYS command to stop the system, you can turn the power off using the Power pushbutton when the mode is set to Manual. Powering off this way causes the next IPL to be abnormal. There are two ways to power off the system using the Power Pushbutton. Normal sequence Emergency sequence Attention Using the Power pushbutton to turn off the system may cause results that cannot be predicted in your data files, and the next IPL will take longer to complete.

Make sure that no media is left in the media devices and that the mode is set to Manual. Note: Do not turn the modem on or off when the system is turned off and is made ready for remote IPL. Otherwise, the system may start unexpectedly, then turn itself off in a few minutes.

Normal Sequence 1. Press the Power pushbutton. The Function/Data display blinks with O?. (the international power off symbol). Note: To cancel the power off operation, press any other pushbutton on the control panel. 2. Press the Power pushbutton again. The Power On light blinks as the system is being powered off. When power off is complete, the light goes off. If the system does not turn the power off within 30 minutes or the System Attention light does not come on, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206, for further directions.

Emergency Sequence 1. Set 08 (fast power off) in the Function/Data display. 2. Press the Enter Pushbutton. A System Reference Code (SRC) of A1ðð 8ðð8 is shown in the Function/Data display. 3. Press the Power Pushbutton. The Function/Data display blinks with O? (The international power off symbol). 4. Press the Power Pushbutton again. The system will immediately power off.

3-4


OS/400 System Console

Chapter 4. The OS/400 System Console The OS/400 system console is the workstation that allows you to control and observe system operations. It is the workstation attached to the first input/output processor capable of supporting workstations. The system controls which display station is the OS/400 console. The system moves the OS/400 console only if the display station at the first workstation I/O processor, port 0, address 0 no longer works. For more information in determining which workstation is the OS/400 console, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.

Device Name of the System Console To find out the device-name for the OS/400 console, type: DSPSYSVAL QCONSOLE QCONSOLE is the value that specifies the name of the display device that is the console. You cannot change this system value.

How the System Console Display is Different from Other Displays The console display is like any other display with the exception of system break messages and commands. Unless the CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK command is issued, break messages are displayed only on the console. However, you can view these system messages using the DSPMSG QSYSOPR command from an OS/400 command line on any display station. For more information on messages, see Chapter 5, “Handling OS/400 Messages.” Most commands can be entered from any OS/400 display, the following commands must be run from the OS/400 system console: DST commands ENDSBS command if the subsystem you are ending is the controlling subsystem.


4-1

OS/400 System Console

4-2


Displaying Messages

Chapter 5. Handling OS/400 Messages Note: The displays shown in this chapter are those you would see if you were running at a basic assistance level. You would see different displays at other assistance levels. A message is any communication sent from one point to another point on the AS/400 system. The communication may be between you and the system or between you and another person using the system. The system communicates with you by sending Informational and Inquiry messages.

Most Common Types of OS/400 Messages Informational messages do not require a reply. These messages give you status on what the system is doing, errors that you make, and responses that you make to messages. Informational messages appear directly on the workstation display in the message line. The message line is the bottom line of the display. Inquiry messages give you information about the system, but request a reply. These messages are sent to either the system operator message queue (QSYSOPR), a user message queue, or the workstation message queue.

Displaying OS/400 Messages A message sent to your message queue is not usually shown automatically. A message interrupts you if: Your message queue is set to interrupt you (break mode). A message is sent with the Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) command. If you are interrupted, the Display Messages display is shown automatically as in Figure 5-1 on page 5-2. Note: If you are interrupted, the Display Messages display is always shown. It does not change based on the assistance level you are running with.


5-1

Displaying Messages

à@

ð

Display Messages Queue . . . . . : Library . . . : Severity . . . :

SMITHS1 QSYS ðð

Type reply (if required), press Enter. From . . . : QSYSOPR ð1/1ð/91 This system will go down in 1ð mins

System: Program . . . . : Library . . . : Delivery . . . :

SYSTEMð1 \DSPMSG \NOTIFY

13:31:33

Bottom F3=Exit F13=Remove all

F11=Remove a message F16=Remove all except unanswered

F12=Cancel F24=More keys

á Figure 5-1. Display Messages display

If your messages do not interrupt you whenever they are sent, you can see them by: Using the Display Messages (DSPMSG) command. Using the Work with Messages (WRKMSG) command. Selecting option 3 (Work with messages) on the Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu. Figure 5-2 on page 5-3 shows the Work with Messages display.

5-2


ñ

Displaying Messages

à@

ð

Work with Messages System: Messages for:

SYSTEMð1

SMITH

Type options below, then press Enter. 4=Remove 5=Display details and reply Opt _

_ _ _

Message Messages needing a reply Controller SYSTEMð1 contact not successful. Probable remote station problem (C R) Messages not needing a reply System is scheduled to be powered off at 22:3ð:ð1 on ð5/17/92. From . . : QPGMR ð5/17/92 22:15:ðð System is scheduled to be powered off at 22:3ð:ð1 on ð5/16/92. From . . : QPGMR ð5/16/92 22:15:ðð System is scheduled to be powered off at 22:45:ð1 on ð5/15/92. From . . : QPGMR ð5/15/92 22:3ð:ðð From . . : QPGMR ð5/14/92 22:3ð:ðð Bottom

F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Display system operator messages F16=Remove messages not needing a reply F17=Top F24=More keys

á

ñ

Figure 5-2. Work with Messages display

Note: By displaying all of your message queues that are in break mode or notify mode, you turn the message waiting light off. To print the messages in a message queue if your assistance level is *BASIC, use the Work with Messages (WRKMSG) command as follows: WRKMSG MSGQ(msgqname) OUTPUT(\PRINT) where msgqname is the name of the message queue that contains the messages you want to print. You can also print messages contained in a message file with the Display Message Description (DSPMSGD) command and F4 (Prompt). Specify a range of message identifiers and *PRINT for the Output (OUTPUT) parameter.

Finding Additional Information about Your Messages To find out more information about messages on the Work with Messages display, use option 5 (Display details and reply). When you use option 5 for a message that does not need a reply, you receive the additional information about that message. If the message requires a reply, you can type your reply in the field provided at the bottom of the Additional Message Information display. For example, Figure 5-3 on page 5-4 shows additional information about the first inquiry message in Figure 5-2:

Chapter 5. Handling OS/400 Messages

5-3

Displaying Messages

à@

ð

Additional Message Information Message ID . . . . . . : Date sent . . . . . . :

CPA57EF 11/18/91

Time sent

. . . . . . :

15:43:ð2

Message . . . . : Controller SYSTEMð1 contact not successful. Probable remote station problem. (C R) Cause . . . . . : The system was trying to exchange identifiers with the station when an error occurred. The probable causes are: -- The controller description on the remote system is not varied on. -- A configuration problem. -- A remote hardware problem. -- A local hardware problem or network problem if on an Ethernet network. -- A timing or performance problem. Recovery . . . : Do the following: -- Contact the remote operator to verify the remote system is not More... Type reply below, then press Enter. Reply . . . . _______________________________________________________ F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Print F21=Select assistance level

F9=Display message details

F12=Cancel

á

ñ

Figure 5-3. Additional Message Information Display – Basic Assistance Level

Press the Page Down key to see the rest of the information about the message. When you have read the information, type a reply in the Reply field at the bottom of the display and press Enter. To see more details about the message, press F9 (Display message details). Figure 5-4 shows the Display Message Details display.

à@

ð

Display Message Details Message ID . Date sent . Message type CCSID . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

: : : :

CPA57EF 11/18/91 Inquiry 65535

Severity . . . . . . . : Time sent . . . . . . :

From job . . . . . . . . . . . : User . . . . . . . . . . . . : Number . . . . . . . . . . . :

QSYSARB QSYS ðð93ð2

From program . . . . . . . . . :

QSWCDCR

To message queue . . . . . . . : Library . . . . . . . . . . :

QSYSOPR QSYS

99 15:43:ð2

Bottom Press Enter to continue. F1=Help

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

á Figure 5-4. Display Message Details display

5-4


ñ

Displaying Messages

To print a single message, use F6 (Print) on the Additional Message Information display. This prints all the information about the message shown on the display.

Identifying Messages from the System On some message displays, the message is accompanied by a letter and number code as shown in Figure 5-5.

CPF 0083 ↑ ↑ .A/ .B/ Figure 5-5. Example of a Message ID

This is the message identifier (ID) that is used to distinguish a message from others in the message file. The first three letters .A/ indicate the message category. The following list shows some typical message categories: CPA through CPZ

Messages from the operating system

CBE through CBX

COBOL messages

CSC

COBOL language syntax checker messages

LBE through LSC

COBOL messages

MCH

Licensed Internal Code messages

QRG

RPG language messages

RPG through RXT

RPG language messages

SBX through SSC

COBOL messages

SQL

Structured Query Language (SQL) messages

The remaining four digits .B/ indicate the sequence number of the message. The example message ID shown indicates this is a message from the operating system, number 0083. A message ID is shown when you press the Help key for an error message and additional message information is shown.

Message Severity Codes Figure 5-6 shows the different severity codes of the messages and the types they are associated with. Figure 5-6 (Page 1 of 2). Message Severity Codes Message Type

Severity Code

Informational messages. For informational purposes only; no reply is needed. The message can indicate that a function is in progress or that a function has completed successfully.

00

Warning. A potential error condition exists. The program may have taken a default, such as supplying missing data. The results of the operation are assumed to be successful.

10


5-5

Displaying Messages

Figure 5-6 (Page 2 of 2). Message Severity Codes Message Type

5-6

Severity Code

Error. An error has been found, but it is one for which automatic recovery procedures probably were applied; processing has continued. A default may have been taken to replace the wrong data. The results of the operation may not be correct. The function may not have completed; for example, some items in a list ran correctly, while other items did not.

20

Severe error. The error found is too severe for automatic recovery procedures and no defaults are possible. If the error was in the source data, the entire data record was skipped. If the error occurred while a program was running, it leads to an abnormal end of program (severity 40). The results of the operation are not correct.

30

Severe error: abnormal end of program or function. The operation has ended, possibly because the program was not able to handle data that was not correct or because the user canceled it.

40

Abnormal end of job or program. The job was not started or failed to start, a job-level function may not have been done as required, or the job may have been canceled.

50

System status. Issued only to the system operator message queue. It gives either the status of or a warning about a device, a subsystem, or the system.

60

Device integrity. Issued only to the system operator message queue, indicating that a device is not working correctly or is in some way no longer operational.

70

System alert and user messages. A condition exists that, although not severe enough to stop the system now, could become more severe unless preventive measures are taken.

80

System integrity. Issued only to the system operator message queue. Describes a condition where either a subsystem or system cannot operate.

90

Action. Some manual action is required, such as entering a reply or changing printer forms.

99


Displaying Messages

How to Handle Break Messages The following is an example of the Display Messages display which appears when a break message is sent.

à@

ð



SMITHS1 QSYS ðð

Type reply (if required), press Enter. From . . . : QSYSOPR ð1/1ð/91 This system will go down in 1ð mins

SYSTEMð1 \DSPMSG \NOTIFY

13:31:33

Bottom F3=Exit F13=Remove all



á

ñ

When you receive break messages that do not need a reply, 1. Read the message carefully. 2. Press Enter to get back to the display you were working on before the interruption. If the break message needs a reply, just type the reply on the line provided and press Enter. If you don’t want to reply to the break message, just press F12 to cancel. The display you were working on before the interruption appears again, and you can continue your work. Notes: 1. Remember, occasionally the last few characters entered before an interruption may be lost. 2. To display more information about a message, place the cursor under the message and press Enter. The Additional Message Information display appears.

Displaying OS/400 System Operator Messages To display messages in the system operator message queue (QSYSOPR), do one of the following: Press F6 (Display system operator messages) on the Work with Messages display.


5-7

Displaying Messages

Type DSPMSG QSYSOPR ASTLVL(*BASIC) on any command line and press Enter. Select option 1 (Display messages for system operator) on the Technical Support Tasks (TECHHELP) menu. Select option 3 (Work with system operator messages) on the Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu. Select option 6 (Display system operator messages) on the System Request menu. Figure 5-7 shows the Work with Messages display with system operator messages.

à@

ð

Work with Messages System: Messages for:

SYSTEMð1

System Operator

Type options below, then press Enter. 4=Remove 5=Display details and reply Opt

Message

_

Messages needing a reply Device PRTð1 not available (C R)

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Messages not needing a reply An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line Device ABRS2 no longer communicating. Device ABRS1 no longer communicating. Communications device ABRðð was allocated to subsystem

TOKENRING. TOKENRING. TOKENRING. TOKENRING. TOKENRING. QCMN. More...

F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F6=Display your messages F16=Remove messages not needing a reply F17=Top F24=More keys

á

ñ

Figure 5-7. System Operator Message Queue

You can work with the system operator messages exactly as you would any other messages. See “Responding to OS/400 Messages” on page 5-9 for information on how to reply or get additional information about these messages.

Your User Profile Message Queue When signing on to the system, the message queue defined in your user profile is put into the delivery mode specified in your user profile. For the system operator (user profile QSYSOPR), this message queue is QSYSOPR, unless it has been changed. Whenever you transfer to an alternative job, your user profile message queue is set to hold the messages. This allows your user profile message queue to move with you when you transfer back and forth between these two jobs. However, if you transfer to an alternative job and then sign on as a different user, the user profile message queue defined in the other user’s user profile will have its delivery mode set. At this time someone else can change the delivery mode of your user profile message queue, so when you transfer back, your user profile

5-8


Displaying Messages

message queue will not be set back to the delivery mode it was set to when doing the first transfer.

Responding to OS/400 Messages The system sometimes sends you error messages that require you to choose a response code option. Based on the option codes given (always in parentheses), this is generally a one-character response. For example, notice the five response option codes for this message: Verify alignment on device PRTð1. (I C G N R) Messages of this kind with response option codes most often appear on the system operator message queue. However, under certain circumstances, they can also appear on your own message queue. You do not have to know or remember the meanings of the numbers or letters in any response option code. The Additional Message Information display provides information about these option codes. In addition, this display also provides a reply line on which you can type your reply (if a reply is needed). To get to the Additional Message Information display from the Work with Messages display: 1. Position the cursor on the option line in front of the message you want to respond to. 2. In the option field, type 5 to select Display details and reply. 3. Press Enter. The Additional Message Information display appears. 4. Page down through the information to find the option you need. The following is an example of the Additional Message Information display.


5-9

Working with Message Queues

à@

ð

Additional Message Information Message ID . . . . . . : Date sent . . . . . . . : H -1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I -1. 2. 3. 4.

CPA5335 11/27/95

Time sent . . . . . . :

ð8:31:42

To hold the file, Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two separate keys. Load the new forms. Press Cancel. Press Stop and Start, or press Start/Stop. Type an H. To continue printing starting with the next line of the file, Press Stop only if Start and Stop are two separate keys. Load the new forms. Press Start or Start/Stop. Type an I.

More... Type reply below, then press Enter. Reply . . . ____________________________________________________________ F1=Help F3=Exit F6=Print F21=Select assistance level

F9=Display message details

F12=Cancel

á

ñ

Working with OS/400 Message Queues A message queue is like a mail box for messages sent to a user. Each workstation has a message queue with the same name as the device description name. Each user has a message queue with the same name as the user profile name (or user ID), and the system operator has a message queue named QSYSOPR. When a user signs on the system for the first time, the system automatically creates a user message queue. When a workstation is connected to the system for the first time, the system automatically creates a workstation message queue. When the system is configured for the first time, the system operator queue is created. You can see the messages from your workstation and personal message queues on the Work with Messages display. To see how your message queue is set up, press F24 (More keys) on the Work with Messages display and then press F22 (Display list details). Figure 5-8 on page 5-11 shows the Display List Details display.

5-10



à@

ð

Display List Details Message queue Library . . Delivery . . Program . . . Severity . . Allow alerts. CCSID . . . . Description .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

: : : : : : : :

SMITHS1 QSYS \NOTIFY \DSPMSG ð \YES

Message queue Library . . Delivery . . Program . . . Severity . . Allow alerts. CCSID . . . . Description .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

: : : : : : : :

SMITH QUSRSYS \NOTIFY \DSPMSG ð \NO 65535 Jim Smith

Work Station Message Queue

Press Enter to continue. F1=Help

F3=Exit

F12=Cancel

á

ñ

Figure 5-8. Display List Details display

This display shows the following information about your user and workstation message queues: Message Queue This is the name of the message queue on which the messages are found. Library This is the library that contains the message queue. Delivery This is the method by which messages are delivered, whether they interrupt you, sound an alarm, hold until answered, or automatically send a default reply. Program This is the name of the program called when a message arrives in a queue that is set to interrupt and the severity of the message is equal to or greater than the queue severity value. Severity Messages sent to the message queue with a severity level equal to or greater than this severity level interrupt you or turn on the message waiting light depending on how your message delivery is set. Allow alerts This value indicates whether messages sent to this message queue might also generate an alert. CCSID This is the coded character set identifier associated with the message queue. Description This is the description of the message queue, usually the name and address of the message queue owner.


5-11


Changing a Message Queue You can change the way a message queue notifies you of messages, change the message queue severity level, or the break-handling program. To change the information shown on the Display List Details display: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGMSGQ 2. Press F4. The Change Message Queue (CHGMSGQ) display appears. 3. Specify the name of the message queue you want to change for the Message queue (MSGQ) parameter and the name of the library containing the message queue you selected. Note: Steps 4 through 12 on page 5-13 are optional. 4. Specify the delivery mode you want to use for the Delivery (DLVRY) parameter. *SAME: The method of message delivery does not change. If this parameter has not been changed in a previous command, *SAME means that *HOLD is the method of delivery. However, if the specified message queue is a workstation message queue, it is automatically changed to *NOTIFY by the system at sign-on. *BREAK: When you receive a message, your work is interrupted, and a separate message display that contains the message is shown (unless you have specified a program to handle the message). *NOTIFY: When you receive a message, your work is not interrupted. You are notified that a message has arrived by the workstation attention light and an alarm (if your workstation has one) that sounds. You can use either the Display Messages (DSPMSG) command or Work with Messages (WRKMSG) command to see the message. *HOLD: The message queue keeps or holds the messages until you request them using the Display Messages (DSPMSG) or Work with Messages (WRKMSG) command. You are not notified when a new message arrives. *DFT: All messages are ignored, and any messages requiring a reply are sent the default reply. For the system operator message queue (QSYSOPR), the messages are kept in the queue and logged in the history log, QHST; this is known as unattended operation. For any other user or workstation message queue, none of the messages are kept in the queue. 5. Specify the severity code you want to use for the Severity code filter (SEV) parameter. The severity code is used to filter messages that interrupt your work or turn on your Message Waiting light. For example, if you enter a message severity code of 59 and the message queue is in break mode, the system shows messages with codes of 59 or greater. After you make this change, any message with a severity code of 59 or greater sent to the same message queue causes the Display Message display to be shown (unless you have specified a different program to handle the message). If you type a message severity code of 59, and the message queue is in notify mode, the system notifies the user of any messages in the message queue that

5-12



have a severity code of 59 or greater. After you make this change, any message with a severity code of 59 or greater sent to the same message queue causes a light to turn on at the workstation and the alarm (if your workstation has one) to sound. See “Message Severity Codes” on page 5-5 for more information on the types of messages and what they mean. 6. Type the text that describes the purpose for the message queue. 7. Press F10 (Additional parameters) to display more parameters you can use. 8. Specify the name of the program (and library) to be called for the Break handling program (PGM) parameter if you specified *BREAK for the Delivery (DLVRY) parameter. 9. Specify *NO for the Reset old messages (RESET) parameter to prevent messages you have already displayed but not removed from your message queue from being reset to the same status as new messages. Specify *YES to reset messages you have displayed on the message queue to the same status as new messages. Resetting old messages to new allows you to receive them again. 10. For the Force to auxiliary storage (FORCE) parameter, specify one of the following: *SAME to use the value specified in the identified message queue. *NO to specify that changes made to the message queue, including its messages, are not immediately forced into auxiliary storage. *YES to specify that all changes made to the message queue description and to the messages in the queue are immediately forced into auxiliary storage. If this field value is changed to *YES, the message queue is forced into auxiliary storage each time it is changed. This is an important recovery tool for message queues that provides communications between programs, but it may slow down system performance. 11. Specify the value you want to use for the allow alerts (ALWALR) parameter: *SAME uses the value specified in the identified message queue. *NO specifies that this message queue does not allow alerts to be generated from messages sent to it. *YES specifies that this message queue does allow alerts to be generated from messages sent to it. 12. Specify the character value you want to use for the coded character set identifier (CCSID) parameter: *SAME uses the value specified in the identified message queue. *HEX specifies that messages on this message queue cannot be converted. *MSG specifies that the CCSID of a message on this message queue is to be determined from the message. *JOB specifies that the CCSID of all messages on this message queue are to be considered in the CCSID of the job. Any valid job CCSID specifies that the CCSID of all messages on this message queue are to be considered in this CCSID. 13. Press Enter to change the message queue.


5-13

Handling OS/400 Error Messages

Handling OS/400 Error Messages You will receive a variety of system messages that indicate conditions ranging from simple typing errors to problems with system devices or programs. The message may be one of the following: An error message on your current display. A message regarding a system problem that is sent to the system operator message queue and shown on a separate Work with Messages display. A message regarding a system problem that is sent to the message queue specified in a device description. A message regarding a potential severe system condition that is sent to the QSYSMSG message queue, the system operator message queue, and other message queues specified by the users.

Handling Important System Messages in the QSYSMSG Message Queue The QSYSMSG message queue is an optional message queue that you create in the QSYS library. The QSYSMSG message queue can be used to monitor specific system messages that indicate potentially severe system conditions. Only messages that require immediate action are sent to the QSYSMSG message queue. Monitor the QSYSMSG message queue to be aware of critical messages related to your system.

Creating the QSYSMSG Message Queue To create the QSYSMSG message queue: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CRTMSGQ QSYS/QSYSMSG TEXT ('optional MSGQ to receive specific system messages') 2. Press Enter. Once the QSYSMSG message queue is created, certain specific system messages are directed to it. For example, the following message would be sent to the QSYSMSG message queue: CPF0907

Serious storage condition may exist. Press HELP.

For a complete listing and description of these messages, see Chapter 8, “Working With Messages” in the CL Programming book. You can write a break-handling program that monitors messages sent to the QSYSMSG message queue and takes action on specific messages you identify. To set up a program to receive messages from the QSYSMSG message queue, see Chapter 8, “Working With Messages” in the CL Programming book.

5-14


Handling OS/400 Error Messages

Error Messages on Menus and Displays If you request a task the system cannot run because of an error, an error message appears at the bottom of the display. Depending on the workstation, the keyboard may also lock. Note: Displays of some application programs may not have message lines. To obtain additional information about the error: 1. Move the cursor to the same line as the message, if you can move the cursor. 2. Press the Help key. The Additional Message Information display is shown. This display gives you more information about the error. Some messages allow you to run problem analysis. When you display a message queue, these messages have an asterisk (*) in front of them (intermediate assistance level) or are highlighted (basic assistance level). Note: Messages about critical system errors or conditions are reverse-imaged (intermediate assistance level), or highlighted (basic assistance level).

Using the Work with Problems Command To run the Work with Problems (WRKPRB) command: Intermediate Assistance Level 1. From the Display Messages display, move the cursor to the message that has an asterisk (*) beside it. 2. Press Help. Basic Assistance Level 1. From the Work with Messages display, type 5 in the Opt field to select Display Details and Reply. 2. Press Enter. The Additional Message Information display is shown. Press the F14 (Work with problem) key. From the Work with Problem (WRKPRB) display, you can show the details of the problem and work directly with the problem. To run the Work with Problem (WRKPRB) command for critical messages, press F15 (Work with critical problems) from the Additional Message Information display. Problem analysis helps you resolve an error that you could not resolve from the message or the Additional Message Information display. For more information about handling problems, see Chapter 6 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.

Understanding OS/400 Keyboard Error Messages When you press the wrong keyboard keys by mistake, the computer simply stops and tells you what is wrong. The computer has simply locked up the keyboard so you cannot continue your task until you make the necessary correction.


5-15

Sending OS/400 Messages

If you make an error, you should get a flashing number in the lower left corner of the display. In many cases, the number is ððð5. Some workstations show the number briefly and then replace it with a statement. The statement is called an error message. To find out what the error message means, press the key marked Help. If your keyboard does not have a Help key, press F1. The number is replaced with text. For example, the text might read: Cursor in protected area of display. The computer does not have a precise message for every error because it does not know why the wrong keys were pressed. Press the Error Reset key and the message disappears. The keyboard is now back to normal and you can continue with your task.

Sending OS/400 Messages As the system operator, you can send Informational messages like System Being Shut Down at 6:ðð. Messages are sent to any of the following: QSYSOPR (The system operator message queue) A user message queue The workstation message queue

Using the Send Message Command to Send a Message The Send Message (SNDMSG) command is used by a person to send an immediate message to one or more message queues. An immediate message is a message that is not predefined and is not stored in a message file. The message can be sent to the system operator, to other user ID's, to a user's message queue, to all currently active message queues or to the system history log, QHST. The sender can also require a reply from the message receiver. To send a message, 1. On an OS/400 command line, type SNDMSG 2. Press F4. 3. Type a message in the Message text field. The message you type can contain a maximum of 512 characters. If the text contains blanks or other special characters, the text must be enclosed in apostrophes.

5-16



4. Type one of the allowable values in the To user profile field. In the To user profile field, you can specify any of the following: user-profile-name Specify the user profile name of the user to whom the message is sent. *SYSOPR Sends the message to the system operator message queue, QSYS/QSYSOPR. *REQUESTER Sends the message to the user profile message queue for interactive jobs or to the system operator's message queue (QSYS/QSYSOPR) for batch jobs. *ALLACT Sends a copy of the message to the user profile message queue of each user profile with an interactive job currently running. *ALLACT cannot be specified with inquiry messages. 5. Press Enter. The message is sent.

Using the Send Break Message Command to Send a Message The Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) command is used to send an immediate message to one or more workstation message queues. This command temporarily interrupts the tasks being done by those who receive the message. To send a break message, do the following: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type SNDBRKMSG 2. Press F4. 3. Type a message in the Message text field. The message you type can contain a maximum of 512 characters. If the text contains blanks or other special characters, the text must be enclosed in apostrophes. If you use the command prompter (F4), the apostrophes are automatically added. 4. Complete the other required fields. 5. Press Enter. The message is sent. You use the other fields on the Send Break Message (SNDBRKMSG) display as follows: To workstation message queue (TOMSGQ) Specifies the names of one or more workstation message queues to which the break message is sent. Only the names of workstation message queues can be specified and only *LIBL or QSYS can be specified for the library value. You can enter more than one value. If you are on an entry display and you need additional entry fields to enter more values, type a plus sign (+) in the entry field opposite the phrase "+ for more" and press Enter. *ALLWS

The break message is sent to all workstation and Personal Computer message queues. *ALLWS cannot be specified for an inquiry message.


5-17


message-queue-name Specify the name of the message queue to which the break message is being sent. The possible library values are: *LIBL

All libraries in the job's library list are searched until the first match is found.

library-name Specifies the library where the message queue is located. Message type (MSGTYPE) Specifies the type of message that is sent in break mode. Only informational or inquiry message types can be specified. Inquiry messages may require a response. *INFO

Send an information only message.

*INQ

Send an inquiry message. The workstation receiving the message is expected to reply to it. An inquiry message cannot be sent to multiple queues with only one command.

Message queue to get reply (RPYMSGQ) Specifies, only if an inquiry message is sent, the name of the message queue that the workstation user's reply is sent to. QSYSOPR Specifies the replies to the break message are sent to the system operator's message queue, QSYSOPR. message-queue-name Specifies the name of the message queue to which a reply to the break message is sent. Only a user or workstation message queue can be specified. The possible library values are: *LIBL


library-name Specify the library where the message queue is located. Coded character set ID (CCSID) Specifies the coded character set identifier (CCSID) that the specified message text is in. The text supplied in the Message field is assumed to be in the CCSID supplied by this parameter. The possible values are: *JOB

The message text is assumed to be in the CCSID of the job running this command.

*HEX

The message text is not converted. CCSID 65535 is used.

coded-character-set-identifier Specify a valid CCSID in which you want your message text to be considered in. Valid values range from 1 through 65535.

5-18



Chapter 6. Using OS/400 CL Commands to Do Tasks OS/400 CL commands are commands run from the OS/400 command line. These commands allow you to give explicit instructions to the system without using menus.

CL Commands — Overview Except for special commands like GO, CL commands have a verb part and an object part. The verb part is a three letter prefix. Some examples are as follows: Figure 6-1. Verb Part of CL Command Verb

Abbreviated Command Prefix

Example command

Change

CHG

CHGPF

Create

CRT

CRTLIB

Display

DSP

DSPMSGQ

Start

STR

STRBGU

Work with

WRK

WRKJOBQE

The object part of the CL command is all of the characters after the first three characters. This second part of the command identifies the type of object you are working with. Some examples are as follows: Figure 6-2. Object Part of CL Command Object

Abbreviated Command Suffix

Example command

Physical file

PF

CHGPF

Library

LIB

CRTLIB

Message Queue

MSGQ

DSPMSGQ

Business Graphics Utility

BGU

STRBGU

Job Queue Entry

JOBQE

WRKJOBQE

The format of a CL command is: command parameter(value) parameter(value) parameter Some CL commands do not require parameters or have default parameters. If you do not know which parameters can be specified for a specific command, type the command and then press F4. A display is displayed for that specific command. There are three columns on the display. The left column shows the name of the parameters, the center column is where you type the parameter values, and the right column shows the values that are allowed for the parameters. The defaults are filled in for you if defaults exist. If you want to use a different value, you can type that value over the default. If a value is required, the line is highlighted and no default is filled in.  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

6-1

What are the Operational Assistant Displays?

If you do not know what a value means or what a parameter is, move your cursor to the value or parameter and press F1. A new display overlays the existing one with information about the value or parameter. When you are more comfortable with commands, you may choose to type the commands in without using prompting. If you do this, you only have to type the required parameters. The defaults are known already to the system. You can also type as many parameters on the command line as you remember and then prompt using F4. When you type the command on the command line, remember to: Start with the command. Follow the command by the required parameters. Use parentheses around the values for the required parameters. Leave no space between the required parameter and the value in parentheses. Press F4 if you cannot remember all of the required parameters. Press Enter when your command is complete. A cross-reference of System/36 commands and AS/400 CL commands is included in Appendix A, “System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference.” A complete list of CL commands is included in chapter 6 of Programming Reference Summary book, SX41-4720. For more information on a specific CL command, you can do either of the following:

| | |

Type the command on an OS/400 command prompt and press F4. Move the cursor to a value or parameter and press F1. Refer to CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Using Operational Assistant Displays The Operational Assistant* displays are a menu-driven interface that allow you to do commonly performed system tasks quickly and easily. The Operational Assistant displays: Simplify everyday tasks such as controlling printer output, controlling jobs, and handling messages Allow you to set up a schedule for automatic power on and off, automatic cleanup, and backup Allow you to backup your system Allow you to manage the devices attached to your system, users enrolled on the system, signed-on users, and disk space storage All of these tasks can be done by selecting options from the Operational Assistant menu. The Operational Assistant menu can be displayed in the following ways: Type go assist on any command line, and press Enter. OR Press the Attention key. Figure 6-3 on page 6-3 shows the Operational Assistant menu.

6-2


Using Assistance Levels

Security Consideration You must have at least a user class of system operator (*SYSOPR) to see all of the options on this menu.

à@

ASSIST

ð

AS/4ðð Operational Assistant (TM) Menu

System: SYSTEMð1 To select one of the following, type its number below and press Enter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Work with printer output Work with jobs Work with messages Send messages Change your password

1ð. Manage your system, users, and devices 11. Customize your system, users, and devices 75. Information and problem handling 8ð. Temporary sign-off

Type a menu option below __ F1=Help

F3=Exit

F9=Command line

F12=Cancel

á

ñ

Figure 6-3. Operational Assistant (ASSIST) Menu

When you install the current release of the OS/400 licensed program, the Operational Assistant function is ready to use.

Using Assistance Levels and User Profiles You can choose the level of information you want when you interact with the system. There are three levels of information called assistance levels: 1=Basic Shows the displays that provide the most assistance. Basic assistance level supports the more common operator tasks and user tasks, and does not use computer terminology. Some less often used functions are not shown. 2=Intermediate Shows the displays that support all system tasks and uses computer terminology. Complicated tasks can be done by using this level. 3=Advanced Shows the displays that provide the same functions as the intermediate assistance level. However, the displays contain as much information as possible by not displaying the allowed function keys and options. Note: The advanced assistance level is only available for some displays.

Chapter 6. Using OS/400 CL Commands to Do Tasks

6-3


Changing Assistance Level Displays You can change from one assistance level to another on most Operational Assistant displays. For example, to change assistance levels on the Work with Messages (WRKMSG) display: 1. Press F21 (Select assistance level). Figure 6-4 shows the Select Assistance Level window.

à@

Work with Messages ................................................................ m: SYSTEMð1 : Select Assistance Level : : : : Current assistance level . : Basic : : : : : : Type choice below, then press Enter. : : : : Assistance level . . . . . 2 1=Basic : : 2=Intermediate : : : : : : : : F1=Help F12=Cancel : : : :..............................................................: An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line TOKENRING. An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line TOKENRING. Writer ð11286/QSPLJOB/PRTð1 started. More... F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom F21=Select assistance level F22=Display list details

á

ð

ñ

Figure 6-4. Select Assistance Level Window

The value in the Assistance level field shows the assistance level you are currently using and the assistance levels that are available. 2. Type a 1 (Basic) to select the basic assistance level, a 2 (Intermediate) to select the intermediate assistance level, or a 3 (Advanced) to select the advanced assistance level (if available). 3. Press Enter. 4. The display you see on your system corresponds to the assistance level you selected. You can also change the assistance level by typing the command you want run followed by astlvl(\xxxxx) where \xxxxx is \basic for basic assistance level, \intermed for intermediate assistance level, and \advanced for advanced assistance level. You can designate the assistance level for the following CL commands:

6-4

Display Messages (DSPMSG) Display System Status (DSPSYSSTS) Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) Work with Messages (WRKMSG) Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) Work with System Status (WRKSYSSTS) Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) Work with User Profiles (WRKUSRPRF)



Work with Writers (WRKWTR)

Changing Assistance Levels Temporarily — Examples Example 1 To change the assistance level for the Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command and reach the Work with Signed-On Users display: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKUSRJOB USER(\ALL) STATUS(\ACTIVE) JOBTYPE(\INTERACT) ASTLVL(\BASIC) 2. Press Enter. Example 2 To change the assistance level for the Work with Users Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command and reach the Work with Jobs display : 1. Type WRKUSRJOB USER(\ALL) STATUS(\ACTIVE) JOBTYPE(\BATCH) ASTLVL(\BASIC) 2. Press Enter. Note: If you follow the directions in examples 1 and 2, you only change the assistance level for one use of the command. If you issue another command and then use the WRKUSRJOB command again, you return to the intermediate assistance level. Example 3 To see messages at the basic assistance level as shown in Figure 6-5 on page 6-6: 1. Type DSPMSG ASTLVL(\BASIC) MSGQ(QSYSOPR) 2. Press Enter. OR 1. Type DSPMSG MSGQ(QSYSOPR) 2. Press Enter. 3. Press F21 (Select assistance level). 4. Type 1 to select Basic. 5. Press Enter.


6-5


à@

ð

Work with Messages System: Messages in:

SYSTEMð1

QSYSOPR

Type options below, then press Enter. 4=Remove 5=Display details and reply Opt

Message

_ _ _ _ _ _

Messages needing a reply Device RMTPRTðð13 not available. (C R) Device RMTPRTðð12 not available. (C R) Device RMTPRTððð9 not available. (C R) Device RMTPRTðððð not available. (C R) Load form type '\STD' device PRTð1 writer PRTð1. Device KOLUMDEV not available. (C R)

_ _ _

Messages not needing a reply An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line TRNLINE. Controller KK33 contacted on line TRNLINE. Device K33SS3 no longer communicating.

F1=Help F17=Top

F3=Exit F18=Bottom

(H C G I R)

More... F5=Refresh F16=Remove messages not needing a reply F24=More keys

á

ñ

Figure 6-5. Work with Messages Display—Basic Assistance Level

Example 4 To see messages at an intermediate assistance level as shown in Figure 6-6 on page 6-7: 1. Type DSPMSG ASTLVL(\INTERMED) MSGQ(QSYSOPR) 2. Press Enter. OR 1. Type DSPMSG MSGQ(QSYSOPR) 2. Press Enter. 3. Press F21 (Select assistance level). 4. Type 2 to select Intermediate. 5. Press Enter.

6-6



à@

ð


QSYSOPR QSYS 7ð


Type reply (if required), press Enter. All sessions ended for device BIGELOW. Controller BIGELOW has disconnected. Controller BIGELOW contacted on line TRNLINE. All sessions ended for device BIGELOW. Writer ð11921/QSPLJOB/BIGELOWS5 started. An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line Controller KODO failed. Automatic recovery started. Device KODOS4 no longer communicating. Device KODOS3 no longer communicating. Controller KODO contacted on line TRNLINE. An adapter has inserted or left the token-ring on line

SYSTEMð1 \DSPMSG \HOLD

TRNLINE. TRNLINE. TRNLINE.

TRNLINE. Bottom

F3=Exit F13=Remove all



á

ñ

Figure 6-6. Display Messages Display—Intermediate Assistance Level

Changing Assistance Levels in Your User Profile You can also change your default assistance level in your user profile. To do this, change the Assistance level field by using the Change User Profile (CHGUSRPRF) command. Note: You must have *SECADM special authority to issue the CHGUSRPRF CL command. The Operational Assistant function keeps track of what assistance level you have requested for each of the following groups of displays:

Printer output Printers Jobs Handling messages Device status User enrollment System status

The assistance level is set for each command, so you can use the basic assistance level for some displays and the intermediate assistance level for other displays. For each command, select the assistance level that you feel most comfortable working with and that allows you to get your work done the easiest way. Note: Your current assistance level for each command is stored. So when you sign on again, your assistance level remains the same.


6-7

Using CL Commands with the Operational Assistant Displays

Using CL Commands with the Operational Assistant Displays As you become an experienced AS/400 system user, you may prefer to do some tasks by using commands rather than menus. When you are using the intermediate or the advanced assistance level, you usually have a command line at the bottom of your display. You can type any control language (CL) command on this command line. Note: To control whether or not a user has use of a command line, type N (No) in the Restrict command line use field on the Add User or Change User display. You can add or change a user on the Work with User Enrollment display. To find this display, type go setup and select option 10 (Work with user enrollment) or use the command WRKUSRPRF *ALL ASTLVL(*BASIC). To display a command line when you are using the basic assistance level, press F9 (Command line). Figure 6-7 shows the command window that appears at the bottom of your display.

à@

ASSIST


ð

System: SYSTEMð1 To select one of the following, type its number below and press Enter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



á

.............................................................................. : Command : : : : ===> go disktasks_______________________________________________________ : : F4=Prompt F9=Retrieve F12=Cancel : : : :............................................................................:

ñ

Figure 6-7. Operational Assistant Command Window

If you know the name of the command, you can type the name of the command on the command line and press F4. A display is shown with all of the fields you need to fill in for that command. Press the Help key or F1 while your cursor is on any field to get an explanation of its function and a list of the possible values you can type in the field. If you do not know the name of the command you want, you can press F4 without typing anything while your cursor is on the command line. The Major Command Groups menu is shown where you can begin your search for the command you want.

6-8



Doing Specific Tasks (GO) To get to any menu on the AS/400 system quickly, type go plus the menu ID on any command line, then press Enter. For example, if you want to run your daily backup, you can get to the Run Backup menu by typing go runbckup on any command line and press Enter. The menu ID is shown in the top left corner of the display as in Figure 6-8.

à

RUNBCKUP

Figure 6-8. Example of a Menu ID

To find a list of all of the menus on the system: 1. On any OS/400 command line, type WRKMNU \ALL Or, GO \ALL 2. Press Enter. When a menu name is mentioned in this topic, the menu ID is shown in parentheses next to the menu name, for example, the Run Backup (RUNBCKUP) menu.

Menus for System Operations The following is a list of menus that are particularly useful in controlling and operating the system. You can get to any of these menus directly from any display having a command line. Just type GO plus a menu ID from the following list: ASSIST

The Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu simplifies some of the common user tasks, such as working with printer output, jobs, messages, and changing your password. In addition, users with proper authority can select options to manage or customize the system, check the system status, clean up objects, power the system on and off, enroll users, change some system options, and collect disk space information.

BACKUP

The Backup Tasks (BACKUP) menu allows you to back up (save) the system and initialize the tapes that are used during backup.

CLEANUP

The Cleanup (CLEANUP) menu allows you to start, end, or change automatic cleanup. The cleanup function deletes old job logs, history logs, messages, office calendar items, and journal receivers that take up storage space.

CMNCFG

The Communications Configuration (CMNCFG) menu can be used to configure communications to other AS/400 systems, System/36s, or to remote work station controllers and attached devices.


6-9


6-10

DEVICESTS

The Device Status (DEVICESTS) menu allows you to choose options for working with system devices, such as display stations, printers, tape drives, and diskette drives.

DISKETTE

The Diskette (DISKETTE) menu allows you to work with diskettes.

DISKTASKS

The Disk Space Tasks (DISKTASKS) menu provides the option for collecting disk space information to help show how storage is being used on your system. After collecting the information, you can specify what information to include in a report and then print the report.

FILE

The Files (FILE) menu allows you to work with files on the system.

FOLDER

The Folders (FOLDER) menu allows you to manage folders. Folders can be used to store other folders and documents.

INFO

The Information Assistant* Options (INFO) menu allows you to find out where to look for information about your AS/400 system and how to comment on that information. You can also use this menu to find out what is new in this release of the AS/400 system and what new enhancements and functions will be available in the next release.

LIBRARY

The Libraries (LIBRARY) menu allows you to work with libraries.

MANAGESYS

The Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) menu allows you to display what activity is going on in the system, run backup, and work with the devices on the system.

POWER

The Power On and Off Tasks (POWER) menu allows you to display the power-on and off schedule. If you have the correct authority, you can also change the schedule or power off the system and then power it on again.

PROBLEM

The Problem Handling (PROBLEM) menu allows you to work with problems, ask questions, and receive answers using the question and answer database, display system operator messages, display the history log, and start system service tools (SST).

RESTORE

The Restore (RESTORE) menu allows you to restore saved information from tape, or save file (SAVF) on the system.

RUNBCKUP

On the Run a Backup (RUNBCKUP) menu you can select a menu option to specify the type of backup you want to run.



SETUP

The Customize Your System, Users, and Devices (SETUP) menu lets you customize automatic cleanup, schedule when your system will power on and off, and enroll users.

SETUPBCKUP

The Set Up Backup (SETUPBCKUP) menu allows you to change backup options, lists, and schedules.

STATUS

The Status (STATUS) menu allows you to display the status of jobs, devices, and system activities.

SYSTEM

The General System Tasks (SYSTEM) menu allows you to control system operations, devices, and all jobs on the system.

TAPE

The Tape (TAPE) menu allows you to use and control tape devices.

TECHHELP

The Technical Support Tasks (TECHHELP) menu provides options to help resolve problems on the system.

USERHELP

The Information and Problem Handling (USERHELP) menu provides additional information about the system and is useful in attempting to resolve problems.

Figure 6-9 lists other commonly used AS/400 menu IDs. Figure 6-9. Other Commonly Used Menu IDs Menu ID

Description of Menu

DATA

Files, Libraries, and Folders

DEFINE

Define or Change the System

DEVICE

Device Operations (printer, tape, and diskette)

DOCUMENT

Documents

FILE2

Files (DDM, System/36)

JOB

Jobs

MAIN

AS/400 Main Menu

MAJOR

Major Command Groups

MESSAGE

MESSAGES

OFCTSK

Office Tasks

PCSTSK

Configure AS/400 for PC Support (PC Support Tasks)

PRINTER

Printer

SUPPORT

User Support and Education

SYSTEM

General System Tasks

USER

User Tasks

USER2

User Tasks (remote jobs, Q and A, System/36 environment)

If you use the word GO followed by CMD and the verb part or object part of a CL command, you go to a menu that lists all commands which contain that part. Verb and object parts are explained in “CL Commands — Overview” on page 6-1.


6-11


6-12


Printing with OS/400

Chapter 7. Printing with OS/400 Note: The displays shown in this chapter are those you would see if you were running at a basic assistance level. You would see different displays at other assistance levels. When you use OS/400, printing is handled differently than when you use SSP. You do not need to know everything about printing. To work with your printer output and printer output created by others, you need to know only the essentials.

Definitions The key elements you need to know about are:

Spooled files Printer writers Output queues Printers

Spooled Files In OS/400, a spooled file is a file that holds output data that is waiting to print. It is also known as a spooled output file. Multiple spooled files might be waiting to print. The spooled files are controlled by the person who created them or by the operator. The operator needs spool control (*SPLCTL) or job control (*JOBCTL) special authorities to work with other people's output. In SSP, spool file entries in the spool file hold output data that is waiting to print. The spool file entries are controlled by the person who created them or by the operator. There is one spool file shared by everyone on the system. All printer output goes to this spool file.

|

Printer Writers In OS/400, the printer writer is a system program that writes spooled files to a printer. In SSP, the spool writer (printer writer) is the part of SSP that prints output saved in spool file entries.

Output Queues In OS/400, an output queue contains a list of spooled files that are waiting to print. There can be multiple output queues in OS/400. | |

The equivalent to an output queue in SSP is the spool file. The spool file contains a list of spool file entries waiting to print. There is only one spool file in SSP. All output waiting to print is in this spool file. For directions on setting up an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to send output to an OS/400 output queue, see “Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls SSP Printer Output” on page 31-26.


7-1

Printing with OS/400

Printers The operating systems can share the same printer. For directions on sharing printers, see “Giving SSP Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output” on page 31-26. The printer can only be used by one operating system at a time. The printer is controlled by a subsystem named QSPL. If an SSP job tries to use a printer that another SSP or OS/400 job is using, the job receives an error stating that the printer is in use.

Additional reading: For detailed information about printing elements, printer device support, printer spooling support, and Advanced Function Printing* (AFP*), see the Printer Device Programming book, SC41-4713.

7-2


Finding OS/400 Printer Output

Finding OS/400 Printer Output Getting to the Work with Printer Output Display Using Operational Assistant It is easy to check on a submitted print job when you use Operational Assistant. To see your printer output: 1. On any OS/400 command line, type GO ASSIST 2. Press Enter. The AS/400 Operational Assistant Menu appears. 3. In the Type a menu option below field, type 1 to select Work with printer output. 4. Press Enter. If the Work with All Spooled Files display appears instead of the Work with Printer Output display: a. Press F21 so you can change your assistance level. The Select Assistance Level display appears. b. In the Assistance Level field, type 1 to select Basic. c. Press Enter. The Work with Printer Output display appears.

Getting to the Work with Printer Output Display Using a CL Command You could also reach the Work with Printer Output display, by using a CL command. 1. On any OS/400 command line, type WRKSPLF ASTLVL(\BASIC) 2. Press Enter. The Work with Printer Output display appears. Figure 7-1 on page 7-4 shows the Work with Printer Output display.

Chapter 7. Printing with OS/400

7-3


Using the Work with Printer Output Display to Find Output à@

ð

Work with Printer Output System: User . . . . . :

PARENTIS

SYSTEMð1

Name, \ALL, F4 for list

Type options below, then press Enter. To work with printers, press F22. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Release 7=Message 9=Work with printing status 1ð=Start printing 11=Restart printing Opt __ __ __ __

Printer/ Output PRTð1 INVENTORY ORDENTRY PRTð2 PAYROLL Not Assigned TIMECRD

Status Printer stopped (use opt 1ð) Printer stopped (use opt 1ð) Printing page 3 of 1ðððð Not assigned to a printer (use opt 1ð)

Bottom F1=Help F3=Exit F11=Dates/pages/forms

F5=Refresh F6=Completed printer output F2ð=Include system output F24=More keys

á

ñ

Figure 7-1. Work with Printer Output display

Initially, only your own printer output is shown. However, you can see the output of others if: You have job control (*JOBCTL) authority and the output queue was created with operator control (OPRCTL) set to *YES. The default is *YES. Or, You have spool control (*SPLCTL) special authority If you are authorized, you can see the printer output for a specific person or for everyone. To see the printer output of someone other than yourself, 1. Type the user ID of the other person whose printed output you want to work with in the User field. Note: If you do not know the user ID, press F4. This shows the Select a User display. This display allows you to select a user ID from a list of all users on the system. 2. If you want to see output for all user IDs that start or end with specific letters, type the letters followed or preceded by an *. For example, if you want to see output for all the user IDs that start with “AR,” type AR* in the User field. 3. If you want to see the printer output for all users, type *ALL in the User field. 4. After you type your choice in the User field, press Enter. The printer output on this display is sorted by printer. Some printer output may have a status of Not assigned to a printer. Printer output that is not assigned to a printer appears last in the list on your display.

7-4



This display shows you information about your printer output. It shows the Printer ID, the name of the output sent to that printer, and the status of the output. This display also allows you to release jobs, resume printing, hold jobs, delete jobs, respond to messages about forms, and change the order in which jobs print. 5. Press F11 (Dates/pages/forms) to see another view of this display that shows when printer output was created, the number of pages, what forms types are used, and how many copies print.

Understanding Printing Problems Figure 7-2 provides some tips on how to solve some common printing problems: Figure 7-2. Why My Printer Output Does Not Print Problem

Suggested Solution

Unanswered printer messages.

Use option 7 Message on the Work with Printer Output display to respond to the message.

Printer is not started.

Use option 10 Start printing on the Work with Printer Output display.

Printer output is not assigned to a printer.

Use option 10 Start printing on the Work with Printer Output display.

Printer output has a forms type that has not been started for the printer.

Stop the printer and start it for the desired forms type. 1. Press F22 on the Work with Printer Output display. 2. Use Option 4 on the Work with Printers display to stop the printer. 3. Change the forms if necessary. 4. Use Option 1 on the Work with Printers display to start the printer.

Printer output has a value of *JOBEND in the Schedule field and the job has not finished.

Use the Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA) CL command to change the value in the Schedule field to *FILEEND.

Printer output is held.

Release the printer output using option 6 Release on the Work with Printer Output display.

Nothing is printing on the system.

Verify that the QSPL subsystem is started with the WRKSBS CL command. If QSPL is not started, use the STRSBS CL command to start it. Check for messages sent to the QSYSOPR message queue in the QSPL subsystem. Respond to the messages.

Printer status says Message waiting or MSGW, but you cannot find the message.

See if the printer's message queue is too full to receive new messages. If so, remove some messages from the message queue. It is also possible that the printer's message queue was cleared. If so, check to see if the printer is ready.

If you have followed all of these suggestions and still have printing problems, see the information on getting help with problems in Chapter 13 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.


7-5

Printing Priorities

Printing Priorities Figure 7-3 maps OS/400 and SSP printing priorities. Figure 7-3. SSP and OS/400 Printing Priorities

7-6

SSP Printing Priorities

OS/400 Printing Priorities

5

3

4

4

3

5

2

6

1

7

0

7 and put in HELD status


Managing Printer Output

Managing Printed Output To manage printer output, use the Work with Printer Output display.

Holding Printer Output To hold printer output, on the Work with Printer Output display: 1. In the option field beside the printer output you want held, type 3 to select the Hold option. 2. Press Enter. 3. Press F5 to refresh the display. The status of the printer output changes to \Held.

Releasing Printer Output To release printer output, on the Work with Printer Output display: 1. In the option field beside the printer output you want released, type 6 to select the Release option. 2. Press Enter. 3. Press F5 to refresh the display. The status of the printer output changes to \Released.

Deleting Printer Output To delete printer output, on the Work with Printer Output display: 1. In the option field beside the printer output you want to delete, type 4 to select Delete. 2. Press Enter. The Confirm Delete of Printer Output display appears. 3. Press Enter to delete the selected output. The printer output you deleted no longer appears on the Work with Printer Output display.

Changing Printer Output To change the attributes of printer output, on the Work with Printer Output display: 1. In the option field beside the printer output for which you want to change attributes, type 2 to select Change. 2. Press Enter.


7-7


The Change Printer Output display appears. Figure 7-4 on page 7-8 shows the Change Printer Output display.

à@

ð

Change Printer Output User . . . . . Printer output Pages . . . . Status . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

: : : :

SMITH Date . . . . . . . . : ACCTPAY Time . . . . . . . . : 1ð Waiting to print

1ð/21/9ð 13:4ð:ð1

Type choices below, then press Enter. Printer to use . . . .

PRTð1_____

Name, F4 for list

Copies and pages: Number of copies . . . . First page to print . . Last page to print . . .

1 1 \LAST

1-255 Number Number, \LAST

Type of forms

. . . .

\STD______

Form type, \STD

Print this output next

N

Y=Yes, N=No

Save printer output

N

Y=Yes, N=No

F1=Help

F3=Exit

. . .

F5=Refresh

F12=Cancel

á

ñ

Figure 7-4. Change Printer Output Display

3. Make your choices on the Change Printer Output display. 4. Press Enter. The Work with Printer Output display appears again. The status of the printer output is now \Status changed.

What to Do if the Printer Output Is Not Already Printing If printer output is not already printing, you can make choices to do the following.

Assign Printer Output to a Printer: To assign this printer output to a printer, type the printer’s name in the Printer to use field. If you do not know which printer to use, press F4 to use the Select Printer display to select a printer.

Change the Number of Copies to Print: To change the number of copies to print, type the new number in the Number of copies field. Specify the Page to Start On: To specify the page that this printer output should begin printing on, type the page number in the First page to print field. If you do not want the entire report to print, type the page number in the Last page to print field. The First page to print and Last page to print fields can be used together if part of your report was damaged by a paper jam or if you only want to print part of a report.

7-8



Change the Form Type: To change the form type for a report, type the name of the form in the Type of forms field. This can be useful during application testing. For example, you may want to test programs, such as check or invoice printing on ordinary paper. Change when Printer Output Prints: To move printer output to the front of the line for printing, type a Y in the Print this output next field. Your user profile controls the highest priority you can use when changing printer output. The printer output you select only prints next if your user profile has higher priority than the printer output next in line.

Save Your Printer Output after It Prints: To save your printer output after it is printed, type a Y in the Save printer output field. Normally, you would want printer output deleted to avoid cluttering up your system. However, for output that prints on special forms, you may want to save your printer output. If you discover an alignment problem after the output has printed, you can reprint without having to rerun the program. If the printer output you want to change is currently printing, you can change only the Number of copies and Save printer output fields. If you want to change the other fields, hold the printer output, make your change, and then release the printer output.

Assigning Printer Output to a Printer To assign printer output to a printer, on the Work with Printer Output display: 1. In the option field beside the printer output you want to assign to a printer, type 1ð to select Start printing. 2. Press Enter. 3. Type the name of the printer you want to use in the Printer field. If you do not know the name of the printer, press F4 to select from a list of all the printers on the system on the Assign Output to a Printer display. 4. Press Enter. If the printer you select is not started, the Start Printing display appears. 5. Type the name of the form type in the Type of forms on printer field. 6. Press Enter. The Work with Printer Output display appears again. 7. Press F5. The printer output that you assigned now appears under the name of the printer.


7-9

Working with Printers

Working with Printers To work with printers, press F22 (Work with printers) on the Work with Printer Output display or use the following command: WRKWTR ASTLVL(\BASIC) Figure 7-5 shows the Work with Printers display.

à@

ð

Work with Printers User . . . . . :

SMITH

Type options below, then press Enter. 1=Start 4=Stop 7=Message 8=Display output for printer Opt __ __ __ __ __

Printer PRTð1 PRTð2 PRTð3 PRTð4 PRTð5

Form Type \STD CHECKS INVOICES \STD \STD

11=Restart

Status Message waiting (use opt 7) Stopped (use opt 1) Printing Held (use opt 6) Printing

Figure 7-5. Work with Printers display

To see all printers on the system, press F6 (Include all printers).

Starting a Printer To start a printer, on the Work with Printers display: 1. In the option field beside the printer you want to start, type 1 to select Start. 2. Press Enter. 3. On the Start Printer display, use the Type of forms on printer field to specify the type of forms you want to print. 4. Change the forms if necessary. 5. Press Enter. The Work with Printers display appears. The printer’s status is \Attempting to start. This means the system has started finding the printer output assigned to this printer. 6. Press F5. The status usually changes to Message waiting which means there is a forms alignment message waiting. 7. In the Opt field, type 7 to select Message 8. Press Enter. After you respond to this message, printing begins.

7-10



You can also start a printer on the Work with Printer Output display by using option 10 (Start printing).

Stopping a Printer To stop a printer: 1. In the option field beside the printer you want to stop, type 4 to select Stop. 2. Press Enter. 3. On the Confirm Stop of Printer display, press Enter to confirm your choices, or press F12 (Cancel) to return to the Work with Printers display without stopping the printer. 4. Press F5 to see which printers are stopped. If you pressed Enter, the printer’s status is \Stopped.

Restarting a Printer To restart a printer, on the Work with Printers display: 1. In the option field beside the printer you want to start again, type 11 to select Restart. 2. Press Enter. The Restart Printer display appears. 3. Type the page number of the first page you want to print in the Restart on page field. 4. Press Enter. The printer’s status is changed to \Attempting to restart. 5. Press F5 to see if the printer has started. A forms alignment message may appear when the printing restarts. Once you respond to the message, printing starts on the page you requested. You can also restart a printer on the Work with Printer Output display using option 11 (Restart printing).

Answering Printer Messages To see a printer message and find out what action is needed, on the Work with Printers display: 1. In the option field beside a printer that has a status of Message waiting, type 7 to select Message. 2. Press Enter. Note: You can also answer printer messages on the Work with Printer Output display using option 7 (Messages).


7-11


For more information about responding to printer messages, see “Responding to OS/400 Messages” on page 5-9.

7-12



Two messages that you may see frequently are: Load form type (CPA3394 or CPA3395) The most common replies to the load form type message (CPA3394 or CPA3395) are G, B, or I. Verify alignment on printer (CPA4002) The most common reply to the Verify alignment on printer message (CPA4002) is I.

Changing Forms on a Printer To change the form type for a printer, on the Work with Printers display: 1. In the option field beside the printer for which you want to change forms, type 4 to select Stop. 2. Press Enter. The Confirm Stop of Printer display appears. 3. Press Enter. The Work with Printer Output display appears again. 4. In the option field beside the printer for which you want to change forms, type 1 to select Start. 5. Press Enter The Start Printer display appears. 6. Type the name of the form you want to use in the Type of forms on printer field. 7. Press Enter.

Working with Spooled Files The Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) command lets you display or print all (or a specified portion) of the spooled files that are currently on the system. This command is useful in locating lost printer output. To use this command: 1. On an OS/400 command prompt, type WRKSPLF 2. Press F4. The Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) display appears. 3. In the User field, type \ALL Or, the name of the user whose spooled files you want to work with.


7-13


4. Press Enter. The Work with Printer Output display appears. From the Work with Printer Output display you can: Change the attributes of a spooled file Hold a spooled file Delete a spooled file Display the contents of a spooled file Release a held spooled file Answer a printer message Work with printing status Start printing Restart printing

Working with All Output Queues The Work with Output Queue (WRKOUTQ) CL command shows you the overall status of the output queues or the detailed status of a specific output queue. From the Work with All Output Queues (WRKOUTQ) display, you can change, hold, delete, and release spooled files. The change option can be used for moving output from one queue to another. To use this command: 1. On an OS/400 command prompt, type WRKOUTQ 2. Press F4. The Work with Output Queue (WRKOUTQ) display appears. 3. In the Output queue field, type \ALL Or, the name of a specific output queue. 4. Press Enter. The Work with All Output Queues display appears. From the Work with All Output Queues display, you can do the following: Change the output description Hold an output queue Delete an output queue Work with spooled files on an output queue Release a held output queue Display the description of an output queue

7-14



Work with printers started to an output queue Clear all the spooled files from an output queue

Comparing System/36 Print Commands to OS/400 Print Commands The following list shows the System/36 commands that are used for controlling printers and output with the AS/400 command that is used to do the same function. System/36 Command

AS/400 Equivalent

ASSIGN (A P)

Assigns a printer ID for the new System Printer. There is no AS/400 equivalent command.

BALPRINT

You can balance printer output on AS/400 by using the Start Printer Writer (STRPRTWTR) command to start another printer writer to the same output queue.

CANCEL (C P)

Option 4 (Delete) on either the Work with All Output Queues display or the Work with Printer Output display. Use the WRKOUTQ command or the WRKSPLF command, respectively, to go to these displays. You can also use the Clear Output Queue (CLROUTQ) command to remove spooled files from a specified output queue.

CHANGE (G)

Option 2 (Change) on either the Work with All Output Queues display or the Work with Printer Output display. Use the WRKOUTQ command or the WRKSPLF command, respectively, to go to these displays.

HOLD (H P)

Option 3 (Hold) on either the Work with All Output Queues display or the Work with Printer Output display. Use the WRKOUTQ command or the WRKSPLF command, respectively, to go to these displays.

RELEASE (L P)

Option 6 (Release) on either the Work with All Output Queues display or the Work with Printer Output display. Use the WRKOUTQ command or the WRKSPLF command, respectively, to go to these displays.

RESTART (T P)

The Restart printing field on the Change Spooled File Attributes display lets you specify which page to restart printing the spooled file. This display lets you change many attributes of the spooled file, such as the number of copies to print, the forms types, and print sequence. Use the CHGSPLFA command to go to the Change Spooled File Attributes display.

START (S P)

Option 1 (Start) on the Work with All Printers display. Use the WRKWTR command to go to this display.

STATUS PRT (D P)

Same as the WRKOUTQ or WRKSPLF command.

STATUS WRT (D WRT)

Same as the WRKWTR command.

STATUSF PRT (DF P)

Same as the WRKOUTQ or WRKSPLF command.

STOP (P P)

Option 4 (End) on the Work with All Printers display. Use the WRKWTR command to go to this display.


7-15


TEXTPRTQ

Same as the Work with Documents to be Printed (WRKDOCPRTQ) command.

For more information on working with printer output, refer to the System Operation book, SC41-4203. The Printer Device Programming book, SC41-4713, also contains information on printing on the AS/400 system and examples of how to find your printer output.

7-16


OS/400 Subsystems

Chapter 8. Working with OS/400 Subsystems

Definitions Just as the word master has more than one meaning, subsystem has more than one meaning. Subsystem means something quite different to OS/400 than it does to SSP.

OS/400 Subsystems For OS/400, a subsystem is an operating environment where the system coordinates processing of jobs and resources for the jobs. There is a default startup program that is supplied by IBM. If you use the startup program and you use the CHGSYSVAL command to set the system value QCTLSBSD to: QCTL in library QSYS The subsystems that start when you IPL include: QCTL, QSPL, QINTER, QBATCH, QCMN, and QSERVER. QBASE in library QSYS The subsystems that start when you IPL are: QBASE and QSPL Once your system is successfully powered on, you may need to start additional subsystems to make your system ready to use if: You created a subsystem which is not automatically started, such as a subsystem which runs only at night. You ended all but the controlling subsystem to bring your system to a restricted state to back it up. All user jobs are run in a subsystem. A subsystem creates a suitable environment for a job to do its work. The AS/400 system can contain one or many subsystems. These can be created or deleted by those who have proper authority. As the number of different types of jobs increases in the system, more subsystems can be defined to manage those jobs. All interactive processing can occur in one subsystem, all batch processing in another, system operator jobs in a third, and so on. This makes it easier to control the different jobs in the system because subsystems can be started and ended individually.

SSP Subsystems For SSP, a subsystem is the part of communications that handles the requirements of the remote system. It isolates most system-dependent considerations from the application program. The only SSP subsystems are: SSP-ICF subsystems APPC subsystems


8-1

OS/400 Subsystems

The SSP-ICF subsystem is required for running ICF sessions. The APPC subsystem allows the System/36 to communicate with other systems that have compatible support.

Working with a Subsystem The Work with Subsystem (WRKSBS) command allows you to work with each active subsystem in the system. Also, if you select one of the subsystems shown on the display, you can see additional information on all the jobs that are active in that subsystem. To use the WRKSBS command: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKSBS 2. Press F4. The Work with Subsystems (WRKSBS) display appears. 3. If you want all the output displayed, press Enter. 4. If you want the output printed with the job's spooled output: a. In the Output field, type \PRINT b. Press Enter. If you selected to display the subsystems, the Work with Subsystems display appears. From the Work with Subsystems display you can do the following: End a subsystem Display a subsystem description Work with subsystem jobs

Working with Subsystem Descriptions The Work with Subsystem Description (WRKSBSD) command allows you to work with a specific subsystem or all subsystems currently on the system. To use the WRKSBSD command: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKSBSD 2. Press F4. The Work with Subsystem Description display appears. 3. In the Subsystem description field, type \ALL Or, the name of a specific subsystem. 4. Press Enter. The Work with Subsystem Description display appears.

8-2


OS/400 Subsystems

From the Work with Subsystem Description display you can do the following: Create a new subsystem description. Change a subsystem description. Delete a subsystem description. Display a subsystem description. Work with subsystem jobs. Start a subsystem. End a subsystem.

Chapter 8. Working with OS/400 Subsystems

8-3

OS/400 Subsystems

8-4


OS/400 System Security

Chapter 9. OS/400 System Security This chapter is an overview of security on the OS/400 operating system.

Levels of Security The system administrator can use a combination of system values, user profile parameters, and resource security to protect the information on your computer. For example, a system value called the security level determines how much security is enforced on your system. The security level for your system is the same for all users on the system. When the system is set up, your system Security Officer sets the security level as one of the following: 10

This is the lowest level of security. When the system security is set at level 10 and you sign on, the system checks for a user profile. If the system does not find a user profile, it creates one. At level 20, a user profile must already exist. The system verifies that the user ID and password entered match that of the existing profile. Users who can sign on can access any object. At security level 30, the user ID and password are checked. In addition, a user cannot work with objects (files or libraries) without authorization. All security considerations for level 30 also apply to level 40. However, at level 40, operating system integrity is ensured. This is the highest level of security. All security considerations for level 40 also apply to level 50. In addition, level 50 is designed to meet the C2 security requirements defined by the United States Department of Defense.

20

30 40 50

Changing the Security Level The security level of the system is set in the QSECURITY system value. To change the value, do as follows: 1. Type CHGSYSVAL QSECURITY 'xx' where xx is the security level that you want to use. Note: The single quotes are required. 2. Press Enter. The security administrator can use system values and parameters in your user profile to enforce your company’s security policy, such as: How often you must change your password. What the system does if you forget to sign off. Whether you are allowed to enter commands. Whether you can manage job queues and output queues.


9-1


Changing Passwords To change your password, do the following: 1. Type GO ASSIST 2. Press Enter. The following display appears.

à@

ASSIST


ð

System: RCHASLðG To select one of the following, type its number below and press Enter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.



Type a menu option below 5 F1=Help

F3=Exit

F9=Command line

F12=Cancel

á 3. Type 5 to select the Change your password option. 4. Press Enter. The Change Password display appears.

9-2


ñ


à@

ð

Change Password Password last changed . . . . . . . . . . :

1ð/16/92

Type choices, press Enter. Current password New password

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

New password (to verify)

F3=Exit

. . . . . . . .

F12=Cancel

á

ñ

5. Fill in the choices with your current password and what you want your new password to be. You need to type your new password twice: once for the New password field and once in the New password (to verify) field. 6. Press Enter. For more information on OS/400 security, see the Security – Basic book, SC41-4301 and the Security – Reference book, SC41-4302.

Chapter 9. OS/400 System Security

9-3


9-4


Working with Batch Jobs

Chapter 10. Controlling OS/400 Jobs Note: The displays shown in this chapter are those you would see if you were running at a basic assistance level. You would see different displays at other assistance levels. The key element used by the AS/400 system to organize and manage work is the job. A job usually includes all necessary programs, files, connections and instructions to the Operating System/400 licensed program. A job can be one very short and simple task such as printing a report. It can also be a series of tasks, such as:

Calculating total sales by product Calculating total sales by area Calculating total sales by sales person Printing sales reports

Figure 10-1 provides an overview of how jobs are run.

Batch Job

SBMJOB

Writer

Printer

Interactive Job

Sign On

Job Queue

Subsystem

Output Queue

RSLP109-0

Figure 10-1. Overview of Job Processing

There are two basic types of jobs: batch jobs and interactive jobs. “Submitting Batch Jobs” gives you information about how to display, end, hold, release and schedule batch jobs as well as work with job queues. “Working with Signed-On Users” on page 10-12 gives information on how to display and end interactive jobs. Also included in this chapter is information on how to display detailed information about your job, changing how a job is run, and working with job logs.

Additional Reading: For more detailed information about jobs, job descriptions, job logs, job queues, output queues, and how to manage any of these, see the Work Management book, SC41-4306.

Submitting Batch Jobs A batch job does not require constant interaction with the user. Once you have submitted a batch job, you are free to do other work at your work station without waiting for the job to run. Two examples of jobs that are commonly run in batch are printing reports and doing month-end data summaries.


10-1


When you submit a batch job, it is placed on a job queue. Then, the subsystem to which the job queue is assigned takes the jobs off the job queue in order and runs them. For more information, see Chapter 8, “Working with OS/400 Subsystems” on page 8-1. You can submit a batch job to run immediately or to run at a scheduled date and time.

Submitting a Batch Job to Run Immediately To submit a job that runs immediately: 1. Type SBMJOB 2. Press F4. The Submit Job (SBMJOB) display appears. 3. On the Submit Job (SBMJOB) display, in the Command to run field, type the command you want to run in a batch job. If the job you want to submit is a program, type call and the name of the program; for example, CALL PAYROLL. If the job you want to run is a REXX procedure, use the Start REXX Procedure (STRREXPRC) command. If the job you want to run is a CL command, type the name of the command. You can use prompting to assist you with the parameters for the command. Type the name of the command and then press F4 while your cursor is positioned in the Command to run field. If you want, you can also change the value already specified for any of the other entry fields. Press Enter. The job is submitted. A message is shown at the bottom of your display that tells you the qualified job name that the system has assigned to your job and the name of the job queue to which it has been submitted. The qualified job name is used by the system and by system users to locate jobs. It consists of three parts: Job number

Assigned by the system to make sure every qualified job name is unique.

User ID

The user profile under which the job is running, usually the profile of the submitter.

Job name

A short descriptive title of the job, such as PRTINV for “print invoices.”

Scheduling a Batch Job to Run Later To schedule a batch job using the Submit Job (SBMJOB) command, use the Schedule date (SCDDATE) and Schedule time (SCDTIME) parameters.

Schedule date (SCDDATE) parameter: Specifies the day the job is released on the job queue. The possible values are:

10-2

*CURRENT

Today’s date

*MONTHSTR

First day of the month



*MONTHEND

Last day of the month

*MON – *SUN

The next occurrence of the specified day of the week

01/26/96

A specific day (job date format is defined in the system value QDATFMT)

Schedule time (SCDTIME) parameter: Specifies the time on the scheduled date when the job will be marked released on the job queue. The actual time may vary depending on the activity involved in releasing the job and the load on the system when the job is scheduled to be started. *CURRENT

The current time

17:00:00

A specific time (job time separator may vary)

Note: If the schedule date is the current date and the schedule time is the current time the job will be placed on the job queue with a status of \Released. At the time indicated, the job’s status changes from \Scheduled to \Released and it is processed as a normal job on the job queue. If a scheduled job is held on the job queue, the job’s status changes from \Scheduled to \Held at the time indicated. As with other batch jobs, in order to run, the job must: Be in a job queue allocated to an active subsystem Not be held Note: Additionally, the maximum number of jobs must not already be active in the subsystem.

Changing a Job Schedule to Run at a Different Date or Time To change the date and time for a scheduled job or to change a non-scheduled job to be scheduled, use the Schedule date (SCDDATE) and Schedule time (SCDTIME) parameters on the Change Job (CHGJOB) command.

Scheduling a Job Using Job Schedule Entries |

A job schedule entry contains the information needed to submit a batch job once or at regular intervals. The Work with Job Schedule Entries (WRKJOBSCDE) command allows you to perform time-dependent scheduling for OS/400 batch jobs. You schedule the date and time at which a job is submitted to the job queue. When you add a job schedule entry, a job will be submitted at the specified time. When you remove a job schedule entry, the job will not be submitted. You can also change the information in the job schedule entries, or hold and release a job schedule entry. Each entry has a unique job name and entry number. This section contains an overview of the job scheduling function. See the Work Management book, SC41-4306, for complete and detailed information about the job scheduling function and working with the job schedule entries. Figure 10-2 on page 10-4 shows the Work with Job Schedule Entries display.

Chapter 10. Controlling OS/400 Jobs

10-3


à@

Work with Job Schedule Entries ð3/25/91 Type options, press Enter. 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Remove 5=Display details 8=Work with last submission 1ð=Submit immediately

Opt __ __ __

Job __________ DAILYJOB PRTREPORT

Status SCD HLD

-----Schedule-----Date Time USER DEF ð3/28/91

17:ðð:ðð 23:ðð:ðð

RCH3836ð ð8:15:ð4

ð

6=Release

Frequency

Recovery Action

Next Submit Date

\WEEKLY \ONCE

\NOSBM \SBMRLS

ð3/25/91 ð3/28/91

Bottom Parameters or command ===> _________________________________________________________________________ F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=Refresh F6=Add F9=Retrieve F11=Display job queue data F12=Cancel F17=Top F18=Bottom

á

ñ

Figure 10-2. Work with Job Schedule Entries Display

Adding a Job Schedule Entry To schedule a job once, weekly, or monthly, use F6 (Add) on the Work with Job Schedule Entries display, or use the Add Job Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command. The job is submitted at the specified time by the Submit Job (SBMJOB) command. For the job to start running, make sure: The job queue is allocated to an active subsystem. The job queue is not held. Maximum jobs are not already active.

Saving a Job Schedule Entry If you want to prevent the entry from being automatically deleted after a job is submitted from a job schedule entry that is used only once to submit a job, type \yes for the Save (SAVE) parameter on the Add Job Schedule Entry (ADDJOBSCDE) command.

Removing a Job Schedule Entry To remove a job schedule entry so that it is not used to submit a job, use option 4 (Remove) on the Work with Job Schedule Entries display or use the Remove Job Schedule Entry (RMVJOBSCDE) command. If a job from this entry has already been submitted to the job queue, you can end it using the Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command or the Work with Submitted Jobs (WRKSBMJOB) command.

10-4



Changing a Job Schedule Entry To change a job schedule entry, use option 2 (Change) on the Work with Job Schedule Entries display or use the Change Job Schedule Entry (CHGJOBSCDE) command. This changes the entry in the job schedule but does not affect any jobs already submitted for this entry.

Holding and Releasing a Job Schedule Entry To hold a job schedule entry, use option 3 (Hold) on the Work with Job Schedule Entries display or use the Hold Job Schedule Entry (HLDJOBSCDE) command. When the time occurs for the job to be submitted, the entry is ignored. To release a job schedule entry, use option 6 (Release) on the Work with Job Schedule Entries display or use the Release Job Schedule Entry (RLSJOBSCDE) command. If the time has not passed, the job is submitted as scheduled. If the scheduled time has passed, a message is displayed indicating that jobs were missed.

Scheduling a Batch Job to Start an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Because the unattended power-on functions for both the TIMERSET OCL statement and the SSP TIMER procedure are not valid when OS/400 is present on the system, this type of function needs to be performed by OS/400. To schedule a batch job to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, use the Submit Job (SBMJOB) command along with the Schedule Date (SCDDATE) and Schedule Time (SCDTIME) parameters. On the Submit Job display, in the Command to Run field, type the STRM36 command with the appropriate parameters. For information on starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in other ways, see Chapter 15, “Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.”

Working with Batch Jobs You can hold, release, end, and check the status of batch jobs on the Work with Jobs display. To find the Work with Jobs display: 1. On any OS/400 command line, type go assist 2. Press Enter to display the Operational Assistant menu. 3. In the Opt field, type 2 to select Work with jobs. 4. Press Enter. The Work with Jobs display appears. Another way to find the Work with Jobs display is to do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKUSRJOB JOBTYPE(\BATCH) ASTLVL(\BASIC) 2. Press Enter. Figure 10-3 on page 10-6 shows the Work with Jobs display.


10-5


à@

ð

Work with Jobs System: User . . . . . .

SMITH_____

Type options below, then press Enter. 3=Hold 4=Delete (End) 6=Release 8=Work with printer output Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Job Queue/ Job QBATCH BONUS2 BONUS NOBONUS PAYCODE PAYROLL OVERTIME TIMECARD HOLIDAY

F1=Help F12=Cancel

SYSTEMð1

Name, \ALL, F4 for list 7=Display message

Status Message waiting (use opt 7) Running Running job held (use opt 6) Ending Waiting to run (2 of 4) Scheduled 11/3ð/91 12:ðð:ðð Held (use opt 6) Held (use opt 6)

F3=Exit F5=Refresh F14=Select other jobs

Bottom F9=Command line F11=Display dates/times F22=Work with job queues F24=More keys

á

ñ

Figure 10-3. Work with Jobs Display for the Status of a Single User

Note: Jobs resulting from job schedule entries do not appear on this display until the time they are scheduled to be submitted.

Displaying Batch Jobs of Other Users You can select whose jobs to view on the Work with Jobs display. Security Consideration To view and manage the jobs of other users, you must have job control (*JOBCTL) authority in your user profile.

If you want to see all of the jobs for a user, type the user ID of the person whose jobs you want to see in the User field and press Enter. The Work with Jobs display appears for the user you selected.

Displaying All Batch Jobs To see all batch jobs, on the Work with Jobs display, type *all in the User field and press Enter. You can enter a generic name, for example A\ shows you all of the jobs for all users whose names start with an A. You can also press F14 to go to the Select Other Jobs display where you can type a generic name. The Work with Jobs display appears with a new column called User. Figure 10-4 on page 10-7 shows all of the batch jobs on the system.

10-6



à@

ð

Work with Jobs System: User . . . . . .

\ALL______

Type options below, then press Enter. 3=Hold 4=Delete (End) 6=Release 8=Work with printer output Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Job Queue/ Job QBATCH BONUS MYJOB BONUS2 QS36EVOKE PAYROLL INVOICES INVOICES2 INVOICES3

F1=Help F12=Cancel

User

SYSTEMð1

Name, \ALL, F4 for list 7=Display message

Status

SMITH HARRY SHEMP

Message waiting (use opt 7) Running Ending

DUNNJ2 MAHONEY MONTEY GEORGE

Waiting to run (1 of 4) Waiting to run (2 of 4) Waiting to run (3 of 4) Scheduled 12/15/91 22:ðð:ðð

F3=Exit F5=Refresh F14=Select other jobs

Bottom F9=Command line F11=Display dates/times F22=Work with job queues F24=More keys

á

ñ

Figure 10-4. Work with Jobs Display for the Status of Multiple Users

The jobs on this display are sorted by job queue. Within each job queue, the jobs are grouped by status. Performance Note Whenever possible, select a user ID instead of typing *all in the User field of the Work with Jobs display. If there are many jobs on the system, the performance of other jobs is affected when you use *ALL.

Displaying Batch Jobs by Status To find jobs based on status: 1. On the Work with Jobs display, press F14 (Select other jobs). Figure 10-5 on page 10-8 shows the Select Other Jobs window.


10-7


à@

á

Work with Jobs .............................................................................. : Select Other Jobs : : : : Select the following jobs for the list. : : : : Type choices below, then press Enter. : : : : User . . . . . . . . . . . . . \ALL______ Name, \ALL, F4 for list : : Status: : : Message waiting . . . . . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Running . . . . . . . . . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Running job held . . . . . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Ending . . . . . . . . . . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Waiting to run/Scheduled . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Held . . . . . . . . . . . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Job queue held . . . . . . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Queue not assigned . . . . . Y Y=Yes, N=No : : Printer output . . . . . . . N Y=Yes, N=No : : : : : : F1=Help F5=Refresh F12=Cancel : : : :............................................................................:

ð

ñ

Figure 10-5. Select Other Jobs Window

2. Leave the Y (Yes) next to each status whose jobs you want included on your display in the Select Other Jobs window. 3. Type an N (No) next to each status you do not want included. 4. Press Enter. The Work with Jobs display appears again, including only those jobs that have the statuses you selected. You can also see when jobs were started by pressing F11 (Display dates/times) on the Work with Jobs display. To return to the status version of this display, press F11 (Display statuses).

Holding a Batch Job To hold a batch job, on the Work with Jobs display: 1. Select option 3 (Hold) for the job or jobs you want held. The status of the job changes to \Held. 2. Press F5. The status of the job changes to either Running job held (use Opt 6) or Held (use Opt 6).

Holding Printer Output from a Batch Job: Once a job has a status of Printer output, it has finished running. Any reports it has created are waiting to print or are printing. If you do not want these reports to print, use option 8 (Work with printer output) on the Work with Jobs display. On the Work with Job Printer Output display, use option 3 (Hold). Note: Printer output is not included unless you type a Y in the Printer output field in the Select Other Jobs window.

10-8


Working with Job Queues

Releasing a Batch Job To release a batch job, on the Work with Jobs display: 1. Select option 6 (Release) for the job or jobs you want released. The status of the job changes to \Released. 2. Press F5. The status of the job changes to either Running, Waiting to run, or Scheduled.

Ending a Batch Job Attention: Use caution when ending a job. Ending a job may interrupt job or file updates. To end a batch job, on the Work with Jobs display: 1. Select option 4 (Delete (End)) for the job or jobs you want ended. The Confirm Delete (End) of Jobs display appears. 2. Press Enter to end the jobs. Note: You would press F12 (Cancel) to keep the jobs. The Work with Jobs display appears. The job you ended only appears on the display if it has a status of Printer output. This status does not appear unless Y is specified in the Printer output field on the Select Other Jobs display.

Deleting Batch Job Printer Output: Once a job has a status of Printer output, it has finished running. Any reports that it created are either printing or waiting to print. To cancel a report, use option 8 (Work with printer output). On the Work with Job Printer Output display, select option 4 (Delete) for the printer output you want to delete.

Working with Job Queues Before a batch job is run, it waits in line on the job queue of the subsystem that will run it. The job can be waiting because other jobs are in front of it on the queue, the job is held, the job queue is held, or the job queue is not allocated to an active subsystem. A waiting job also has a priority (its place in the queue). Figure 10-6 shows an overview of a subsystem processing jobs from a job queue.

┌───────────┐ ┌──────────┐ │ Job 1 ├──────5│ Run Job 1│ │ Job 2 │ └──────────┘ │ Job 3 │ Subsystem │ Job 4 │ │ Job 5 │ SBMJOB──────5│ Job 6 │ └───────────┘ Job Queue Figure 10-6. Overview of Job Queue Processing


10-9


Looking at Job Queues If you submitted batch jobs, the Work with Jobs display gives you the status of those jobs, including where they are on the job queue if they are waiting to run. However, you may want to know which jobs are scheduled to run ahead of your job. Or, as the system operator, you may want to monitor the activity on the job queues. You can see this information on the Work with Job Queues display. To find this display: 1. On the Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu, select option 2 (Work with jobs). 2. On the Work with Jobs display, press F22 (Work with job queues). Figure 10-7 shows the Work with Job Queues display.

à@

ð

Work with Job Queues System: User . . . . . :

SYSTEMð1

\ALL

Type options below, then press Enter. 3=Hold 6=Release Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Job Queue/ Job HILGEREL MHJOBQ NORBERT NORBERT2 NOBELL QBATCH QCTL QSNADS QXFPCS SCHMALL TLMJOBQ

Status Job queue Job queue Held (use Ready Job queue Ready Ready Ready Ready Job queue Job queue

not assigned not assigned Opt 6) not assigned

not assigned not assigned More...

F1=Help F12=Cancel

F3=Exit F5=Refresh F11=Display libraries/descriptions F14=Include jobs on job queue

á

ñ

Figure 10-7. Work with Job Queues Display - Summary

3. To see the individual jobs on the queues, press F14 (Include jobs on job queue). The Work with Job Queues display appears again with the jobs included. 4. From either of these displays, press F11 (Display libraries/descriptions) to see another version that shows descriptive information about the job queues.

Working with an Empty Job Queue and Displaying Job Priority: To view an empty job queue or job priority within the queue, use the Work with Job Queue (WRKJOBQ) command to display the Work with All Job Queues display. On the Work with All Job Queues display, you can hold or release any job queue. This holds all jobs already on the job queue as well as any jobs that are submitted to that job queue.

10-10



To find priorities of jobs on a job queue use option 5 (Work with). When you press Enter, the Work with Job Queue display is shown for the queue you selected. The Priority column contains the priority of each job in the job queue.

Holding a Job Queue To hold a job queue, on the Work with Job Queues display: 1. Use option 3 (Hold) for the job queue or queues you want to hold. The status of the queue is changed to \Job queue held. 2. Press F5. The status of the queue is changed to Held. Note: The Work with Job Queues display shows only those job queues which have waiting or running jobs. If no jobs are associated with a job queue, the Work with Job Queues display is empty. An empty job queue is held when you know that the job queue is empty and choose to hold it so you can stop all future jobs from coming into the system.

Releasing a Job Queue To release a job queue, on the Work with Job Queues display: 1. Use option 6 (Release) for the job queue or queues you want to release. The status of the job queue changes to \Job queue released. 2. Press F5. The status changes to Ready.

Working with Unassigned Job Queues Jobs waiting on the job queue do not run if the job queue is not assigned to an active subsystem. To run these jobs, do one of the following: Move the jobs on the unassigned queue to a different job queue: 1. On either the Work with Jobs or the Work with Job Queues display, find the job queues that are ready to run jobs. 2. If you need additional information about which job queues are assigned to which subsystems, use the Work with Job Queues (WRKJOBQ) command. 3. On the Work with All Job Queues display, look at the Subsystem column to tell which job queues are assigned to active subsystems. 4. Move the jobs between job queues using the Change Job (CHGJOB) command. See “Moving a Job to a Different Job Queue” on page 10-17 for instructions on how to do this. Start the subsystem to which the job queue is assigned using the STRSBS command. See Chapter 2 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206, for more information on starting subsystems. Note: To determine which subsystem uses the job queue, display the subsystem description. See Chapter 2 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206 for information on how to display a subsystem description.


10-11

Working with Signed-On Users

On the Display Subsystem Description display, select option 6 (Job queue entries). The Display Job Queue Entries display is shown with all of the job queues assigned to the subsystem. Assign the job queue to a subsystem. If you have determined that none of the subsystems have a job queue entry for this job queue, you can assign it to a subsystem using the Add Job Queue Entry (ADDJOBQE) command.

Working with Signed-On Users When you are signed on the system, you type one request at a time (such as selecting an option or typing a command). The system responds to each typed request after Enter is pressed. This session, sometimes called an interactive job, begins when you sign onto a workstation and ends when you sign off. During the session, your interaction with the system is similar to a conversation. The AS/400 system links together all of the tasks you do from the time you sign on until you sign off. This makes it easier for you to manage your work environment, find your output, and keep track of what you have done.

Displaying Signed-On Users To display all users signed on the system, select option 12 (Work with signed-on users) on the Manage Your System, Users, and Devices (MANAGESYS) display which can be reached using option 10 on the ASSIST menu. You can also use the Work with User Jobs command as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKUSRJOB USER(\ALL) STATUS(\ACTIVE) JOBTYPE(\INTERACT) ASTLVL(\BASIC) 2. Press Enter.

Creating a Customized Work with User Jobs Command If you do not want to type the Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command with all the parameters to get to the Work with Signed-On Users display, you can create your own copy of the Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command in your library, changing the defaults to show the Work with Signed-On Users display. To do this: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CRTDUPOBJ 2. Press F4. 3. Type the following values for the parameters listed and press Enter:

10-12

From object (OBJ)

WRKUSRJOB

From library (FROMLIB)

QSYS

Object type (OBJTYPE)

*CMD

To library (TOLIB)

Your library name

New object (NEWOBJ)

Name of the new command (for example, WRKSGNON)


Working with Signed-On Users

4. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGCMDDFT 5. Press F4. 6. Type the following values for the parameters and press Enter: Command (CMD)

WRKSGNON (or the name of the new command)

Library

Your library name

New default (NEWDFT)

USER(*ALL) STATUS(*ACTIVE) JOBTYPE(*INTERACT) ASTLVL(*BASIC)

Figure 10-8 shows the Work with Signed-On Users display.

à@

ð

Work with Signed-On Users Find user

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

_________

Type options below, then press Enter. 3=Send message 4=Sign off 5=Display details Opt _ _ _ _ _ _ _

User BRUNS EVERLY GOETZ JACK SMITH TELLY TUBER

Display Station BRUNSS3 EVERLYS2 QPADEVððð4 JACKS4 SMITHS1 QPADEVððð8 QPADEVððð2

System: SYSTEMð1 Starting characters 7=Display message

Activity ASSIST menu INVENTORY program Command entry Message waiting (use Opt 7) WRKUSRJOB command MAIN menu WRKSPLF command

Bottom F1=Help F3=Exit F5=Refresh F11=Display additional information

F1ð=Send message to all F13=Sort list F24=More keys

á

ñ

Figure 10-8. Work with Signed-On Users Display

Signing Users Off the System When you sign a user off the system, you interrupt the user's interactive job in the middle of processing and remove the job from the system. Attention: Use caution when signing a user off the system. Ending a user’s interactive job may interrupt job or file updates. To sign a user off the system: 1. Use option 4 (Sign off), on the Work with Signed-On Users display, for the user or users you want to sign off the system. 2. Press Enter. On the Confirm Sign Off display, press Enter to sign users off the system or F12 (Cancel) to leave the users signed on to the system.


10-13

Displaying Job Information

The Work with Signed-On Users display is shown without the users you signed off the system.

Finding Signed-On Users and Sorting the User List To find a specific user signed on to the system, type the first few characters of the user's name in the Find user field and press Enter. The list is positioned at the first user matching the characters you typed. The list is initially sorted by user name and shows the activities of each user. To sort the list by user name or display station name, press F13 (Sort list). To select other users and display stations, use F14 (Select other users and display stations). Users who are temporarily signed off are not included in this list. To include them, type a Y in the Include temporarily signed-off users and suspended group jobs field on the Select Other Users and Display Stations window.

Finding Additional Information about Signed-On Users There are two ways you can display additional information about the users currently signed on to the system. For a single user listed on the Work with Signed-On Users display, select option 5 (Display details). This shows the Display Details display, which gives the user, display station description, and the current activity of the user. To get additional information for all users shown on the Work with Signed-On Users display, press F11 (Display additional information). This displays a pop-up window where you can select to see activities, workstation descriptions, or user descriptions in the third column of the display. For additional information about all aspects of every job on the system, see “Displaying Detailed Job Information.”

Sending Messages to Signed-On Users From the Work with Signed-On Users display, you can send messages to one, several, or all users signed on the system. To send a message to one or several signed-on users, use option 3 for each user. To send a message to all signed-on users, press F10 (Send message to all). Type your message in the Message text field on the Send a Message display and press F10 (Send). Note: The Send a Message display is set up to interrupt the users signed on the system. If you do not want to interrupt them, change the value in the Interrupt user field to an N.

Displaying Detailed Job Information The system keeps a comprehensive record of all aspects of every job. This information is available to you through the Work with Job menu. To find this information for your own interactive job, use the Work with Job (WRKJOB) command. To display the Work with Job menu for any other job on the system:

10-14


Displaying Job Information

1. Use the Work with User Jobs (WRKUSRJOB) command selecting all jobs (or the job name if you know it) with the intermediate assistance level. 2. Use option 5 (Work with) for the job you want more information about on the Work with User Jobs menu. The Work with Job menu for the job you selected appears. To help you monitor jobs and find out why problems with jobs occur, use the Display Job (DSPJOB) command or the Work with Job menu. You can do the same tasks with the DSPJOB or WRKJOB commands except: The WRKJOB menu has a command line where you can change the job. DSPJOB only allows you to display the JOB.

Displaying Job Status Attributes To display the identifying characteristics and the status of the job, select option 1 (Display job status attributes) on the Work with Jobs display. For example, you can see when the job entered the system and when it started running. For a batch job, this information can help you determine whether or not the job has been running too long and might be in a loop.

Displaying Job Definition Attributes To display the current job definition attributes, select option 2 (Display job definition attributes) on the Work with Jobs display. This display provides information such as job queue assignment and priority, output queue assignment and priority, message queue assignment, and logging level. Many of these definition attributes can be changed using the Change Job (CHGJOB) command or F9 (Change job) on the Display Job Definition Attributes display. See “Changing How a Job Is Run” on page 10-16 for information on how to change a job.

Displaying Job Run Attributes To display the current job run attributes, select option 3 (Display job run attributes, if active) on the Work with Jobs display. You can find out what a job’s run priority is on this display.

Displaying the Call Stack If an active job has stopped or seems to be in a loop, the call stack can help to determine where the problem is. It shows what program line numbers the job is currently trying to run. To display the call stack, select option 11 (Display call stack, if active) on the Work with Job menu.

Displaying Open Files You can see information about all of the files that the job is currently using by selecting option 14 (Display open files, if active) on the Work with Job menu. The Display Open Files display is useful in detecting a program loop. Press F5 continually and look at the data in the Relative Record column to see if the job is repeating the same relative record number.


10-15

Changing How a Job Is Run

You can also use this option to monitor the progress of a long-running batch job. For example, if you know that the job updates 15,000 records in a file, you can check the I/O Count field for the input/output count in that file to find out how the job is progressing.

Changing How a Job Is Run Once you have used the options on the Work with Job menu to do research, you might want to change some of the attributes of a job that is running or waiting to run. You can change a number of job attributes. For example, if you have *JOBCTL authority, you can:

Change the job queue priority Change the run priority Change the output priority Move a job to a different job queue or output queue

Note: Display the current value of any job attributes before you change them. You can change attributes of a job with the Change Job (CHGJOB) command. Select option 40 (Change job) on the Work with Job menu. The following are tasks that can be done on the Change Job (CHGJOB) prompt display. You can do any of the following by changing the value for the specified parameter.

Changing a Job’s Priority on a Job Queue Each job on a job queue has an assigned priority (position on the queue). To change a job’s position on the queue, type a number (0 to 9) in the Job priority (on JOBQ) field on the Change Job (CHGJOB) display. Raising a job’s priority (changing the priority to a number closer to 0) can move it closer to the top of the queue. Then the job begins running sooner than jobs with lower priority on that queue. The highest priority is 0. The lowest priority is 9. Jobs with a higher priority are run before jobs with a lower priority. There may be a limit on how high you can set the priority, depending on the number specified in the Priority limit (PTYLMT) parameter of your user profile. Note: When you submit a job, the highest priority allowed is 1. Priority 0 is reserved for changing a job to move it to the very top of the queue. Figure 10-9 on page 10-17 shows how job priorities work when selecting jobs to run:

10-16



Priorities 0

1

2

3

4

9

To Processing

If a job that has a priority of 1 is added to the queue, it would go here. RV2P721-4

Figure 10-9. Job Queue Priority

This change only affects the job once. If the same job is submitted to the job queue again, it has its original priority. If you want to make a permanent change to the job’s priority on the job queue, you need to change either the job description it uses or the procedure that submits the job.

Moving a Job to a Different Job Queue You may have more than one job queue on your AS/400 system. Sometimes certain job queues are set aside for work that does not require immediate running. These job queues can be released and held depending on how busy your system is. Or, your system may have a job queue assigned to a subsystem that has less system resources than the interactive subsystem. If you have more than one job queue on your system, you can move a job from one queue to another by typing the new job queue in the Job queue field. This change only affects the job once. If the same job is submitted again in the same way, it goes to the original job queue. If you want to make a permanent change to the queue this job uses, you need to change either the job description it uses or the procedure that submits the job.

Changing How an Active Job Is Run To change how a job is run, change either the Run priority or Time slice fields on the Change Job (CHGJOB) display. The control program decides which jobs to run in what order and for how long. Here’s how it happens: Every job has a time slice and a run priority. The time slice sets a limit on how long the processor works on one job before switching to another job. Time slices are measured in milliseconds. The run priority determines which job the processor selects next. Once the processor has started processing the instructions for a job, it continues with that job until one of the following happens: – The job reaches time slice end. – The job needs to wait for something. For example, an interactive job might send a new display to your display station. Then the system has to wait for you to type another request and press Enter. This is known as a long wait.


10-17


When one of the previous events occurs, the system has to decide which job to run next. It looks at a list of jobs that are ready to be run and chooses the highest priority job. You can see that both run priority and time slice can affect how a job is run. You should use great care in changing either of these. If you give any job too high a priority or too long a time slice, it can negatively affect everything else running on the system. When you use the Change Job (CHGJOB) command, it only affects the job once. If the same job runs again, it returns to the original priority and time slice. If you want to make a permanent change to how the job runs, you need to change either the characteristics of the class it uses or have it run using a different class. For more information on class, see the Work Management book, SC41-4306.

Changing a Job’s Print Priority Each printer output on an output queue has an assigned priority (position on the queue that was obtained from the job’s print priority). To change this priority, type a number from 1 to 9 in the Output priority (on OUTQ) field. Raising a job’s priority (changing the priority to a number closer to 1) can move the job’s printer output closer to the top of the output queue. Then it begins printing sooner than printer output with lower priority on that output queue. Output queue priorities work in the same way as job queue priorities (see Figure 10-9 on page 10-17). Changing print priority using the Change Job (CHGJOB) command only affects the job once. If the same job runs again, it returns to the original output priority. If you want to make a permanent change to the job’s output priority, you need to change either the job description it uses or change the procedure for submitting the job.

Assigning a Job to a Different Output Queue When a batch job that creates printed output is waiting to run, you can change the output queue to which it is assigned by changing the Output queue field on the Change Job (CHGJOB) display. Once the batch job starts to run, it begins creating its spooled file in its assigned output queue. At that point, you would need to move the spooled file to a different output queue. For an interactive job, you may want to change the assigned output queue before you use the Print key or run a program that creates a report. Using the Change Job (CHGJOB) command only affects the job once. If the same job runs again, it is assigned to the original output queue. If you want to make a permanent change to a batch job’s output queue, you need to change either the job description it uses or change the procedure for submitting the job. If you want to make a permanent change to an interactive job’s output queue, you need to change either the job description it uses, the user profile, or the work station device description. For more information on the CHGJOB command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

10-18


Working with Job Logs

Working with Job Logs A job log is a system record of what happened when the job was processed. Each job has an associated job log that may contain the following information: The commands in the job The commands in any programs that were run as part of the job Any messages that were issued when the job ran, as well as the message online help information (second level text) When a job is finished, a job log output file called QPJOBLOG is created. Usually, when a batch job ends, the job log remains on the output queue and can be viewed or printed. When an interactive job ends normally, the job log is usually not sent to an output queue. When an interactive job ends abnormally, the job log output file is sent to an output queue. The job log is a useful tool in diagnosing problems with a job. However, when the system creates and prints detailed job logs, it can slow the system down. It is a good idea to balance how much information you need in your job logs against how their creation affects system performance.

Displaying a Job Log You can display a job log several different ways: For a job that has ended, on the Work with User Jobs menu: 1. Use option 8 (Work with spooled files) for the job whose log you want to see. 2. On the Work with Job Spooled Files display, find the file called QPJOBLOG. 3. Use option 5 (Display) to view it. For a job that is still running, on the Work with User Jobs menu: 1. Use option 5 (Work with) for the job whose log you want to see. 2. On the Work with Job menu, select option 10 (Display job log, if active or on job queue) To display the job log for your own work station session, use the Display Job Log (DSPJOBLOG) command.

Printing a Job Log When an interactive job is running, a job log is being created. If the interactive job ends normally, for example, when you sign off without problems, this job log is not sent to the output queue. To print a log for your interactive job during sign-off: 1. On any OS/400 command line, type signoff \list 2. Press Enter. To print the job log for another job: 1. On any OS/400 command line, type


10-19


dspjoblog job(job-number/user/job-name) output(\print) where job-number is the six-digit number of the job whose job log is to be printed on the system, user is the name of the user of the job whose job log is to be printed, and job-name is the name of the job whose job log is to be printed. 2. Press Enter Your job log output file is printed or placed in an output queue, depending on how your system is set up.

Changing the Logging Level for a Job To minimize the size of job logs on your system, use the log level to limit how much information about a job is written to the job log. To change the logging level for an active job: 1. Enter the Change Job (CHGJOB) command and press F4. 2. Press F10 (Additional parameters). 3. Press the Page Down key to find the Message logging and Log CL program command fields. 4. Type in the changes and press Enter. Note: If you change the logging level to 0, F9 (Retrieve) does not work for command displays. Using the Change Job (CHGJOB) command changes the logging level temporarily. If the same job runs again, it runs with its original log level. To make a permanent change to the log level for a job, change the job description under which the job runs, using the Change Job Description (CHGJOBD) command. Note: The same job description may be used by many jobs on the system. Investigate the possible effect before making this type of global change.

Filtering Messages from the Job Log Filtering is the process of removing messages from the job log based on the message logging level set for the job. Filtering occurs before each new request is received by a request processing program. If you run a CL program interactively or in batch and fill in the Message logging fields (on the Change Job command) as shown:

Level Severity Text

0 00 *NOLIST

filtering would be run only once after the program ends. Filtering does not occur after every CL command is run within the program. After the program ends, all messages are removed from the job log because the message level is 0. A job log is not spooled if the job ended normally because *NOLIST is specified for the message text level. Note: When the job log is not spooled, system resource to remove messages from the job log is wasted.

10-20



Sending Job Log Output Files to a Separate Output Queue The Operational Assistant automatic cleanup function deletes old job logs by assigning them to the QEZJOBLOG output queue in the QUSRSYS library. For more information about automatic cleanup, see chapter 8 of the System Operation book, SC41-4203. All of the job logs are conveniently stored for you in one output queue. You can view them when you need to. If you need a printed copy of a log, you can move it to an active output queue and print it. To send your job logs to a separate output queue if you are not using the Operational Assistant cleanup function, change the description for the job log printer file to use the shipped output queue for job logs using the Change Printer File (CHGPRTF) command as follows: 1. On any OS/400 command prompt, type CHGPRTF FILE(QPJOBLOG) OUTQ(QEZJOBLOG) 2. Press Enter.


10-21


10-22


Displaying and Changing Device Status

Chapter 11. Working with OS/400 Devices and Communications In operating the system, you sometimes have to change device status (making devices available or unavailable for use). Each device (such as a diskette device, display station, printer, and tape device) has a status that determines if it is ready to use. A device is ready to use if its status is Available to use or Varied on. Display devices may also show a status of Sign-on display when waiting for a user to sign on. A device is not ready to use if its status is any of the following: Powered off or not yet available Varied off Session held Not assigned to active subsystem

Additional Reading: For conceptual information on configuration and how to do a local configuration, see the Local Device Configuration book, SC41-4121. For information on how to do a remote configuration, see the Communications Configuration book, SC41-3401. Note: With the following tasks, make sure you are using the basic assistance level of the Operational Assistant functions. Otherwise the displays you see will not match the displays shown in this manual. For more information on assistance levels, see “Using Assistance Levels and User Profiles” on page 6-3.

Displaying and Changing Device Status To change the status of your devices, use the Device Status (DEVICESTS) menu. To display this menu, select option 10 (Manage your system, users, and devices) on the Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu. Then, select option 20 (Device status tasks). To display the Work with Devices display where you can see different kinds of devices at once, use the Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) command specifying *BASIC for the Assistance level (ASTLVL) parameter and *DEV for the Type (CFGTYPE) parameter. To display and change the status of a device on the Device Status Tasks (DEVICESTS) menu, select the option number that corresponds to the type of device (display, printer, tape, and diskette) whose status you want to see. Security Consideration Only the devices for which you have object operational authority are displayed.

On all of the device displays, the device status can be changed with option 1 (Make available) or 2 (Make unavailable) after selecting the corresponding option on the Device Status Tasks menu. The status for all of the devices is shown in the Status column.


11-1

Renaming a Device

Device Status Restrictions Making media devices ready for use may include answering messages sent to the system operator. To display system operator messages, press F6 (Display system operator messages) on the Work with Messages display. Before a printer can print, the printer’s power and ready lights must be on, and the error light must be off. If the printer’s error light is on, you may need to answer messages sent to the system operator. To do this, make the printer available (vary it on), start it, then answer any printer messages. Virtual devices, used by display station pass-through, are made available automatically by the pass-through function. This means that: – You do not have to make a virtual device available. – A virtual device is made available by the pass-through function unless you reach the limit specified for the QAUTOVRT system value. To display the QAUTOVRT system value, on an OS/400 command line, type DSPSYSVAL QAUTOVRT and press Enter. To change the system value, use the Work with System Value (WRKSYSVAL) command. You must have *ALLOBJ authority to change this system value. For information on activating communications lines and controllers, see “Activating Communications Lines and Controllers” on page 11-4.

Renaming a Device To rename any device, on the Device Status Tasks menu: 1. Select the option that corresponds to the type of device you want to rename. For example, if you want to rename a display, select option 1 (Work with display devices). 2. Vary off the device. 3. Use option 9 (Rename). 4. On the Rename Device display, type the new name of the device in the New name field and press Enter. If necessary, the system tries to make the selected device unavailable so it can be renamed, and then makes it available again with the new name.

Considerations for Renaming Devices If you rename a device, there are other places where you will need to change the name.

Display Device

Subsystem description work station entries entered by name Display files CD-ROM device CL programs referring to this device

Printer Device Printer files QPRTDEV system value User profiles that refer to this device

11-2


Printing Local Device Addresses

CL programs referring to this device Job descriptions that refer to this device by name Display descriptions referring to this as an auxiliary printer

Tape device Tape files CL programs referring to this device

Diskette device Diskette files CL programs referring to this device

Displaying and Changing a Device Description To see the text description (location and owner) of any device on the system, press F11 (Display descriptions) on any of the device displays. The display remains the same except the description is shown next to the device it describes. In addition to the name of the person who operates the device, it is helpful to include the physical location of the device in the Description column. To return to the original display, just press F11 (Display types/statuses). To change the device description, use option 13 (Change description). On the Change Description display, type the new description over the current description in the New description field and press Enter. The Work with Display Devices display is shown with the new description in the Description column.

Printing Local Device Addresses You can print a diagram that shows the device location, by port number and switch setting, for the devices attached to all local work station controllers. This printout can help you know where to attach new devices. To print the addresses of your local devices: 1. Type go devicests. 2. Press Enter to display the Device Status Tasks menu. 3. Select option 10 (Print local device addresses). A message is displayed when printer output is created. 4. Type go assist. 5. Press Enter to display the Operational Assistant menu. 6. Select option 1 (Work with printer output). 7. Look for printer output named QPDCDEVA and follow the instructions on the display to make sure it is printing.

Chapter 11. Working with OS/400 Devices and Communications

11-3

Activating Communications Lines and Controllers

Activating Communications Lines and Controllers Figure 11-1 illustrates how communications lines and controllers are connected to enable the devices to communicate with each other.

System 1

System 2 (or remote controller)

Line Description

LIND

LIND

Controller

CTRL

CTRL

Devices

Devices RV2P705-0

Figure 11-1. Relationship Between Controllers and Lines in Communications

To activate, change the text descriptions, or rename your communications lines and controllers, on the Device Status Tasks (DEVICESTS) menu: 1. Select the option that corresponds to the device that you want to work with. For example, to work with controllers and lines that connect display stations on the AS/400 system, select option 1 (Work with display devices). 2. On the Work with Display Devices display (shown in Figure 11-2) use option 8 (Work with controller and line) to show the controller and line to which the device is attached. For example, the following display shows the line and controller for RMTDEV1 which is a remote display station. Note: If you used option 8 (Work with controller and line) for a local display station, you would see the Work with Controller display because a local display does not have a communications line.

à@

ð

Work with Controller and Line System: Type options below, then press Enter. 1=Make available 2=Make unavailable 7=Display message 9=Rename

Opt __ __ __ __

Line/ Controller/ Device LINð2 RMTCTLð3 RMTDEV1 RMTDEV2

F1=Help F12=Cancel

F3=Exit F17=Top

Type \SDLC 5394 318ð 318ð

F5=Refresh F18=Bottom

F9=Command line

Figure 11-2. Work with Controller and Line Display


5=Display details 13=Change description

Status Active Active Sign-on display Powered off or not yet available

á

11-4

SYSTEMð1

F11=Display descriptions

ñ

Activating Communications Lines and Controllers

3. The Work with Controller and Line display shows the controller and line to which the display is attached as well as the other local, remote, and virtual displays and printers that are attached to that specific controller and line. On this display, you can do the following: To make a line, controller, or device available, use option 1 (Make available). To make a line, controller, or device unavailable, use option 2 (Make unavailable). To display a description of the line, controller, or device, use option 5 (Display details). To rename the line, controller, or device, use option 9 (Rename) to see the Rename Controller display. On the Rename Controller display, you can change the name of the controller. If necessary, the system tries to make the selected controller unavailable so it can be renamed, and then makes it available again with the new name. Note: When you change the name of a line or controller, other objects on the system need to be updated with the new name. If you change the name of a line or controller, check to ensure that any control language (CL) programs that refer to that line or controller are updated as well. Also, check the Alert Controller Description (ALRCTLD) network attribute on the Display Network Attribute (DSPNETA) command or Change Network Attribute (CHGNETA) command to see if it refers to the controller whose name was changed. To change the text description of the line, controller, or device type, use option 13 (Change description). On the Change Description display, type the new description over the current description in the New description field. For example, if a new remote display station were added, RMTDEV3, you could change the description to include that display station.

Configuring Remote Communications To configure remote communications, use option 20 (Communications configuration tasks) on the Customize Your System, Users, and Devices (SETUP) menu or type go cmncfg on any command line and press Enter. With the Communications Configuration menu you can easily configure: 5250 remote work station controllers and devices 3270 remote attach controllers and devices AS/400 system to AS/400 system using advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) and Advanced peer-to-peer networking* (APPN*) AS/400 system to System/36 using APPN and APPC For more information on remote communications, see the Communications Configuration book, SC41-3401.


11-5

Using a Switched Communications Line

Using a Switched Communications Line You can establish a connection to a remote controller or another system by making a telephone call to the remote location or by answering a telephone call from the remote location. If you do not have an automatic dial modem, you must place the call manually, using manual dial. If you do not have an automatic answer modem, calls to you must be answered manually.

Using Manual Dial Generally, a communications request is made to the system by an application program. When the request is made, you manually connect the line by doing the following: 1. A message is sent by the system to the system operator message queue. If you are authorized as the system operator, a message light comes on at your work station, and an alarm, if your work station has one, sounds to indicate that a message has arrived. 2. Display the messages sent to the system operator: a. On the Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu, select option 3 (Work with messages). The Work with Messages display is shown. b. Press F6 (Display system operator messages). A message similar to the following is displayed: Manually dial 123-4567 for controller CTLUð2 line LINEð2. (C G) 3. Dial the indicated telephone number on the indicated line (in the example message shown, the number is 123-4567 and the line is LINE02). 4. When the call is answered, type 5 to select Display details and reply. 5. Press Enter to respond to the message. 6. Type g in the response area. 7. Press Enter. 8. Put the telephone or modem in data mode. For information about how to do this, see the appropriate modem instructions. When you complete this manual dial sequence, another message is sent to the system operator. Display the message using option 3 (Work with messages). The system operator message queue is shown with a message indicating whether the controller was contacted successfully or not. Sometimes the remote controller cannot be contacted or the line is busy. Note: You have a limited amount of time to complete this manual dial sequence, or the communications program does not finish, therefore, you should monitor the messages at a work station near the phone or modem.

11-6



Using Manual Answer Connect the line by doing the following: 1. When the telephone connected to the data line rings, answer it, and make sure the person calling is authorized, if possible. If it is a modem from another system calling your number, listen for a buzz. 2. Type ANSLIN 3. Press F4. 4. On the Answer Line (ANSLIN) prompt display, type the line name in the Line field. 5. Press Enter. A message is sent by the system to the system operator message queue. 6. On any command line, type dspmsg qsysopr 7. Press Enter to display the messages sent to the system operator message queue. A message similar to the following should be displayed: Type g and place modem for line LINEð2 in data mode. (C G) 8. Type 5 to select Display details and reply. 9. Press Enter to respond to the message. 10. Do one of the following: Type g in the response area and press Enter. Put the telephone or modem in data mode. For information about how to do this, see the appropriate modem instructions. Type c and press Enter to cancel the operation. 11. Press F12 (Cancel) to return to your previous display. When you complete this manual answer sequence, another message is sent to the system operator message queue. 12. Display the message as in step 6 on page 11-7. The system operator message queue is shown with a message indicating that the controller was contacted successfully.

Using Manual Answer for Countries Other Than the United States | | | |

For countries other than the United States, the government-operated common carrier Post Telephone and Telegraph Administration (PTT) and your X.21 BIS modem allow you to contact remote systems using manual answer (a switched line network). The X.21 BIS modem you are using differs from the X.21 modem in that X.21 BIS converts analog signals used by older equipment to the digital signals used by newer equipment.


11-7


To start manual answer: 1. Type ANSLIN 2. Press F4. 3. On the Answer Line display, type the line name in the Line field and press Enter. A message is sent by the system to the system operator. 4. Display the messages sent to the system operator: a. On the Operational Assistant (ASSIST) menu, type 3 to select Work with messages. The Work with Messages display is shown. b. Press F6 (Display system operator messages). A message similar to the following should be displayed: Enter G and place modem for line LINEð2 in data mode. (C G) 5. Type 5 to select Display details and reply. 6. Press Enter. 7. Type g in the response area. 8. Press Enter. Attention: Do not press the answer button on the modem at this time. 9. When an incoming call is indicated by a signal from the data communications equipment, press the answer button within 60 seconds. When you complete the manual answer sequence, another message is sent to the system operator. Display the message using the Work with Messages display. The system operator message queue is shown with a message indicating that the controller was contacted successfully. Note: It is helpful to display the status of the line and controller when you are trying to make a dial connection. Press F5 to see what is currently happening on the line and controller.

11-8


Saving and Restoring OS/400

Chapter 12. Saving and Restoring OS/400 and OS/400 Objects This chapter contains an overview of how to save and restore OS/400 objects and the OS/400 operating system. You can save or restore an entire system or individual objects in the system. Use the save and restore commands and functions to ensure that, following any type of failure, information exists that allows you to recover your system or to re-create any objects on your system that were damaged. The media that are used for saving or restoring objects and information include tape, diskette, and optical storage. You can use the save and restore functions by using specific commands or by using menu options on the Save and Restore menus. To display the Save menu, type GO SAVE on any command line and press Enter. To display the Restore menu, type GO RESTORE on any command line and press Enter.

Saving the Entire System You should develop a disaster recovery plan: To ensure that you can respond to a disaster or other emergency that might affect your system To minimize the effect on your business operations Part of the disaster recovery plan should be saving your entire system. The entire system includes: | | | | |

Licensed internal code OS/400 operating system OS/400 user profiles OS/400 private authorities OS/400 configuration objects OS/400 optional libraries OS/400 licensed program libraries OS/400 IBM libraries with user data OS/400 user libraries OS/400 documents and folders OS/400 distribution objects OS/400 objects in directories

Note: Your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are saved when you save your OS/400 user libraries. If you want to be able to restore individual files or programs that are on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, you must also use the SSP save procedures to individually save files, folders and libraries that are on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines. For directions, see Chapter 25, “Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information.” To save the entire system:


12-1


1. Stop each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.” 2. Initialize tapes and load the first tape. For information on how to initialize and load tapes, see Chapter 4 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206 or Chapter 7 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297. 3. Use the Save Menu. The simplest way to save your entire system is to use option 21 on the Save menu. For directions, see chapter 4 in the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304. This book also contains complete and detailed information on how to save and restore objects and information and how to plan more advanced strategies for backup and recovery.

Restoring the Entire System To recover after a complete system loss, see “Recovering from a complete Loss” in Chapter 9 in the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304. To recover after a disk failure, see “Choosing the Recovery for a disk failure” in Chapter 9 in the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304. After either of these recoveries, if you have a more recent copy of your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine data, restore that data. If you did individual saves of your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, restore the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see Chapter 25, “Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information.”

Saving the OS/400 Operating System The Save System (SAVSYS) CL command saves: A copy of the Licensed Internal Code The QSYS library (including security information and configuration objects) These are saved in a format compatible with the installation of the AS/400 system. SAVSYS does not save: Any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine For directions on saving an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see Chapter 25, “Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information” on page 25-1. Libraries other than QSYS For directions on saving the entire system including the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see “Saving the Entire System” on page 12-1.

12-2



Restoring the OS/400 Operating System Restoring the OS/400 operating system from SAVSYS media is made up of two tasks: Restoring the Licensed Internal Code For directions, see “Recovering Licensed Internal Code” in the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304. Restoring the operating system For directions, see “Restoring the Operating System” in the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304. For directions on restoring other libraries from SAVSYS media, the directions are also included in the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304. For directions on how to restore an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that was saved individually, see Chapter 25, “Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information.”

Saving AS/400 Storage The Save Storage (SAVSTG) CL command causes the Licensed Internal Code and the contents of the auxiliary storage to be saved to tape. When you run the SAVSTG command, the save function causes an IPL of the system. This function is intended for disaster recovery backup. Individual libraries or objects cannot be restored from a save storage tape. For more information on the SAVSTG command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Restoring AS/400 Storage To use the restore storage function, The system must be in a DST-restricted state. The disk storage configuration must be the same as it was when the SAVSTG command was used. The restore storage process is started by using an option on the Dedicated Service Tools (DST) menu. The restore storage operation can only be started when the operating system is not active (before an IPL of the operating system). This function is intended for disaster recovery backup. The procedure does not restore single objects or libraries.

Saving Individual OS/400 Objects This section contains an overview of the CL commands that can be used to save OS/400 objects. For more information about these CL commands, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Chapter 12. Saving and Restoring OS/400 and OS/400 Objects

12-3


Saving Objects in Directories The Save (SAV) command saves a copy of one or more objects that can be used in the integrated file system. For more information about the integrated file system, see the Integrated File System Introduction book, SC41-4711.

Saving Calendar The Save Calendar (SAVCAL) CL command saves of calendars and calendar items.

Saving Configuration Objects The Save Configuration (SAVCFG) command saves all configuration and system resource management (SRM) objects without requiring a system in a restricted state.

Saving Changed Objects The Save Changed Objects (SAVCHGOBJ) command saves a copy of each changed object (since a specified date and time). The SAVCHGOBJ command is the same as the SAVOBJ command except that the SAVCHGOBJ command saves only changed objects and members.

Saving Documents, Folders, and Mail The Save Document Library Object (SAVDLO) command saves copies of the following: Documents Folders Distribution objects (mail) Documents can be saved individually or in a group using the SAVDLO command. Distribution objects (mail) cannot be saved or restored for individual users. Mail can only be saved for all users. The SAVDLO DLO(*ALL) FLR(*ANY) command saves a copy of all documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail). The SAVDLO DLO(*CHG) saves all documents created or changed, all folders created since the last complete save operation, and all mail.

Saving Libraries The Save Library (SAVLIB) command allows you to save a copy of one or more libraries. An AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is stored as an object in a library. By saving that library, you can save the entire AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. A library containing an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine can be restored just like any other library. Attention: You must stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in order to save the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is contained. The SAVLIB command saves the entire library, including the library description, the object descriptions, and the contents of the objects in the library. You can save 1 to

12-4



300 libraries using the SAVLIB command. If you specify multiple libraries, you overlap processing, which can improve performance. All libraries, including all user libraries, can be saved to diskette or tape using the SAVLIB command. User libraries are defined as libraries that you create or IBM-supplied libraries that are intended to contain user data. The SAVLIB LIB(*NONSYS) command saves all user-created libraries, the QGPL library, and licensed program libraries, such as QRPG and QIDU. The SAVLIB LIB(*IBM) command saves all system (IBM) libraries. The SAVLIB LIB(*ALLUSR) command saves all user libraries. To determine which libraries are IBM libraries and which libraries are user libraries, see the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304. Note: When you save this way, you cannot restore individual System/36 files or programs. You must restore the entire library. You should continue to use the directions in Chapter 25, “Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information” to save specific files and program libraries.

Saving Licensed Programs The Save Licensed Programs (SAVLICPGM) CL command saves a copy of the objects that make up a licensed program.

Saving Specific Objects The Save Object (SAVOBJ) CL command saves a copy of a single object or a group of objects located in the same library.

Saving Security Data The Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) command saves all security information without requiring a system in a restricted state.

Restoring Individual OS/400 Objects This section contains an overview of the CL commands that can be used to restore OS/400 objects. For more information about these CL commands, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Restoring Objects in Directories The Restore (RST) command restores a copy of one or more objects that can be used in the integrated file system. For more information about integrated file system, see the Integrated File System Introduction book, SC41-4711.

Restoring Calendar The Restore Calendar (RSTCAL) CL command allows you to restore calendars and calendar items.


12-5


Restoring Configuration Data The Restore Configuration (RSTCFG) command restores a device configuration object to the system. The command restores any device configuration object that was saved to tape by the Save System (SAVSYS) command or the Save Configuration (SAVCFG) command.

Restoring Changed Objects The Restore Changed Objects (RSTCHGOBJ) CL command restores each changed object (since a specified date and time). The RSTCHGOBJ command is the same as the RSTOBJ command except that the RSTCHGOBJ command only restores changed objects and members.

Restoring Documents, Folders, and Mail The Restore Document Library Object (RSTDLO) command restores documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail). The RSTDLO DLO(*ALL) SAVFLR(*ANY) command restores to the system all documents, folders, and distribution objects (mail) saved on media, regardless of the folders (if any) from which they were saved.

Restoring Libraries The Restore Library (RSTLIB) command restores a single saved library or a group of libraries. The RSTLIB command restores the entire library, including the library description, object descriptions, and the contents of the other objects. Any library that was saved by the Save Library (SAVLIB) command can be restored by the RSTLIB command. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is stored as a library. If you have used the SAVLIB command to save the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is stored, you can use the RSTLIB command to restore the entire AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The RSTLIB SAVLIB(*IBM) command restores to the system all system (IBM) libraries (with the exception of the QSYS library). The RSTLIB SAVLIB(*ALLUSR) command restores to the system all user libraries. See the Backup and Recovery – Basic book, SC41-4304, to determine which libraries are IBM libraries and which libraries are user libraries. The RSTLIB SAVLIB(*NONSYS) command restores to the system all libraries saved by SAVLIB LIB(*NONSYS) command.

Restoring Licensed Programs The Restore Licensed Program (RSTLICPGM) CL command restores a copy of the objects that make up a licensed program.

12-6



Restoring Specific Objects The Restore Object (RSTOBJ) command restores objects to a library. Objects can only be restored to one library at a time with the RSTOBJ command. Attention: When you restore an object, it replaces any existing object in the same library with the same name and object type.

Restoring User Profiles The Restore User Profile (RSTUSRPRF) command restores the basic parts of a user profile or a set of user profiles. The command restores any user profiles that were saved by the Save System (SAVSYS) command or the Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) command.

Restoring Object Authority The Restore Authority (RSTAUT) command restores object authorities. When you restore objects and user profiles, you do not simultaneously restore the authority to those objects. Authority is only restored by using the RSTAUT command.


12-7


12-8


Working with LIC and OS/400 PTFs

Chapter 13. Working with Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 Program Temporary Fixes IBM periodically creates program temporary fixes (PTFs) to correct problems or potential problems found within a particular IBM licensed program. PTFs may fix problems that appear to be hardware failures, or they may provide new functions. PTFs are designed to replace one or more objects in the licensed program. Generally, PTFs are incorporated in a future release of the system. PTFs packaged using the SystemView* System Manager/400 licensed program may also be available for non-IBM programs. See the System Manager Use, book, SC41-3321, for information on this licensed program. The program maintenance strategy discussed in this chapter applies specifically to IBM AS/400 system service and delivery.

AS/400 Program Maintenance Strategy The AS/400 program maintenance strategy consists of preventive service and corrective service.

Preventive Service (Cumulative PTF Packages) Preventive service helps you avoid problems that have been resolved since the start of the current release.

| |

Cumulative PTF packages contain PTFs which have been ordered a specific number of times. If a PTF provides a change for a limited set of users or requires special handling, it may not be included in the package. Cumulative PTF package application is useful for ensuring you have key changes and improvements for your system. The entire cumulative PTF package should be installed after you load or reload a different version, release or modification of the OS/400 operating system. Cumulative PTF packages can be ordered electronically or by telephone and are always sent by mail on a CD-ROM or tape. Cumulative PTF packages should be installed every three to four months if there is no change to the equipment or programs on your system. Between releases of cumulative PTF packages, IBM service support provides PTFs that may be important to your system. You should periodically order preventive service planning information and review the PTFs listed. If any of these PTFs are needed for your system, you should order and install them.

Corrective Service Corrective service corrects problems reported to IBM service support. If you have a problem with an IBM licensed program, you can describe the problem using the Analyze Problem (ANZPRB) command or the Work with Problem (WRKPRB) command. You can report the problem electronically or by calling your service provider. You can also have the system analyze or report any problems automatically. For more information on reporting problems, see System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.


13-1

Ordering PTFs and PTF Information

Ordering LIC and OS/400 PTFs and PTF Information For information on the following topics, see Chapter 5 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. Ordering PTFs and PTF Information Installing PTFs System Storage Areas A and B Advanced PTF Topics

13-2


Transferring to M36

Chapter 14. Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine There are three ways of transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: The Transfer to AS/400 Advanced 36 (TFRM36) CL Command The TFRM36 command transfers control of a display device from an OS/400 job to the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The display device that is transferred is the one on which the command is run. The Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Procedure (STRM36PRC) CL Command The STRM36PRC command transfers control from an OS/400 job to the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and runs the specified SSP procedure. The display device that is transferred is the one on which the command is run. The Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) CL Command The STRPASTHR command allows you to pass through to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine where you can sign on as if your display station were attached locally. The display device where STRPASTHR is run is the display that is transferred to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Important Information about Transferring | | | | | | | | |

You can use the TFRM36 and STRM36PRC commands to transfer the display station to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You can also use the pass-through support to transfer the display station to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. When the OS/400 operating system and the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine are on the same physical system, the APPC or APPN support uses the Internal Local Area Network (ILAN) to link for the passthrough. Attention: You should not transfer the OS/400 console to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. OS/400 allows up to ten characters for a user ID. An AS/400 Advanced 36 machine allows up to eight characters for the user ID. For this reason, when you choose to automatically sign on to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, the first eight characters of the OS/400 user ID are used. If two user IDs start with the same eight characters, this could be a security problem. For example, the following user IDs would all be shortened to MICHAELS: MICHAELS MICHAELSON MICHAELSEN MICHAELSRM

Restrictions on Transfers using the TFRM36 and STRM36PRC Commands The following restrictions apply when using the TFRM36 or the STRM36PRC CL command to transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine specified on the M36 parameter must be STARTING or STARTED. If the STATUS of the machine is STARTED, the


14-1

Transferring to M36

transfer request proceeds immediately. If the machine STATUS changes to STARTED before two minutes are up, the transfer proceeds. After two minutes, if the machine STATUS is still STARTING, the transfer request ends with an error. The STATUS of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine can be found by using the Work AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (WRKM36) CL command. For more information on the WRKM36 CL command, see “Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command” on page 30-1.

| |

If the AUTOSIGNON function is used during the transfer, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine being transferred to must have AUTOSIGNON(*ENABLE) specified or a message is issued. For TFRM36, the transfer continues and AUTOSIGNON(*NO) is used. When you set up your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you need to decide whether to allow automatic sign-on or not. If you allow automatic signon, an SSP signon display is not seen because the user ID is already signed on to OS/400. A user ID that is greater than eight characters is truncated to an eight-character user ID when they transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The STRM36PRC command cannot be sent to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine display station that is configured as an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine data display station. It must be sent to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine display station that is configured as a command display station. If you specify automatic signon for the TFRM36 command and specify a menu, library, or procedure, the command must be sent to a display station which is configured as a command display station. These parameters are not allowed when you sign on to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine data display station. Problems can occur if the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC CL commands are used while you are reloading SSP. The TFRM36 or STRM36PRC commands can be discarded and there may be no record that the commands did not complete successfully. From a non-local display station that was transferred to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC commands, functions like display station passthru and 3270 device emulation might not work correctly. In some cases, the format of the data returned to the application for signed numeric processing and trailing nulls processing will be different on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine than it was on a System/36.

| | | | | |

If the Test Request key is pressed on a non-local display that is transferred to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC, an error message is shown that indicates the key is not supported.

| | |

From a non-local display station that was transferred to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC commands, some text processing functions (for example, editing a document) do not work like they did on a System/36.

| | | |

– Help and print keys

|

When you edit a document, the modified data in the document is not returned to the system when either the help key or print key is pressed.

| |

– Supported Emulators

|

14-2


Transferring to M36

|

Some non-local displays do not support the System/36 TEXTDOC procedure. If the system can determine that the display does not support System/36 text, the following error message is shown:

|

Text processing is not supported on this display.

| |

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

– 3477 Extended Attributes The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine never sends the 3477 extended attributes to non-local transferred displays. Some display station emulators (For example: Personal Communications 5250 (PCOM), Client Access for Windows, Client Access for OS/2, Connection Program/6000) expect the 3477 extended attributes to be sent. If you do any text processing from any of these displays, an error message is shown that indicates the display station has a program error. The PASSTHRU procedure will not work from a non-local display that was transferred to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC commands. If you want to passthru to another system from one of these displays, use the RUN400 OCL statement to run the OS/400 STRPASTHR CL command to passthru to the other system. From a non-local display station that was transferred to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC commands, if data is to be returned to the application on a read immediate operation, the application will not work like it did on the System/36. On the System/36, the data was always returned regardless of whether the modified data tag was set. On an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, the data is only returned if the modified data tag is set. The modified data tag can be set when the field is defined or when the data in the field is modified.

Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using TFRM36 The Transfer to AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (TFRM36) command transfers control of a display device from an OS/400 job to the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The display device that is transferred is the one on which the command is run. Control returns to OS/400 when you sign off the SSP operating system. There are certain restrictions you should be aware of when using the TFRM36. For information on the restrictions, see “Restrictions on Transfers using the TFRM36 and STRM36PRC Commands” on page 14-1. For more information on the TFRM36 command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine 1. On an OS/400 command line or in a CL source program, type TFRM36 2. Press F4. 3. Type values in the fields that apply. | |

4. Press Enter. More fields are shown.

|

5. Type values in the fields that apply.

|

6. Press Enter. Chapter 14. Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

14-3

Transferring to M36

Using the TFRM36 Command — Examples Example 1 TFRM36

M36(MYM36)

This command transfers the display station, on which the command is run, to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named MYM36. It is located through the library list of the OS/400 job. If the machine allows automatic sign on, the user of the display device is automatically signed on to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the default menu, library, and procedure identified in the user's SSP user profile. Because a workstation identifier was not specified on the transfer, the system determines the SSP logical workstation identifier. If the machine does not allow automatic signon, the SSP signon display for that workstation appears.

| | |

If the display device is defined in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's configuration (*M36CFG) through either controller or device mapping, the controller, port, and address of the display station in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration is used to determine the SSP logical display station. For example, if your display station is defined as controller 2, port 3, address 4, then the SSP logical workstation will be the display station that is defined at controller 2, port 3 and address 4 in the SSP master configuration record. If the display station is not defined in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, the SSP logical display station is chosen by the system from a list of display stations that are defined in the SSP master configuration record that are not in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. Example 2 TFRM36 M36(\CURLIB/MYM36) WSID(W7) AUTOSIGNON(\YES) MENU(INV) LIB(INVAPPL) PRC(INVPREP) IGC(\NO) This command transfers the display device, on which it is run, to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named MYM36, located in the current library of the OS/400 job. The user of the display device is automatically signed on to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine if it is configured to allow automatic signons. If the machine does not allow automatic signon, the SSP signon display for that workstation appears.

| | |

The display device is assigned the M36 workstation identifier W7, if it is available for use by this display device. If it is not available, an error message is returned and the transfer request is refused.

|

If the user can be automatically signed on to workstation W7, the library INVAPPL will be the default library for the user's AS/400 Advanced 36 machine session. Additionally, the procedure INVPREP will be run before the user menu INV is shown on the user's display device. The user is not given an ideographic session. If the requested library, procedure, or menu for the TFRM36 command cannot be found, the System/36 signon display is shown and a message which identifies the error also appears on the signon display. The user has the option of correcting the error and signing on or pressing Cmd7 to return to OS/400. Example 3 TFRM36

14-4

M36(JOG/ADV36)

AUTOSIGNON(\NO)


Transferring to M36

This command transfers the display device, on which it is run, to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named ADV36, located in a library named JOG. The SSP workstation identifier that is assigned to the display device, is based on whether the display device is currently configured in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The user of the display device must sign on to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. | |

| | | | | |

For more information on this command, type the command on an OS/400 command line and press F1.

How to Allow for Automatic Sign-On If you decide you want to allow automatic sign-on, set up the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine as follows: 1. Stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.” 2. On an OS/400 command line, type

|

CHGM36 library-name/machine-name

|

where machine-name is the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and library-name is the name of the library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| | |

3. Press F4.

|

4. Change the Automatic sign-on field to *ENABLE.

|

5. Press Enter.

|

6. Start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| | |

For directions, see Chapter 15, “Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine” on page 15-1. 7. On an OS/400 command line, type

|

TFRM36 library-name/machine-name

|

where machine-name is the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and library-name is the name of the library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| | | | | | | |

| | | | |

8. Press F4. The Transfer to Machine (TFRM36) display appears. 9. Make sure the value in the automatic sign-on field is \YES. 10. Press Enter. Your display station is transferred to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and you are signed on to the machine.

Selecting the Correct User Profile When you transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC CL commands, most of the S/36 printed output that is sent to an OS/400 output queue is owned by the user's OS/400 user profile. However, in the case of the following:

|

Print key output

|

Printed output from jobs put on the JOBQ Chapter 14. Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

14-5

Transferring to M36

|

Printed output from evoked jobs

|

Printed output from NRT programs

|

Printed output from MRT procedures the output that goes to an OS/400 output queue is owned by the user profile associated with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Similar processing also applies when one of the above jobs executes a RUN400 OCL statement. The CL command executes under the user profile associated with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If you want all printed output and all your RUN400 OCL statement jobs to use your OS/400 user profile, you should change the SSP HOSTUPRF system value from OFF to ON. The default value is OFF. To change the SSP HOSTUPRF value to ON, use the CHGSYSVL procedure:

| | | | | | | |

CHGSYSVL HOSTUPRF,ON

|

This change remains in effect until the SSP HOSTUPRF system value is changed to OFF.

| |

Whether HOSTUPRF is ON or OFF, the M36 server job opens the output queue and executes the RUN400 CL command for the type of jobs listed in this topic. The M36 server job might have a different library list or other job attributes than those of the job which executed the TFRM36 or STRM36PRC command.

| | | |

For more information on the SSP HOSTUPRF system value, see the General Information for SSP Operating System book, SC21-8299.

| |

Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using the STRM36PRC Command The Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Procedure (STRM36PRC) CL command transfers control from an OS/400 job to the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and runs the specified SSP procedure. Control returns to OS/400 when the SSP procedure ends. There are certain restrictions you should be aware of when using the STRM36PRC command. For information on the restrictions, see “Restrictions on Transfers using the TFRM36 and STRM36PRC Commands” on page 14-1. For more information on the STRM36PRC command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Using the STRM36PRC Command 1. On an OS/400 command line or in a CL source program, type STRM36PRC 2. Press F4. 3. Type values in the fields that apply. 4. Press Enter.

14-6


Transferring to M36

Running an SSP Procedure from OS/400 — Examples Example 1 The following example runs an SSP procedure named CATALOG on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named PARENTIS. STRM36PRC

M36(PARENTIS)

PRC(CATALOG)

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine first checks for the procedure in the default session library identified in the user's SSP user profile. If the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine does not find the procedure in the default session library, SSP automatically searches the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine system library (#LIBRARY). No parameters are passed to the procedure. Example 2 The following example shows how to run an SSP procedure and pass parameters. STRM36PRC M36(JML/CLASSOF96) PRC(TRNSCRPT) CURLIB(STUDENTS) PARM('LIST,ALL') IGC(\NO) This command runs an SSP procedure named TRNSCRPT on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named CLASSOF96, located in a library named JML. First, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine checks for the procedure in a library named STUDENTS because this was specified as the current library for the procedure. If the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine does not find the procedure in the specified library, SSP automatically searches the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine system library (#LIBRARY). If the PRC or CURLIB values are not found, an error message is returned to OS/400 and the STRM36PRC command is not successful. The positional parameters LIST and ALL are passed to the procedure. Any system messages or displays that are shown use single-byte characters only. |

Note: Positional parameters (such as LIST and ALL) must be typed in upper case. To find out more about what you can do with the STRM36PRC CL command, type the command on an OS/400 command line and press F1.

Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine using STRPASTHR The Start Pass-Through (STRPASTHR) command allows you to pass through to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine where you can sign on as if you were attached locally. The display device where STRPASTHR was run is the display that is transferred to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. In order to use the STRPASTHR command: The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine you are passing through to must be STARTED. If the STATUS of the machine is STARTED, the transfer request proceeds immediately. If the machine STATUS is something other than STARTED, the transfer fails. The STATUS of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine can be found by using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (WRKM36) CL command. For more information on the WRKM36 CL command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Chapter 14. Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

14-7

Transferring to M36

ILAN communications must be set up. For directions on setting up ILAN, see Chapter 4 in the Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377. For more information on the STRPASTHR command, see CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Running the STRPASTHR command: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type STRPASTHR 2. Press F4. 3. Type values in the fields that apply. 4. Press Enter.

Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using the STRPASTHR Command — Examples Example 1 — Pass Through to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine On an OS/400 command line, type: STRPASTHR RMTLOCNAME(IBMM36ð1) This command specifies a pass-through to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine at a location of IBMM36ð1. The defaults for all the other parameters are used. When the pass-through has completed, an SSP sign-on display will appear at the display device on which the STRPASTHR command was typed. Example 2 — Pass Through and Automatically Sign on to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine On an OS/400 command line, type: STRPASTHR RMTLOCNAME(IBMM36ð1) RMTUSER(USER1) RMTPWD(X1T4) This command specifies a pass-through to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine at a location of IBMM36ð1. A user ID of USER1 and password of X1T4 are passed to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The defaults for the other parameters are used. If USER1 is authorized to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and has enabled the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for automatic sign on, an SSP command display appears on the display where the STRPASTHR command was typed. For more information on using STRPASTHR, see “Using Display Station PassThrough” on page 29-15.

14-8


SSP for the OS/400 Operator Chapter 15. Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Command line Requirements for Using the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command Using the IPL Type (IPLTYPE) Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the User Profile (USRPRF) Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Apply AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (APYM36CFG) Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine — Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Automatically How To Change a Configuration for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine That Starts Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Customized IPL Start-Up Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample QSYS/QSTRUP Start-up Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-1 15-1 15-1 15-2 15-2

Chapter 16. Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State . . . . . . Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the SSP System Console Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

16-1 16-1 16-2

. .

16-3

. . . .

Chapter 17. Operating the SSP Console and SSP Subconsoles . . . . The SSP Console: A Way of Controlling the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine The SSP Subconsole: A Way of Controlling SSP Printers . . . . . . . . . . Transferring the SSP Console Function to an Alternative SSP Console . . Transferring the SSP Console Function During an Attended IPL . . . . . Transferring the SSP Console Function When the SSP Console Is in Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring the SSP Console Function to an Alternative SSP Console When the Console Is in Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making an Alternative SSP Console the SSP Console . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring the SSP Console Function When the SSP Console Is Not in Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the SSP Console Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requesting a Help Menu from the SSP Console Display . . . . . . . . . Using the Subconsole Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requesting a Help Menu from the Subconsole Display . . . . . . . . . .

15-5 15-5 15-7

.

17-1 17-1 17-1 17-2 17-2

.

17-3

.

17-3 17-3

. . .

. . . . . .

Chapter 18. Handling SSP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How You Know That You Have an SSP Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of SSP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages That Instruct You to Perform an Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Messages That Require a Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Information for a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Informational Messages at the SSP Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying That Informational Messages Are Not to Be Displayed at the SSP Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole . . . . . . . . Replying to SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole . . . . . . . . Replying to Messages - Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending SSP Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

15-3 15-4 15-5

17-4 17-4 17-5 17-5 17-6 18-1 18-1 18-2 18-2 18-2 18-5 18-5 18-6 18-6 18-7 18-8 18-9

Using the MSG Control Command to Send an SSP Message Using the MSG OCL Statement to Send an SSP Message . Using the OFCMSG Procedure to Send a Message . . . . . SSP Keyboard Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Reset Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Keyboard Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 19. Using SSP Commands and Procedures to Do Tasks Using Help for Commands and Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When You Know the Name of a Command or a Procedure . . . . When You Do Not Know the Name of a Command or a Procedure

| |

Chapter 20. Printing with SSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spooled Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding SSP Printer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using SSP Help Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Work with Spool File (WRKSPL) Command . . . . . Managing Printer Output — Command Summary . . . . . . . . . Managing Printer Output — Complete Details . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Printer Output with a Control Command . . . . . . . Changing Printer Output with an Option from a Menu . . . . . Changing Printer Output with an Option from a Display . . . . Holding Printer Output Using a Control Command . . . . . . . Holding Printer Output Using an Option from a Menu . . . . . Holding Printer Output Using an Option from a Display . . . . Releasing Printer Output Using a Control Command . . . . . . Releasing Printer Output Using an Option from a Menu . . . . Releasing Printer Output Using an Option from a Display . . . Deleting Printer Output Using a Control Command . . . . . . . Deleting Printer Output Using an Option from a Menu . . . . . Deleting Printer Output Using an Option from a Display . . . . Copying Printer Output Using a Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Printer Output Using an Option from a Display . . . . Displaying Printer Output Using an Option from a Display . . Balancing Spooled Output Between Printers Using a Procedure Working with Spool Writers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a Spool Writer Using a Control Command . . . . . . . Starting a Spool Writer Using an Option from a Menu . . . . . Stopping a Spool Writer Using a Control Command . . . . . . Stopping a Spool Writer Using an Option from a Menu . . . . Restarting a Spool Writer Using a Control Command . . . . . Restarting a Spool Writer Using an Option from a Menu . . . Assign a Printer as the System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Printed Output — Selected Examples . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Printer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 21. Working with SSP Subsystems Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSP Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OS/400 Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting an SSP Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . AS/400 Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems R7.5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18-9 18-10 18-10 18-10 18-10 18-11 19-1 19-1 19-1 19-4 20-1 20-1 20-1 20-1 20-1 20-2 20-2 20-2 20-3 20-3 20-4 20-4 20-4 20-4 20-4 20-4 20-4 20-5 20-5 20-5 20-5 20-5 20-5 20-5 20-5 20-6 20-6 20-6 20-7 20-7 20-7 20-7 20-7 20-8 20-8 20-8 21-1 21-1 21-1 21-1 21-2

Ending an SSP Subsystem . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Status of an SSP Subsystem Chapter 22. SSP Security Password Security . . . . . Menu Security . . . . . . . . Badge Security . . . . . . . Communications Security . Resource Security . . . . . Working with SSP Security

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 23. Controlling SSP Jobs Working With Current Running Jobs Working with the History File . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24. Working with SSP Devices and Communications Displaying and Changing Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Local Device Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Communications Lines and Controllers . . . . . . . . . Configuring Remote Communications Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 25. Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving and Restoring an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Object and Configuration Object Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Object and Configuration Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving and Restoring the SSP Operating System, Licensed Programs, and Other SSP System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing Tapes to Save the SSP Operating System, Licensed Program Product and Other SSP System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the SSP Operating System Using the SAVELIBR Procedure Saving the Licensed Program Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Licensed Program Products Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Procedure to Save Licensed Program Products . . . . . . . Saving the Licensed Program Products Using a Previously Created Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Other SSP System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Other SSP System Files Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Procedure to Save Other SSP System Files . . . . . . . . Saving the Other SSP System Files Using a Previously Created Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the SSP Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Restore Library Procedure to Restore the SSP Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the SSP Operating System Using the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Licensed Program Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Licensed Program Products Interactively . . . . . . . . . Creating a Procedure to Restore Licensed Program Products . . . . . Restoring the Licensed Program Products from a Previously Created Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21-2 21-2 22-1 22-1 22-1 22-2 22-2 22-3 22-3 23-1 23-2 23-2 24-1 24-1 24-1 24-1 24-1

25-1 25-1 25-1 25-1 25-2 25-2 25-2 25-2 25-3 25-3 25-5 25-7 25-8 25-12 25-13 25-16 25-18 25-18 25-19 25-21 25-24 25-25 25-27 25-29

SSP for the OS/400 Operator

Restoring the Other SSP System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the Other SSP System Files Interactively . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Procedure to Restore the Other Saved SSP System Files Restoring the Other SSP System Files from a Previously Created Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

| | | | |

Chapter 26. Working with SSP Program Temporary Fixes . . . . . AS/400 Advanced 36 Program Maintenance Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . Preventative Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cumulative PTF Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrective Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrective Service SSP PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering SSP PTFs and PTF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying or Printing Cumulative PTF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Cumulative SSP PTF Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corrective SSP PTFs (Patches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing Corrective SSP PTFs from CD-ROM or Tape . . . . . . . . Installing Corrective SSP PTFs That Were Sent Electronically . . . . Getting Electronic Customer Support Up and Running . . . . . . . Getting ILAN Up and Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using DDM for PTFs Sent Electronically from the OS/400 operating system to the SSP operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing SSP PTFs That Were Sent Electronically Installing a Saved PTF That Was Sent Electronically . . . . . . . . Displaying or Printing Corrective SSP PTF Information . . . . . . . . Removing Corrective SSP PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping the TC Device ID to the CD-ROM Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What to Do if the Mapping Failed Changing the TC Device ID Back to a Tape Cartridge Drive . . . . . . . Chapter 27. Establishing a Communications Link for Remote Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Remote Work Station Support Establishing the Communications Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending the Communications Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


.

25-32 25-33 25-35

.

25-37

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26-1 26-1 26-1 26-1 26-2 26-2 26-3 26-3 26-5 26-5 26-5 26-7 26-7 26-7 26-7 26-9 26-9 26-13 26-14 26-15 26-16 26-17 26-17

27-1 27-1 27-1 27-2

Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

Chapter 15. Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Although the commands you use to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine are OS/400 commands, directions for starting your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are in this chapter since you cannot use SSP without starting the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions on using SSP sign-on displays, see Chapter 2 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297.

Starting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Command line You use the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (STRM36) command to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The STRM36 command starts an existing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine as a guest of the OS/400 operating system. Essentially, an IPL of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is performed. You can either type the command and the appropriate parameters on an OS/400 command line or you can type the command and press F4. After you press F4, you can get information on all of the parameters by positioning the cursor on a parameter and pressing F1. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine must already be created. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine contains a copy of the last applied AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. If you want to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, use the Create AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (CRTM36CFG) command. For more information on the CRTM36CFG command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Requirements for Using the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command If the SSP needs to be loaded onto the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, as would be the case if the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine was just created, then IPLTYPE is a required parameter. Specify the device in which media (a diskette, tape or CD-ROM) that contains the SSP operating system is loaded. If an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration has never been applied to the machine, and the machine was not created through a conversion of a 236/436 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine definition to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, then APYM36CFG is a required parameter.


15-1


Using the IPL Type (IPLTYPE) Parameter This parameter specifies the type of IPL to perform and the device from which it is performed. You can specify any of the following keywords for the parameter: *M36

This is the default. This specifies to use the type of IPL (attended or unattended) defined in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

*UNATTEND

An unattended IPL is performed from the fixed disk of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. In an unattended IPL, the system operator cannot sign on either to change the system date and time, or to specify IPL overrides.

*ATTEND

An attended IPL is performed from the fixed disk of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. In an attended IPL, the system operator must sign on to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The system date and time of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine can be changed and IPL overrides can be specified.

*I1

An attended IPL is performed from the diskette drive. For directions on defining a diskette drive, see “Defining a Diskette Device” on page 31-8.

*T1

An attended IPL is performed from the media drive defined for T1. For directions on defining a media drive, see “Defining a Tape or CD-ROM Device” on page 31-10.

*T2

An attended IPL is performed from the media drive defined for T2. For directions on defining a media drive, see “Defining a Tape or CD-ROM Device” on page 31-10.

*TC

An attended IPL is performed from the media drive defined for TC. For directions on defining a media drive, see “Defining a Tape or CD-ROM Device” on page 31-10.

device-name

Specify the name of the OS/400 device description from which you want to IPL. An attended IPL is performed from the drive by that name.

For information on how the IPLTYPE parameter affects the starting of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see Figure 15-1 on page 15-4.

Using the User Profile (USRPRF) Parameter This parameter controls the OS/400 job attributes and the authority available to the AS/400 Advanced 36 server job. For information on AS/400 Advanced 36 server jobs, see “Understanding Server Jobs” on page C-1. If you sign on to an SSP display station that was automatically acquired by the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine or run an SSP batch job and: You use the RUN400 OCL statement, the job runs under the USRPRF user profile. You send printed output to an OS/400 output queue, the printed output belongs to the USRPRF user ID instead of your user ID. The possible values you can specify for the USRPRF parameter are: *M36

15-2

This is the default. This specifies to use the user profile defined in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.



user-profile-name Specify the name of the user profile to use. For information on how the USRPRF parameter affects the starting of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see Figure 15-1 on page 15-4.

Using the Apply AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (APYM36CFG) Parameter The APYM36CFG parameter specifies which AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration to apply to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine before the machine is started. Note: After you change an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration with the Change AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) command, you must use the APYM36CFG parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the changes to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this. For more information on using the CHGM36CFG command, see Chapter 31, “Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration.” The possible values you can specify for the APYM36CFG parameter are: configuration-object-name Specify the name of an existing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. The name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration can be qualified by one of the following library values: *LIBL


*CURLIB The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the current library for the job, the QGPL library is searched. library-name Specify the name of the library to be searched. For information on how the APYM36CFG parameter affects the starting of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see Figure 15-1.

Chapter 15. Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

15-3


Advanced 36 Machine Object

STRM36 USRPRF (user profile) STRM36 IPLTYPE (IPL type)

Temporary USRPRF

IPLTYPE

STRM36 USRPRF(*M36) IPLTYPE(*M36)

CRTM36CFG or CHGM36CFG

Applied Advanced 36 Machine Configuration

Advanced 36 Machine Configuration Object

1. Attributes

1. Attributes: IPLTYPE and USRPRF

2. Display and printer devices

2. Display and printer devices 3. Display and printer device attributes 4. Tape and optical devices 5. Diskette devices 6. Communication lines

STRM36 APLYM36CFG (config name)

3. Display and printer device attributes 4. Tape and optical devices 5. Diskette devices 6. Communication lines Overwrite at IPL Temporary Advanced 36 Machine Configuration 1. Attributes 2. Display and printer devices 3. Display and printer device attributes

CHGSYSVL DEVMAP (SSP procedure)

4. Tape and optical devices 5. Diskette devices 6. Communication lines RV3P219-0

Figure 15-1. How the STRM36 Parameters Affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine — Examples Example 1 STRM36

M36(ADV36M)

This command performs an IPL of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named ADV36M that is located through the library list of the OS/400's job in which the STRM36 command is run. The IPL type and user profile are taken from the configuration last applied to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You can display the current IPL type and user profile by using the Display AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (DSPM36) command. For information on using this command, see “Displaying a Machine” on page 32-2. If you want the default values to be different than those stored in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, change the IPL type and user profile values as follows: 1. Use the Change AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) command to change the IPL type and user profile in the machine configuration. Note: You can use the DSPM36 command to determine the name of the last machine configuration object that was applied to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. Stop the machine. For directions, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.” 3. Start the machine again using the APYM36CFG parameter on the STRM36 command to apply that machine configuration to the machine. Example 2

15-4



STRM36 M36(MYLIB/ADVM36) IPLTYPE(\TC) APYM36CFG(MYLIB/MYM36CFG)

USRPRF(QUSER)

Note: This is an example of how to load or reload #LIBRARY because of changes to the IPLTYPE parameter. This command performs an IPL of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named ADVM36 that is located in the library named MYLIB. The IPL is performed from the media drive configured for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine as the tape cartridge (TC) drive. The IBM-defined user profile QUSER is used to define the OS/400 default authority and job attributes of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration named MYM36CFG which is located in the library named MYLIB is applied to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Starting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Automatically If you want your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines to start up automatically when you IPL your AS/400 system, you need to create a customized start-up program. For directions, see “Creating a Customized IPL Start-Up Program” on page 15-5.

How To Change a Configuration for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine That Starts Automatically Any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine you automatically start will always use the configuration information contained in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You may need to apply a new configuration at some time in the future in order to change the: User profile for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Devices used by the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Type of IPL that is done when the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started. Because the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is always active if you start it automatically, in order to apply changes to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you must: 1. Stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.” | |

2. To apply the changed configuration, start the machine using the STRM36 command while specifying the APYM36CFG parameter. You can use the USRPRF and IPLTYPE parameters on the STRM36 command to temporarily change the user profile or the type of IPL. The next time you do an IPL of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine without specifying these parameters, the values in the machine configuration are used.

Creating a Customized IPL Start-Up Program To change the IPL start-up program, complete the following steps from an OS/400 command prompt unless directed otherwise: 1. If you do not already have an editor installed with which you can edit a source member, install an editor. If you choose to install the PW1 licensed program (5716-PW1), see the Software Installation book, SC41-4120, for instructions. 2. If you do not already have a file in which to store your start-up program, create one as follows: Chapter 15. Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

15-5


a. Type CRTLIB yourlib where yourlib is the name of the library in which you want to store the start-up program source member. b. Press Enter. 3. If you do not already have a file in which to store your start-up program source member, create one as follows: a. Type CRTSRCPF yourlib/yourfile where yourlib is the name of the library in which you want to store the start-up program source member and yourfile is the name of the file in which you want to store your start-up program source. b. Press Enter. 4. Retrieve the shipped IPL start-up program source into your own source file as follows: a. Type RTVCLSRC PGM(QSYS/QSTRUP) SRCFILE(yourlib/yourfile) Where yourlib is the name of the library in which you want to store the start-up program source member and yourfile is the name of the file in which you want to store your start-up program source. b. Press Enter. 5. You need to add the following lines to your start-up program source file. QSYS/STRM36 library-name/machine-name MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) where library-name is the name of the library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and machine-name is the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine you want to start automatically. Notes: a. The number .1/, shown in reverse highlighting in Figure 15-2 on page 15-8, indicates where to add the lines to the sample start-up program to start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine automatically. b. Repeat step 5 on page 15-6 for each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to start automatically. 6. Create your customized start-up program: a. Type CRTCLPGM b. Press F4. c. In the Program field, type yourpgm where yourpgm is the name of your program. d. In the first library field, type the library name you used for yourlib. e. In the Source file field, type the name you used for yourfile.

15-6



f. In the second library field, type the library name you used for yourlib. g. In the Source member field, type QSTRUP h. Press Enter. 7. Define the start-up program at IPL time to be your customized start-up program: a. Type CHGSYSVAL b. Press F4. 8. In the System value field, type QSTRUPPGM 9. In the New value field, type yourpgm yourlib where yourpgm is the name of your program and yourlib is the name of the library where you stored your start-up program. 10. Press Enter.

Sample QSYS/QSTRUP Start-up Program Figure 15-2 on page 15-8 shows the source for a CL program highlighted with the changes you make. The changed start-up program resides on OS/400. You will add two lines where .1/ is shown in reverse highlighting in Figure 15-2 on page 15-8. You replace library-name with the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine resides, and you replace machine-name with the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to start. You can add additional lines for your other AS/400 Advanced 36 machines.


15-7


Figure 15-2. Example of Modified QSYS/QSTRUP Startup Program. This example program starts a single AS/400 Advanced 36 machine whenever the AS/400 is IPLed. SEQNBR\... ... 1 ... ... 2 ... ... 3 ... ... 4 ... ... 5 ... ... 6 ... ... 7 ... ... 8 1ðð /\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\/ 2ðð /\ \/ 3ðð /\5716SS1 V3R6Mð 951222 RTVCLSRC Output ð4/ð1/96 14:ð3:47 \/ 4ðð /\ \/ 5ðð /\ Program name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSTRUP PN\/ 6ðð /\ Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSYS PL\/ 7ðð /\ Original source file . . . . . . . . . . : SN\/ 8ðð /\ Library name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : SL\/ 9ðð /\ Original source member . . . . . . . . . : SM\/ 1ððð /\ Source File change \/ 11ðð /\ date/time SC\/ 12ðð /\ Patch option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : \NOPATCH PO\/ 13ðð /\ User profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : \USER UP\/ 14ðð /\ Text . . . : TX\/ 15ðð /\ Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : QSYS OW\/ 16ðð /\ Patch change ID . . . . . . . . . . . . : PC\/ 17ðð /\ Patch APAR ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . : PA\/ 18ðð /\ User mod flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . : \NO UM\/ 19ðð /\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\/ 2ððð PGM 21ðð DCL VAR(&STRWTRS) TYPE(\CHAR) LEN(1) 22ðð DCL VAR(&CTLSBSD) TYPE(\CHAR) LEN(2ð) 23ðð DCL VAR(&CPYR) TYPE(\CHAR) LEN(9ð) VALUE('+ 24ðð 5716-SS1 (C) COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 198ð, 1995. + 25ðð LICENSED MATERIAL - PROGRAM PROPERTY OF IBM') 26ðð 27ðð QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSPL) 28ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 29ðð 3ððð QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36MRT) 31ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 32ðð 33ðð QSYS/RLSJOBQ JOBQ(QGPL/QS36EVOKE) 34ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 35ðð 36ðð QSYS/STRCLNUP 37ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 38ðð 39ðð 4ððð QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QCTLSBSD) RTNVAR(&CTLSBSD) 41ðð IF ((&CTLSBSD \NE 'QCTL QSYS ') + 42ðð \AND (&CTLSBSD \NE 'QCTL QGPL ')) GOTO DONE 43ðð 44ðð QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QINTER) 45ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 46ðð 47ðð QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QBATCH) 48ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 49ðð 5ððð QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QCMN) 51ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 52ðð 53ðð QSYS/STRSBS SBSD(QSERVER) 54ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 55ðð 56ðð 57ðð 58ðð 59ðð DONE: 6ððð .1/ QSYS/STRM36 library-name/machine-name 61ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 62ðð 63ðð QSYS/RTVSYSVAL SYSVAL(QSTRPRTWTR) RTNVAR(&STRWTRS) 64ðð IF (&STRWTRS = 'ð') GOTO NOWTRS 65ðð 66ðð CALL PGM(QSYS/QWCSWTRS) 67ðð MONMSG MSGID(CPFðððð) 68ðð 69ðð NOWTRS: 7ððð RETURN 71ðð CHGVAR VAR(&CPYR) VALUE(&CPYR) 72ðð /\ Needed to include CPYR variable in program. \/ 73ðð ENDPGM

15-8



For information on automatically starting ILAN communications, see “Automatically Starting ILAN Communications” on page 29-6. For information on manually starting ILAN communications, see “Manually Starting the ILAN” on page 29-3.


15-9


15-10


Stopping SSP

Chapter 16. Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine This chapter describes the steps that you can use to stop your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You should always use the SSP POWER OFF command to stop your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines. If the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is stopped in any other way: Jobs running in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine will not end normally. Opened files on the AS/400 Advanced 36 disk will not close normally and might be in an unknown condition. This chapter discusses how to: Send a message to all users informing them what is about to happen. Put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state. Stop an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine from the SSP system console under normal circumstances. Stop an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine from the OS/400 operating system only when you cannot stop it normally from the SSP system console.

Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State Certain operations, such as stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, require the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to be in a dedicated state. Note: The following steps refer to the SSP command display and the SSP console display. The SSP command display is the display where an operator can display or send messages and use control commands and procedures to start and control jobs. The SSP console display is a display that can only be requested from the SSP system console. From this display, the operator can control the operation of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on the SSP command display and the SSP console display and how to switch between the two, see “Using the SSP Console Display” on page 17-4. To put an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state: 1. Ensure that all users are signed off except for the user ID signed on to the SSP system console. a. Send a message to all users to inform them that you are going to put the system in a dedicated state: 1) On the command display of the SSP system console, type: MSG ALL, SYSTEM BEING PLACED IN DEDICATED STATE, PLEASE SIGN OFF NOW 2) Press Enter. Review any replies sent by the users. A critical job may need to be completed before you stop the system. b. Verify that all users have signed off the system: 1) On the command display of the SSP system console, type STATUS WORKSTN  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

16-1

Stopping SSP

Or, D W 2) Press Enter. c. If users are still signed on, you can send them another message or use option 9 (Cancel a session) on the DEVICES menu to sign off the user. d. If you used option 9 to cancel a session, press Cmd3. e. Press Cmd3 again to end the display. 2. On the SSP console display, type: STOP SYSTEM (or P S) 3. Press Enter. You will immediately receive the following message at the system console: SYS-5676 STOP SYSTEM command in progress. After a few minutes the following message should be shown at the system console: SYS-5677 STOP SYSTEM command has completed. 4. If the SYS-5677 message is not shown, a. On the SSP console display, type START SYSTEM (or S S) b. Press Enter. c. Go to Appendix E, “Preparing SSP for Dedicated State” on page E-1, and perform the steps defined there. 5. When the following message is shown: SYS-5677 STOP SYSTEM command has completed the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in a dedicated state.

Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the SSP System Console This is the preferred method for stopping the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 1. Put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state. For directions, see “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. 2. Type the following command on the SSP console display: POWER OFF 3. The Message POWER OFF command successful should be shown at the SSP console display. A few minutes later the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine ends. Each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine should be stopped in this way before you power down or IPL the AS/400 system.

16-2


Stopping SSP

Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Operating System | |

The End AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (ENDM36) CL command can be used to abnormally stop an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Important Note You should only use the ENDM36 command if you cannot stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine from the SSP console using the POWER OFF command. When you use the ENDM36 command to stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: Jobs running in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine will not end normally. Opened files on the AS/400 Advanced 36 disk will not close normally and might be in an unknown condition.

The ENDM36 command ends (stops) the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine immediately. To use the ENDM36 command: 1. On any OS/400 command line, type ENDM36 2. Press F4 to show the prompt display for the command. 3. In the Machine field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to end. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, *LIBL if your library list is to be searched for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine or *CURLIB if the current library is to be searched for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 5. In the Dump the machine field, type \YES Specifying *YES in the Dump the machine field, prior to ending the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, causes the OS/400 operating system to attempt to dump the contents of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to disk. A message is sent to the QSYSOPR message queue. The message indicates whether the dump was successful. If the dump was created, the message tells you the type of object the dump was written to, the name of the object and the library the object is located in. You can use either the OS/400 Dump Object (DMPOBJ) command or the OS/400 Dump System Object (DMPSYSOBJ) command to copy the dump to a spool file for viewing or printing. You can use the OS/400 Save Object (SAVOBJ) command to save the object that contains the dump to tape, diskette or a *SAVF. If you call your service representative to report the problem, this dump will be very helpful in solving the problem. 6. Press Enter. The Confirm End of Machine display is shown.

Chapter 16. Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine

16-3

Stopping SSP

7. Press Enter. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is ended. Two examples of using the ENDM36 command are as follows: Example 1 ENDM36

M36(MYM36)

This command immediately ends an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine which is named MYM36, located through the library list of the OS/400 job in which the command is run. A main storage dump of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is not generated because the default is *NO. Example 2 ENDM36

M36(MYLIB/MYM36)

DUMP(\YES)

This command immediately ends an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named MYM36, located in a library named MYLIB. A main storage dump of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is generated while the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is ending.

16-4


Using SSP Console, Subconsoles

Chapter 17. Operating the SSP Console and SSP Subconsoles This chapter describes how to use the SSP console and SSP subconsole after you sign on. You can: Transfer the SSP console function to an alternative SSP console (CONSOLE GIVE control command and CONSOLE TAKE control command). Use the SSP subconsole display station. Use the SSP console display station. For information about the differences among data displays, command displays, subconsole displays, and console displays, refer to the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209.

The SSP Console: A Way of Controlling the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine An SSP console, like other display stations, is made up of a keyboard and a display. Using the keyboard and display, the SSP console operator can enter information into and retrieve information from the system. However, in addition to this, you can also monitor and control system activity, because during system configuration, this display station was selected to serve as the SSP console. As an SSP console operator, you can: Use it as a data display station that is controlled by a program Use it as an SSP console to: – Control all jobs entered at all display stations. – Control all printers from this display station. – Control all jobs on the system. – Control the entire operation of the system. You can also transfer control of the SSP console to someone else's command display station or SSP subconsole, provided their display station was configured as an alternative SSP console. For example, you may want to do this if you are planning to be out of the office for a while. For more information about transferring the control of the SSP console to an alternative SSP console, refer to “Transferring the SSP Console Function to an Alternative SSP Console” on page 17-2.

The SSP Subconsole: A Way of Controlling SSP Printers During system configuration, you may have had one or more display stations configured as an SSP subconsole. An SSP subconsole operator may then use the SSP subconsole: As a data display station controlled by a program. As a command display station to control jobs entered at this display station. As an SSP subconsole to control one or more printers from this display station.


17-1


For more information about data display stations and command display stations, refer to the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209.

Transferring the SSP Console Function to an Alternative SSP Console The SSP console and the alternative SSP consoles are specified during system configuration. You can transfer the SSP console function to an alternative SSP console: During an attended IPL. If you are using the SSP console, and you find it necessary to leave the SSP console (you may want another operator to control the system in your absence). If the SSP console does not work.

Transferring the SSP Console Function During an Attended IPL Turn on the display station that was specified as an alternative SSP console and is to become the SSP console. The following message .A/ appears:

à@

ð

IPL

IPL is in progress. CONSOLE .B/

please wait. .A/

á

ñ

1. Type CONSOLE as shown in .B/. 2. Press Enter. The IPL Sign On display is shown. 3. Complete the IPL Sign On display. 4. Press Enter. The workstation can now be operated as the SSP console.

17-2



Transferring the SSP Console Function When the SSP Console Is in Operation To transfer the SSP console function to an alternative SSP console, the CONSOLE GIVE command must be entered at the SSP console and the CONSOLE TAKE (or CONSOLE) command must be entered at an alternative SSP console. Note: If the CONSOLE GIVE command is entered at the SSP console and then the CONSOLE TAKE command is entered at the SSP console, the CONSOLE GIVE command is canceled.

Transferring the SSP Console Function to an Alternative SSP Console When the Console Is in Operation 1. At the SSP console, on either a Command display or a Console display, type CONSOLE GIVE 2. Press the Help key. The Status Work Station display is shown. 3. Type the ID of the display station that was specified as an alternative SSP console and is to become the SSP console. The ID is shown in the WS-ID column, and the alternative SSP console (Alt Console) is shown in the TYPE column. Note: If you do not type the ID, any display station that was defined as an alternative SSP console during system configuration can become the SSP console. 4. Press Enter.

Making an Alternative SSP Console the SSP Console To have an alternative SSP console become the SSP console, use a command display at the alternative SSP console. For this example, the Main System Help menu is used. 1. On a command display at an alternative SSP console, type CONSOLE Or, CONSOLE TAKE Note: If a display station ID was entered with the CONSOLE GIVE command at the SSP console, only the alternative SSP console with that display station ID can be used to enter the CONSOLE or CONSOLE TAKE command. If a display station ID was not entered with the CONSOLE GIVE command at the SSP console, any alternative SSP console can be used to enter the CONSOLE or CONSOLE TAKE command. 2. Press Enter. The SSP Console display is shown. Note: The SSP console function is transferred if a command display is used at the SSP console or if the SSP console is signed off, in error, or turned off.

Chapter 17. Operating the SSP Console and SSP Subconsoles

17-3


Transferring the SSP Console Function When the SSP Console Is Not in Operation When the SSP console does not work, type CONSOLE or CONSOLE TAKE on the command display at any alternative SSP console. The alternative SSP console can then operate as the SSP console. Note: If you have interrupted a job (Inquiry Options display), you cannot use the CONSOLE command. For more information about the Inquiry Options display, refer to the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209.

Using the SSP Console Display The SSP Console display can be displayed only at the display station designated as the SSP console. To request this display from a command display: 1. Press the System Request key documented in the user's guide for your workstation. A blank line is shown at the bottom of the display. 2. Press Enter with the input line blank. A display similar to the following SSP Console display is shown:

à@ SYSTEM

á

CONSOLE

W1

ð

ñ

You can use the SSP Console display to receive and send messages, and to enter all control commands except JOBQ, MENU, MODE, and OFF. The control commands enable you to control AS/400 Advanced 36 machine activity. You cannot use the SSP Console display, or any display that has the word CONSOLE in the upper-right corner or the lower-right corner, to enter procedure commands. These commands must be entered on a Command display. To return to a display after using the SSP Console display: 1. Press the System Request key documented in the user's guide for your workstation. A blank line is shown at the bottom of the display. 2. Press Enter with the input line blank.

17-4



You return to the original display.

Requesting a Help Menu from the SSP Console Display To request a help menu when the SSP Console display is shown, do as follows: Press Cmd5, or type HELP MAIN and press Enter to display the Main help menu. Type the name of a help menu and press the Help key. Type HELP, leave one space, and type the name of a help menu. Then, press Enter.

Using the Subconsole Display The Subconsole display can be displayed only at a display station that was configured as a subconsole (a display station that controls one or more printers). To request this display: 1. Press the System Request key documented in the user's guide for your workstation. A blank line is shown at the bottom of the display. 2. Press Enter with the input line blank. A display similar to the following Subconsole display is shown:

à@ SYSTEM

á

SUB CONSOLE

W2

ð

ñ

You can use the Subconsole display to receive and send messages, and to enter control commands except JOBQ, MENU, MODE, and OFF. You cannot enter control commands that are restricted to the system console, such as START SYSTEM and STOP SYSTEM. You may want to use this display to monitor system activity, respond to messages, or send messages when the SSP console is being repaired or replaced. You cannot use the Subconsole display, or any display that has the word SUBCONSOLE in the upper-right corner or the lower-right corner, to enter procedure commands. These commands must be entered on a command display.

Chapter 17. Operating the SSP Console and SSP Subconsoles

17-5


To return to a display after using the Subconsole display: 1. Press the System Request key documented in the user's guide for your workstation. A blank line is shown at the bottom of the display. 2. Press Enter with the input line blank. You return to the original display.

Requesting a Help Menu from the Subconsole Display To request a help menu when the Subconsole display is shown, do one of the following: Press Cmd5, or type HELP MAIN and press Enter, to display the Main help menu. Type the name of a help menu and press the Help key. Type HELP, leave one space, and type the name of a help menu. Then, press Enter.

17-6


SSP Messages

Chapter 18. Handling SSP Messages A message is a way for SSP operating system to communicate with you and for you to communicate with display station operators. This chapter contains information about: The kinds of messages that are displayed – Messages that instruct you to perform an action – Messages that require a response Displaying additional information for a message Informational messages at the SSP console Displaying messages that are waiting Displaying messages at the SSP console or subconsole

How You Know That You Have an SSP Message The following summarizes how you know that SSP or another operator has sent you a message: A blinking 4-digit number appears in the lower-left corner of your display, and the Input Inhibited light is on at your display station. You have a keyboard message waiting to be displayed. For information on keyboard errors, see “SSP Keyboard Error Messages” on page 18-10 or see “Displaying Keyboard Messages” in the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209. A message appears and an alarm may sound. A procedure that you are running displayed the message. For information on keyboard errors, see “SSP Keyboard Error Messages” on page 18-10 or see “Understanding the Kinds of Messages that Are Displayed” in the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209. An alarm sounds and the Message Waiting light is on at your display station. Another operator or a job that is running sent you a message. See “Displaying SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole” on page 18-6 in this book or “Displaying Messages that Are Waiting” in the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209. When you want to communicate with another display station operator, see “Sending SSP Messages” on page 18-9. When you want to display local or remote messages while in a Display Station Pass-Through session, see “Displaying Messages While in a Display Station PassThrough Session” in the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209.


18-1

SSP Messages

Types of SSP Messages When an alarm sounds and a message appears, or if there is no alarm but a message appears, the message may: Not require a response since it is an informational message Note: Informational messages are described later in this chapter. Instruct you to perform an action Require a response

Messages That Instruct You to Perform an Action SSP may display messages that instruct you to perform an action. For example: End of volume-insert next diskette Printer P1 is not ready To respond to these messages, perform the action that is required.

Messages That Require a Response SSP displays a message for various reasons. For example, you might use a command or a procedure that requests SSP to perform an action that is not allowed. When this happens, you need to enter a response to the message. The message has an identifier, options that you can enter, and text that explains the message. Following is an example of a message that requires a response:

A

B D

F

C

E

RTSP033-0

You can have SSP respond to some messages for you. This is called automatic response. For more information on automatic response, see “NOHALT Procedure” in the S/36 System Reference book, SC21-9020.

18-2


SSP Messages

The message identifier .A/ is 3- or 4-alphabetic characters followed by a dash and four numbers. Each message that has an identifier, other than USER, is described in a messages book. Figure 18-1 on page 18-3 shows the character code, the code meaning, and the manual where the messages are described: Figure 18-1. Character Codes and Meanings for Messages Code

Meaning

Book

ASM

Assembler

S/36 Assembler Messages book, SC21-7942

BAS

BASIC

S/36 BASIC Messages book, SC21-7943

BGU

Business graphics utilities

S/36 System Messages book, SC21-7938

CBL

COBOL

S/36 COBOL Messages book, SC21-7941

CGU

Character generator utility

S/36 Character Graphic Utility Guide (Japan only) book, SC09-1055

CNFG

Configuration


DDM

Distributed data management

S/36 Distributed Data Management Guide book, SC21-8011

DFU

Data file utility

S/36 Utilities Messages book, SC21-7939, General Information for SSP Operating System book, SC21-8299

DSNX

Distributed systems node executive

S/36 Communications and Systems Management Guide book, SC21-8010

EMU, ESU

3270 device emulation

S/36 3270 Device Emulation Messages book, SC21-7945

FORT

FORTRAN

S/36 FORTRAN IV Messages book, SC21-9055

FTS

File transfer subroutine

S/36 Using System/36 Communications book, SC21-9082

KBD

Keyboard


MIGR

Transition Aid

Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System, SC21-8297

NRD

Network resource directory

S/36 Distributed Data Management Guide book, SC21-8011

RJE

Remote job entry

S/36 Multiple Session Remote Job Entry Messages book, SC21-7944

RPG

RPG II

S/36 RPG II Messages book, SC21-7940 General Information for SSP Operating System book, SC21-8299

SDA

Screen design aid

S/36 Utilities Messages book, SC21-7939

SEU

Source entry utility


SORT

Sort program

System Messages–SSP Addendum book, SC21-8291

SRTX

IGC sort utility

S/36 Ideographic Sort Guide (Japan only) book, SC09-1054

SYS

System support program product

System Messages–SSP Addendum book, SC21-8291, General Information for SSP Operating System book, SC21-8299

VASP

Value-Added Software feature

Using Value-Added Software Package book, SC21-8368

WSU

Work station utility


The messages are listed in an ascending sequence within each book by the 4-digit number. This number is called a message identification code. The options .B/ you can use to respond to the message are shown within the parentheses. Each message shows only the options that are allowed. The following describes what generally happens when you select an option to respond to a message. Because each message has a different description, always refer to the Options part of each message description in the appropriate messages book for specific details.

Chapter 18. Handling SSP Messages

18-3

SSP Messages

Option 0: When you select this option, generally the error is ignored and the job continues. Option 1: When you select this option, generally the operation that caused the error is retried and you can continue the job. Option 2: When you select this option, generally the job step is ended. If this option ends the job step, the job continues with the next job step. Option 3: When you select this option, the job is canceled. Option D: This option is available when option 3 is displayed; however, option D is not displayed and is not described in the message description. When you select option D, the contents of main storage and System/36 Emulator control block storage are copied into the dump area on disk. SSP actions described for option 3 occur. Option H: This option is available when option 3 is displayed if you are using a help display. When you select this option, the display where you made the error is shown again. You can then correct the error and continue your job. The message text .C/. Three periods .D/ at the end of the message text indicate there is additional information that you can display for the message. If you press Enter or the Help key without typing an option number, the additional message information display is shown. Use the message identifier .A/ to refer to the message description in the appropriate messages book (see Figure 18-1 on page 18-3). For some problems, additional messages are sent to the SSP Console display that include an 8-character system reference code in the message text .C/. If you are unable to solve the problem, refer to the appropriate system problem determination book. If you need to call for service, record the system reference codes (SRCs) by pressing the Print key. Give the printout to your service representative. If you do not display the additional message information display, type your response on the entry line .F/ and press Enter. If you are using the Console display, you must respond to the message with the REPLY command, which is described later in this chapter.

18-4


SSP Messages

Additional Information for a Message Following is an example of an Additional Message Information display:

à@

ADDITIONAL MESSAGE INFORMATION

SYS-112ð Options (123) Dedicated program $CNDED

ð

W1

──┐ │ .G/ cannot be loaded now... │ ──┘

───┐ There are other programs or system tasks active at this time. │ Select option 1 to retry; the other programs and task may have ended. │ Select option 2 to end the job step; 3 to cancel the job. │ │ .H/ │ │ If more information is needed before responding to the message, │ refer to the appropriate messages book. ───┘ The allowed options are listed in parentheses. Option: .I/

á

ñ

Note: See Figure 18-1 on page 18-3 for information on which book is appropriate to use for information on the messages. The message .G/ is shown again. Additional information for the message .H/ is shown. Type an option number .I/. Press Enter to respond to the message.

Informational Messages at the SSP Console An informational message could be displayed at your display station by an SSP procedure or by a procedure that was written by a programmer. Note: Any type of message sent to the SSP Console is also logged to the History file. The following messages are examples of informational messages because they do not require you to enter a response: LISTLIBR procedure is running (LISTLIBR is an SSP operating system procedure). PAYROLL procedure is running (PAYROLL could be a procedure that was written by a programmer).


18-5

SSP Messages

Specifying That Informational Messages Are Not to Be Displayed at the SSP Console If you are using the SSP console, enter the INFOMSG NO command on a command display. Then, if you do not want to use the REPLY command to reply to informational messages when they appear at the console display: 1. Type INFOMSG NO (on the console display). 2. Press Enter. Notes: a. After you enter the INFOMSG NO command, informational messages that are responses to a command, such as CANCEL command successful, are displayed. An informational message such as Payroll procedure is running is not displayed. b. If an alarm sounds and no apparent message has been sent to the console display, the job that sent the message has ended and the message was removed. This happens if, during SSP configuration, the option to keep informational messages was not selected. c. After you have used the INFOMSG NO command to prevent most informational messages from being displayed, you can use the INFOMSG command to indicate that most informational messages are to be displayed.

Displaying SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole To display a message that was sent to the SSP Console display when you are using a command display or when you are running a job, switch to the SSP console display or a Subconsole display. To switch: 1. Press the System Request key documented in the user's guide for your workstation. A blank line is shown at the bottom of the display. 2. Press Enter with the input line left blank. A console or subconsole display is shown with the message displayed. To display messages when you are using the Console display, press Enter. If the Message Waiting indicator stays on, one of the following conditions applies: The display is full of messages that have not been replied to. See “Replying to SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole” on page 18-7. A job that is running may have displayed a message. Return to the command display.

18-6


SSP Messages

Replying to SSP Messages at the SSP Console or Subconsole The display you use when you reply to a message at the Console display and the Subconsole display contains a console roll area, message lines, and entry lines. Following is an example of a Console display:

à@

SYSTEM

ð1 \\ ð4

ð5

CONSOLE

───┐ │ │ Enter volume ID for output diskette │ S P │ START command successful │ SYS-14ð5 Options (ð12) │ .A/ Do you want spool separator pages on P1 ... │ 3,PMODS │ REPLY command successful │ 2 │ REPLY command successful │ SYS-9918 Options (ð ) │ Magnetic tape error, SCR 638ðCCð6... │ ───┘

ð

W1

PAYROLL is running

W3171143

.B/ __ .C/

á

ñ

The console roll area .A/ can contain messages sent from SSP or another operator, and information that you have entered on the Console display. When this area is full, the old (top) entries roll up and off the display and the new entries appear at the bottom of the display. Messages that require a reply, which you have not replied to, will not roll off the display. A message is displayed if the display is full of messages that you have not replied to. You must reply to some of the messages to get any new messages. If you do not reply to any of the messages, SSP saves the messages that are waiting to be displayed. The message lines .B/ contain the most recently displayed messages. The entry lines .C/ are two lines on which you type commands and reply to messages. After a message is displayed on the Console display or the Subconsole display, you can:

Reply to a message that has a reply ID. Reply to a message that has a reply ID and response options. Reply to all informational messages so they can be removed from the display. Clear the display of all messages that you have replied to.

A reply ID is a 2-digit number that appears in the first two columns on the left side of the display. After you reply to a message, the reply ID is replaced by two asterisks (**).


18-7

SSP Messages

Replying to Messages - Example Following is an example of messages displayed on the Console display, and how to reply to the messages:

à@

SYSTEM

ð1

PAYROLL is running .A/

\\

Enter volume ID for output diskette .C/ S P START command successful SYS-14ð5 Options (ð12) .B/ Do you want spool separator pages on P1 . . . 3,PMODS REPLY command successful ──┐ 2 │ .C/ REPLY command successful ──┘ SYS-9918 Options (ð ) .E/ Magnetic tape error, SCR 638ðCCð6....F/

ð4

ð5

CONSOLE

W1

ð

.D/ W3171143

á

ñ

Message .A/ is an informational message. No options are displayed. The message has a reply ID of 01. To reply to message 01, type one of the following: – REPLY 01 – R1 – 1 To reply to all informational messages that have a reply ID, type one of the following: – REPLY I – RI If you do not want informational messages to be displayed, use the INFOMSG NO command. See “Specifying That Informational Messages Are Not to Be Displayed” in the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209. Message .B/ (SYS-1405) has a reply ID of 04 and requires you to type an option (012) when you reply. The three periods (...) indicate there is additional information for this message. To reply to this message with a 1 option, type one of the following: – REPLY 04,1 – R 4,1 – 4,1 To display the additional information for this message, before you reply to it: 1. On the SSP command prompt, type

18-8


SSP Messages

4 (or ð4) 2. Press Enter. Possible options that could be displayed for a message and their meanings are explained in “Messages That Require a Response” on page 18-2. These messages .C/ are responses to messages or messages that do not require a response. To clear (remove from the display) these messages and messages that have been replied to, type one of the following: – REPLY C – RC This is the 8-character ID .D/ of the job that received this message. This field shows SYSTEM if a message was issued by an SSP function. Use the message identifier .E/ to refer to the message description in the appropriate messages book (see Figure 18-1 on page 18-3). For some problems, additional messages are sent to the SSP Console display that include an 8-character system reference code .F/ in the message text. If you are unable to solve the problem, refer to the appropriate system problem determination book. If you need to call for service, record the system reference codes (SRCs) by pressing the Print key. Give the printout to your service representative.

Sending SSP Messages There are three ways you can send SSP messages. MSG Control Command MSG OCL Statement OFCMSG Procedure

Using the MSG Control Command to Send an SSP Message The MSG Control Command can be used to send a message to The SSP console Another display station on the same AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Another display station operator on the same AS/400 Advanced 36 machine All display stations configured for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine A personal computer on an IBM Token-Ring Network that communicates with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine A user on another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which communications are set up A user on OS/400 for which communications are set up For example, you can use the MSG Control Command when you want to let everyone know you are going to power down the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Example MSG ALL,SYSTEM GOING DOWN IN 5 MINUTES, PLEASE SIGN OFF NOW


18-9

SSP Messages

This message was sent to all of the user IDs that were active on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Using the MSG OCL Statement to Send an SSP Message The MSG OCL statement is similar to the MSG Control Command. The MSG OCL Statement can be used to send a message to: The SSP console Another display station on the same AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Another display station operator on the same AS/400 Advanced 36 machine All display stations configured for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine A personal computer on an IBM Token-Ring Network that communicates with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine A user on another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which communications are set up A user on OS/400 for which communications are set up For example, you can use the MSG OCL Statement when you want to let everyone know you are taking the system down. Example On an SSP command line, type // MSG ALL,SYSTEM GOING DOWN IN 5 MINUTES, PLEASE SIGN OFF NOW When you press Enter, this message is sent to all of the user IDs signed on to any of the display stations currently signed on to that AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Using the OFCMSG Procedure to Send a Message The OFCMSG procedure allows you to send messages to more than one user or display station in an office environment. The user or display station can be locally attached or on another system. This is done interactively. Note: The OFCMSG procedure can only be used if Personal Services/36 is installed on your system.

SSP Keyboard Error Messages When you press the wrong keyboard keys by mistake, the computer simply stops and tells you what is wrong. The computer has locked up the keyboard so you cannot continue your task until you make the necessary correction.

Error Reset Key The Error Reset key (or Reset key) is used to unlock the keyboard from a keyboard error or an invalid answer to a prompt. The Error Reset key is also used to unlock the keyboard following the use of the Print key. After pressing the Error Reset key, you can type a valid answer to a prompt. The keyboard is now back to normal and you can continue with your task.

18-10


SSP Messages

Displaying Keyboard Messages If you have a blinking 4-digit number in the lower left corner of the display and the Input Inhibited light is on at your display station, you have a keyboard message waiting to be displayed. If you know the cause of the error, press the Error Reset key and enter the required data again. If you do not know the cause of the error, press the Help key. A message appears on the bottom line of the display. If you need an explanation of the message, refer to the S/36 System Messages book, SC21-7938. Then, take the recommended action to continue processing. Following is an example of a keyboard message: COMMAND

W4

Cmd3-Previous menu

Cmd5-Main help menu

Home-Sign on menu

Ready for command or procedure.

KBD-0009 This field requires numeric characters

RTSN017-0

Keyboard Message


18-11

SSP Messages

18-12


SSP Commands

Chapter 19. Using SSP Commands and Procedures to Do Tasks SSP Control Commands are used to control the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, the printers and the display stations. You can use the Help key or HELP procedure on Control Commands to find out more information about the commands. The Control Commands can be entered from the keyboard or selected by a menu option. They cannot be coded in a procedure. SSP Procedures are used to do various tasks on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine such as creating files, creating libraries, copying files and compiling programs. You can use the help key or HELP procedure on SSP procedures to find out more information about the SSP procedures.

Using Help for Commands and Procedures When you are signed on the system, you can use the help support to do a task. The help support is made up of menus, command displays, procedure displays, and help text. You can use help support when: You know the name of the command or procedure that does the task. You know the task you want to do, but you do not know the name of the command or procedure that does the task.

When You Know the Name of a Command or a Procedure Use the following steps when you know the name of the command or procedure that does the task. 1. Type the name of the command or procedure on the entry line of a command display. 2. Press the Help key. A menu, a command, or a procedure display is shown at your display station. This menu, command or procedure display enables you to do the task. Note: You can accomplish the same thing by typing HELP followed by the name of the command or procedure on the entry line of a command display and pressing Enter. 3. If a menu is shown, you can select an option to do a specific task. If there is another menu for the option and you press Cmd11, the name of the next menu for the option is shown on the right side of the menu options. To show that menu, type the menu name of the command line and press the Help key. If you press the Help key without typing anything, the help text for the menu that is currently on your display station is shown. 4. If a command is shown, you can run that command by pressing Enter. If you press the Help key again, the help text for the command that is on your display station is shown. If a procedure display is shown, you can type the necessary parameters on the prompt lines. Then, press Enter to perform the task described at the top of the procedure display. If you press the Help key again, the help text for the procedure display is shown.


19-1

SSP Commands

Example 1 Type HELP STATUS When you press Enter, the following STATUS menu is shown at your display station:

à@

STATUS

W1

ð

Display general status information Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1ð.

Spool file entries (PRT) Spool writer (WRT) Jobs on the job queue (JOBQ) Currently running jobs (USERS) Devices on the system (WORKSTN) System activity (SYSTASK) Session status (SESSION) Message at subconsoles (MESSAGE) Communications Full display status

Cmd3-Previous menu

Cmd5-Main help menu

SPOOLJOB SPOOL JOBQUEUE JOBS DEVICES SYSACT JOBENVR SUBCMSG COMMSTAT STATUSF Cmd7-End

Hone-Sign on menu

Ready for option number or command

á

ñ

Note: If you press Cmd11, the menu names are shown to the right of each menu option as they appear on this display. To display the status on a spool writer, do one of the following: Select option 2 and press Enter Type SPOOL and press the Help key. Type STATUS WRT on the command line and press Enter. The second parameter for the STATUS command is shown in parentheses next to the description of the specific status that can be displayed. If any of the listed actions are done, the Spool Writer Status display is shown at your display station. To display additional help text about displaying status, press the Help key. The help for the STATUS menu is displayed at your display station.

19-2


SSP Commands

Example 2 Type HELP POWER The following POWER command is shown at your display station:

à@

ð POWER OFF COMMAND Power off the system Press the Enter key to power down the system.

Cmd3-Previous menu

á

ñ

To power down the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, simply press Enter. To display additional help about the POWER command, press the Help key. Help for the POWER command is displayed at your display station.

Chapter 19. Using SSP Commands and Procedures to Do Tasks

19-3

SSP Commands

Example 3 Type HELP RENAME and press Enter. The following RENAME procedure display is shown at your display station:

à@

RENAME PROCEDURE

Optional-\

ð

Changes the name of an existing disk file, library or folder Current name of file, library or folder

. . . . . . . .

________

New name of file, library or folder

. . . . . . . . . .

________

Creation date of file to be renamed

. . . . . . . . . .

______

Cmd3-Previous menu

\

Cmd4-Put on job queue

á

ñ

To rename a file currently named FILEOLD to FILENEW, type FILEOLD on the first prompt line and FILENEW on the second prompt line. Then press Enter. To display additional help about the RENAME procedure, press the Help key. The help for the RENAME procedure will be shown at your display station. For more information about help support, see “Help for Commands and Procedures” in the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209.

When You Do Not Know the Name of a Command or a Procedure Use the following steps when you do not know the name of the command or procedure that does the task. 1. Begin on the Main menu. To display this menu, do one of the following: a. Type MAIN on the entry line of a command display and press the Help key. b. Type HELP MAIN on the line of a command display and press Enter. Note: If there is another menu and you press Cmd11, the name of the next menu for the option is shown on the right side of the menu options. That menu can be shown by typing the menu name on the command line and pressing the Help key.

19-4


SSP Commands

If you press the Help key without typing anything, the help text for the Main menu is shown. 2. Type the option number that generally describes the task that you want to do, and press Enter. Another menu is displayed. 3. Type the option that more specifically describes the task that you want to do, and press Enter. Another menu is displayed. 4. Continue to select options until the procedure display or command display that does the task is displayed. 5. Type the necessary parameters on the input lines of the procedure or command display. If you need more information about the procedure, command, or any of the parameters: a. Press the Help key to display the help text. b. After you read the help text, press Cmd3 to return to the procedure display or the command display. c. Type the parameters. 6. Press Enter. The task starts processing. Example 1 You are asked to put a job on the job queue. 1. Type MAIN on the command line and press the Help key. The Main menu is shown at your display station.

à@

MAIN

W1

ð

Main System/36 help menu Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1ð.

Display a user menu Perform general System activities Use and control printers, diskettes, or tape Work with files, libraries, or folders Use programming languages and utilities Communicate with another system or user Define the system and its users Use problem determination and service Use office products Sign off the system

Cmd3-Previous menu

Cmd7-End

Cmd12-How to use help

MENU SYSSESN USEDEV LIBRFILE PROGRAM SYSCOMM DEFSYS PROBSERV OFCPROD OFF

Home-Signon menu


á

ñ

The option that best describes what you were asked to do (put a job on the job queue) is option 2 Perform general system activities. 2. Type a 2 on the command line and press Enter. Chapter 19. Using SSP Commands and Procedures to Do Tasks

19-5

SSP Commands

The SYSSESN menu is shown at your display station.

à@

SYSSESN

W1

ð

Perform general system activities Select one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1ð.

Control session environment Handle messages Control printing (spool file) Control jobs and the job queue Work with files, libraries, and folders List or work with history file Display general status information Change or control the status of devices Stop or start system activity Help with system procedures and control commands

Cmd3-Previous menu

Cmd7-End

Cmd12-How to use help

SESNENVR MESSAGE SPOOLJOB JOBS LIBRFILE HIST STATUS DEVICES SYSACT COMMAND

Home-Signon menu


á

ñ

The option that best describes what you were asked to do (put a job on the job queue) is option 4 Control jobs and the job queue. 3. On the command line, type 4 to select Control jobs and the job queue. 4. Press Enter. The STATUS USERS display and the JOBS menu is shown at your display station.

à@

STATUS USERS JOB

PROC

Cmd7-End

PROGRAM

Cmd8-Help

STATUS

W1

ATTRIBUTES

Cmd15-Update

PRTY

Cmd16-Restart

RGN

PGM

ð

BUFF

Roll-Page

-------------------------------------------------------------------JOBS Control jobs and the job queue 1. Display a specific job 6. Change processing priority 2. Jobs on the job queue 7. Prevent jobs from starting 3. Stop a job 8. Allow jobs to start 4. Restart a stopped job 9. Prevent SSP-ICF jobs 5. Cancel a job 1ð. Allow SSP-ICH jobs to start Ready for option number or command

á

ñ

The option that best describes what you were asked to do (put a job on the job queue) is option 2 Jobs on the job queue.

19-6


SSP Commands

5. On the command line, type 2 to select Jobs on the job queue 6. Press Enter. The JOB QUEUE STATUS display and the JOBQUEUE menu is shown at your display station.

à@

Complete JOB QUEUE STATUS W1 Jobs in Queue: ð of 8ð JOBQ PRTY STOPPED : ð Max Active Jobs: 1 Max for PRTY 5:5ð 4:5ð 3:5ð 2:5ð 1:5ð ð:5ð POS

JOBNAME

PROC/DOC

LIBR/FLDR

USER

STATUS

ð

JOBQ PROC

SYS-5689 The job queue is empty now

Cmd7-End Cmd8-Help Cmd15-Update Cmd16-Restart Roll-Page -------------------------------------------------------------------JOBQUEUE Jobs on the job queue 1. Display specific job(s) 6. Start the job queue 2. Put a job on the queue 7. Stop the job queue 3. Cancel a job 8. Change position of a job 4. Hold a job 9. Change processing priority 5. Release a job 1ð. Change maximum active jobs Ready for option number or command

á

ñ

The option that best describes what you were asked to do (put a job on the job queue) is option 2 Put a job on the queue. 7. On the command line, type 2 to select Put a job on the queue. 8. Press Enter. The JOBQ COMMAND display overlays the JOBQUEUE menu at your display station.

Chapter 19. Using SSP Commands and Procedures to Do Tasks

19-7

SSP Commands

à@

Complete JOB QUEUE STATUS W1 Jobs in Queue: o of 8ð JOBQ PRTY STOPPED : ð Max Active Jobs: 1 Max for PRTY 5:5ð 4:5ð 3:5ð 2:5ð 1:5ð ð:5ð POS

JOBNAME

PROC/DOC

LIBR/FLDR

USER

STATUS

ð

JOBQ PROC

SYS-5689 The job queue is empty now

Cmd7-End Cmd8-Help Cmd15-Update Cmd16-Restart Roll-Page -------------------------------------------------------------------JOBQ COMMAND Optional-\ ð , 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5

3_______ \

Library containing the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .

________ \

Procedure name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

________

Job queue priority

. . . . . . .

Procedure parameters . . . . . _____________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________

á

ñ

9. Type the necessary parameters on the command prompt lines. 10. Press Enter. Once the job is put on the job queue, a message, Job Wnnnnnnn was successfully added to the jobq, is shown at the bottom of the display. 11. To get back to the Main menu, press Cmd7 (End) twice. For more information about help support, see “Help for Commands and Procedures” in the Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36 book, SC21-0209. To see a list of other tasks you may want to do using the SSP operating system, see Chapter 5 in the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297.

19-8


SSP Printing

Chapter 20. Printing with SSP SSP commands can be used to print from an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. However, you may share an output queue or printer with OS/400. You do not need to know everything about printing. To work with your printer output and printer output created by others, you only need to know the essentials.

Spooled Files In OS/400, a spooled file is a file that holds output data waiting for printing. It is also known as a spooled output file. Multiple spooled files might be waiting to print. The spooled files are controlled by the person who created them or by the operator. The operator needs spool control (*SPLCTL) or job control (*JOBCTL) special authorities to work with other people's output. In SSP, spool file entries in the spool file hold output data waiting for printing. The spool file entries are controlled by the person who created them or by the operator. There is one spool file shared by everyone on the system. All printer output goes to this spool file.

| |

Printer Writers In OS/400, the printer writer is a system program that writes spooled files to a printer. In SSP, the equivalent to a printer writer is the Spool Writer. The spool writer is the part of SSP that prints output saved in spooled file entries.

Output Queues In OS/400, an output queue contains a list of spooled files waiting for printing. There can be multiple output queues in OS/400. In SSP, the equivalent to an output queue is the spool file. The spool file contains a list of spool file entries waiting to print. There is only one spool file in SSP. All output waiting to print is in this spool file.

| |

For directions on setting up an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to send output to an OS/400 output queue, see “Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls SSP Printer Output” on page 31-26.

Printers For directions on specifying whether a printer is assigned to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine or shared with OS/400, see Chapter 31, “Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-1. For more information on OS/400 printing, see Chapter 7, “Printing with OS/400” on page 7-1. The operating systems can share the same printer. For directions on sharing printers, see “Giving SSP Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output” on page 31-26. The printer can only be used by one operating system at a time. If an SSP job tries to use a printer that another SSP or OS/400 job is using, the job receives an  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

20-1

SSP Printing

error stating that the printer is in use. If an OS/400 job tries to use a printer that an SSP is using, the OS/400 job receives an error stating that the printer is not available. You have the option of spooling the output to an OS/400 output queue rather than sending the output to the SSP spool file or directly to a printer. Specifying an output queue allows the OS/400 Printer Writer to print all the output for both SSP and OS/400. This prevents SSP and OS/400 from trying to acquire the same printer. The output queue is specified either on the PRINTER OCL statement or in the configuration of the Advanced 36 machine.

|

In order to use non-twinaxial printers, such as ASCII printers and LAN-attached printers, the output must be directed to an output queue and then printed using the OS/400 printer writers.

Additional reading: For detailed information about printing elements, printer device support, printer spooling support, and Advanced Function Printing* (AFP*), see the Printer Device Programming book, SC41-4713.

Finding SSP Printer Output There are two ways of finding all the SSP printer output for which you are authorized: Using the SSP Help support If you have the Value Added Software Package installed on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you can use the WRKSPL command.

Using SSP Help Support To use the SSP Help support, do as follows: 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type HELP SPOOLJOB 2. Press Enter. The SPOOL FILE STATUS display and the SPOOLJOB menu are shown at your display station. The SPOOL FILE STATUS display contains a list of all the spool file entries for which you are authorized. The roll keys can be used to page forward and backward through the list of entries. From the SPOOLJOB menu you can control the spool writer and manage the spool file entries.

| | | |

Using the Work with Spool File (WRKSPL) Command To use the WRKSPL command, do as follows: 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type WRKSPL 2. Press Enter. The Work With Spool File display is shown at your display station. This display contains a list of all the spool file entries for which you are authorized. From this display you can manage the spool file entries.

| |

20-2


SSP Printing

Managing Printer Output — Command Summary The following commands can be used from your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to manage your printed output.

|

SSP Command

Function

ASSIGN (A P)

Assigns a printer as the system printer.

BALPRINT

Balances the printed output workload for a group of printers.

CANCEL (C P)

Deletes a spool file entry or entries.

CHANGE (G)

Allows you to change: Defer status Destination printer Forms number Number of copies Number of separator pages Position of a spool file entry

|

Priority of the spool writer |

HOLD (H P)

Prevents the spool file entry from printing

|

RELEASE (L P)

Releases a held spool file entry for printing

|

RESTART (T P)

Starts the printing of a spool file entry again.

|

START (S P)

Starts the printing of spool file entries.

|

STATUS PRT (D P)

Displays information about spool file entries on half of the display.

|

STATUS WRT (D WRT)

Displays status of the spool writers.

|

STATUSF PRT (DF P)

Displays information about spool file entries on the entire display.

|

STOP (P P)

Stops the printing of spool file entries.

|

WRKSPL

Allows a user to work with the overall status of all spool file entries.

|

|

|

For more information on working with printer output, refer to the S/36 System Reference book, SC21-9020. The Printer Device Programming book, SC41-4713, also contains information on printing concepts.

Managing Printer Output — Complete Details To manage printer output you can use: Control commands Options selected from a menu Options from a display

Chapter 20. Printing with SSP

20-3

SSP Printing

Changing Printer Output with a Control Command The CHANGE (G) Control Command can be used to change the following attributes of spool file entries:

| |

Number of copies Defer status Forms number Assigned printer Position in the spool file Priority Number of separator pages To use the CHANGE (G) Control Command, do as follows: 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type G which is the abbreviation for the CHANGE command. 2. Press the Help key.

Changing Printer Output with an Option from a Menu Select option 5 (Change entries) on the SPOOLJOB menu.

Changing Printer Output with an Option from a Display Use option 2 (Change) on the WRKSPL display.

Holding Printer Output Using a Control Command The HOLD PRT (H P) Control Command can be used to hold a specific spool file entry, all spool file entries or all spool file entries for a specified printer ID.

| |

To hold printer output using the control command, you would: 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type HOLD PRT 2. Press the Help key.

Holding Printer Output Using an Option from a Menu Select option 3 (Hold entries) on the SPOOLJOB menu.

Holding Printer Output Using an Option from a Display Use option 3 (Hold) on the WRKSPL display.

Releasing Printer Output Using a Control Command The RELEASE PRT (L P) Control Command can be used to release a specific spool file entry, all spool file entries or all spool file entries for a specific printer ID.

| |

1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type RELEASE PRT

20-4


SSP Printing

2. Press the Help key.

Releasing Printer Output Using an Option from a Menu Select option 4 (Release entries) on the SPOOLJOB menu.

Releasing Printer Output Using an Option from a Display Use option 6 (Release) on the WRKSPL display.

Deleting Printer Output Using a Control Command | | | |

The CANCEL PRT (C P) Control Command can be used to delete a specific spool file entry, all spool file entries, all spool file entries with a specified forms number, all spool file entries created by a specified user ID or all spool file entries for a specified printer ID. 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type CANCEL PRT 2. Press the Help key.

Deleting Printer Output Using an Option from a Menu Select option 2 (Cancel entries) on the SPOOLJOB menu.

Deleting Printer Output Using an Option from a Display Use option 4 (Delete) on the WRKSPL display.

Copying Printer Output Using a Procedure | |

The COPYPRT procedure can be used to copy spool file entries to a data file and then display the printer output. The following can be copied to a data file:

|

A specific spool file entry

|

All spool file entries on the system

|

All spool file entries you created All spool file entries with a specific forms number 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type COPYPRT 2. Press the Help key.

|

Copying Printer Output Using an Option from a Display Select option 6 (Copy or display entries) on the SPOOLJOB menu.

|

Displaying Printer Output Using an Option from a Display Select option 5 (Browse) on the WRKSPL display.


20-5

SSP Printing

Balancing Spooled Output Between Printers Using a Procedure The BALPRINT procedure allows you to balance spooled output between printers in a group. 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type BALPRINT 2. Press the Help key. Note: You cannot balance spooled output between printers using an option from a menu or using an option from a display.

Working with Spool Writers There are two ways of working with spool writers: Using a Control Command to Work with Spool Writers The Control Command can be considered a fast path for working with spool writers. 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type STATUS WRT Or D WRT 2. Press Enter. The SPOOL WRITER STATUS display and the SPOOL menu are shown at your display station. Using a Menu to Work with Spool Writers 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type SPOOL 2. Press the Help key. The SPOOL WRITER STATUS display and the SPOOL menu are shown at your display station.

Starting a Spool Writer Using a Control Command To start a spool writer using a control command: 1. On any SSP command line on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type START PRT Or, S P 2. Press the Help key.

20-6


SSP Printing

Starting a Spool Writer Using an Option from a Menu To start a spool writer from a menu option: 1. Select option 3 on the SPOOL menu. The START Command display overlays the SPOOL menu shown on the lower half of your display station.

Stopping a Spool Writer Using a Control Command If you want to use a control command to stop a spool writer: 1. On an SSP command line on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type one of the following: STOP PRT Or, P P 2. Press the Help key.

Stopping a Spool Writer Using an Option from a Menu To stop a spool writer using an option from a menu: 1. Select option 4 on the SPOOL menu. The STOP Command display overlays the SPOOL menu shown on the lower half of your display station.

Restarting a Spool Writer Using a Control Command You can use the RESTART command to restart printing in any of the following places: At the beginning of the specified entry From the top of a specified page of that entry At the top of the last page that was partially printed by the spool writer To use a control command to restart a spool writer: 1. On any SSP command line on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type one of the following: RESTART PRT Or, T P 2. Press the Help key.

Restarting a Spool Writer Using an Option from a Menu To use an option from a menu to start a spool writer again: 1. Select option 5 on the SPOOL menu. The RESTART Command display overlays the SPOOL menu shown on the lower half of your display station.


20-7

SSP Printing

Assign a Printer as the System Printer To assign a printer as the system printer, do as follows: 1. On any SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type HELP ASSIGN 2. Press Enter. The STATUS WORK STATION display and the ASSIGN COMMAND menu is shown at your workstation. 3. On the ASSIGN COMMAND menu, select option 2 (Assign a printer as the system printer).

Creating Printed Output — Selected Examples

|

LISTDATA

Allows you to print or display the data records of a file located on disk, diskette, or tape

LISTFILE

Allows you to print or display the contents of a file located on disk, diskette, or tape

CATALOG

Allows you to print or display the names of all the files, libraries and folders located on disk, diskette, or tape

HISTORY

Allows you to print or display the history file.

WRKSPL

Allows you to work with spool file entries

LISTLIBR

Allows you to display or print the contents of a library

Configuring Printer Options The following can be specified during system configuration using the CNFIGSSP procedure: Whether you want print spooling active Whether to start the spool writer program automatically after an IPL The size of the spool file in blocks The size of spool file segments in blocks Which disk you want to use for the spool file A default forms identifier How many lines you want to print on each page The system printer If you want to change any of the items in the previous list, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295

20-8


SSP Subsystems

Chapter 21. Working with SSP Subsystems

Definitions SSP Subsystems For SSP, a subsystem is the part of the operating system that handles communication requirements of the remote system or remote drives. It isolates most system dependent considerations from the application program. The following are examples of SSP subsystems: SSP-ICF subsystems APPC subsystems The SSP-ICF subsystem is required for running ICF sessions. The APPC subsystem allows the AS/400 Advanced 36 machines to communicate with other systems that have compatible support.

OS/400 Subsystems For OS/400, a subsystem is an operating environment where the system coordinates processing of jobs and resources for the jobs. If you use one of the default subsystem configurations supplied by IBM, all of your OS/400 subsystems are automatically started when you do an IPL. Once your system is successfully powered on, you may need to start additional subsystems to make your system ready to use if: You created a subsystem which is not automatically started, such as a subsystem which runs only at night. You ended all but the controlling subsystem to bring your system to a restricted state to back it up. All jobs are run in a subsystem. A subsystem creates a suitable environment for a job to do its work. The AS/400 system can contain one or many subsystems. These can be created or deleted by those who have proper authority. As the number of different types of jobs increases in the system, more subsystems can be defined to manage those jobs. All interactive processing can occur in one subsystem, all batch processing in another, system operator jobs in a third, and so on. This makes it easier to control the different jobs in the system because subsystems can be started and ended individually.


21-1

SSP Subsystems

Starting an SSP Subsystem To start an SSP subsystem, 1. On any SSP command line, type ENABLE 2. Press the Help key. The ENABLE procedure display is shown at your display station. 3. Type the necessary parameters on the various prompt lines. 4. Press Enter. A message is displayed telling you the subsystem has started.

Ending an SSP Subsystem To end an SSP subsystem: 1. On any SSP command line, type DISABLE 2. Press the Help key. The DISABLE procedure display is shown at your display station. 3. Type the necessary parameters on the various prompt lines. 4. Press Enter. A message is displayed indicating that the system has started to end the subsystem. Another message is sent when the subsystem has ended.

Displaying the Status of an SSP Subsystem To display the status of the Communications subsystems: 1. On any SSP command line, type STATUS SUBSYS Or, D I 2. Press Enter. The STATUS Information display and the CNTLLINE menu are shown at your display station. The status of the active subsystems are in the STATUS display. You can use the CNTLLINE menu to control subsystems and communications lines.

21-2


SSP Security

Chapter 22. SSP Security This chapter provides basic information on security for SSP operating systems. Attention: OS/400 system security is used to provide the security of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine objects (*M36 and *M36CFG). OS/400 system security does not provide password, menu, badge, communications or resource security for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. This security must be provided by SSP security.

Password Security Password security helps prevent an unauthorized person from signing on to the system. When password security is active, you have specified that password information should be checked and verified. This requires that the password and the user ID be entered when you sign on to the system. If the correct combination of user ID and password is entered on the sign-on display, the person is allowed on the system. Note: If password security is active for SSP, Master Security Officer authority is required to use certain commands such as the CHGSYSVL command. If password security is not active, the CHGSYSVL command and other system commands must be run from the SSP console. A user ID can be any combination of up to 8 characters. The first character must be 0 through 9, A through Z, #, @, or $. The remaining characters can be any character of the alphabet, any number, or any special character except a comma. Also, the user ID cannot contain any blanks between the characters. A password must be 4 characters. Any letter of the alphabet, any number, or any special character except a blank can be used. When password security is not active, anyone can sign on to the system by entering any user ID. Note: The difference between four-character passwords for SSP and ten-character passwords for OS/400 must be considered when you transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine with autosignon enabled. The password prompt appears on the Sign-On display only if password security is active.

Menu Security Password security must be active to use menu security. Menu security allows you to restrict a user to using a single menu or chain of menus. When menu security is in effect, the menu that you specify in the user profile as the mandatory default user menu appears after the user signs on. Unless an option on the mandatory menu causes another option menu, help menu, or help prompt to appear, a user cannot use another menu or the system help.


22-1

SSP Security

When menu security is in effect, the user does not have to enter a menu name in the menu field on the Sign On display. Once the default menu is displayed, the user can only: Select the options on that menu Enter the MSG and OFF control commands

Badge Security If password security is active, you can use another type of security called badge security. Badge security prevents unauthorized users from signing on to a display station that has a magnetic stripe reader configured. When badge security is active, the display station configured with a magnetic stripe reader has an Enter badge prompt on the Sign On display. The user must move a badge through the magnetic stripe reader as well as supply the other information needed during sign-on. The badge has a magnetic stripe with specially coded data. Consult your local IBM branch office for information about obtaining badges and magnetic stripe readers, and about coding the information needed on the magnetic stripe. If the person does not have a badge or uses a badge with the wrong information, that person is unable to sign on at that display station. Badge security requires a magnetic stripe reader at a display station and the hardware support for connecting the reader to the display station. The display stations with badge readers are identified during system configuration. Not every display station needs a magnetic stripe reader. A person with a badge can still sign on at a display station without a magnetic stripe reader. You might decide to install magnetic stripe readers only at those display stations that are far away from your central data processing center.

Communications Security In order to use communications security, password security must be active for APPC and ICF. Communications security is only valid with the APPC (advanced program-toprogram communications) subsystem when password security is active. APPC is the communications support that allows the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to communicate with other systems having compatible support. Communications security allows you to verify a remote location's identity before you allow it to run programs on your system. When communications security is in effect, the local and remote locations must send and receive the same location password to start an APPC session. If both systems have communications security in effect, they verify each other's identity, by exchanging location passwords, before an APPC session can be started. If neither system has communications security or password security, a user on one system can access:

22-2


SSP Security

Any resources that are not secured on the system Any secured resources he is authorized to access on the other system If one system has password security and the other system does not, a user ID of *NULL allows users on the system that is not secured to access the secured system through the APPC subsystem. The secured system must create a user profile with a user ID of *NULL. The user ID of *NULL and an access level should be entered for the resources on your system that you will allow the system that is not secured to access. Note: Do not create a location profile for a remote location that does not use communications security. You can use the DEFINEID procedure to set up communications security for the SSP ICF BSCEL subsystem if you use Bisynchronous Communications. When the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is using BSCEL and is connected to a remote system by a switched communications line. The DEFINEID procedure compares the ID received from the remote system with the DEFINEID list. If the ID is in the list, the communications line is connected successfully. If the ID is not found, the remote system is disconnected. The DEFINLOC procedure can be used for an asynchronous system using X.25 support to define remote locations that are allowed to call your system. When a connect request is received, the location ID of the calling system is checked. If the location ID and name are listed in the DEFINLOC list, the call is accepted. If the location ID and name are not on the DEFINLOC list, the call is rejected.

Resource Security Resource security helps prevent unauthorized access to disk files, libraries, folders, and folder members on your system. When resource security is not active, anyone who can sign on to the system can use any file, library, or folder on the system. Note: Diskette and tape files cannot be secured using resource security. Resource security is a good way of ensuring that only the people that you have authorized to use certain files, libraries, and folders can do so. You can, for example, allow only the employees responsible for the payroll to update the personnel files and to run the payroll programs.

Working with SSP Security To work with SSP security, do one of the following: Use the SECURITY command. 1. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type SECURITY 2. Press the Help key. Or, Use the HELP SECURITY command.

Chapter 22. SSP Security

22-3

SSP Security

1. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type HELP SECURITY 2. Press Enter. In either case, the SECURITY help menu is shown. From this menu, you can: Update security information List security information Save the user ID file or resource security file Restore the user ID file or resource security file Define password security Define resource security Update your password For more information on SSP security, see the S/36 System Security Guide, SC21-9042.

22-4


Controlling SSP Jobs

Chapter 23. Controlling SSP Jobs The STATUS JOBQ (D J) command can be used to control SSP JOBS. This command shows all the jobs on the job queue and allows the operator to: Display a specific job Put a job on the job queue Cancel a job on the job queue Hold a job on the job queue Release a job on the job queue Start the job queue Stop the job queue Change the position of a job in the job queue Change the processing priority of a job on the job queue Change the maximum number of active jobs When you run the STATUS JOBQ or D J command, the following display appears:

à@ POS 1 2 3 4

Complete JOB QUEUE STATUS W1 Jobs in Queue: 4 of 8ð JOBQ PRTY STOPPED : ð Max Active Jobs: 1 Max for PRTY 5:5ð 4:5ð 3:5ð 2:5ð 1:5ð ð:5ð PRIORITY JOBNAME PROC/DOC LIBR/FLDR USER STATUS JOBQ PROC W1ð75ðð6 JOB5 JOBLIB USER1 -5 N W1ð75ðð1 JOB3 JOBLIB USER1 -3 N W1ð75ð15 JOB2 JOBLIB USER1 -3 N W1ð75ð25 JOB4 JOBLIB USER1 -3 N

ð

Cmd7-End Cmd8-Help Cmd15-Update Cmd16-Restart Roll-Page --------------------------------------------------------------------------JOB Control jobs and the job queue 1. Display specific job 6. Start the job queue 2. Put a job on the job queue 7. Stop the job queue 3. Cancel a job 8. Change position of a job 4. Hold a job 9. Change processing priority 5. Release a job 1ð. Change maximum active jobs Ready for option number or command

á

ñ

To perform any of the functions on the previous display, you type the option number on the display and press Enter. The display will change to show the command prompt for that function.


23-1


Working With Current Running Jobs The STATUS USERS (D U) command and the WRKUSER command show all the jobs currently running on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and allow the operator to: Display a specific job Display jobs on the job queue Stop a job Restart a stopped job Cancel a job Change the processing priority of a job Prevent jobs from starting Prevent SSP-ICF jobs from starting Allow SSP-ICF jobs to start When the STATUS USER or D U command is run, the following display appears:

à@

Complete JOB W1ð74951 W3113219 W3113234

STATUS USERS PROC JOB1 CATALOG DSPSYS

PROGRAM -------$LABEL $VAPS

STATUS MSG-Wait ACTIVE ACTIVE

ATTRIBUTES ----------SRT SRT

W1 PRTY Norm Norm Norm

RGN 24K 24K 24K

PGM ---26K 18K

ð

BUFF ----------

Cmd7-End Cmd8-Help Cmd15-Update Cmd16-Restart Roll-Page --------------------------------------------------------------------------JOBQUEUE Jobs on the job queue 1. Display specific job 6. Change processing priority 2. Jobs on the job queue 7. Prevent jobs from starting 3. Stop a job 8. Allow jobs to start 4. Restart a job 9. Prevent SSP-ICF jobs 5. Cancel a job 1ð. Allow SSP-ICF jobs to start Ready for option number or command

á To perform any of the functions on the previous display, type the option on the display and press Enter. The display changes to show the command prompt for that function.

Working with the History File The history file contains the following information: OCL and utility control statements from user-written procedures Commands contained in jobs or entered from a display station All messages shown at a display station

23-2


ñ


All operator responses to messages and prompts The display station ID used by the job The operator's user ID The job name The start time and date The end time and date To work with the history file, do one of the following: Use the HIST command. 1. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type HIST 2. Press the Help key. Use the HELP HIST command. 1. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type HELP HIST 2. Press Enter. In either case, the Hist help menu appears. From this menu you can: Display the history file List the history file Copy the history file to a data file Erase the history file

Chapter 23. Controlling SSP Jobs

23-3


23-4


SSP Devices and Communications

Chapter 24. Working with SSP Devices and Communications The purpose of this chapter is to provide pointers to information that is needed to work with devices and communications from the SSP operating system. In those cases where the information is limited, it is included in this chapter. For information on doing these tasks from OS/400, see Chapter 11, “Working with OS/400 Devices and Communications.”

Displaying and Changing Device Status You can use the following commands to display and change device status from the SSP operating system: STATUS LINE (D L) The STATUS LINE command displays status and allows the operator to change the communication line status. STATUS WORKSTN (D W) The STATUS WORKSTN command displays status and allows the operator to change workstation, diskette, or tape status.

Printing Local Device Addresses To print the addresses of the local workstations and printers, follow the directions in Chapter 5 of the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295.

Displaying Communications Lines and Controllers You can start or stop a subsystem that controls a communications line using the STATUS LINE (D L) command to show the status of the line. You can show the status of a specific line by changing the command as follows: D L,x where x is the line number for which you want status.

Configuring Remote Communications Lines You can configure remote communications lines for your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the CNFIGICF procedure.


24-1

SSP Devices and Communications

24-2


Saving and Restoring SSP

Chapter 25. Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information This chapter contains information on how to save and restore the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine as an OS/400 object. It also contains information on how to save and restore the SSP operating system, the licensed program products and other SSP system files. User data must also be backed up. User data is stored in files, folders and libraries in an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. There are 6 procedures that can be used to save and restore user data: SAVE and RESTORE - to save and restore user files. SAVEFLDR and RESTFLDR - to save and restore user folders. SAVELIBR and RESTLIBR - to save and restore user libraries. You should set up a backup plan to use these procedures to save your vital user data. For information on Backup and Recovery of your user data in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see the S/36 Concepts and Programmer’s Guide book, SC21-9019.

Saving and Restoring an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine | | | | | | |

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is an OS/400 object. The object type is *M36. The *M36 object contains the SSP operating system, all the licensed program products, the other SSP system files and all the user data for that AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. There are also AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration objects. The object type for configuration objects is *M36CFG. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object defines the OS/400 devices to the SSP operating system. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine object and the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object are stored in OS/400 libraries.

Saving the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Library The OS/400 Save Library (SAVLIB) command can be used to save the library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The SAVLIB command saves the entire library, including the library description, the object descriptions, and the contents of the objects in the library. This type of save is intended for disaster recovery. Individual files, folders or libraries in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine cannot be restored from this type of save. For more information on the SAVLIB command, see “Saving Libraries” on page 12-4.

Saving the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Object and Configuration Object The OS/400 Save Object (SAVOBJ) CL command can be used to save an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine object and an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object. This type of save is intended for disaster recovery. Individual files, folders or libraries in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine cannot be restored from this type of save. For more information on the SAVOBJ command, see “Saving Specific Objects” on page 12-5.


25-1


Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Library The OS/400 Restore Library (RSTLIB) CL command can be used to restore a saved library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. This type of restore is intended for disaster recovery. The entire library containing the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine must be restored. Individual files, folders or libraries in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine cannot be restored. For more information on the RSTLIB command, see “Restoring Libraries” on page 12-6.

Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Object and Configuration Object The OS/400 Restore Object (RSTOBJ) CL command can be used to restore an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine object and an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object. This type of restore is intended for disaster recovery. The entire object containing the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine must be restored. Individual files, folders or libraries in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine cannot be restored. For more information on the RSTOBJ command, see “Restoring Specific Objects” on page 12-7.

Saving and Restoring the SSP Operating System, Licensed Programs, and Other SSP System Files This section discusses the following:

Initializing tapes Saving the SSP operating system Saving the licensed program products Saving other SSP system files Restoring the SSP operating system Restoring the licensed program products Restoring other SSP system files

Initializing Tapes to Save the SSP Operating System, Licensed Program Product and Other SSP System Files Note: One 6150 tape initialized at QIC120 holds 120MB of data. This tape will hold the SSP, all of your programming support, and the other SSP system files that you want to save. For information on using different kinds of tape from your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see Chapter 7 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297. For information on using different kinds of tape from OS/400, see Chapter 4 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. To initialize the tape for saving the SSP operating system, licensed program products and other SSP system files, do the following: 1. Insert a 1/4-inch tape cartridge into the tape drive. 2. Type the following procedure on the command line of the SSP system console: TAPEINIT TC,SL,PPROD,CLEAR Note: When you save the licensed program products, the volume ID of the tape must by PPROD. Therefore, it is recommended that you use the volume ID of PPROD.

25-2



3. Press Enter. 4. When the command entry display returns, remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive and label it PPROD - BACKUP 1.

Saving the SSP Operating System Using the SAVELIBR Procedure Use the Save Library (SAVELIBR) procedure to save the SSP operating system library, #LIBRARY, to tape after you have applied PTFs. Note: It is recommended that you place the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state to ensure that all files, libraries, and folders are saved. For information on putting the system in dedicated state, see “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. To save the SSP operating system, do the following: 1. Insert the tape cartridge you initialized and labelled PPROD - BACKUP1 in the tape drive. 2. On the command line at the SSP system console type the following procedure: SAVELIBR #LIBRARY,999,PPROD,,,TC,LEAVE 3. Press Enter. When the command entry display returns, #LIBRARY (SSP operating system) has been saved to tape. If you put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state and you are going to save the licensed program products or other SSP system files, you can leave the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state. If you are not going to perform these tasks, remove the dedication as follows: 1. On the command line of the SSP System Console for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type START SYSTEM 2. Press Enter.

Saving the Licensed Program Products Product libraries must be saved to tape using specific save commands for that product (for example, RPGSAVE for RPG and SEUSAVE for SEU). Other files, folders, and libraries that are part of the program products must be saved using the SAVE, SAVEFLDR, and SAVELIBR procedures.

Chapter 25. Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information

25-3


Before Your Begin... 1. You must specify PPROD for the volume ID when you save the product libraries to tape. 2. It is recommended that you save the licensed program products to the same tape where you saved the SSP operating system. 3. Make sure the tape cartridge you initialized with a volume ID of PPROD is in the tape drive. 4. The session library must be set to #LIBRARY to use the procedures in this section. Use the SLIB procedure to accomplish this. a. On the command line of the SSP system console, type SLIB ð b. Press Enter.

Note: It is recommended that you place the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state prior to saving the licensed program products. This will ensure all parts of the licensed program products are saved. If you left the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state, you can proceed to save the licensed program products. Otherwise, put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state. For information on how to put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state, see “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. The licensed program products can be saved in the following ways: 1. Interactively You key each save procedure on the command line at the SSP system console. Saving the licensed program products this way is very time consuming and the tape LEAVE option does not work properly. The advantage to saving this way is that no previous preparation is required. 2. Using a previously created procedure You use a previously created procedure that contains all the procedures you would have keyed in if you were to save the licensed program products interactively. Saving the licensed program products this way is less time consuming and the tape LEAVE option does work properly. The disadvantage is that this way requires previous preparation. Note: During the saving of the licensed program products, if you receive message SYS-2509, #######--Specified members not in this library, record the name of the member shown in the message text. Select option 1 for the message, this causes the save to continue. If you are experiencing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine problems and have reported these problems to your service representative, contact them again. This time mention you received message SYS-2509 during a save of your licensed program product and give them the name of the module in the message text. If you are not experiencing any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine problems, ignore the error message.

25-4



Saving the Licensed Program Products Interactively To save the licensed program products interactively: 1. Determine which programming support you have installed on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. Using Figure 25-1 on page 25-10, find the programming support functions you have installed. If the procedure name for the programming support function is not SAVE, SAVEFLDR, SAVELIBR or DICTSAVE: a. Type that procedure name on the command line at the SSP system console. For example, if the programming support function was DFU, the procedure name is DFUSAVE. DFUSAVE is not SAVE, SAVEFLDR, SAVELIBR or DICTSAVE, so DFUSAVE would be typed on the command line at the SSP system console. b. Press Enter. If the procedure name for the programming support function is SAVE, SAVEFLDR, SAVELIBR or DICTSAVE, follow the steps below: If the procedure name is SAVE: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SAVE b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SAVE procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to save field, type the file name. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the file name of the programming support that is to be saved. d. Press Enter. A second help display appears. e. In the Retention days field, type 999 f. In the Volume ID field, type PPROD g. In the Location of file field, type TC h. Press Enter. A third help display appears. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SAVE procedure. The default values will work. i. Press Enter. If the procedure name is SAVEFLDR: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SAVEFLDR b. Press the Help key.


25-5


The help display for the SAVEFLDR procedure appears. c. In the Name of folder to save field, type the folder name. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the folder name of the programming support that is to be saved. d. In the Volume ID field, type PPROD e. In the Location of file field, type TC f. Press Enter. A second help display appears. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SAVEFLDR procedure. The default values will work. g. Press Enter. If the procedure name is SAVELIBR: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SAVELIBR b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SAVELIBR procedure appears. c. In the Name of library to be saved field, type the library name. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the library name of the programming support that is to be saved. d. In the Volume ID field, type PPROD e. In the Location of file field, type TC f. Press Enter. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SAVELIBR procedure. The default values will work. If the procedure name is DICTSAVE: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type DICTSAVE b. Press the Help key. The help display for the DICTSAVE procedure appears. c. In the Dictionary to load field, type the dictionary ID. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the dictionary ID of the programming support that is to be saved. d. Press Enter. 3. Repeat step 2 on page 25-5 for each of the programming support functions installed on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You have saved the Licensed Program Products interactively.

25-6



4. If you put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state, and you are going to save the other SSP system files, leave the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state. 5. If you are not going to save the other SSP system files, remove the dedication as follows. a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type START SYSTEM b. Press Enter.

Creating a Procedure to Save Licensed Program Products To create a procedure to save the licensed program products (features and products): 1. Use DSU, FSEDIT or SEU to edit a new procedure library member. The name of the procedure and the library you put the procedure in are your choice. You might choose SAVELPP in #LIBRARY. For more information on creating a procedure, see “Making Procedures” in the S/36 System Reference book, SC21-9020. 2. Determine which programming support you have installed on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 3. Using Figure 25-1 on page 25-10, find the programming support functions you have installed. If the procedure name for the programming support function is not SAVE, SAVEFLDR, SAVELIBR or DICTSAVE, add that procedure name to the procedure you are editing. For example, if the programming support function was DFU, the procedure name is DFUSAVE. DFUSAVE is not SAVE, SAVEFLDR, SAVELIBR or DICTSAVE, so you need to add DFUSAVE to the new procedure. If the procedure name for the programming support function is SAVE, SAVEFLDR, SAVELIBR or DICTSAVE, add that procedure with all the necessary parameters to the new procedure. If the procedure name is SAVE, add the following to the new procedure: SAVE file name,999,,PPROD,TC,,,,,,,LEAVE where file name is the file name of the programming support that is to be saved. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the file name of the programming support that is to be saved. Note: On the SAVE procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. If the procedure name is SAVEFLDR, add the following to the new procedure: SAVEFLDR folder name,999,PPROD,TC,,,LEAVE where folder name is the file name of the programming support that is to be saved. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the folder name of the programming support that is to be saved.


25-7


Note: On the SAVEFLDR procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. If the procedure name is SAVELIBR, add the following to the new procedure: SAVELIBR library name,999,PPROD,,,TC,LEAVE where library name is the file name of the programming support that is to be saved. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the library name of the programming support that is to be saved. Note: On the SAVELIBR procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. If the procedure name is DICTSAVE, add the following to the new procedure: DICTSAVE dictionary ID where dictionary ID is the file name of the programming support that is to be saved. See Figure 25-1 on page 25-10 for the dictionary ID of the programming support that is to be saved. 4. Repeat step 3 on page 25-7 for each of the programming support functions you have installed on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 5. After all the procedures used to save the program products are added to the new procedure, end the edit session and replace the procedure member in the library.

Saving the Licensed Program Products Using a Previously Created Procedure To save the licensed program products with a procedure you previously created: 1. If you have not created a procedure to save licensed program products, follow the steps described in section “Creating a Procedure to Save Licensed Program Products” on page 25-7. 2. Set the session library to the library that contains the procedure you created to save the licensed program products. a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SLIB library name where library name is the name of the library that contains the procedure you created to save the licensed program products. b. Press Enter. 3. On the command line at the SSP system console, type the name of the procedure you created to save the licensed program products. 4. Press Enter. The procedure you created begins to run all the save procedures you added to it. 5. When the command entry display appears again, the procedure has ended and you have completed the task of saving the licensed program products.

25-8



6. If you put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state and you are going to save the other SSP system files, leave the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state. 7. If you are not going to save the other SSP system files, do as follows: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type START SYSTEM b. Press Enter.


25-9


Figure 25-1 (Page 1 of 2). Licensed Program Product Save Procedures Programming Support to be Saved

Procedure Name

Programmer and Operator Productivity Aid

POPSAVE

Value Added Software Package

VASPSAVE

Migration Analyzer

ANLZSAVE

DFU

DFUSAVE

WSU

WSUSAVE

SEU

SEUSAVE

SDA

SDASAVE

RPG II

RPGSAVE

COBOL

COBSAVE

BASIC

BASSAVE

FORTRAN

FORTSAVE

Assembler

ASMSAVE

DisplayWrite/36

TEXTSAVE SAVEFLDR

Personal Service/36

OFCSAVE

Document Library Services

DLSSAVE

PROFS Bridge

PROFSAVE

QUERY/36

QRYSAVE

Object Distribution Facility

ODFSAVE

Transition Aid

TNSAVE

Online Information for: Object Distribution Facility DisplayWrite/36 Personal Services/36

Document Library Services Query/36 IDDU

DSU Shared Folders

25-10


SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVE SAVELIBR SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR SAVE SAVE SAVE SAVEFLDR SAVEFLDR

File, Folder or Library Name or Dictionary ID

#PRFFLDR

#OFCFLDR 1 #WPFLDR 2 WPDOCS #OFCFLDR 1 $OUDRSMP #DQRYSMP #DIRSMP #DLSFLDR #QRYFLDR #IDDFLDR #IDDUSMP #USERDCT CUSTCDT NAMEADDR NAMEPHON #DSUFLDR #WPFLDR 2


Figure 25-1 (Page 2 of 2). Licensed Program Product Save Procedures Programming Support to be Saved

Procedure Name


DisplayWrite/36 Language Dictionaries: English French French-Canadian Spanish Italian Danish German Swedish Norwegian Dutch Icelandic Portuguese

DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE DICTSAVE

ENGLISH FRENCH FRENCHCA SPANISH ITALIAN DANISH GERMAN SWEDISH NORWEGIAN DUTCH ICELANDIC PORTUGUESE

Development Support Utility

DSUSAVE

Business Graphics Utility/36

BGUSAVE

PC Support/36, including: Shared Folders PC Support/36 Organizer PC Support/36 Pass-Thru

IWSAVE

PC Support/36 IBM TokenRing Network Support

LRTRSAVE

PC Support/36 Work Station Feature

WSFSAVE

Multinational Character Set Conversion

4

3

MCSTSAVE

Software Distribution Support

SWDSAVE

LAN Communications Support

LANSAVE

Character Generator Utility IGC Sort

4

4

CGUSAVE SRTXSAVE

Support for Printing/Reading Online Information

DOCPSAVE

3278 Device Emulation via IBM Personal Computer

SAVE

#EPPCLD1

Table notes: 1

#OFCFLDR is used by both Personal Services/36 and Object Distribution Facility. If you have both functions on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, it is only necessary to save the folder once.

2

#WPFLDR is used by both DisplayWrite/36 and Shared Folders. If you have both functions on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, it is only necessary to save the folder once.

3

The Shared Folders procedure (SHRFSAVE), the PC Support/36 Organizer procedure (PCOSAVE) and the PC Support/36 Pass-Thru procedure (IWPTSAVE) are included in the base PC Support/36 procedure IWSAVE.

4

This programming support would only be supported on the Ideographic version of the SSP.


25-11


Saving Other SSP System Files This section describes how to save the following SSP system files: Password security file On your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine if password security is activated. Resource security file On your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine if resource security is activated. Network Resource Directory On your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine if you use Distributed Data Management, APPC or APPN. Extended Character Set files On your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine if you have an Ideographic version of the SSP. SSP Configuration Members Although SSP configuration members are not really files, they are included in this section because they should be saved when you backup your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Configuration members are used to change the SSP master configuration record on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Before You Begin... 1. It is recommended that you save these SSP system files to the same tapes that were used to save the licensed program products. 2. If you are going to save the password or resource security files, you must determine the name of the tape file these SSP system files are to be saved to (For example: USERIDFL and RESOURFL). 3. If you are going to save the extended character set files, you may want to use a name other than #EXT1818 and #EXT2424. If you do, you should determine these names before you start the save (For Example: EXT18FIL and EXT24FIL). 4. Make sure the tape cartridge you initialized with a volume ID of PPROD is in the tape drive. 5. The session library must be set to #LIBRARY to use the procedures in this section. Use the SLIB procedure to accomplish this. a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SLIB ð b. Press Enter.

Note: It is recommended that you place the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state prior to saving the other SSP system files. This ensures the files get saved correctly. You may have done this earlier when saving the SSP operating system or the licensed program products. If you left the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state, you can proceed. For information on how to put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in dedicated state, see “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. You can save other SSP system files in the following ways:

25-12



1. Interactively You key each save procedure on the command line at the SSP system console. Saving the other SSP system files this way is very time consuming and the tape LEAVE option does not work properly. The advantage to saving files this way is that no previous preparation is required. 2. Using a previously created procedure This previously created procedure contains all procedures you would have keyed in if you were to save the other SSP system files interactively. Saving the other SSP system files this way is less time consuming and the tape LEAVE option functions properly. The disadvantage to saving this way is that some previous preparation is required.

Saving Other SSP System Files Interactively To save any of these other SSP system files interactively, do as follows: 1. If you have password security activated on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, complete the following steps to save the password security file: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SECSAVE USERID b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SECSAVE procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to create field, type the name of the tape file where you want to save the password security file. d. In the Location of file field, type TC e. Press Enter. A second help display appears. f. In the Volume ID of tape field, type the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SECSAVE procedure. The default values will work. g. Press Enter. The password security file is saved to tape. 2. If you have resource security activated on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, complete the following steps to save the resource security file: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SECSAVE RESOURCE b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SECSAVE procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to create field, type the name of the tape file where you want to save the resource security file. d. In the Location of file field, type


25-13


TC e. Press Enter. A second help display appears. f. In the Volume ID of tape field, type the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SECSAVE procedure. The default values will work. g. Press Enter. The resource security file is saved to tape. 3. If you have a Network Resource Directory (NRD) on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, complete the following steps to save the Network Resource Directory: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SAVENRD b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SAVENRD procedure appears. c. In the Name of directory to be saved field, type #NRD.FLE d. In the Volume ID field, type the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. e. In the Location of directory field, type TC f. Press Enter. A second help display appears. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SAVENRD procedure. The default values will work. g. Press Enter. The Network Resource Directory is saved to tape. 4. If you have an Ideographic version of the SSP and you use the extended character set files #EXT1818 or #EXT2424 on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, save the extended character set files. To save the #EXT1818 file: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SAVEEXTN #EXT1818 b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SAVEEXTN procedure appears. c. In the Name of file field, type the name of the tape file where you want to save the #EXT1818 file. If you want the name to be #EXT1818, leave the prompt blank.

25-14



d. In the Volume ID field, type the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SAVEEXTN procedure. The default values will work. e. Press Enter. The extended character set file #EXT1818 is saved to tape. To save the #EXT2424 file, a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SAVEEXTN #EXT2424 b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SAVEEXTN procedure appears. c. In the Name of file field, type the name of the tape file where you want to save the #EXT2424 file. If you want the name to be #EXT2424, leave the prompt blank. d. In the Volume ID field, type the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SAVEEXTN procedure. The default values will work. e. Press Enter. The extended character set file #EXT2424 is saved to tape. If you want to save the SSP configuration members on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, complete the following steps: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SAVELIBR b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SAVELIBR procedure appears. c. In the Name of library to be saved field, type the library name that contains the SSP configuration members. Normally, these members are stored in a library named #CNFGLIB. d. In the 'Volume ID' field, type the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. e. In the Location of file field, type TC Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SAVELIBR procedure. The default values will work. f. Press Enter. The library containing your configuration members is saved to tape.


25-15


You have completed the task of saving the other SSP system files interactively. If you put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state, remove the dedication: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type START SYSTEM b. Press Enter.

Creating a Procedure to Save Other SSP System Files To create a procedure to save the other SSP system files such as password security file and resource security file: 1. Use DSU, FSEDIT or SEU to edit a new procedure library member. The name of the procedure and the library you put it in is your choice. It may be SAVEOSF in #LIBRARY. For more information on creating a procedure, see “Making Procedures” in the S/36 System Reference book, SC21-9020. You may want to print a copy of the save procedure that you created to remind you of the order the products were saved. 2. Copy the save procedure and give it a new name. 3. Replace the save statements as follows: a. If you have password security activated on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SECSAVE USERID,file name,TC,volume ID,999,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where you want to save the password security file and volume ID is the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: On the SECSAVE procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. b. If you have resource security activated on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SECSAVE RESOURCE,file name,TC,volume ID,999,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where you want to save the resource security file and volume ID is the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: On the SECSAVE procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. c. If you have a Network Resource Directory (NRD) on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SAVENRD #NRD.FLE,volume ID,TC,,,LEAVE,999 where volume ID is the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD.

25-16



Note: On the SAVENRD procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. d. If you have the extended character set file #EXT1818 on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SAVEEXTN #EXT1818,file name,volume ID,999,TC,,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where you want to save the #EXT1818 file and volume ID is the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. If you want the file name to be #EXT1818, you could specify a null value (,,) for file name. Note: On the SAVEEXTN procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. e. If you have the extended character set file #EXT2424 on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SAVEEXTN #EXT2424,file name,volume ID,999,TC,,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where you want to save the #EXT2424 file and volume ID is the volume ID of the tape used for the save. If you want the name to be #EXT2424, specify a null value (,,). If this is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: On the SAVEEXTN procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. f. If you want to save the SSP configuration members on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SAVELIBR library name,999,volume ID,,,TC,LEAVE where library name is the name of the library that contains the SSP configuration members and volume ID is the volume ID of the tape used for the save. Normally, the SSP configuration members are stored in a library named #CNFGLIB. If the tape used for save is the same tape that was used to save the licensed program products, the volume ID is PPROD. Note: On the SAVELIBR procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. g. After all the procedures used to save the other SSP system files are added to the new procedure, end the edit session and replace the procedure member in the library.


25-17


Saving the Other SSP System Files Using a Previously Created Procedure To save the other SSP system files using a procedure you created previously, do as follows: 1. If you have not created the procedure, follow the steps described in section “Creating a Procedure to Save Other SSP System Files” on page 25-16. 2. Set the session library to the library that contains the procedure you created to save the other SSP system files. a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SLIB library name where library name is the name of the library that contains the procedure you created to save the other SSP system files. b. Press Enter. 3. On the command line at the SSP system console, type the name of the procedure you created to save the other SSP system files. 4. Press Enter. The procedure you created begins to run all the save procedures you added to it. 5. When the command entry display appears again, the procedure has ended and you have completed the task of saving the other SSP system files using a previously created procedure. 6. If you put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state, you must use the START SYSTEM command to remove the dedication. a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type START SYSTEM b. Press Enter.

Restoring the SSP Operating System You may be directed by your software support personnel to restore the SSP operating system if the SSP operating system is experiencing problems. You can restore the SSP operating system from a backup tape in two ways: If the SSP operating system can still perform an IPL but is producing unexpected results, use the Restore Library (RESTLIBR) procedure. Go to “Using the Restore Library Procedure to Restore the SSP Operating System” on page 25-19 to restore the SSP operating system using the Restore Library procedure. If the SSP operating system is damaged and cannot perform an IPL, use the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (STRM36) CL command to perform an IPL (restore) of the SSP operating system from tape. Go to “Restoring the SSP Operating System Using the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command” on page 25-21 to restore the SSP operating system.

25-18



Using the Restore Library Procedure to Restore the SSP Operating System Use the Restore Library (RESTLIBR) procedure to restore the SSP operating system library if it is running but is experiencing problems, or when you want to go back to the previous PTF level of SSP operating system. Note: If Licensed program product libraries are to be restored, this must be done after the SSP operating system is loaded. To restore the SSP operating system using the RESTLIBR procedure, do the following: 1. Insert the tape containing the SSP operating system (PPROD - BACKUP1) in the tape cartridge drive. 2. Type the following procedure on the command line at the SSP system console: RESTLIBR #LIBRARY,,,,,,TC 3. Press Enter. The following display appears.

à@

ð Input-Output

á

RESTLIBR #LIBRARY,,,,,,TC RESTLIBR procedure is running.

ñ

After a few minutes, the display clears. The next display should be the SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - SIGN ON display.


25-19


à@

SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - SIGN ON

ð

User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSSSP__ Password

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _________

4. Enter the information on the SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - SIGN ON display using the following instructions: a. User ID: Type your user ID (SYSSSP is the default). If the Password prompt is not displayed, the user ID could be your name or initials. If the Password prompt is displayed, type the user ID assigned to you. b. Password: Type your 4-character password. This password does not appear on the display when you type it. If security is not active, the Password prompt is not displayed. c. After you type the information on the SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD – SIGN ON display, press Enter. An initial program load (IPL) begins from tape. The display clears and the SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD – INPUT/OUTPUT display appears. If this display does not appear, refer to the System Problem Determination–SSP book, SC21-8296.

à@

SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - INPUT/OUTPUT

ð

Processing input from:

Location

-

TC

Volume ID

-

SAVEDS

5. This display may ask you to perform an action, such as insert another tape. If you are asked to perform an action, perform the action that is requested and press Enter.

25-20



After a few minutes, a display, similar to the following, appears:

à@

ð

SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - MESSAGES

SSP generation complete, MSIPL from disk started.

á

ñ This display informs you when the SSP operating system restore is complete. There is a delay of a few seconds, then the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine automatically starts an IPL from disk. When this happens, the display clears. After a few minutes, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine SIGN ON display appears. If this display does not appear, refer to the System Problem Determination–SSP book, SC21-8296. Continue by signing on to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see Chapter 2 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297.

Restoring the SSP Operating System Using the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command If the SSP operating system becomes damaged and you cannot perform an IPL, you can use the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (STRM36) CL command to restore the SSP operating system. Before Your Begin... 1. If the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is still running, stop it. For directions, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.” 2. Make sure the workstation designated as the SSP system console is turned on.

To perform an IPL from tape: 1. Insert the tape that contains the backup of the SSP operating system (PPROD - BACKUP1) in the tape cartridge tape drive.


25-21


2. On the command line of the OS/400 system console, type STRM36 3. Press F4. The command prompt for Start M36 (STRM36) appears. 4. In the Machine field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that is to be restored. 5. In the Library field, type the name of the OS/400 library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that is to be restored. 6. In the IPLtype field, type \TC 7. Press Enter. The following message appears at the bottom of the display: Request to start machine-name put on job queue. where machine-name is the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you specified. After a few minutes, the display clears for the workstation designated as the system console for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you are restoring. The next display should be the SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - SIGN ON display.

à@

SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - SIGN ON

ð

User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSSSP__ Password

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _________

8. Enter the following information on the SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD SIGN ON display: a. Type your user ID in the User ID field (SYSSSP is the default). If the Password field is not shown, you could use your name, initials, or any other letters for the user ID. b. If the Password field is shown, type your password in the Password field. The password is the four-character user ID assigned to you. This password does not appear on the display when you type it. If security is not active, the Password field is not displayed. c. Press Enter. An initial program load (IPL) begins from tape. The display clears and the SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD – INPUT/OUTPUT display appears. If this display does not appear, refer to the System Problem Determination–SSP book, SC21-8296.

25-22



à@

SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - INPUT/OUTPUT

ð

Processing input from:

Location

-

TC

Volume ID

-

SAVEDS

9. This display may ask you to perform an action, such as insert another tape. If you are asked to perform an action, perform the requested action and press Enter.


25-23


After a few minutes, a display, similar to the following, appears:

à@

SSP GENERATION AND RELOAD - MESSAGES

ð

SSP generation complete, MSIPL from disk started.

á

ñ This display informs you when the SSP operating system restore is complete. There is a delay of a few seconds, then the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine automatically starts an IPL from disk. When this happens, the display clears. After a few minutes, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine SIGN ON display appears. If this display does not appear, refer to the System Problem Determination–SSP book, SC21-8296. Continue by signing on to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see Chapter 2 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297.

Restoring the Licensed Program Products Product libraries must be restored from tape using specific restore commands for that product (for example, RPGLOAD for RPG and SEULOAD for SEU). Other files, folders and libraries that are part of the program product must be restored using the RESTORE, RESTFLDR and RESTLIBR procedures. Before Your Begin... 1. Insert the tape cartridge you used during the save of the licensed program products in the tape drive. The tape has a volume ID of PPROD. 2. The session library must be set to #LIBRARY to use the procedures in this section. Use the SLIB procedure to set the session library as follows: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SLIB ð b. Press Enter.

25-24



You can restore the licensed program products in any of the following ways: Interactively You key each restore procedure on the command line at the SSP system console. Restoring the licensed program products this way is very time consuming and the tape LEAVE option does not work properly. The advantage to this way is that no previous preparation is required. Using a previously created procedure. This previously created procedure contains all of the procedures you would have typed if you were to restore the licensed program products interactively. Restoring the licensed program products this way is less time consuming and the tape LEAVE option works properly. The disadvantage to this way of restoring is that some previous preparation is required.

Restoring the Licensed Program Products Interactively To restore the licensed program products interactively: 1. Determine which licensed program products you want to restore to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. Using Figure 25-2 on page 25-30, find the programming support functions you want to restore. If the procedure name for the programming support function is not RESTORE, RESTFLDR, RESTLIBR or DICTLOAD: a. Type that procedure name on the command line at the SSP system console. b. Press Enter. For example, if the programming support function was DFU, the procedure name is DFULOAD. DFULOAD is not RESTORE, RESTFLDR, RESTLIBR or DICTLOAD, so DFULOAD would be typed on the command line at the SSP system console. If the procedure name for the programming support function is RESTORE, RESTFLDR, RESTLIBR or DICTLOAD, follow the steps below: If the procedure name is RESTORE: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type RESTORE b. Press the Help key. The help display for the RESTORE procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to restore field, type the file name. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the file name of the programming support that is to be restored. d. Press Enter. A second help display appears. e. In the Location of file field, type TC f. Press Enter. A third help display appears.


25-25


Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the RESTORE procedure. The default values will work. g. Press Enter. If the procedure name is RESTFLDR: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type RESTFLDR b. Press the Help key. The help display for the RESTFLDR procedure appears. c. In the Name of folder containing folder to restore field, type the folder name. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the folder name of the programming support that is to be restored. d. In the Location of file field, type TC e. Press Enter. A second help display appears. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the RESTFLDR procedure. The default values will work. f. Press Enter. If the procedure name is RESTLIBR: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type RESTLIBR b. Press the Help key. The help display for the RESTLIBR procedure appears. c. In the Name of library to be restored field, type the library name. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the library name of the programming support that is to be restored. d. In the Location of file field, type TC e. Press Enter. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the RESTLIBR procedure. The default values will work. If the procedure name is DICTLOAD: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type DICTLOAD b. Press the Help key. The help display for the DICTLOAD procedure appears. c. In the Dictionary to load field, type the dictionary ID. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the dictionary ID of the programming support that is to be restored. d. Press Enter.

25-26



Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the DICTLOAD procedure. The default values will work. 3. Repeat step 2 on page 25-25 for each of the programming support functions you want to restore. 4. You have completed the task of restoring the licensed program products interactively. If you are not going to restore the other SSP system files, remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive and return it to its protective container.

Creating a Procedure to Restore Licensed Program Products Note: The procedure you are creating will perform more efficiently if the order that the products are restored is the same as the order that the products were saved to tape. This efficiency is achieved because the tape does not need rewinding between restores. The procedure will work correctly even if the order is the same. To create a procedure to restore the licensed program products (features and products), do as follows: 1. Do one of the following: Method 1 a. Use the print option P of the LIBR function to print a copy of the procedure you created to save the licensed program products. You can use the printed copy as a reminder of the order the products are saved. b. Complete the other steps in this section as they are written. Method 2 a. Use the copy option Y of the LIBR function to create a copy of the procedure you created to save the licensed program products. Note: Be sure you rename the procedure while you are making the copy. b. Instead of adding the statements indicated in the other steps in this topic, replace the save statements with the restore statements. 2. Use DSU, FSEDIT or SEU to edit a new procedure library member. The name of the procedure and the library you put it in is your choice. You could choose RESTLPP in #LIBRARY. For more information on creating a procedure, see “Making Procedures” in the S/36 System Reference book, SC21-9020. 3. Determine which programming support you want to restore to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 4. Using the Figure 25-2 on page 25-30, find the programming support functions you want to restore. 5. If the procedure name for the programming support function is not RESTORE, RESTFLDR, RESTLIBR or DICTLOAD, add that procedure name to the procedure you are editing. For example, if the programming support function was DFU, the procedure name is DFULOAD. DFULOAD is not RESTORE, RESTFLDR, RESTLIBR or DICTLOAD, so you would add DFULOAD to the new procedure. 6. If the procedure name for the programming support function is RESTORE, RESTFLDR, RESTLIBR or DICTLOAD, add that procedure with all the necessary parameters to the new procedure. Chapter 25. Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information

25-27


If the procedure name is RESTORE: add the following to the new procedure: RESTORE file name,,,,,,TC,,,,,,,,,,,LEAVE where file name is the file name of the programming support that is to be restored. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the file name of the programming support that is to be restored. Note: On the RESTORE procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. If the procedure name is RESTFLDR, add the following to the new procedure: RESTFLDR folder name,,,TC,,,LEAVE where folder name is the folder name of the programming support that is to be restored. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the folder name of the programming support that is to be restored. Note: On the RESTFLDR procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. If the procedure name is RESTLIBR, add the following to the new procedure: RESTLIBR library name,,,,,,TC,LEAVE where library name is the library name of the programming support that is to be restored. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the library name of the programming support that is to be restored. Note: On the RESTLIBR procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. If the procedure name is DICTLOAD, add the following to the new procedure: DICTLOAD dictionary ID where dictionary ID is the dictionary ID of the programming support that is to be restored. See Figure 25-2 on page 25-30 for the dictionary ID of the programming support that is to be restored. Note: On the DICTLOAD procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. 7. Repeat step 4 on page 25-27 for each of the programming support functions you want to restore. 8. After all the procedure names for the programming support you want to restore are added to the new procedure, end the edit session and replace the member in the library.

25-28



Restoring the Licensed Program Products from a Previously Created Procedure To restore the licensed program products using a procedure you created previously: 1. If you have not created the procedure, follow the steps described in section “Creating a Procedure to Restore Licensed Program Products” on page 25-27 and then return here. 2. Set the session library to the library that contains the procedure you created to restore the licensed program products. a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SLIB library name where library name is the name of the library that contains the procedure you created to restore the licensed program products. b. Press Enter. 3. On the command line at the SSP system console, type the name of the procedure you created to restore the licensed program products. 4. Press Enter. 5. When the command entry display appears again, the procedure has ended and you have completed the task of restoring the licensed program products. 6. If you are not going to restore the other SSP system files, remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive and return it to its protective container.


25-29


Figure 25-2 (Page 1 of 3). Licensed Program Product Restore Procedures Programming Support to be Saved

Procedure Name

Programmer and Operator Productivity Aid

POPLOAD

Value Added Software Package

VASPLOAD

Migration Analyzer

ANLZLOAD

DFU

DFULOAD

WSU

WSULOAD

SEU

SEULOAD

SDA

SDALOAD

RPG II

RPGLOAD

COBOL

COBLOAD

BASIC

BASLOAD

FORTRAN

FORTLOAD

Assembler

ASMLOAD

DisplayWrite/36

TEXTLOAD RESTFLDR

Personal Service/36

OFCLOAD

Document Library Services

DLSLOAD

PROFS Bridge

PROFLOAD

Query/36

QRYLOAD

Object Distribution Facility

ODFLOAD

Transition Aid

TNLOAD

Online Information for: Object Distribution Facility DisplayWrite/36 Personal Services/36

Document Library Services Query/36 IDDU

DSU Shared Folders

25-30


RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTORE RESTLIBR RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTFLDR RESTORE RESTORE RESTORE RESTFLDR RESTFLDR


#PRFFLDR

#OFCFLDR 1 #WPFLDR 2 WPDOCS #OFCFLDR 1 $OUDRSMP #DQRYSMP #DIRSMP #DLSFLDR #QRYFLDR #IDDFLDR #IDDUSMP #USERDCT CUSTCDT NAMEADDR NAMEPHON #DSUFLDR #WPFLDR 2



Procedure Name


DisplayWrite/36 Language Dictionaries: English French French-Canadian Spanish Italian Danish German Swedish Norwegian Dutch Icelandic Portuguese

DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD DICTLOAD

ENGLISH FRENCH FRENCHCA SPANISH ITALIAN DANISH GERMAN SWEDISH NORWEGIAN DUTCH ICELANDIC PORTUGUESE

Development Support Utility

DSULOAD

Business Graphics Utility/36

BGULOAD

PC Support/36, including: Shared Folders PC Support/36 Organizer PC Support/36 Pass-Thru

IWLOAD

PC Support/36 IBM TokenRing Network Support

LRTRLOAD

PC Support/36 Work Station Feature

WSFLOAD

Multinational Character Set Conversion

5

3

and

MCSTLOAD

Software Distribution Support

SWDLOAD

LAN Communications Support

LANLOAD

Character Generator Utility IGC Sort

5

5

4

CGULOAD SRTXLOAD

Support for Printing/Reading Online Information

DOCPLOAD


25-31



Procedure Name


3278 Device Emulation via IBM Personal Computer

RESTORE

#EPPCLD1

4

Table notes: 1

#OFCFLDR is used by both Personal Services/36 and Object Distribution Facility. If you have both functions on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, it is only necessary to restore the folder once.

2

#WPFLDR is used by both DisplayWrite/36 and Shared Folders. If you have both functions on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, it is only necessary to restore the folder once.

3

The Shared Folders procedure (SHRFLOAD), the PC Support/36 Organizer procedure (PCOLOAD) and the PC Support/36 Pass-Thru procedure (IWPTLOAD) are included in the base PC Support/36 procedure IWLOAD.

4

The virtual disk #EPPCLD1 is not a part of PC Support/36. The virtual disk #EPPCLD1 must be restored prior to restoring PC Support/36. The virtual disk is then activated when the IWLOAD procedure is run.

5

This programming support would only be supported on the Ideographic version of the SSP.

Restoring the Other SSP System Files This section describes the steps that must be followed to restore any of the following saved SSP system files:

Password security file Resource security file Network Resource Directory Extended character set files SSP configuration members Before You Begin... 1. Insert the tape cartridge you used during the save of the other SSP system files in the tape drive. 2. The session library must be set to #LIBRARY to use the procedures in this section. Use the SLIB procedure to accomplish this. a. On the command line at the SSP system console type SLIB ð b. Press Enter.

The ways to restore other saved SSP system files are: 1. Interactively You key each restore procedure on the command line at the SSP system console. Restoring the other SSP system files this way is very time consuming and the tape LEAVE option does not work properly. The advantage to restoring this way is that no previous preparation is required. 2. Using a previously created procedure.

25-32



This previously created procedure contains all the procedures you would have keyed in if you were to restore the other SSP system files interactively. Restoring the other SSP system files this way is less time consuming and the tape LEAVE option works properly. The disadvantage to restoring this way is that some previous preparation is required.

Restoring the Other SSP System Files Interactively To restore the other SSP system files interactively, do as follows: 1. If you want to restore the password security file to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SECREST USERID b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SECREST procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to restore field, type the name of the tape file where you saved the password security file. d. In the Location of file field, type TC e. Press Enter. A second help display appears. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SECREST procedure. The default values will work. f. Press Enter. The password security file is restored from tape. 2. If you want to restore the resource security file to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SECREST RESOURCE b. Press the Help key. The help display for the SECREST procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to restore field, type the name of the tape file where you saved the resource security file. d. In the Location of file field, type TC e. Press Enter. A second help display appears. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the SECREST procedure. The default values will work. f. Press Enter. The resource security file is restored from tape. 3. If you want to restore the Network Resource Directory (NRD) to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: Chapter 25. Saving and Restoring the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Information

25-33


a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type RESTNRD b. Press the Help key. The help display for the RESTNRD procedure appears. c. In the Name of directory to be restored field, type #NRD.FLE d. In the Location of directory field, type TC e. Press Enter. A second help display appears. Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the RESTNRD procedure. The default values will work. f. Press Enter. The network resource directory is restored from tape. 4. If you have an Ideographic version of the SSP and you want to restore the extended character set file #EXT1818: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type RESTEXTN b. Press the Help key. The help display for the RESTEXTN procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to be restored field, type the name of the tape file where you saved the #EXT1818 file. d. In the Name of the extended character file prompt, type #EXT1818 Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the RESTEXTN procedure. The default values will work. e. Press Enter. The extended character set file #EXT1818 is restored from tape. 5. If you have an Ideographic version of the SSP and you want to restore the extended character set file #EXT2424: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type RESTEXTN b. Press the Help key. The help display for the RESTEXTN procedure appears. c. In the Name of file to be restored prompt, type the name of the tape file where you saved the #EXT2424 file. d. In the Name of the extended character file field, type #EXT2424 Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the RESTEXTN procedure. The default values will work.

25-34



e. Press Enter. The extended character set file #EXT2424 is restored from tape. 6. If you want to restore the SSP configuration members on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type RESTLIBR b. Press the Help key. The help display for the RESTLIBR procedure appears. c. In the Name of library to be restored field, type the library name that contained the SSP configuration members when the save was done. Normally, these members are stored in a library named #CNFGLIB. d. In the Location of file field, type TC Note: No values need to be specified for the other parameters on the RESTLIBR procedure. The default values will work. e. Press Enter. The library containing your configuration members is restored from tape.

Creating a Procedure to Restore the Other Saved SSP System Files Note: The procedure you are creating will perform more efficiently if the order that the products are restored is the same as the order that the products were saved to tape. This efficiency is achieved because the tape does not need rewinding between restores. The procedure will work correctly even if the order is the same. To create a procedure to restore the other saved SSP system files such as password security file and resource security file: 1. Do one of the following: Method 1 a. Use the print option P of the LIBR function to print a copy of the procedure you created to save the licensed program products. You can use the printed copy as a reminder of the order the products are saved. b. Complete the other steps in this section as they are written. Method 2 a. Use the copy option Y of the LIBR function to create a copy of the procedure you created to save the licensed program products. Note: Be sure you rename the procedure while you are making the copy. b. Instead of adding the statements indicated in the other steps in this topic, replace the save statements with the restore statements. 2. Use DSU, FSEDIT or SEU to edit a new procedure library member. The name of the procedure and the library you put it in is your choice. You might choose


25-35


RESTOSF in #LIBRARY. For more information on creating a procedure, see “Making Procedures” in the S/36 System Reference book, SC21-9020. 3. If you have not created the procedure, follow the steps described in section “Creating a Procedure to Restore Licensed Program Products” on page 25-27 and then return here. 4. If you want to restore the password security file to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SECREST USERID,file name,,,TC,,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where the password security file was saved. Note: On the SECREST procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. 5. If you want to restore the resource security file to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: SECREST RESOURCE,file name,,,TC,,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where the resource security file was saved. Note: On the SECREST procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. 6. If you want to restore the Network Resource Directory to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: RESTNRD #NRD.FLE,TC,,,LEAVE Note: On the RESTNRD procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. 7. If you want to restore the extended character set file #EXT1818 to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: RESTEXTN file name,,#EXT1818,TC,,,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where the #EXT1818 extended character set file was saved. Note: On the RESTEXTN procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. 8. If you want to restore the extended character set file #EXT2424 to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure: RESTEXTN file name,,#EXT2424,TC,,,,,LEAVE where file name is the name of the tape file where the #EXT2424 extended character set file was saved. Note: On the RESTEXTN procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. 9. If you want to restore the SSP configuration members to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, add the following to the new procedure:

25-36



RESTLIBR library name,,,,,,TC,LEAVE where file name is the name of the library that contained the SSP configuration members when they were saved. Normally, these members are stored in a library named #CNFGLIB. Note: On the RESTLIBR procedure there are parameters that were not specified (the null parameters ',,'). The default values are used for these parameters. 10. After all the procedures used to restore the other SSP system files are added to the new procedure, end the edit session and replace the procedure member in the library.

Restoring the Other SSP System Files from a Previously Created Procedure To restore the other SSP system files using a procedure you created previously: 1. If you have not created the procedure, follow the steps described in section “Creating a Procedure to Restore the Other Saved SSP System Files” on page 25-35 and then return here. 2. Set the session library to the library that contains the procedure you created to restore the other SSP system files. a. On the command line at the SSP system console, type SLIB library name where library name is the name of the library that contains the procedure you created to restore the other SSP system files. b. Press Enter. 3. On the command line at the SSP system console, type the name of the procedure you created to restore the other SSP system files. 4. Press Enter. 5. When the command entry display appears again, the procedure has ended and you have completed the task of restoring the other SSP system files. 6. Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive and return it to its protective container.


25-37


25-38


SSP PTFs

Chapter 26. Working with SSP Program Temporary Fixes An SSP program temporary fix (PTF) is a solution to a problem or a potential problem that exists in the: SSP operating system (SSP) SSP features (For example: POP, VASP, and Transition Aid) Licensed program products (LPPs) Program Request for Price Quotation (PRPQ) SSP PTFs could also fix problems that appear to be hardware failures or provide new functions. SSP PTFs are designed to replace the failing load module(s) or procedure(s) in a product library. Generally, the failing load modules or procedures are incorporated into a future release of the system. The program maintenance strategy discussed in this chapter applies to the IBM AS/400 system service and delivery, specifically the AS/400 Advanced 36 system.

AS/400 Advanced 36 Program Maintenance Strategy The AS/400 program maintenance strategy consists of preventative service and corrective service.

Preventative Service Preventative service helps you avoid problems that have been found and fixed since the start of the current release. Cumulative PTF Packages are used to perform preventative service.

Cumulative PTF Packages |

The cumulative PTF contains PTFs for:

|

Licensed Internal Code (LIC)

|

OS/400 operating system

|

OS/400 licensed programs

|

SSP operating system

|

SSP licensed program products

|

The cumulative PTF package is given a name with the following format: CYJJJVRM

| |

where:

|

C

Indicates cumulative PTF package

|

Y

Is the last digit of the year in which the package was released

|

JJJ

Is the Julian date the package was released


26-1

SSP PTFs

VRM

| |

Is the version, release and modification level of the software running on the system.

An example of a cumulative PTF package name is C611537ð. The cumulative PTF package was released April 15, 1996 for software at version 3, release 7 and modification 0.

| | |

The Cumulative PTF package is created so OS/400 can load and apply the PTFs for:

| | |

The Licensed Internal code

|

The OS/400 operating system

|

The OS/400 licensed programs and the SSP can copy and apply PTFs for:

| |

The SSP operating system

|

The SSP licensed program products Cumulative PTF packages contain all PTFs from the previous Cumulative PTF package plus any new preventative PTFs. A corrective PTF becomes a preventative PTF after it has gone through extensive testing and after it does not require any special instructions or handling. Cumulative PTFs can be ordered electronically or by telephone. Cumulative PTF packages are sent to you by mail on a CD-ROM. If your service representative is not from IBM, you might receive your cumulative PTF package on a tape cartridge.

| | | | | | |

Corrective Service Corrective service corrects problems reported to IBM service support. If you have a problem with the SSP, SSP features or LPPs, you use the System Problem Determination–SSP book, SC21-8296, to help isolate the problem. This book might direct you to contact your service representative for assistance. If there is a problem with the IBM supplied software, a PTF is made available to fix the problem.

Corrective Service SSP PTFs There are three types of PTFs for corrective service: Test PTFs Development cannot adequately test the PTF, so the customer is asked to help test the PTF. Traps PTFs Development cannot recreate the reported problem. They need additional information to solve the problem. A trap is developed to get that additional information and is supplied as a PTF. Corrective PTFs (sometimes called Patches) These PTFs fix a specific problem reported by a customer. Corrective service SSP PTFs could be sent to you in the following ways: On a corrective cumulative PTF package on a CD-ROM sent by IBM.

26-2


SSP PTFs

On a corrective cumulative PTF package on a tape cartridge sent to you by your service representative. Electronically using Electronic Customer Support. An electronically sent SSP PTF is sent to the OS/400 operating system using Electronic Customer Support. For more information on Electronic Customer Support see Appendix D, “Using Electronic Customer Support.”

Ordering SSP PTFs and PTF Information Preventative cumulative PTF packages or Corrective PTFs can be ordered by: Contacting your service provider and asking for the latest AS/400 Advanced 36 Cumulative PTF package. Using the OS/400 Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) command and Electronic Customer Support. For information on using SNDPTFORD and Electronic Customer Support, see Appendix D, “Using Electronic Customer Support.”

Displaying or Printing Cumulative PTF Information You can choose to either display or print information about IBM-supplied PTFs. To do so, perform the following steps: 1. Select a PTF media device that contains the IBM-supplied PTFs. The PTFs could be on 1/4-inch tape or on CD-ROM. The PTF procedure reads only from the tape cartridge (TC) device. If the PTF media is 1/4-inch tape, continue with step 2. If the media that contains the IBM-supplied PTFs is on CD-ROM, you must remap the device TC to be the CD-ROM drive. For directions, see “Mapping the TC Device ID to the CD-ROM Drive” on page 26-16. 2. Remove the PTF media from its protective container and insert it into the appropriate drive. Note: For information on using different kinds of media from your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see Chapter 7 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297. For information on using different kinds of media from OS/400, see Chapter 4 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. 3. Type PTF NEWS,RESTORE on the entry line. 4. Press Enter. The PTFNEWS library is restored to the disk. 5. Type PTF NEWS on the entry line. 6. Press the Help key.

Chapter 26. Working with SSP Program Temporary Fixes

26-3

SSP PTFs

à@

ð

PTF PROCEDURE Applies PTFs (program temporary fixes) and patches to IBM-supplied and user programs that are found to be in error, or provides information about IBM-supplied PTFs. Function to be performed . . . . . . APPLY,COPY,DELETE,DIRECT, LIST,PATCH,REMOVE,RESTORE,SAVE,MAPPLY,MCOPY,MREMOVE,NEWS

NEWS___

PTF news function to be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL,BULLETIN,DELETE,PTFINDEX,PTFXREF,RESTORE,newsletter name

ALL_____

7. Type one of the following in the PTF news function to be performed field. a. Type ALL to receive: All of the newsletters in the PTFNEWS library A list of cross-referenced PTFs A PTF index b. Type BULLETIN to select the printing or displaying of the PTFNEWS library. 8. Press Enter.

à@

ð

PTF PROCEDURE Applies PTFs (program temporary fixes) and patches to IBM-supplied and user programs that are found to be in error, or provides information about IBM-supplied PTFs. Function to be performed . . . . . . APPLY,COPY,DELETE,DIRECT, LIST,PATCH,REMOVE,RESTORE,SAVE,MAPPLY,MCOPY,MREMOVE,NEWS

NEWS___

PTF news function to be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALL,BULLETIN,DELETE,PTFINDEX,PTFXREF,RESTORE,newsletter name

ALL_____

Type of output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY,PRINT

DISPLAY

9. In the Type of output field, type PRINT to have the PTF information printed. Or, DISPLAY to have the PTF information shown on your display. 10. Press Enter. Depending on your selection, information similar to the following is shown or printed:

26-4


SSP PTFs

\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ \ \ RELEASE 7.5 PTF BULLETIN FILE \ \ THE PTF BULLETIN FILE CONTAINS IMPORTANT "READ-ME-FIRST" DATA. \ THE "ABSTRACT" ALLOWS YOU TO DETERMINE WHETHER OR NOT THE DATA \ IS APPROPRIATE TO YOUR SYSTEM USAGE. "ADDITIONAL INFORMATION" \ PROVIDES MORE DETAIL ON THE "READ-ME-FIRST" DATA WHENEVER IT \ IS NECESSARY. \ \ CURRENT PTF LEVEL: LAST BULLETIN UPDATE: \ \ TAPE MEDIA IN xxxxxxxx PREVENTATIVE PTF PACKAGE: \ SYSTEM UNIT: 94ð2 ONE QIC525 1/4 INCH TAPE CARTRIDGE \ \ TAPE MEDIA IN xxxxxxxx CORRECTIVE PTF PACKAGE: \ SYSTEM UNIT: 94ð2 ONE QIC525 1/4 INCH TAPE CARTRIDGE Look through the information for descriptions of what the PTFs in the package are fixing. 11. If you changed the device mapping of the TC device to be the CD-ROM device, and you are not going to use the CD-ROM drive in later steps, you must change it back to the tape cartridge tape drive. To change it back, follow the directions in “Changing the TC Device ID Back to a Tape Cartridge Drive” on page 26-17 and then return here.

Installing Cumulative SSP PTF Packages The installation of a cumulative SSP PTF package is a two-step process: 1. Copying SSP preventative PTFs from the PTF media to the system 2. Applying SSP preventative PTFs For detailed information on installing Cumulative SSP PTF packages use the PTF Shipping Information Letter that comes with the Cumulative PTF package. Note: It is important to remember, the SSP PTF procedure only installs PTFs from a device that has a device ID of TC. If you received a cumulative PTF package on CD-ROM, you must map the device that has an ID of TC to be the CD-ROM drive. Before you copy the PTFs, follow the steps in “Mapping the TC Device ID to the CD-ROM Drive” on page 26-16.

Corrective SSP PTFs (Patches) Installing Corrective SSP PTFs from CD-ROM or Tape Before you begin... Prior to installing your corrective SSP PTF, review the PTF Shipping Information Letter that came with the corrective PTF. There might be special instructions you must do when installing the PTF.


26-5

SSP PTFs

You use the AUTOPTCH procedure to install corrective SSP PTFs (patches) from CD-ROM and tape. To install corrective SSP PTFs, do as follows: 1. If the corrective PTF is on a tape cartridge, go to step 3. 2. If the corrective PTF is on CD-ROM, you must map the device TC to be the CD-ROM drive. To do this, follow the steps in “Mapping the TC Device ID to the CD-ROM Drive” on page 26-16. 3. Insert the media that contains the corrective PTF into the appropriate drive. Note: For information on using different kinds of media from your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, see Chapter 7 of the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297. For information on using different kinds of media from OS/400, see Chapter 4 of the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206. 4. From the console for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state. To do this, follow the directions in “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. After this is done, return here. If you completed this step, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in a dedicated state. 5. On the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type AUTOPTCH APPLY,patchid,TC Where: APPLY

Specifies you wish to apply (install) a corrective PTF.

patchid

Is the patch ID of the SSP corrective PTF. The patch ID is always 8 characters long. The first 2 characters are TF, PT or DT. The third character is the version of the patch (For example, A, B, or C) The remaining 5 characters are the last 5 digits of the APAR that reported the problem this corrective PTF is going to fix.

TC

Specifies the corrective PTF is to be installed from a tape cartridge or a CD-ROM that was mapped to TC.

6. Press Enter. A message AUTOPTCH procedure is running. is shown at the bottom of the display. The corrective PTF is installed. 7. If you changed the device mapping of the TC device to be the CD device, you should change it back at this time. To do so, follow the directions in “Changing the TC Device ID Back to a Tape Cartridge Drive” on page 26-17. 8. On the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type START SYSTEM 9. Press Enter. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is no longer dedicated.

26-6


SSP PTFs

|

Installing Corrective SSP PTFs That Were Sent Electronically

|

If you have previously installed an electronically sent PTF, go to “Electronic Installation Checklist” on page 26-9.

|

Getting Electronic Customer Support Up and Running

| |

If you want to receive SSP PTFs electronically, you need to install the software and hardware indicated in the Fastpath Installation of Your Advanced 36 book, SA41-4138.

|

Getting ILAN Up and Running

|

In order to install an electronically sent SSP PTF, ILAN must be running on your system. ILAN communications allow you to send the PTF from OS/400 to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If you have not set up ILAN, follow the directions in Chapter 4 of the Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377. Then, start the ILAN as directed in Chapter 29, “System-to-System Communications - ILAN Communications”

|

|

| | | | | | |

Using DDM for PTFs Sent Electronically from the OS/400 operating system to the SSP operating system

|

In order for DDM to do this copy, the Network Resource Directory (NRD) must be defined and an entry must be put in the NRD for the electronically sent PTF.

|

The NRD:

|

|

Contains information about each remote file that can be accessed using DDM

|

Reflects the DDM network as seen from the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's viewpoint

|

|

Identifies the remote files that can be accessed by the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine

|

Identifies the remote system where the files are located.

|

| | | |

If you have not previously installed an electronically sent PTF, you need the Local control point name of the AS/400 system. If you do not know the name, do the following: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type DSPNETA 2. Press Enter. 3. Find the line titled Local control point name. This is the name of the AS/400 system in a Network. 4. Make note of the name. 5. Press Cmd3 (Exit) to return to a command line. Because you have not previously installed an electronically sent PTF, you need to define an entry in the Network Resource Directory. To define that entry, do as follows:

|

1. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type EDITNRD 2. Press Enter.


26-7

SSP PTFs

If the NRD already exists, the NETWORK RESOURCE DIRECTORY edit display is shown. If this display is shown, go to step 5 on page 26-8. If the NRD does not already exist, the NETWORK RESOURCE DIRECTORY create a new directory display is shown. The NRD must be created.

à@

NETWORK RESOURCE DIRECTORY

Optional-\

ð

Creates a new Directory Number of entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-9999

____

3. In the Number of entries field, type the number of remote files you plan to access. Note: If you are only going to use the DDM for electronically sent PTFs, 40 entries is large enough. 4. Press Enter. The NETWORK RESOURCE DIRECTORY edit display is shown.

à@

ð

NETWORK RESOURCE DIRECTORY Edits entries in the directory Scan for local label

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

________

--------------------------------------------------------------------------LOCAL LABEL ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ Cmd4-Delete

REMOTE LOCATION ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________ ________

Cmd6-Print

REMOTE LABEL _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ Cmd7-End

Cmd8-Reset

á

Cmd1ð-Add

Roll keys-Page

ñ

5. Under the LOCAL LABEL heading, type LOCPTFFL. 6. Under the REMOTE LOCATION heading, type the OS/400 local control point name used when you set up ILAN communications. 7. Under the REMOTE LABEL heading, type RMTPTFFL. Note: This name is changed when your first electronically sent PTF arrives. 8. Press Enter.

26-8


SSP PTFs

9. Press Cmd7 to end the edit session. Other messages, such as COPYDATA is running, may roll up from the bottom of the display. These are normal and should be ignored.

Electronic Installation Checklist During the actual install of the PTF, you need the following: ILAN Subsystem Configuration Member name. The default subsystem shipped with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine was ILANSBS. This was also the recommended name for any additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines you installed. The name of the library the ILAN Subsystem Configuration Member is stored in. The default subsystem shipped with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in #CNFGLIB. It was recommended that the subsystems for any additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines be placed in that library also. The name of the save file that contains the corrective SSP PTF. This name must be in the following format: QU57mnnn where m is the modification level of release 7 (for example, 5 for Release 7.5) and nnn is the last three digits of the SSP PTF. The patch ID of the SSP corrective PTF. The patch ID is always 8 character long. The first 2 characters are TF, PT or DT. The third character is the version of the patch (for example, A, B, or C). The last 5 characters are the last 5 digits of the APAR that reported the problem this corrective PTF is going to fix. A tape cartridge with a volume ID of AUTOPT. You use this tape cartridge to save the library that contains the corrective PTF.

Installing SSP PTFs That Were Sent Electronically The SSP PTF is sent to your OS/400 operating system as a save file (SAVF). A cover letter for the corrective PTF is also sent to your OS/400 operating system. Before you begin... Prior to installing the electronically sent PTF, you must review this cover letter. There may be special instructions you must do when installing the PTF. Instructions for displaying a cover letter are in the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.

1. Make sure you have everything in the “Electronic Installation Checklist” on page 26-9 and that you have read the cover letter for special instructions. 2. From the console for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state. To do this, follow the directions in “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. After this is done, return here.


26-9

SSP PTFs

If you completed this step, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in a dedicated state. You need to start ILAN communications again on the dedicated AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 3. Start ILAN communications as follows: a. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type ENABLE b. Press the Help key. c. In the Subsystem configuration name field, type the name of the ILAN Subsystem Configuration Member name. If you do not know the name, see the “Electronic Installation Checklist” on page 26-9. d. In the Name of library field, type the name of the library that contains the ILAN Subsystem Configuration Member. If you do not know the name, see the list in “Electronic Installation Checklist” on page 26-9. e. In the Line number field, type 15 This is the line number that is always used for ILAN communications. f. Press Enter. ILAN communications should now be started on the dedicated system. 4. Verify that the ILAN subsystem is enabled by following the directions in “ILAN Communications Verification” on page 29-10. If the ILAN subsystem is not enabled, see the directions in the System Problem Determination–SSP book, SC21-8296. 5. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type ECSAPTCH savfname,patchid Where: savfname

Is the save file name that contains the corrective PTF (patch) that you determined earlier.

patchid

Is the patch ID of the SSP corrective PTF you determined earlier.

6. Press Enter. The message ECSAPTCH procedure is running is shown at the bottom of the display. After a few seconds the following will rollup from the bottom of the display. When the NETWORK RESOURCE DIRECTORY display comes up find the LOCAL LABEL - LOCPTFFL. Modify the REMOTE LABEL on this entry to be: U57mnnn When you are done, press Cmd7 to end the edit. When ready to continue, respond with ð to SYS-3725. SYS-3725 Options (ð ) Pause--when ready, enter ð to continue. Note: The message identified in the above text might be SYS-3726. If so, it refers to the Pause message SYS-3725. 7. Write down the number that is in the form U57mnnn.

26-10


SSP PTFs

8. After you have read the instructions on the display, type ð 9. Press Enter. The NETWORK RESOURCE DIRECTORY edit display appears. 10. Find the entry with a LOCAL LABEL of LOCPTFFL. The Roll keys can be used to page forward and backward through the entries. 11. In the REMOTE LABEL field for that entry, type the name that was shown earlier on the display. It was in the form, U57mnnn. 12. Press Enter. 13. Press Cmd7 to end the edit session. COPYDATA is running. These messages are normal and should be ignored. Eventually, the following message appears: SYS-6111 Options ( 123 ) Dedicated system required for this PTF function... This message is informing you that the function that is going to install the corrective PTF requires that the system be dedicated. If you followed all of the steps, the system is dedicated except for ILAN communications that were needed to get the PTF from the OS/400 operating system. 14. Press the Attention key. The INQUIRY OPTIONS display appears.

à@

INQUIRY OPTIONS ð. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Current Interrupted job: W1234567

W1

ð

Resume current interrupted job Request Command display Cancel job and close files; new data is saved Cancel job; new files are lost Set inquiry condition for program Display session status Display messages sent to this display station

Enter number to select option

á

ñ

15. Type 1 16. Press Enter. 17. On the command line, type DISABLE 18. Press the Help key. The DISABLE PROCEDURE help display appears. 19. In the Subsystem configuration name field, type the ILAN Subsystem Configuration Member name. If you do not know the name, see the “Electronic Installation Checklist” on page 26-9.


26-11

SSP PTFs

20. In the Line number field, type 15 This is the line number that is always used for ILAN communications. 21. Press Enter. ILAN communications should now be stopped and the system is again in a dedicated state. 22. Press Cmd1 (Resume job) to resume the interrupted job. The following message appears: SYS-6111 Options ( 123 ) Dedicated system required for this PTF function... 23. Type 1 24. Press Enter. The corrective PTF continues to install. 25. The following message will prompt you to save the PTF to tape: Insert a tape in the tape cartridge drive on which you want to backup the corrective PTF. The volume ID must be AUTOPT. When ready to continue, respond with ð to SYS-3725. SYS-3725 Options (ð ) Pause--when ready, enter ð to continue. 26. Insert a tape that was initialized with a volume ID of AUTOPT. Once saved, you can use the tape if you ever need to install this PTF again or you can use the tape to install this PTF on another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Note: The message identified in the above text might be SYS-3726. If so, it refers to the Pause message SYS-3725. 27. If you do not have a tape cartridge with a volume ID of AUTOPT, do as follows: a. Press the Attention key. The INQUIRY OPTIONS display appears. b. Type 1 c. Press Enter. An INQUIRY command display is shown. d. On the command line, type TAPEINIT TC,SL,AUTOPT,CLEAR,,NOERASE,REWIND e. Press Enter. The tape is initialized. When the initialization is complete, the INQUIRY command display appears again. f. Press Cmd1 (Resume job) to resume the interrupted job.

26-12


SSP PTFs

28. Type ð 29. Press Enter. The library that contains the corrective PTF is saved to tape. When the command entry display appears, the electronically sent PTF has been installed and saved to tape. The save file that was sent to OS/400 and the LIBRFILE that was in the save file have been deleted. 30. Remove the tape with the saved corrective PTF from the tape drive. 31. Put the tape in the protective case and store it in a safe place for use the next time you need it. This completes the process of installing a corrective PTF. 32. To remove system dedication, on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type START SYSTEM 33. Press Enter.

Installing a Saved PTF That Was Sent Electronically If you want to apply this PTF on another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you will need to use the tape you saved this PTF to. You do this by following the directions in this topic. When you installed the electronically sent PTF, the library that contains the PTF was saved to tape. The volume ID of this tape is AUTOPT. During the actual install of the saved corrective PTF, you need the following: The patch ID of the SSP corrective PTF. The patch ID is always 8 character long. The first 2 characters will be TF, PT or DT. The third character is the version of the patch (A, B, or C). The last 5 characters are the last 5 digits of the APAR that reported the problem this corrective PTF is going to fix. The tape cartridge with a volume ID of AUTOPT. This tape contains the save libraries for the electronically sent corrective PTF. To install this PTF on your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows: 1. From the console for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state. To do this, follow the directions in “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. After this is done, return here. If you completed this step, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in a dedicated state. 2. On the command line of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type RESTLIBR patchid,,,,,,TC where patchid is the patch ID of the corrective PTF you determined earlier. 3. Press Enter. 4. When the command display is shown, type


26-13

SSP PTFs

AUTOPTCH APPLY,patchid,F1 where patchid is the patch ID of the corrective PTF you determined earlier. 5. Press Enter. 6. When the command display is shown, type DELETE patchid,F1,,,LIBR where patchid is the patch ID of the corrective PTF you determined earlier. 7. Press Enter. When the command display is shown, the installation of the corrective PTF is complete. This completes the process of installing a saved electronically sent PTF. 8. To remove system dedication, on a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type START SYSTEM 9. Press Enter.

Displaying or Printing Corrective SSP PTF Information After the corrective PTF is installed, you should review the information sent with the PTF. During the install process, a PTF backup library was created. In this library is a source member called README. This member contains any special information about the corrective PTF. The name of the backup library is #Bmnnnnn, where m is the version of the corrective PTF (for example, A, B or C) and nnnnn is the last 5 digits of the APAR that reported the problem this corrective PTF is going to fix. On either the AUTOPTCH or ECSAPTCH procedure you used to install the corrective PTF, the second parameter was the patch ID. It was in the format TFmnnnnn, DTmnnnnn or PTmnnnnn, where m and nnnnn are the same as in the backup library name.

|

To display or print the corrective PTF information, you must display or print the source member named README in the corrective PTF backup library #Bmnnnn. This can be done in the following ways: Using the LISTLIBR procedure. 1. On the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine command line, type LISTLIBR README,SOURCE,#Bmnnnnn,,,,MEMBERS where #Bmnnnnn is the name of the PTF back up library that was discussed earlier in this topic. 2. Press Enter. This LISTLIBR procedure lists the contents of the source member README in library #Bmnnnnn on the current system list device. If the system list device is CRT, the member is shown on your display. If the system list device is a printer, a spool file is created with the contents of the member. The spool file can then be printed or you can browse it using the WRKSPL procedure. Using the LIBR function of the Programmer and Operator Productivity Aid (POP): 1. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type

26-14


SSP PTFs

LIBR #Bmnnnnn where #Bmnnnnn is the name of the PTF back up library that was discussed earlier in this topic. 2. Press Enter. This LIBR procedure shows you the members in the library #Bmnnnnn. You can use the B (Browse) or P (Print) options to display or print the README member.

Removing Corrective SSP PTFs You use the AUTOPTCH procedure to remove corrective PTFs (patches) from the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Note: You can only remove corrective PTFs if the PTF backup library is still be on the system. If the PTF backup library is not on the system, it must be restored before you try to remove a corrective PTF. To remove a corrective PTF: 1. From the console for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, put the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in a dedicated state. To do this, follow the directions in “Putting the AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine In a Dedicated State” on page 16-1. After this is done, return here. If you completed this step, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in a dedicated state. 2. On the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine command line, type AUTOPTCH REMOVE,patchid Where: REMOVE

Specifies you wish to remove a corrective PTF.

patchid

Is the patch ID of the SSP corrective PTF. The patch ID is always 8 characters long. The first 2 characters will be TF, PT or DT. The second character is the version of the patch (for example, A, B, or C). The last 5 characters are the last 5 digits of the APAR that reported the problem this corrective PTF is going to fix.

3. Press Enter. A message AUTOPTCH procedure is running. is shown at the bottom of the display. When the command display appears, the corrective PTF has been removed. The only thing left to do is remove the system dedication. 4. To remove system dedication: a. On a command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type START SYSTEM b. Press Enter.


26-15

SSP PTFs

Mapping the TC Device ID to the CD-ROM Drive To remap the device that has an ID of TC to be the CD-ROM drive: 1. On the command line of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type SYSLIST CRT 2. Press Enter. This changes the system list device to the display. This specifies that the system list output is to be shown at your display station. 3. On the command line of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type DSPSYSVL 4. Press Enter. The SSP SYSTEM VALUES start to roll up on your display. 5. Find the system value that starts DEVMAP

TC.

Note: If it is not on the first display, press Enter to see the next display. To the right of this entry is the OS/400 device name for the tape drive that is currently mapped to the SSP device named TC. 6. Make note of the name shown next to DEVICE TC. You will use this name later to remap TC back to the current OS/400 device name. 7. On the command line of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type CHGSYSVL DEVMAP,TC 8. Press the Help key. The help display for the CHGSYSVL procedure is shown. 9. In the OS/400 device name field, type OPTð1 10. Press Enter. The command line appears if the remapping was successful. If the remapping was successful, until the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is IPLed or device TC is remapped again, any reference to device ID TC actually refers to the CD-ROM drive as OPT01. 11. If the remapping was successful, return to the topic that sent you here. 12. If error message SYS-4725 Invalid parameter 3 in CHGSYSVL procedure is issued, the remapping failed because OPTð1 is not the device name of the CD-ROM drive. Do as follows: a. Respond to the message as follows: 1) Type 3 2) Press Enter. b. Follow the directions in “What to Do if the Mapping Failed.”

26-16


SSP PTFs

What to Do if the Mapping Failed You are here because you received an error when you tried to map the device ID TC to the CD-ROM drive. The following steps will help you determine the OS/400 device name of the CD-ROM device. Do as follows: 1. On a command line on the OS/400 system console, type WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(\DEV) CFGD(\OPT) ASTLVL(\BASIC) 2. Press Enter. The Work with Devices display appears. 3. Look in the Type column for 6320. Beside it in the Device column is the OS/400 device name of the CD-ROM drive. This is the name you must use when mapping TC to the CD-ROM drive. 4. Make note of the OS/400 device name. 5. Press Cmd3 (Exit) to end the Work with Devices job. 6. Repeat the steps in “Mapping the TC Device ID to the CD-ROM Drive,” starting with step 7. When you get to step 9, make sure you type the OS/400 device name you determined.

Changing the TC Device ID Back to a Tape Cartridge Drive After the operations that require you to use the CD-ROM drive are complete, the TC device ID should be mapped back to the 1/4-inch tape drive. To change the mapping of TC back to the tape cartridge drive: 1. On the command line of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console, type CHGSYSVL DEVMAP,TC 2. Press the Help key. 3. In the OS/400 device name field, type the OS/400 device name you determined in step 6 on page 26-16. 4. Press Enter. The TC device ID is now remapped back to the initial OS/400 device name. 5. Return to the step that sent you here.


26-17

SSP PTFs

26-18


Remote Workstation Communications

Chapter 27. Establishing a Communications Link for Remote Workstations To use the communications support on your system, you need to establish a communications link between your system and another location. The action required, at a display station or the system console, to establish the communications link depends upon which communications support you have. This chapter contains a form for remote work station support (RWS) that your programmer or system manager should fill in so you know the steps to use to establish a communications link with the communications support that is on your system. Forms establishing communications links for other communications support appear in the appropriate communications reference books, with examples of how to fill in the form with telephone numbers, procedure names, and dial or answer procedures. Steps 1 and 2 in the “Using Remote Work Station Support” topic should be filled in by your programmer or system manager. The steps you can take to determine the cause of a problem for communications lines are described in the System Problem Determination–SSP book, SC21-8296.

Using Remote Work Station Support Establishing the Communications Link 1. If you have system operator authority or higher, enter the VARY OFF command at a display station for each line, cluster controller, or each device that is to be varied online: For each line, enter VARY ON,,X where X is the line number. For each cluster controller, enter VARY ON,CXX where XX is the work station address. For each device, enter VARY ON,XX where XX is the device ID. 2. You may receive one of the following messages: a. SYS-34ð1 SDLC (line number) Operator dial is required This message is displayed because you have an SDLC switched line, and you must call a remote location. Perform the following steps:

b. SYS-34ðð SDLC (line number) Operator answer is required This message is displayed because you have an SDLC switched line, and you must answer a call from a remote location. Perform the following steps:


27-1

Remote Workstation Communications

c. Other message See the S/36 System Messages book, SC21-7938, for an explanation of the message and the steps that you should follow.

Ending the Communications Link If you have system operator authority or higher, enter the VARY OFF command at a display station for each line, cluster controller, or for each device that is to be varied offline: For each device, enter VARY OFF,XX where XX is the device address. For each cluster controller, enter VARY OFF,CXX where XX is the cluster controller address. For each line, enter VARY OFF,,X where X is the line number. VARY OFF will not be performed if all display stations on the line are not signed off or if the spool writers for remote printers are not stopped.

27-2


AS/400 System Common Operator Tasks

| | | | |

| |

Chapter 28. Problem Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Problem Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Problem Message Sent to SSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Problem Message Sent to OS/400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Product Activity Log to Find out about Hardware Problems Determining Who Owns the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining Who Owns a Printer, Display Station or Media Device Determining the Owner of a Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . Determining Which SSP Job Owns a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the Owner of a Media Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determining the Owner of a Printer or Display Station . . . . . . . Determining the Owner of a Communication Line . . . . . . . . . . How to Handle OS/400 and SSP Printer Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Work with Configuration Status Command to Determine If Devices are Varied Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . Determining What the Error Codes Mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 29. System-to-System Communications - ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Default Startup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Starting the ILAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Starting the OS/400 Side of ILAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (All Connections) . . . . . . . . Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (A Single Connection) . . . . . Automatically Starting ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Starting ILAN Communications for SSP . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Starting ILAN Communications for OS/400 . . . . . . . . . Disabling Automatic Startup of ILAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping ILAN Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping ILAN Communications on the OS/400 Side . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping ILAN Communications on the SSP Side (All Connections) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping ILAN on the SSP Side (Single Connection) ILAN Communications Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification for the First AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . Verification for the Second AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . Verification for the Third AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . OS/400 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSP Side Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Out Why ILAN Is Not ACTIVE or VARIED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovery When Communications Were Not Disabled Before Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Display Station Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Display Station Pass-Through from OS/400 to SSP . . . . . . . Changing the QAUTOVRT Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Pass-Through from SSP to OS/400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Pass-Through from SSP to SSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28-1 28-1 28-1 28-1 28-1 28-1 28-3 28-4 28-5 28-5 28-6 28-8 28-8 28-8 28-9 28-9

29-1 29-3 29-3 29-3 29-3 29-4 29-5 29-6 29-6 29-6 29-7 29-8 29-8 29-8 29-9 29-9 29-10 29-10 29-10 29-11 29-12 29-13 29-13 29-14 29-15 29-15 29-15 29-16 29-16

Chapter 30. Using CL Commands to Manage AS/400 Advanced 36 Configurations and Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command . . . . . . . . Creating An AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Attributes for AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine and Its Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine and Its Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Description for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ending an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration Command Creating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . Changing Attributes and Configuration Details for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . Displaying an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . Printing an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . Renaming an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . Changing the Description for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary Table of CL Commands for Managing AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration Configuration That Exists Immediately after Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . OS/400 Added to a System That Previously Was SSP Only . . . . . . . . OS/400 and SSP Preloaded from IBM Manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Communications Line or a LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Diskette Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Tape or CD-ROM Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Device Mapping . . . . . . . . Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Controller Mapping . . . . . . Changing a Workstation Controller from Controller Mapping to Device Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls SSP Printer Output . . . . . . . Giving SSP Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output . . Giving OS/400 Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output Giving OS/400 Control of Printer Output When There Is No Physical Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls the Display Station . . . . . . . Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 32. Displaying Information About an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration and Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a Configuration Displaying a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


. . . . . . . . .

30-1 30-1 30-2 30-3 30-4 30-4 30-5 30-5 30-6 30-6 30-7 30-7 30-8 30-9 30-10 30-11 30-11 30-12 30-12 30-13 30-13 31-1 31-2 31-2 31-3 31-4 31-8 31-10 31-12 31-17 31-22 31-26 31-26 31-30 31-32 31-36 31-39

32-1 32-1 32-2

Hardware Problem Isolation

Chapter 28. Problem Handling

Hardware Problem Isolation When the system detects a hardware problem and you are running an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, the system reports the hardware problem to either the SSP operating system or the OS/400 operating system.

Hardware Problem Message Sent to SSP If the system determines that the hardware problem is with a single specific device that the SSP operating system is using, the system notifies the SSP operating system about the error. The SSP operating system: Gives a return code to the application program. Issues an error message to the system console or subconsole for printer error messages. Note: If a message is sent to a console, you should follow the error recovery procedure documented in the appropriate S/36 message manual. For information on how to respond to messages, see Chapter 18, “Handling SSP Messages.”

Hardware Problem Message Sent to OS/400 If the system cannot determine that the hardware problems is with a single specific device, the system notifies the OS/400 operating system about the error. Usually, the system sends a message to the OS/400 QSYSOPR message queue. You can use the Display Message (DSPMSG) CL command to display the QSYSOPR message queue. Note: For many of the hardware error messages, you can press Cmd14 to start the Work with problem support to try and determine the cause of the error. For more information on how to respond to OS/400 messages, see Chapter 5, “Handling OS/400 Messages.”

Using the Product Activity Log to Find out about Hardware Problems For many hardware problems, an entry is placed in the Product Activity Log. This log is a list of errors that occurred on the various hardware devices. Examples of hardware devices include: disks, tapes, diskettes, displays, printers, and communication lines. You can use the Start System Service Tools (STRSST) CL command to access the Product Activity Log. For more information about the Product Activity Log, see the AS/400 Service Functions book, SY44-4902.

Determining Who Owns the Device | | |

Devices can be owned by an OS/400 user who has used the Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) command or by an OS/400 user who is using a CL command to access the device. OS/400 users can use the ALCOBJ command to allocate the device even if they are not actually using the device. Devices can also be owned by an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

28-1


This topic will assist you in determining who owns a device that you may want to use. The type of owner determines what you need to do in order to use the device.

| |

If the owner is an OS/400 user:

|

Locate the owner and ask if you can use the device. The OS/400 user can use the Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) CL command to release the device. If the OS/400 user is using a CL command to access the device, the user can end the job to release the device. Devices are also given up when the OS/400 user signs off the system. If the owner is an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: If the device is a display station it is released when the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is powered off. If the device is a tape drive, CD-ROM drive, diskette drive, printer or communication port, it is released when:

| | | |

– The SSP job ends.

|

– The SSP job uses a DEALLOC OCL statement to release the device. Or,

|

– The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is powered off.

|

You can use the instructions in “Determining Which SSP Job Owns a Device” on page 28-5 to find the SSP job which owns the device.

| |

On the OS/400 operating system, hardware resources (for example, printers, displays, and media devices), are defined to the system with device descriptions. A media device is any CD-ROM drive, tape drive, or diskette drive. You refer to a hardware resource by using the name of its device description. When someone is using a resource (owns a resource), a lock is held on the device description by a job that represents the owner.

| | | | | |

The initial device descriptions are created during an IPL when the system detects that there are devices attached that do not have device descriptions associated with them. The names of these device description are based on the the types of devices (for example, PRT01 for a printer, DSP01 for a display, TAP01 for a tape drive).

| | | | |

You can create additional device descriptions for media devices. You might want to do this to specify different device attributes in each of the device descriptions for a particular resource. For example, you might have two device descriptions for the same tape drive. One description might specify QIC525 format. The other might specify QIC2GB format.

| | | | |

When someone is using a resource for which there are multiple device descriptions, the device can be in use by only one of those descriptions at a time. In order to determine who is using a resource, you need to follow the instructions for each of the device descriptions associated with the resource until you find the device description which is in use.

| | | | |

28-2



| | | | |

Determining Who Owns a Printer, Display Station or Media Device To determine who owns a printer, display station or media device (not a communication port), you would: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type: WRKOBJLCK device-name \DEVD

| |

where device-name is the name of the device description. (Examples are DSP01, TAP01, and PRT03). 2. Press Enter.

|

The Work with Objects Locks display is shown for that device. It shows a list of jobs which are using the device or are waiting to use the device. For each job in the list, the following information is shown:

|

Job

The name of the job which is using the device or waiting for the device

|

User

The name of the user profile associated with the job

|

Lock

The type of lock which the job is holding or is waiting to obtain

|

Status

Information on whether the job is holding or waiting for the lock

| |

|

|

HELD

Indicates the job is holding the lock

|

REQ

Indicates the job is waiting for (requesting) the lock

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

3. To determine who owns the device, you use only the jobs in the list which have a status of HELD. If there are two jobs which hold a lock on the device, one job with the name QSYSARB, and the other with a name of the form QM36nnn, then the device is owned by an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. nnn are the decimal digits that represent the ID assigned by the system to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To determine the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, use the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (WRKM36) CL command. For more information on the WRKM36 command, see “Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command” on page 30-1 When you determine which AS/400 Advanced 36 machine owns the device, use the instructions “Determining Which SSP Job Owns a Device” on page 28-5 to find the SSP user. If there is a single job with a name other than QSYSARB which holds a lock on the device, then the device is owned by an OS/400 user. The displayed user name identifies the person to contact about releasing the device. If there is a single job with the name QSYSARB which holds a lock on the device, the device is varied off. If there are multiple device descriptions associated with the resource, only one of them can be varied on at at time. You should repeat these steps for each of the other device descriptions, until you have determined who is using the device. Note:

|

a. To use a varied off device from an OS/400 job, you first need to vary it on.

|

b. When an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is using a device, that device appears to OS/400 as varied off.

|


28-3


|

Determining the Owner of a Communication Port

|

To determine who owns a communication resource, you would: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type:

|

WRKHDWRSC \CMN

|

2. Press Enter.

|

The Work with Communication Resource display is shown.

|

|

3. Search through the list of communication resources shown on the display until you find the resource name you want. You may need to page down to find it.

|

4. In the Opt column next to the resource name, type:

|

5

|

5. Press Enter.

|

The Work with Configuration Descriptions display is shown. This display contains a list of the line descriptions associated with the communication resource. Only one of them can use the communication resource at a time.

| | |

6. Until you determine which line description is using the resource, for each line description in the list, do as follows:

| |

a. In the Opt column, next to a line description name, type:

|

8

|

b. Press Enter.

|

The Work with Configuration Status display is shown.

|

c. Check the Status column.

|

1) If words other than VARIED OFF appear in the Status column, the line description is using the communication resource. In this case, go to step 7 on page 28-4.

| | |

|

2) If the words VARIED OFF appear in the Status column, the line description is not the one which is using the communication resource. In this case, continue with step 6c3.

|

3) Press Enter.

| |

The Work with Configuration Descriptions display is shown.

| |

4) Select the next line description in the list.

|

5) Return to step 6a on page 28-4.

|

7. Note the name of the first or only line description shown on the display.

|

8. Use the first three characters of the name to determine whether the communication port is being used by an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine or is owned by an OS/400 job. If the line description name:

| |

Begins with the characters

| |

Q36

|

an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is using the communication port. Begins with anything other than Q36, the communication resource is owned by an OS/400 job.

| |

9. If an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is using the communication port:

|

28-4



| |

a. Determine the machine ID and communication line number from the line description name. The name is in the form:

|

QM36nnnlxx

|

where:

|

nnn is the ID assigned by the system to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| |

l is the line number by which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine refers to the communication port. Values 1 through 9 identify lines 1 through 9. A value of A identifies line 10.

|

xx can be any characters.

|

|

b. Press Enter three times to return to an OS/400 command line.

|

c. Use the WRKM36 command to determine the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine which owns the communication port. For more information on the WRKM36 command, see “Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command” on page 30-1.

| | | | | | | | | | |

d. After you determine which AS/400 Advanced 36 machine owns the communication port, use the instructions in “Determining Which SSP Job Owns a Device” on page 28-5 to find the SSP owner. 10. If the communication port is owned by an OS/400 job: a. Look at the job name associated with the communication port. The job name includes the name of the user profile which identifies the person to contact about releasing the device. Note: You might need to page down to see the job name.

|

b. Note the user profile name.

|

c. Press Enter three times to return to an OS/400 command line.

Determining Which SSP Job Owns a Device |

This topic includes information on how to determine who owns a

|

Media device

|

Printer or display station

|

Communication line

|

Determining the Owner of a Media Device

|

To determine which SSP job is using a media device which is owned by an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows:

| |

1. From an SSP command display on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type

|

SYSLIST CRT

|

2. Press Enter.

|

3. Type

|

DSPSYSVL

|

4. Press Enter.

|

A list of SSP system values is displayed.

|

5. Find the system values that begin with DEVMAP


28-5


|

6. Find the one that refers to the device description of the media device.

|

7. Note the ID by which the SSP operating system refers to the device (For example, T1, T2, TC, or I1).

|

|

8. Press Enter as many times as necessary to get back to the SSP command display.

|

9. Type

|

STATUS WORKSTN

|

10. Press Enter.

|

The Status Work Station display is shown. All devices defined to the SSP are listed under the WS-ID heading.

| |

11. Find the device ID you noted in step 7. You might need to page down to find it.

| |

The name of the user and the job which is using the device are displayed with the device ID.

| | |

Determining the Owner of a Printer or Display Station

|

To determine which SSP job is using a printer or display station which is owned by an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows:

|

1. On an OS/400 command line, type

| |

DSPM36 library-name/machine-name

|

where library-name is the name of the library that contains the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and machine-name is the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| |

2. Press Enter.

|

The Display M36 Machine display is shown.

|

3. In the Selection field, type

|

2

|

4. Press Enter.

|

The Display M36 Display and Printer Dev display is shown.

|

5. Press F21.

|

The display changes to show the device description names of the various display stations and printers defined to the SSP operating system on this workstation controller.

| | | |

6. Search through the list to find your device.

|

7. If you do not find your device,

|

a. Press Enter

|

b. Move the cursor to the next workstation controller.

|

c. Return to step 5 on page 28-6.

|

8. If you find your device, note its port and address (row and column), and the workstation controller number shown in the upper right corner on the display.

|

9. Press Enter twice.

|

10. Press F3.

|

28-6



|

11. On the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine command display, type

|

CNFIGSSP

|

12. Press Enter.

|

The CNFIGSSP main menu is shown.

|

13. Type

|

3

|

to select Review a configuration.

| |

14. Press Enter. The CONFIGURATION MEMBER DEFINITION display is shown.

|

15. Type

|

5

| | | |

16. Press Enter Screen 6.0 is shown. 17. Press Enter. Screen 5.0 is shown.

|

18. Type

|

1

|

to select Work with display stations and printers.

| |

19. Press Enter. Screen 27.0 is shown.

|

20. Type

|

6

|

to select Change display stations or printer workstation IDs.

| |

21. Press Enter. Screen 40.0 is shown.

|

22. Look at the port number that is shown.

|

23. Press Enter until the port you are looking for is shown.

| | | | | | | |

Note: Ports ðð through ð7 correspond to ports ð through 7 on workstation controller 1. Ports ð8 through 15 correspond to ports ð through 7 on workstation controller 2. Ports 16 through 23 correspond to ports ð through 7 on workstation controller 3. Ports 24 through 31 correspond to ports ð through 7 on workstation controller 4.

|

24. Find the workstation ID that corresponds to the address for which you are looking.

|

25. Press Cmd 19.

|

26. Press Cmd 3.

|


28-7


27. Type

|

STATUS WORKSTN

|

28. Press Enter.

|

The Status Work Station display is shown. All devices defined to the SSP are listed under the WS-ID heading.

| |

|

29. Find the device ID you noted in step 24 on page 28-7. You might need to page down to find it.

|

30. Find the user and jobname in the appropriate columns beside the device.

|

Determining the Owner of a Communication Line

| |

SSP communication lines are not owned by a particular job or user. However, the directions here will help you find out how the line is being used.

|

To determine how an SSP communication line is being used, do as follows:

|

1. On an SSP command display on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type

| |

D L,line-number

|

where line-number is the number of the communication line.

|

The COMMUNICATIONS LINE ACTIVITY display and the Activate Communications line menu are shown.

|

2. Look at the User field shown in the upper right portion of the screen. This field indicates the type of communications job which is using the line.

| |

How to Handle OS/400 and SSP Printer Conflicts There are a number of alternatives. If OS/400 and SSP printer conflicts frequently arise, choose to do one of the following: Use output queue support. Send SSP output to an OS/400 output queue and have the OS/400 spool writer print SSP output along with OS/400 output. For directions, see “Giving SSP Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output” on page 31-26.

|

Dedicate printers to SSP or OS/400. For directions, see “Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls the Display Station” on page 31-36. Get an additional printer.

Using the Work with Configuration Status Command to Determine If Devices are Varied Off The Work with Configuration Status (WRKCFGSTS) command should only be used after the WRKOBJLCK command. When you use the WRKOBJLCK command, a display appears on which the owner of the lock is identified. The user ID which owns the lock on the device has a status of held in the Status field. Any other user IDs which have requested use of the device have REQ in the Status field. Note: A lock on a printer or a display station is an exclusive read (*EXCLRD) lock held by a single job on the system.

28-8


What the Error Codes Mean

When a lock is given up by a display station, the lock request is satisfied and the QBASE subsystem owns the lock as it does when you are on a sign-on display. When a lock is given up by a print writer, the system arbiter owns the lock. If a printer is available, you see the following message: There are no locks for the object. Once you know whether there is a lock on a device, you are ready to use the WRKCFGSTS command to find out whether devices are varied on or varied off.

Handling AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Error Codes Determining What the Error Codes Mean Errors that are generated because there are problems related to using OS/400 and SSP on the same system, are included in this chapter. If you were not referred to this book for recovery, move your cursor to the message and press Cmd1 for more information. If you were referred to this book for recovery, find the error code in the following list. Then, read the Message and Recovery column. The following error codes can be shown for CPFACE0 exceptions: Error Code

Message and Recovery

00010001

AS/400 Advanced 36 machine not started. The machine state is not valid because an internal processing error occurred. Contact your service representative for help.

00010002

Object type or subtype is not valid because an internal processing error occurred. Contact your service representative for help.

00010003

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is still active because the machine was not able to shutdown completely. To recover, end each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine on the system. Then, do another IPL of the AS/400 system.

00010004

The function code is not valid because an internal processing error occurred. Contact your service representative for help.

00010005

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine machine pointer is not valid because an internal processing error occurred. Contact your service representative for help.

00010006

Migration is pending and the state of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is not valid. Contact your service representative for help.

01010002

Insufficient storage space exists to create the minimum size AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To recover, free up disk storage or add another disk. The Chapter 28. Problem Handling

28-9


minimum storage space required to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is 80 megabytes. 01010003

User storage limit exceeded. The machine cannot be created because it causes the user's storage limit to be exceeded. Free up user storage or increase the storage limit specified in the user profile for the user ID of the person creating the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

03010001

Configuration template bytes provided less than 16 megabytes. Contact your service representative for help.

03010002

Configuration template device category mask is non-zero. Contact your service representative for help.

03010003

Configuration template reserve bytes are non-zero. Contact your service representative for help.

03010004

Invalid device category. Contact your service representative for help.

03010005

Resource not compatible with device category. A hardware resource was renamed after the machine configuration was applied. To recover, start the machine again and apply the same configuration.

03010006

Resource name not valid. A hardware resource was renamed after the machine configuration was applied. To recover, start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine again and apply the same configuration.

03010007

Device code is not valid. Contact your service representative for help.

03010008

IPL device category is not valid. Contact your service representative for help.

03010009

IPL device code is not valid. Contact your service representative for help.

0301000A

IPL resource name is not valid. A hardware resource was renamed after the machine configuration was applied. To recover, start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine again and apply the same configuration.

0301000B

The resource is not an IPL-able device. A hardware resource was renamed after the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration was applied. To recover, start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine again and apply the same configuration.

0301000C

No configuration exists in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Apply a valid AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration using the APYM36CFG parameter on the STRM36 command.

28-10



0301000D

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration is no longer valid. It is out of date. Contact your service representative for help.

0301000E

The configuration template has a duplicate device code. Contact your service representative for help.

0301000F

The configuration template has a duplicate resource name. Contact your service representative for help.

03010010

An IPL from media is required. There is no SSP/reload in progress. To recover, load the SSP from tape, CD-ROM, or diskette.

03010011

There is at least one workstation controller missing. Contact your service representative for help.

03010012

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration that is applied is not capable of using a resource. Restart the machine and apply the same configuration.

03010013

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine cannot use the IPL resource because a hardware resource was renamed after the machine configuration was applied. To recover, start the machine again and apply the same configuration.

03010014

There is not enough disk storage to start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To recover, free up some disk storage or add another disk.

05010001

The STRM36PRC CL command was entered but the OS/400 user ID is not correct for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To recover, have the security officer add the OS/400 user ID to the user ID file on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

05010002

The STRM36PRC CL command was entered, but the default menu is not correct for the specified user ID. To recover, have the security officer for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine correct the default user menu or help menu for the user ID. More information about the cause of the error can be found in the S/36 history file.

05010003

The STRM36PRC CL command was entered but the procedure is not correct. The procedure might not exist. It is also possible that you may not be authorized to use the procedure or your user ID may be restricted to run only a specific procedure. To recover, make sure the procedure you are trying to run exists on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Get authorization to run the procedure. More information about the cause of the error is in the S/36 history file.


28-11


05010004

The STRM36PRC CL command was entered but the library is not correct. The library might not exist. You may not be authorized to the library or your user ID may be restricted to use only a specific library. Ensure that the library you are trying to use exists on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Have the security officer authorize you to this library. More information about the cause of the error can be found in the S/36 history file.

05010005

The procedure was terminated abnormally. The STRM36PRC CL command was entered but the procedure did not successfully complete. Common reasons for this error are: Option 3 was taken to an error message The Attention key was pressed and the option to terminate the procedure was selected. More information about the cause of the error can be found in the S/36 history file.

0501000F

The STRM36PRC CL command was entered, but the procedure did not successfully complete. More information about the cause of the error can be found in the S/36 history file. Contact your service representative for help.

05010011

The STRM36PRC or TFRM36 CL command was entered but there were no SSP workstations available for the transfer. To recover, do the following. Display the job log for your OS/400 job. If message CPIAC82 is in the job log, your OS/400 display is probably not defined to this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The CL command tried to find an unused SSP display station. However, all the display stations defined were in use. If this error occurs frequently, the SSP configuration should be updated to add additional display stations or the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration should be updated to include this OS/400 display so an SSP display station will be reserved for this OS/400 display.

| |

If there is no CPIAC82 message in the job log, your display is configured in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for a specific controller, port and workstation address. The specific address is already in use so the CL command failed. There may be a display station error message that the system operator must respond to before this workstation address can be used again. Another reason for this error is another display station has already signed on to this specific address. 05010012

28-12

The STRM36PRC or TFRM36 CL command was entered and a workstation ID was specified. However, the workstation ID is not defined to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine at this time.



To recover, issue the CL command again specifying a valid workstation ID. If the system is be reloaded, no workstation IDs are defined by the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If a display is defined in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine at controller 1 port 0 address 0, only that display station is allowed to transfer into the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine To recover, issue the CL command specifying *DFT for the workstation ID. 05010013

The STRM36PRC or TFRM36 CL command was entered, and a workstation ID was specified, but the workstation ID is already in use or a display station error message is waiting for a response from the system operator. To recover, check to see if there is display station error message that the system operator must respond to before this workstation ID can be used again. Try the command again after the system operator responds to the message. If that doesn't work, try the command again with a different workstation ID.

05010014

The STRM36PRC or TFRM36 CL command was entered but the address that was specified for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine was not configured for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To recover, use the CHGM36CFG command to update the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration to include this display station. The next time the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is ended and started, apply the updated configuration that includes the display station.

| |

05010015

The STRM36PRC or TFRM36 CL command was entered but the address that was specified to the SSP was already in use or a display station error message must be responded to by the system operator. To recover, have the system operator respond to any waiting error messages or try the command again with a different display station ID.

05010017

The STRM36PRC or TFRM36 CL command was entered but the S/36 display station was varied off. To recover, vary on the display station from the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine console using the VARY command.

07010001

The configuration template provided less than sixteen bytes. Contact your service representative for help.

07010002

The Configuration template device category mask is not valid. Contact your service representative for help.

07010003

The configuration template reserved bytes that are nonzero Contact your service representative for help.


28-13


07010004

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine has no configuration because the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine has never been started. To recover, start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and apply a configuration. Then, try your request again.

07010005

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration is out of date. A hardware resource was renamed after the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration was applied. To recover, start the machine again and reapply the configuration. Then, try your request again.

08010001

The token is not valid. Contact your service representative for help.

09010001

Unconverted AS/400 Advanced 36 machine does not exist because an internal processing error occurred. Contact your service representative for help.

0B010000

There is a communication object processing error. Contact your service representative for help.

00FFnnnn

Unexpected exception (nnnn) Contact your service representative for help.

00FE0001

Configuration is missing Contact your service representative for help.

00FE0002

Configuration has a resource name that is not valid. Contact your service representative for help.

00FE0003

Configuration has invalid device class Contact your service representative for help.

00FE0004

The configuration has a duplicate device code. Contact your service representative for help.

00FE0005

The configuration has a duplicate resource name. Contact your service representative for help.

00FE0006

The configuration has resource that the S/36 is not capable of using. Contact your service representative for help.

00FE0007

The configuration has a new device code. Contact your service representative for help.

28-14


ILAN Communications

Chapter 29. System-to-System Communications - ILAN Communications

| | | |

When multiple, different, operating systems exist on a single physical system, it is often desirable for applications running on these operating systems to have a way to communicate with each other. ILAN offers a way of doing this without physical communication links. ILAN Communications are accomplished by defining a network within the system. This network is linked by what is called an Internal Local Area Network (ILAN). Just as a Local Area Network (LAN) connects systems externally, an Internal Local Area Network (ILAN) connects operating systems inside the AS/400 system. Any operating system running on the system can communicate with any other operating system running on the system. On a LAN, you would find the following type of configuration:

AS/400

AS/400

Other Connections

AS/400 Advanced 36

Token Ring

AS/400 Advanced 36

System/36 RV3D360-2


29-1

ILAN Communications

On an ILAN, you would find the following type of configuration: Other Connections

Token Ring

OS/400

AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine



RV3D361-0

The fact that there is no physical communications link is transparent to the applications that reside on the AS/400 system. APPC and APPN communications do not require a physical communications link to connect with the operating systems within the system. The connection takes place within the lower levels of the software.

| | | |

APPC and APPN communications are supported over the ILAN. Some examples are:

|

DDM SNADS ODF Display Station Pass-through Customer-written APPC applications

Every physical LAN (such as Token-Ring or Ethernet) has the following three unique identifiers for each operating system: Source Service Access Point (SSAP) Destination Service Access Point (DSAP) Adapter address However, on an ILAN, these identifiers are more specifically defined as follows: An SSAP is defined for the AS/400 system itself and for each machine on the system

| |

The DSAP identifier is the SSAP of the machine with which you want to communicate. The adapter address is not used.

29-2


ILAN Communications

To an external network, these coexisting operating systems or machines appear to be independent systems. External networks are unaware that each of these operating systems actually reside on the same piece of equipment.

Setting up ILAN Communications Instructions on how to set up ILAN communications for your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are in chapter 4 of the Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377.

Understanding Default Startup Settings When the system is shipped, ILAN communications are set to be started: Manually by you for SSP Automatically by the system for OS/400 You need to decide whether you want to start ILAN manually or automatically and make changes for SSP or for OS/400. Notes: | |

1. If you create additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines and you set up ILAN for those AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, the OS/400 side of ILAN automatically starts during the next IPL of OS/400. If you want to use ILAN communications before the next IPL, you must manually start the OS/400 side. 2. If you do not stop ILAN communications before you power down the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you must go to OS/400 (and any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine connected to this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine) to stop and then restart the ILAN connections with this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Manually Starting the ILAN In order for ILAN to establish a link between the OS/400 Operating System and the SSP Operating System, ILAN communications must be started on both operating systems. On the OS/400 Operating System, the APPC Controller Description was created with ONLINE(*YES) specified. This starts and varies on the Controller Description objects at OS/400 Initial Program Load (IPL) time. If you do not start the ILAN automatically, and you want to use ILAN, ILAN communications must be started manually.

Manually Starting the OS/400 Side of ILAN When the system is shipped, ILAN communications are set to be started: Manually by you for SSP Automatically by the system for OS/400 You must make changes to the OS/400 side if you want ILAN communications to manually start for OS/400.


29-3

ILAN Communications

Note: If you create additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines and you set up ILAN for those AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, the OS/400 side of ILAN automatically starts during the next IPL of OS/400. If you want to use ILAN communications before the next IPL, you must manually start the OS/400 side.

| |

The following steps are required to manually start the OS/400 side of ILAN for each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. They must be completed each time you do either of the following: IPL the system. Restart the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine unless the APPC subsystem is disabled before you end your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Note: If your APPC subsystem is not disabled before you end your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you must vary your AS/400 controller description *OFF and then *ON again. 1. To start ILAN communications manually for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine each time you IPL the system, vary on the controller for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which ILAN communications are set up:

| |

a. On the OS/400 command line, for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type VRYCFG QILANM36ð1 \CTL \ON where QILANM36ð1 is the OS/400 APPC controller description name. b. Press Enter. ILAN communications are now started on the OS/400 side for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 2. To start ILAN communications manually for the second or third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine each time you IPL the system, vary on the controller for the second or third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which ILAN communications are set up:

| | |

a. On the OS/400 command line, for each additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type VRYCFG ILANM36ðx \CTL \ON where x is the number of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to start. For the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, x is 2. For the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, x is 3. b. Press Enter. ILAN communications are now started on the OS/400 side for either the second or third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (All Connections) When the system is shipped, ILAN communications are set to be started: Manually by you for SSP Automatically by the system for OS/400 Note: If you create additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines and you set up ILAN for those AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, the OS/400 side of ILAN automat-

|

29-4


ILAN Communications

|

ically starts during the next IPL of OS/400. If you want to use ILAN communications before the next IPL, you must manually start the OS/400 side. On the SSP Operating System, communication line 15 is used for ILAN communications. To start the APPC subsystem: 1. On the command line, type ENABLE ILANSBS,#CNFGLIB,15 2. Press Enter. ILAN communications are now started on the SSP side. Note: These steps must be completed each time you start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (A Single Connection) When the system is shipped, ILAN communications are set to be started: Manually by you for SSP Automatically by the system for OS/400 | |

Note: If you create additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines and you set up ILAN for those AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, the OS/400 side of ILAN automatically starts during the next IPL of OS/400. If you want to use ILAN communications before the next IPL, you must manually start the OS/400 side. On the SSP Operating System, communication line 15 is used for ILAN communications. To start the APPC subsystem: 1. On the command line, type ENABLE ILANSBS,#CNFGLIB,15,NOSHOW,xxxxxxxx where xxxxxxxx is the control point name. IBMM3601 is the control point name of the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3602 is the control point name of the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3603 is the control point name of the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Sxxxxxxx (S followed by the serial number of the AS/400 system) is the IBM-supplied control point name for OS/400. For directions on finding out what this name is see “Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name” on page 29-8. 2. Press Enter. ILAN communications are now started on the SSP side for the single connection you specified.


29-5

ILAN Communications

Automatically Starting ILAN Communications In order for ILAN to establish a link between the OS/400 operating system and an SSP operating system or between two SSP operating systems, ILAN communications must be started. When the system is shipped, ILAN communications are set to be started: Manually by you for SSP Automatically by the system for OS/400 You do not need to make changes to the OS/400 side unless ILAN communications were changed to manually start OS/400. Note: If you create additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines and you set up ILAN for those AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, the OS/400 side of ILAN automatically starts during the next IPL of OS/400. If you want to use ILAN communications before the next IPL, you must manually start the OS/400 side.

| |

Automatically Starting ILAN Communications for SSP To start ILAN communications automatically for SSP, do as follows: 1. From an SSP display, edit the #STRTUP2 procedure in the #LIBRARY. 2. Add the following line: ENABLE ILANSBS,#CNFGLIB,15 3. Save and exit the #STRTUP2 procedure. 4. Stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 5. Start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. ILAN communications will automatically start when that AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started until you change the instructions to start ILAN communications manually.

Automatically Starting ILAN Communications for OS/400 Directions in this section allow you to automatically start ILAN communications on the OS/400 side of the ILAN. For directions on automatically starting the SSP side of ILAN communications, see “Automatically Starting ILAN Communications” on page 29-6. When the system is shipped, ILAN communications are set to be started: Manually by you for SSP Automatically by the system for OS/400 You do not need to make changes to the OS/400 side unless ILAN communications were changed to manually start OS/400. Note: If you create additional AS/400 Advanced 36 machines and you set up ILAN for those AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, the OS/400 side of ILAN automatically starts during the next IPL of OS/400. If you want to use ILAN communications before the next IPL, you must manually start the OS/400 side.

| |

29-6


ILAN Communications

To start ILAN communications for OS/400 automatically for your first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows: 1. On an AS/400 command line, type CHGCTLAPPC QILANM36ð1 ONLINE(\YES) where QILANM36ð1 is the name of the OS/400 APPC controller description for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. Press Enter. |

Each time the system is IPLed, ILAN communications will automatically start for the OS/400 operating system. To start ILAN communications for OS/400 automatically for the second or third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows: 1. On an AS/400 command line, type CHGCTLAPPC ILANM36ðx ONLINE(\YES) where x is 2 for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and where x is 3 for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine if you used the recommended names for the AS/400 APPC controller description. 2. Press Enter. Each time the AS/400 Advanced 36 system is IPLed, ILAN communications will automatically start for the OS/400 operating system.

Disabling Automatic Startup of ILAN If OS/400 or SSP or both are automatically started, and you want to start them manually, you need to disable automatic startup of ILAN. |

When the system is shipped, ILAN communications are set to be started:

|

Automatically by the system for OS/400.

|

Manually by you for SSP. 1. To disable ILAN communications on the OS/400 side, do the following: a. On the OS/400 command line, type CHGCTLAPPC QILANM36ð1 ONLINE(\NO) for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine where QILANM36ð1 is the name of the OS/400 APPC controller description. Or, CHGCTLAPPC ILANM36ðx ONLINE(\NO) Where x is the number of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to start. For the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, x is 2. For the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, x is 3. b. Press Enter. This change to manual startup takes effect the next time the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started. Repeat steps 1a and 1b for each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.


29-7

ILAN Communications

2. To disable ILAN communications on the SSP side, comment out or delete the following statement from the #STRTUP2 procedure in the #LIBRARY: ENABLE ILANSBS,#CNFGLIB,15 This change to manual startup takes effect after the next IPL of OS/400 or after the next startup of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name To find out the name of the OS/400 control point, do as follows: 1. On a command line on the OS/400 system console, type DSPNETA 2. Press Enter. The Display Network Attributes display is shown. 3. On the Display Network Attributes display, find the line titled Local control point name. This is the name of the AS/400 system in a network. 4. Make note of the name. 5. Press F3 (Exit) to return to a command line.

Stopping ILAN Communications The directions in this topic tell you how to stop ILAN communications. You must stop ILAN communications on the OS/400 side of the ILAN and on each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. This must be done manually. You cannot stop ILAN communications automatically. Once you stop ILAN communications, you will need to manually restart ILAN communications if you want to use ILAN before the next IPL. Note: Automatic starting of ILAN communications only occurs at IPL time.

Stopping ILAN Communications on the OS/400 Side To stop ILAN communications on the OS/400 side of the ILAN: 1. Vary off the ILAN controller for each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine as follows:

|

a. On an OS/400 command line, type VRYCFG QILANM36ð1 \CTL \OFF where QILANM36ð1 is the name of the controller description for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| |

b. Press Enter to vary off the ILAN controller for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and stop ILAN communications for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| |

Note: If you have more than one AS/400 Advanced 36 machine on this AS/400 system, continue with the next step. 2. On an OS/400 command line, type VRYCFG ILANM36ðx \CTL \OFF

29-8


ILAN Communications

where x is a 2 for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and x is a 3 for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. | |

3. Press Enter to vary off the ILAN controller for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and stop ILAN communications for that AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 4. If you have another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, repeat step 2 and step 3 for that AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Stopping ILAN Communications on the SSP Side (All Connections) To stop ILAN communications on the SSP side, do the following for each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: 1. From an SSP command prompt on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you want to stop ILAN communications, type DISABLE ILANSBS 2. Press Enter. 3. If you get a SYS-8003 message ILANSBS -- DISABLE tried but subsystem active., respond to the message with a 2 to immediately disable all active sessions. ILAN communications are now stopped for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you completed the steps in this section. Note: If you do not stop ILAN communications before you power down the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you must go to OS/400 (and any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine connected to this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine) to stop and then restart the ILAN connections with this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Stopping ILAN on the SSP Side (Single Connection) To stop ILAN on the SSP side, do the following on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine from which you want to disconnect another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine or OS/400: 1. From an SSP command prompt on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you want to stop a single ILAN connection, type DISABLE ILANSBS,xxxxxxxx where xxxxxxxx is the control point name. IBMM3601 is the control point name of the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3602 is the control point name of the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3603 is the control point name of the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Sxxxxxxx (S followed by the serial number of the AS/400 system) is the IBM-supplied control point name for OS/400. For directions on finding out this name, see “Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name” on page 29-8. 2. Press Enter.


29-9

ILAN Communications

3. If you get a SYS-8003 message ILANSBS -- DISABLE tried but subsystem active., respond to the message with a 2 to immediately disable all active sessions. ILAN communications are now stopped for that single connection to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you completed the steps in this section. Note: If you do not stop ILAN communications before you power down an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you must go to OS/400 (and any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine connected to this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine) to stop and then restart the ILAN connections with this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

ILAN Communications Verification This section explains how to verify that your ILAN communications are started. You must verify ILAN communications on both OS/400 and SSP. Directions for setting up ILAN communications are in Chapter 4 of Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377.

Verification for the First AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine 1. Get the OS/400 Control Point Name. For directions, see “Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name” on page 29-8. 2. Go to the console for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and manually start the ILAN subsystem for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (All Connections)” on page 29-4.

| |

3. Go to the OS/400 console and verify ILAN communications for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “OS/400 Verification” on page 29-12.

| |

Note: If the OS/400 ILAN controller was not started during IPL, follow the directions in “Manually Starting the OS/400 Side of ILAN” on page 29-3.

| |

4. Go to the console for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and verify ILAN communications for OS/400. For directions, see “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13.

| |

5. Run Display Station Pass-through from OS/400 to SSP if you have an available OS/400 workstation. For directions, see “Using Display Station Pass-Through” on page 29-15. Note: If you do not stop ILAN communications before you power off the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, when you start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine again, you might need to stop and restart all of the ILAN connections to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For information on how to do this, see “Recovery When Communications Were Not Disabled Before Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine” on page 29-14.

| | | | | |

Verification for the Second AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine 1. Get the OS/400 Control Point Name. For directions, see “Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name” on page 29-8. 2. Go to the OS/400 console and manually start the ILAN controller for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the OS/400 Side of ILAN” on page 29-3.

| |

29-10


ILAN Communications

| | | | |

| |

| |

| |

| | | | | |

3. Go to the console for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and manually start the ILAN subsystem for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (A Single Connection)” on page 29-5. 4. Go to the console for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and manually start the ILAN subsystem for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (All Connections)” on page 29-4. 5. Go to the OS/400 console and verify ILAN communications for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “OS/400 Verification” on page 29-12. 6. Go to the console for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and verify ILAN communications for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13. 7. Go to the console for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and verify ILAN communications for connections for OS/400 and the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13. Note: If you do not stop ILAN communications before you power off the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, when you start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine again, you might need to stop and restart all of the ILAN connections to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For information on how to do this, see “Recovery When Communications Were Not Disabled Before Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine” on page 29-14.

Verification for the Third AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine 1. Get the OS/400 Control Point Name. For directions, see “Finding Out the OS/400 Control Point Name” on page 29-8. 2. Go to the OS/400 console and manually start the ILAN controller for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the OS/400 Side of ILAN” on page 29-3. | | | | | | | | | |

| |

3. Go to the console for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and manually start the ILAN subsystem for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (A Single Connection)” on page 29-5. 4. Go to the console for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and manually start the ILAN subsystem for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (A Single Connection)” on page 29-5. 5. Go to the console for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and manually start the ILAN subsystem for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “Manually Starting the SSP Side of ILAN (All Connections)” on page 29-4. 6. Go to the OS/400 console and verify ILAN communications for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13.


29-11

ILAN Communications

7. Go to the console for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and verify ILAN communications for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13.

| |

8. Go to the console for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and verify ILAN communications for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13.

| |

9. Go to the console for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and verify ILAN communications for all connections for OS/400, the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see “OS/400 Verification” and “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13.

| |

Note: If you do not stop ILAN communications before you power off the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, when you start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine again, you might need to stop and restart all of the ILAN connections to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For information on how to do this, see “Recovery When Communications Were Not Disabled Before Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine” on page 29-14.

| | | | | |

OS/400 Verification To verify ILAN communications for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows:

| |

1. On an OS/400 command prompt, type WRKCFGSTS \CTL QILANM36ð1 where QILANM36ð1 is the OS/400 APPC controller description name for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| |

2. Press Enter. 3. Check the Status column. Communications are started properly if the status is ACTIVE or VARIED ON. 4. If the status is not ACTIVE or VARIED ON, go to “Finding Out Why ILAN Is Not ACTIVE or VARIED ON” on page 29-13. 5. If the status is ACTIVE or VARIED ON, and you only installed one AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, go to “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13 and verify the SSP Side. 6. If the status is ACTIVE or VARIED ON, and you installed two or three AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, verify ILAN communications on the other AS/400 Advanced 36 machines.

| |

To verify ILAN communications for the second or third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows:

| |

1. On an OS/400 command prompt, type WRKCFGSTS \CTL ILANM36ðx where ILANM36ðx is the OS/400 APPC controller description name. If you used the recommended names, this is ILANM36ð2 for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and ILANM36ð3 for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. Press Enter.

29-12


ILAN Communications

3. Check the Status column. Communications are started properly if the status is ACTIVE or VARIED ON. 4. If the status is not ACTIVE or VARIED ON, go to “Finding Out Why ILAN Is Not ACTIVE or VARIED ON” on page 29-13. 5. If the status is ACTIVE or VARIED ON, and you have checked the OS/400 side for each of your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, go to “SSP Side Verification” on page 29-13 and verify the SSP Side. 6. If the status is ACTIVE or VARIED ON, and you installed a third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine repeat these steps.

SSP Side Verification For each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you set up ILAN communications, do as follows: 1. On an SSP prompt on each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type STATUS SUBSYS Or, D I 2. Press Enter. 3. Check the Line, Location name, and Communicating columns. If the ILAN communications are started to a certain location on this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, there is a Y in the communicating column for that Location name. Note: In this case, you have verified that communications are started. If passthrough works, the ILAN is completely functional. To find out how to use pass-through, go to “Using Display Station Pass-Through” on page 29-15. If there is an N in the communicating column, ILAN communications are not started on this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for that Location name. Go to “Finding Out Why ILAN Is Not ACTIVE or VARIED ON” on page 29-13 for further directions.

Finding Out Why ILAN Is Not ACTIVE or VARIED ON If you verified that your ILAN communications are not started on either the OS/400 side or the SSP Side, do as follows: 1. Make sure the AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are started. 2. On an OS/400 command prompt, type DSPMSG QSYSOPR 3. Press Enter to display messages sent to the OS/400 console. 4. If you are unable to correct the problem, look at messages on the SSP console. 5. Try setting up ILAN communications again for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which ILAN communications are not started.


29-13

ILAN Communications

| |

Recovery When Communications Were Not Disabled Before Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine It is important to remember to disable communications before you power down or end each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The directions in this section tell you how to get your ILAN up and running again if you forgot to disable communications or were unable to disable communications before you powered down or ended each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To recover, 1. Make sure all your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are started. 2. Vary off each AS/400 APPC Controller Description as follows: a. On an OS/400 command line, type

|

VRYCFG QILANM36ðx \CTL \OFF

|

where x is 1 for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, 2 for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and 3 for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| |

b. Press Enter to vary off the controller for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine on which you are doing recovery.

| |

c. On an OS/400 command line, type |

VRYCFG QILANM36ðx \CTL \ON

|

where x is 1 for the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, 2 for the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and 3 for the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| |

d. Press Enter to vary on the controller for each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine on which you are doing recovery.

| |

3. Disable and Enable ILAN communications for each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine as follows: a. On an SSP command line on each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type DISABLE ILANSBS b. Press Enter. c. On an SSP command line on each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, type ENABLE ILANSBS,#CNFGLIB,15 d. Press Enter.

29-14


ILAN Communications

Using Display Station Pass-Through Running Display Station Pass-Through from OS/400 to SSP Note: You should not run Display Station Pass-Through from the OS/400 console. To run Display Station Pass-Through from an OS/400 display station to SSP: 1. On an OS/400 command prompt, type STRPASTHR IBMM36ðx where IBMM360x is the control point name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to pass through to. If you set up your system as recommended: IBMM3601 is the control point name of the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3602 is the control point name of the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3603 is the control point name of the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. Press Enter. The Display Status Passthru display appears briefly. Then, an SSP signon display appears. 3. After the signon display appears, sign-on and do the SSP operations you want to do. 4. When completed with the operations, sign off as follows: a. Type OFF b. Press Enter. You return to the OS/400 command prompt.

Changing the QAUTOVRT Value If you want to pass through from an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to OS/400, QAUTOVRT must be a number other than zero. To change this value, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGSYSVAL QAUTOVRT nnnn | |

where nnnn is the number of virtual devices that can be auto-configured for pass-through to OS/400. 2. Press Enter.


29-15

ILAN Communications

Running Pass-Through from SSP to OS/400 Note: To use pass-through from SSP, you must install SSP Programming support feature 6079: Display Station Pass-Through Support (DSPT). To run pass-through from an SSP display station to OS/400: 1. On an SSP command line, type PASSTHRU Sxxxxxxx where xxxxxxx is the serial number of the AS/400 system if you are using the IBM-supplied control point name for OS/400. 2. Press Enter. An OS/400 signon display appears. 3. Sign on and do the OS/400 operations you want to do. 4. When completed with the operations, sign off as follows: a. Type ENDPASTHR b. Press Enter. You return to the SSP command prompt. For complete directions on using pass-through, see S/36 Using System/36 Communications book, SC21-9082.

Running Pass-Through from SSP to SSP To use pass-through from SSP, you must install SSP Programming support feature 6079: Display Station Pass-Through Support (DSPT). To run pass-through from an SSP display station to another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: 1. On an SSP command line, type PASSTHRU IBMM36ðx where IBMM360x is the control point name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to pass through to. If you set up your system as recommended: IBMM3601 is the control point name of the first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3602 is the control point name of the second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. IBMM3603 is the control point name of the third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. Press Enter. An SSP signon display appears. 3. Sign on and do the SSP operations you want to do. 4. When completed with the operations, sign off as follows: a. Type

29-16


ILAN Communications

OFF b. Press Enter. |

You return to the SSP command prompt. For complete directions on using pass-through, see S/36 Using System/36 Communications book, SC21-9082.


29-17

ILAN Communications

29-18


Managing Machines and Configurations

Chapter 30. Using CL Commands to Manage AS/400 Advanced 36 Configurations and Machines There are fourteen CL commands that were developed specifically to help you manage your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines. The two main commands are: Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines (WRKM36) Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configurations (WRKM36CFG) | | | |

Directions on how to use these two commands are included in this chapter. From these two commands, you can use eleven of the other CL commands. The Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Procedure (STRM36PRC) command must be entered from a command line or included in a CL program. Although directions on using these other twelve CL commands are not included in this chapter, “Summary Table of CL Commands for Managing AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines” on page 30-13 tells you where the directions are included. Note: You must have the proper authority to use these CL commands. For information, see the Security – Reference book, SC41-4302.

Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Command To use the WRKM36 command, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKM36 2. Press F4. A display similar to the following appears.

à@

Work with Machines (WRKM36)

ð

Type choices, press Enter. Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . .

\LIBL

Name, generic\, \ALL Name, \LIBL, \CURLIB...

Figure 30-1. Work with Machines (WRKM36) display

3. In the Machine field, type \ALL 4. In the Library field, type \ALL 5. Press Enter. A display similar to the following appears.


30-1


à@

Work with M36 Machines Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 4=Delete 13=Change description 14=Start Opt __ __ __

M36 _________ CHICAGO Test

Library _______ M361 M363

5=Display 15=End

ð

6=Print 7=Rename 16=Transfer

Status

Description

Starting Ended

Branch Office in Chicago Test machine

If you prefer, instead of doing step 1 on page 30-1 through step 5 on page 30-1, you could do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKM36 \ALL/\ALL 2. Press Enter.

Creating An AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine You can use the WRKM36 CL command to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Important Note It is especially important that you make sure there is enough room on your system for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine before you try to create it. It is highly recommended that you follow the directions in the Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377 when you create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

To use the Work with M36 Machines display to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would: 1. In the Opt field, type 1 to select Create. 2. Press F4. The Create Machine (CRTM36) display appears. 3. Type the necessary values. If you are unsure what a field is used for, you can position the cursor on the field and press F1. 4. Press Enter to create a new AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Note: Up to three AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are supported on each system.

30-2



| | |

You can also use the CRTM36 command to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on using the CRTM36 command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Changing Attributes for AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines You can use the WRKM36 CL command to change the attributes of AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that have a status of ENDED, ABENDED, or INCOMPLETE. To use the Work with M36 Machines display to change the attributes of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field, type 2 to select Change. 2. Press Enter. The Change Machine (CHGM36) display appears. 3. Type the necessary values. If you are unsure what a field is used for, you can position the cursor on the field and press F1. 4. Press Enter to change the attributes of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. | | |

You can also use the CHGM36 command to change the attributes of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on using the CHGM36 command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722. Attributes that you can change are: Automatic sign on This parameter controls whether or not autosignon is allowed for this machine.

|

If you change the Autosignon value to *ENABLE: – Users automatically sign on if AUTOSIGNON(*YES) is specified on the TFRM36 command. – Users are automatically signed on when they use the STRM36PRC command.

| | | | | |

If you change the Autosignon value to *DISABLE, the STRM36PRC command will fail and users of the TFRM36 command will be required to sign on to SSP. For more information on using the STRM36PRC command, see “Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using the STRM36PRC Command” on page 14-6. For more information on using the TFRM36 command, see “Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using TFRM36” on page 14-3. Text 'description' You can change the text that is used to describe the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To do so, type a description in this field. The description can contain up to 50 characters.

Chapter 30. Using CL Commands to Manage AS/400 Advanced 36 Configurations and Machines

30-3


Deleting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine You can use the WRKM36 CL command to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine which has a status of ENDED, ABENDED, or INCOMPLETE. Important Note If you delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you also delete all libraries, files, and folders that exist on that machine. All data on the machine is lost.

To use the Work with M36 Machines display to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to delete, type 4 to select Delete. 2. Press Enter. The Confirm Delete of Machine display appears. 3. To cancel the delete, press F12. 4. To delete the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, press F2. You can also use the DLTM36 command to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. However, regardless of how you delete the machine, all of the libraries, files, and folders that exist on that machine are lost. For more information on how to use the DLTM36 command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

| | |

Displaying Information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine and Its Configuration You can use the WRKM36 CL command to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To use the Work with M36 Machines display to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to display, type 5 to select Display. 2. Press Enter.

|

The Display M36 Machine display appears. 3. Type the necessary values. Select the option number for the information you want to display.

| |

If you are unsure what the options display, you can position the cursor on the option and press F1. 4. Press Enter to display information about the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

|

30-4



| | |

You can also use the DSPM36 command to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on how to use the DSPM36 command, see“Displaying a Machine” on page 32-2 .

Printing Information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine and Its Configuration You can use the WRKM36 CL command to print information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and its configuration. To use the Work with M36 Machines display to print information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to print information about, type 6 to select Print. 2. Press F4. | | | |

The Display Machine (DSPM36) display appears. *PRINT is placed in the Output field for you. The information about the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine will be printed. When the printing is complete, the following message appears at the bottom of your display: Object printed for machine-name in library-name type \M36. where machine-name is the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and library-name is the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine (object type *M36) is stored.

| | |

You can also use the DSPM36 command to print information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on how to use the DSPM36 command to print, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Renaming an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine You can use the WRKM36 CL command to change the name of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To use the Work with M36 Machines display to change the name of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to rename, type 7 to select Rename. 2. Press Enter. The Rename Object (RNMOBJ) display appears. There you can change the name of an object in a library. The new name specified for the machine in the New object field must be unique in that library for object type *M36. If the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine being renamed is in use when you press Enter, the command is not run and a message is sent.


30-5


To rename any object, you must have object management authority for the object. You must also have update authority and execute authority for the library in which the object is located. You can also use the RNMOBJ command to change the name of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on how to use the RNMOBJ command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

| | |

Changing the Description for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine You can use the WRKM36 CL command to change the description of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To use the Work with M36 Machines display to change the description of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you want to change the description, type 13 to select Change description. 2. Press Enter. The Change Object Description (CHGOBJD) display appears. 3. Type the new description in the Text 'description' field. The description can contain up to 50 characters. 4. Press Enter to rename the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You can also use the CHGOBJD and the CHGM36 CL commands to change the description of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on how to use these commands, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

| | |

Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine You can use the WRKM36 CL command to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To use the Work with M36 Machines display to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to start, type 14 to select Start. 2. Press Enter twice.

|

An initial program load (IPL) of the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine object occurs which starts the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You can also use the STRM36 command to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on how to use the STRM36 command, see Chapter 15, “Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.”

| |

30-6



Ending an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine |

You can use the WRKM36 CL command to abnormally end an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Important Note This option immediately ends the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine without allowing any programs running in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to perform any cleanup.

|

| |

To use the Work with M36 Machines display to abnormally end an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that you want to abnormally end, type 15 to select End. 2. Press F4. The End Machine (ENDM36) display appears.

| |

3. If the machine is being ended because of a problem and you want to collect information about the problem, in the Dump the machine field, type \YES 4. Press Enter. If you are unsure what the other fields are used for, you can position the cursor on each field and press F1.

| | |

5. Press Enter to abnormally end the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You can also use the End AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (ENDM36) command to abnormally end an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on how to use the ENDM36 command and the restrictions and alternatives to using that command, see “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Operating System” on page 16-3.

Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine You can use the WRKM36 CL command to transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To use the Work with M36 Machines display to transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to which you want to transfer this display station, type 16 to select Transfer. 2. Press F4. The Transfer to Machine (TFRM36) display appears. 3. Type the necessary values.


30-7

WRKM36CFG

If you are unsure what a field is used for, you can position the cursor on the field and press F1. 4. Press Enter.

|

More fields are shown.

| |

5. Type the values in those fields that apply.

|

6. Press Enter. The display is transferred to the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

|

You can also use the Transfer AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (TFRM36) command to transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on how to use the TFRM36 command see Chapter 14, “Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine.”

| | |

Using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration Command To use the WRKM36CFG command, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKM36CFG 2. Press F4. A display similar to the following appears.

à@

Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) Type choices, press Enter. Machine configuration . . . . . Library . . . . . . . . . . .

\LIBL

Name, generic\, \ALL Name, \LIBL, \CURLIB...

Figure 30-2. Work with Machines (WRKM36CFG) display

3. In the Machine configuration field, type \ALL 4. In the Library field, type \ALL 5. Press Enter. A display similar to the following appears.

30-8


ð

WRKM36CFG

à@

ð Work with AS/4ðð Advanced 36 Machine Configurations Type options, press Enter. 1=Create 2=Change 4=Delete 13=Change description Opt

| |

__ __ __

M36 Configuration M36 MYM36 TEST

5=Display

6=Print

7=Rename

Library

Text

M36 MYLIB TESTLIB

The configuration for the first machine A configuration used for testing

If you prefer, instead of doing step 1 through step 5, you could do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKM36CFG \ALL/\ALL 2. Press Enter.

Creating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You can use the WRKM36CFG CL command to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. Up to three AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are supported on each system. However, you can have as many configurations as you want. Note: A configuration must be applied to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the APYM36CFG parameter on the STRM36 command before it affects an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To use the Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) display to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field on the top line beside the blank line, type 1 to select Create. 2. Press F4. The Create AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (CRTM36CFG) display appears. 3. Type the necessary values. If you are unsure what a field is used for, you can position the cursor on the field and press F1. 4. Press Enter to create a new AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. An AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration is similar to a configuration member on a System/36. | |

When creating a new AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you can specify an existing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine or an existing AS/400 Advanced 36


30-9

WRKM36CFG

machine configuration whose configuration information should be copied. If you do not specify a from object, you must supply all of the configuration information.

|

If you run the command interactively, a series of displays are shown which supply configuration information. If you specified a from object, these displays show the copied configuration information. You can change this configuration information or leave it as it is. The configuration defines the attributes to be used for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. When the configuration is applied to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, a copy of those attributes are stored in the *M36 object. This is done using the APYM36CFG parameter with the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (STRM36) command. It is acceptable to create an empty configuration. However, an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to which an empty configuration is applied will fail to start. You can also use the CRTM36CFG command to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. For more information on using the CRTM36CFG command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

| | |

Changing Attributes and Configuration Details for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You can use the WRKM36CFG CL command to change the attributes and configuration details of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. To use the Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) display to change the attributes of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration that you want to change, type 2 to select Change. 2. Press Enter. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 3. Type the necessary values. If you are unsure what a field is used for, you can position the cursor on the field and press F1. 4. Press Enter to change the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. You can also use the CHGM36CFG command to change the attributes and configuration details of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. For more information on using the CHGM36CFG command, see Chapter 31, “Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” and the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

| | | | |

30-10


WRKM36CFG

Deleting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You can use the WRKM36CFG CL command to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. To use the Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) display to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration that you want to delete, type 4 to select Delete. 2. Press Enter. The Confirm Delete of M36 Machine Configuration display appears. 3. If you want to cancel the delete, press F12. 4. If you want to continue with the delete, press Enter. If you delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object, you do not affect the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to which it was applied. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine has its own copy of the last configuration applied to it. | | |

You can also use the DLTM36CFG command to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. For more information on how to use the DLTM36CFG command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Displaying an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You can use the WRKM36CFG CL command to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. To use the Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) display to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you want to display information, type 5 to select Display. 2. Press F4. The Display M36 Configuration display appears. You can choose other options that allow you to see information about the configuration. 3. Type a number in the Opt field. If you are unsure what an option is used for, you can position the cursor on the option and press F1. 4. Press Enter to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. | | |

You can also use the DSPM36CFG command to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. For more information on how to use the DSPM36CFG command, see“Displaying a Configuration” on page 32-1 .


30-11

WRKM36CFG

Printing an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You can use the WRKM36CFG CL command to print the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. To use the Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) display to print the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration that you want to print, type 6 to select Print. 2. Press Enter. When printing is complete, the following message appears at the bottom of your display: Object printed for configuration-name in library-name type \M36CFG. where configuration-name is the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration and library-name is the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration (object type *M36CFG) is stored. You can also use the DSPM36CFG command to print information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. For more information on how to use the DSPM36CFG command to print, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

| | |

Renaming an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You can use the WRKM36CFG CL command to change the name of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. To use the Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) display to change the name of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration that you want to rename, type 7 to select Rename. 2. Press Enter. The Rename Object (RNMOBJ) display appears. The new name specified for the machine configuration in the New object field must be unique in that library for AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configurations. 3. Type the necessary values. If you are unsure what a field is used for, you can position the cursor on the field and press F1. 4. Press Enter to change the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. To rename any object, you must have object management authority for the object. You must also have update authority and execute authority for the library in which the object is located.

30-12


CL Command Summary Table

| | |

You can also use the RNMOBJ command to rename an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. For more information on how to use the RNMOBJ command, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Changing the Description for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You can use the WRKM36CFG CL command to change the description of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. To use the Work with Machine Config (WRKM36CFG) display to change the description of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, you would do as follows: 1. In the Opt field beside the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration you want to change, type 13 to select Change description. 2. Press Enter. The Change Object Description (CHGOBJD) display appears. 3. Type the new description in the Text 'description' field. The description can contain up to 50 characters. | | |

You can also use the CHGOBJD and CHGM36CFG commands to change the description of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. For more information on how to use these commands, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

Summary Table of CL Commands for Managing AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines The Figure 30-3 table includes the CL commands used only to manage AS/400 Advanced 36 machines, text which describes what each command does, and a reference to where specific information is found on how to use each command. Figure 30-3 (Page 1 of 3). AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine - CL Commands CL Command

Description

Reference

CHGM36

Change AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine: Allows you to change attributes for a machine.

14-5

CHGM36CFG

Change AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration: Allows you to change an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. The configuration can be applied to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Once applied, the configuration of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is changed.


CRTM36

Create AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine: Allows you to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

CL Reference book, SC41-4722.


30-13


Figure 30-3 (Page 2 of 3). AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine - CL Commands CL Command

Description

Reference

CRTM36CFG

Create AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration: Allows you to create an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. You can apply the configuration to any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine using the STRM36 command.


DLTM36

Delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine: Allows you to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and all of the libraries, files, and folders that exist on that machine.


DLTM36CFG

Delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration: Allows you to delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. This does not affect any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to which it was applied.


DSPM36

Display AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine: Allows you to display information about an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

“Displaying a Machine” on page 32-2

DSPM36CFG

Display AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration: Allows you to display information about a configuration object that you can apply to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

“Displaying a Configuration” on page 32-1

ENDM36

End AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine: Used to stop an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine when it cannot be stopped by other means.

“Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine from the OS/400 Operating System” on page 16-3

STRM36

Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine: Allows you to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

Chapter 15, “Starting an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine”

STRM36PRC

Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Procedure: Allows you to start an SSP procedure from an OS/400 command line for a specific AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If you want access to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to do more than run a procedure, you should use the TFRM36 or STRPASTHR commands.

“Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Using the STRM36PRC Command” on page 14-6

TFRM36

Transfer to AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine: Allows you to transfer from an OS/400 display station to an SSP display station for a specific AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If you want access to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to just run a procedure, you could use the STRM36PRC command.

Chapter 14, “Transferring to an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine”

WRKM36

Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machines: Allows you to work with all of your AS/400 Advanced 36 machines at the same time.

This chapter

| |

|

30-14



Figure 30-3 (Page 3 of 3). AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine - CL Commands CL Command

Description

Reference

WRKM36CFG

Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration: Allows you to work with all the configurations that can be applied to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

This chapter

Note: For additional information on any of these commands, type the command on an OS/400 command line and press F4, or see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.


30-15


30-16


Configuration

Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration You use the Change AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) command to change the configuration of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes you make to the configuration only affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine after you use the Apply AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (APYM36CFG) parameter on the Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (STRM36) command. Using the APYM36CFG parameter on the STRM36 command applies the updated configuration information to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this. This chapter provides instructions on how to change your AS/400 Advanced 36 configuration. The information includes instructions on: “Defining a Communications Line or a LAN” on page 31-4. “Defining a Diskette Device” on page 31-8. “Defining a Tape or CD-ROM Device” on page 31-10. “Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Device Mapping” on page 31-12. “Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Controller Mapping” on page 31-17. “Changing a Workstation Controller from Controller Mapping to Device Mapping” on page 31-22. “Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls SSP Printer Output” on page 31-26. – “Giving SSP Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output” on page 31-26. – “Giving OS/400 Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output” on page 31-30. – “Giving OS/400 Control of Printer Output When There Is No Physical Printer” on page 31-32. “Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls the Display Station” on page 31-36. Note: The configuration changes in the previous list require no additional changes in the SSP operating system. You might want to do additional work with your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration by using the CNFIGSSP procedure to edit a configuration member. The tasks you can do include: Defining what kind of communication line is attached. Assigning printers to display stations (default printers). Assigning display stations (subconsoles) that will control printers. Changing workstation IDs for display stations and printers. Changing the characteristics of display stations and printers. Changing the system printer.  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

31-1

Configuration

Adding, replacing or deleting remote service devices. Printing a configuration member. Applying the member to the master configuration record. Using the Configuration Support Aids. Note: For instructions on making these additional changes to your configuration, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295. All commands must be entered from the console of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for which you want to make configuration changes.

Configuration That Exists Immediately after Installation OS/400 Added to a System That Previously Was SSP Only If your system was previously an SSP-only system and you added OS/400 to it, then the configuration of your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is exactly the same as the configuration of your system before you added OS/400: When the SSP refers to T1, T2, TC, I1, and communications lines 1-10, it will refer to the same physical resources as it did before OS/400 was added. When the SSP refers to its workstation controllers and the displays and printers attached to them, it will refer to the same physical workstation controllers and the devices attached to them at the same physical ports and addresses as it did before OS/400 was added. There is one exception. It will normally be the case that the OS/400 system console display is attached to the same physical workstation controller as appears to be workstation controller 1 to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. When this is the case, then to prevent both OS/400 and SSP from trying to use the same display station as their system consoles, there must be another display station physically attached to port 0 address 1. This display station will appear to the SSP operating system to be at port 0 address 0. It is therefore the SSP system console. The display station physically cabled at port 0 address 0 will be the OS/400 system console, and if it were to be transferred into the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, it would appear to be at port 0 address 1. In addition, the workstations will have the following attributes: – Workstation controllers use controller mapping, not device mapping. This means that entire physical workstation controllers are mapped to entire logical workstation controllers on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If you cable new displays or printers to the workstation controller, those devices will auto-configure into the master configuration record of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. – All display stations on mapped controllers will be automatically acquired by the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine when it is started. The only exception to this will be the display station which is the OS/400 console. That device will never be automatically acquired. – By default, printed output will not be routed to an OS/400 Output Queue (OUTQ). All printed output will be printed directly from the SSP, either spooled or non-spooled, unless overridden within the SSP by using the OUTQ parameter on the // PRINTER OCL statement.

| |

31-2


Configuration

| |

An AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object also reflects the configuration of your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. This object has the same name and is in the same library as your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine object.

OS/400 and SSP Preloaded from IBM Manufacturing If your system was ordered with both OS/400 and SSP, the preloaded AS/400 Advanced 36 machine shipped from IBM manufacturing came with the same configuration as your system would have had if it had been an SSP-only system: When the SSP refers to TC, it will refer to the 1/4" or 8mm tape cartridge. If there is more than one such resource, it will refer to the one with the lowest address on the system bus. |

Note: You can change the configuration to include the CD-ROM drive as a tape drive. When the SSP refers to T1 or T2, it will refer to the 1/2" tape cartridge or reel devices. T1 will refer to the one with the lowest address on the system bus, and T2 to the one with the second-lowest address on the system bus. If you have 1/2" tape devices, it is possible the devices may not be included in the configuration. This would be true if they were added to your system after the configuration was established in the manufacturing process. If this is the case, you may change the configuration to add them yourself.

|

Note: You can change the configuration to include the CD-ROM drive as a tape drive. When the SSP refers to I1, it will refer to the diskette drive which has the lowest address on the system bus. It is possible that the diskette drive may not be included in your configuration. This would be true if it was added after the configuration was established in the manufacturing process. If this is the case, you may change the configuration to add it yourself.

| | |

|

When the SSP refers to communications lines 1-8, it will refer to the communications ports which: – Support the Async, Bisync, SDLC, X.21 Short Hold Mode, or X.25 communications methods And, – Have the lowest addresses on the system bus respectively. You might need to change the configuration to associate different SSP communications lines with different communication port resources. When the SSP refers to communications lines 9 and 10, it will refer to the token ring port resources which have the lowest addresses on the system bus respectively. You may need to change the configuration to associate different SSP communications lines with different communications port resources.

| | |

When the SSP refers to its workstation controllers (1-4), it uses controller mapping, and refers to the physical workstation controllers which have the lowest addresses on the system bus respectively. It refers to the displays and printers attached to those workstation controllers by their physical ports and addresses. There is one exception. It will normally be the case that the OS/400 system console display is attached to the same physical workstation controller as appears to be workstation controller 1 to the AS/400 Advanced 36 Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration

31-3

Configuration

machine. When this is the case, then to prevent both OS/400 and SSP from trying to use the same display station as their system consoles, there must be another display station physically attached to port 0 address 1. This display station will appear to the SSP to be at port 0 address 0, and will be the SSP system console. The display station physically cabled at port 0 address 0 will be the OS/400 system console, and if it were to be transferred into the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, it would appear to be at port 0 address 1. In addition, the workstations will have the following attributes: – Workstation controllers use controller mapping, not device mapping. This means that entire physical workstation controllers are mapped to entire logical workstation controllers on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If you cable new displays or printers to the workstation controller, those devices will auto-configure into the master configuration record of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. – All display stations on mapped controllers will be automatically acquired by the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine when it is started. The only exception to this will be the display station which is the OS/400 console. That device will never be automatically acquired. – By default, printed output will not be routed to an OS/400 Output Queue (OUTQ). All printed output will be printed directly from the SSP, either spooled or non-spooled, unless overridden within the SSP by using the OUTQ parameter on the // PRINTER OCL statement.

| |

An AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object also reflects the configuration of your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. This object has the same name and is in the same library as your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine object.

| |

If for any type of device, you have more physical resources than the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine can use, then you may change the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object to configure resources other than those which were configured for you by default. You must apply that configuration when you start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

| | |

Defining a Communications Line or a LAN If you are connecting your AS/400 system to external communications you will need to physically connect the hardware. After you set up the hardware, add the communications line as directed in this section. To add, change, or delete an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine communications line, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 2. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 3. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored.

31-4


Configuration

5. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 6. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 7. In the Selection field, type 6 to select Change M36 communication lines. 8. Press Enter. The Change M36 Communication Lines display appears. You can specify up to 10 communication lines. Lines 1 through 8 can be used for any of the following communications methods: Async, Bisync, SDLC, X.21 Short Hold Mode, or X.25. Lines 9 and 10 can be used for Token Ring connections. Directions for setting up token-ring connections are in the LAN and Frame Relay Support book, SC41-3404. You should follow the example for the System/36 when setting-up the token-ring connection for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 9. If you want to add or replace a communication line, type the Resource Name of the desired AS/400 communication port in the AS/400 Communication Resource column by the line number in the M36 Communication Line column. Or, do one of the following: a. Press F10 to have the system select the communication port resources for you. The ports selected will be the same ones that would be used by SSP if OS/400 were not installed. b. Use F4 to prompt, as follows: 1) Move the cursor to the entry in the AS/400 Communication Resource column corresponding to the desired line number. 2) Press F4 to see a list of the Resource Names that can be used for that communication line. 3) Next to the name you want to select for the communication line, type 1 4) Press Enter. 10. If you want to delete a resource, use the space bar to space over the name of the resource with blanks. 11. Press Enter. You return to the Change M36 Configuration display. 12. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 13. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 7 on page 31-5. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 14. To save and exit, Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration

31-5

Configuration

a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be saved. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears. The following message appears: Object changed for configuration object-name in library-name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/configuration-name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this. 15. When you set up communications lines, follow the System/36 directions in the appropriate books: Communications Protocol SSP Book Reference Async

S/36 Using the Asynchronous Communications Support book, SC21-9143.

Bisync

S/36 Using System/36 Communications book, SC21-9082.

SDLC


X-21 short-hold mode


X-25


Token-Ring


APPN

S/36 Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) Guide book, SC21-9471.

Some types of communications are allowed from OS/400 or from an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. However, you must set up ILAN to use these types of communications from an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Additionally, you must set up APPN for all of these communications types except Apple Talk. These types of communications are:

31-6

Communications Type

Book References

Wireless

LAN and Frame Relay Support book, SC41-3404.

Ethernet


ISDN

ISDN Support book, SC41-4403.


Configuration

Frame Relay


FDDI (DDI)


Apple Talk


Directions for setting up ILAN are included in Chapter 4 of the Getting SSP and OS/400 Installed and Running book, SC21-8377. |

The following type of communications can be done from OS/400 or from an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. However, you must send the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine printer output to an OS/400 output queue to use the following type of communications: Communications Type

Book References

Fax

Local Device Configuration book, SC41-4121.

Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration

31-7

Configuration

Defining a Diskette Device To add, change, or delete a diskette device, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 2. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 3. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 5. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 6. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 7. In the Selection field, type 5 to select Change M36 diskette devices 8. Press Enter. The Change M36 Diskette Devices display appears. The AS/400 Advanced 36 system supports only one diskette device. That device is known to the SSP operating system as I1. Any diskette device description name can be specified for I1. 9. If you want to add a device or replace a device, type the name of the device in the AS/400 Diskette Device column. Or, do one of the following: a. Press F10 to have the system select the diskette drive for you. The device it selects is the same device the SSP operating system would select if OS/400 was not installed. b. Use F4 to prompt, as follows: 1) Press F4 to see a list of the diskette device names that can be used for I1. 2) Next to the device you want to use, type 1 3) Press Enter. 10. If you want to delete the device, use the space bar to space over the device name. 11. Press Enter. You return to the Change M36 Configuration display. 12. Press F19 to validate your changes.

31-8


Configuration

Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 13. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 7 on page 31-8. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 14. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be saved. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears. The following message appears: Object changed for configuration object-name in library-name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/configuration-name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this.


31-9

Configuration

Defining a Tape or CD-ROM Device To add, change, or delete a tape or CD-ROM device, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 2. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 3. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 5. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 6. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 7. In the Selection field, type 4 to select Change M36 tape and optical devices. 8. Press Enter. The Change M36 Tape and Optical Dev display appears. The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine supports only three tape devices. These are known to the SSP operating system by the following device-IDs: T1, T2, and TC. 9. If you want to add or replace a tape or CD-ROM device, type the device-name in the AS/400 Tape or Optical Device column by the tape device-ID in the M36 Tape Device column. Or, do one of the following: a. Press F10 to have the system select the tape drives for you. The devices it selects are the same devices the SSP operating system would select if the OS/400 operating system was not installed. b. Use F4 to prompt, as follows: 1) Move the cursor to the entry in the AS/400 Tape or Optical Device column that corresponds to the device ID. 2) Press F4 to see a list of the tape and CD-ROM devices that can be used for that device-ID. 3) Next to the device you want to use, type 1 4) Press Enter. 10. If you want to delete a tape or CD-ROM device, use the space bar to space over the tape device-ID with blanks. 11. Press Enter. You return to the Change M36 Configuration display.

31-10


Configuration

12. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 13. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 7 on page 31-10. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 14. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be saved. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears. The following message appears: Object changed for configuration object-name in library-name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/configuration-name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this.


31-11

Configuration

Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Device Mapping This section assumes you have physically connected the hardware and defined the printers and display stations to OS/400. SSP supports a maximum of four workstation controllers. For this reason, an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine supports only four workstation controllers. However, since the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's workstation controllers are logical and not physical, you can map any display station or printer on any physical controller to any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controller using device mapping. Note: You can also choose to map an entire physical controller (including all of the printers and display stations attached to the physical controller) to a specific workstation controller on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. This is called controller mapping. For directions on controller mapping, see “Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Controller Mapping” on page 31-17. Device mapping does not map an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's workstation controller to a physical controller. Instead, the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controller is a logical workstation controller with physical display stations and printers mapped to its logical ports and addresses. This is done without regard to the physical controllers, ports, and addresses to which the devices are cabled. The display station you map to port 0 address 0 of workstation controller 1 will be the SSP system console. Other than that, you can map devices to any ports and addresses. All fifty-six port and address combinations of each logical workstation controller may have a display station or printer mapped to them. All fifty-six can be used at the same time. The devices you map to each logical workstation controller will auto-configure into the SSP master configuration record at the ports and addresses you specify.

|

To add, replace or delete a printer or display station using device mapping, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 2. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 3. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 5. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 6. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 7. In the Selection field, type 2 to select Change M36 display and printer devices.

31-12


Configuration

8. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display appears. 9. To do device mapping of the local devices, do one of the following. If the workstation controller is already configured with device mapping: a. Move the cursor to the line that corresponds to the workstation controller number (1-4). Note: If it is already configured with device mapping, the line is filled in already with *DEV. b. Go to step 10. To configure a new workstation controller with device mapping and add workstation devices to it: a. Move the cursor to the blank line that corresponds to the new workstation controller number (1-4). |

Note: If it is not configured, the line is blank. b. Type *DEV on the line. c. Go to step 10 to add the workstation devices. To change a workstation controller from controller mapping to device mapping and map workstation devices to it: a. Move the cursor to the line that corresponds to the workstation controller number (1-4). Note: If the workstation controller is mapped with controller mapping, the line is filled in with an OS/400 Workstation Controller Description. b. Type *DEV over the name. After you have applied this configuration to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you may want to use the CNFIGSSP procedure to remove printers or display stations that are no longer part of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration from the master configuration record. Note: Before you type over the controller name, you may want to save the attributes. For directions, see “Changing a Workstation Controller from Controller Mapping to Device Mapping” on page 31-22. c. Go to step 10 to add the workstation devices. To remove a workstation controller from the configuration: a. Move the cursor to the line that corresponds to the workstation controller number (1-4). b. Blank out the line. After you have applied this configuration to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you may want to use the CNFIGSSP procedure to remove the display stations and printers associated with this workstation controller from the master configuration record. c. Go to step 12 on page 31-15.


31-13

Configuration

10. Press F21 to define the mappings of individual printers and display stations. A grid with rows of ports and columns of addresses is shown for the workstation controller you specified. Each entry in the grid can contain the name of a device description for the printer or display station that you want configured at the corresponding port and address. You may use either or both of the following techniques to configure display stations and printers: Technique 1 You may choose to use a physical OS/400 workstation controller as the basis for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's workstation controller. If you do this, all display stations and printers currently attached to that controller will be configured at the same ports and addresses to which they are physically cabled. You can change the configuration afterwards. To use this technique: a. Press F16 (Autofill from controller). The Select AS/400 Work Station Ctlr display overlays the Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display. b. In the Opt field on the line with the name of the AS/400 workstation controller that contains the devices you want automatically filled in for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's workstation controller, type 1 Note: F11 works as a toggle to allow you to see the controller names and their descriptions or to see just controller names. Selecting just controller names allows you to see more choices on a single display. If necessary, you can use Page Down to see more controller names. c. Press Enter. The Select AS/400 Work Station Ctlr display is replaced by the Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display. This display is automatically filled in with the devices that are physically connected to the controller you chose. If you are working with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's workstation controller 1 and you auto-filled it from the AS/400 workstation controller that contains the OS/400 system console, the devices at port 0 addresses 0 and 1 were switched when they were filled in. Notes: 1) If the OS/400 system console is physically cabled to port 0 address 0, it will appear at port 0 address 1 in the display. 2) The device physically cabled to port 0 address 1 will appear in the display at port 0 address 0, and will be the SSP system console. 3) Unless you change the mapping of these devices, the SSP operating system acts as if they are at the ports and addresses you see on the display instead of at the ports and addresses to which they are physically cabled. d. If you do not want to change the configuration of the workstation controller you just auto-filled, continue with step 11. e. Otherwise, continue with Technique 2.

31-14


Configuration

Technique 2 You can add or replace a device at a particular port and address by typing the desired device description name at the desired port and address. You can remove a device from a particular port and address by spacing over its name with blanks. Note the following considerations for device mapping: – The display stations and printers you include in the configuration must be locally attached twinax or ASCII devices. Note: Locally attached ASCII printers may only be configured as output queues. For information on how to configure these printers, see “Giving OS/400 Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output” on page 31-30.

|

– The display stations and printers must be known to OS/400. They can be cabled to any AS/400 workstation controller, at any port and address. The display stations can be any sessions of a multi-session device. For information on restrictions on using the multi-session devices, see the General Information for SSP Operating System book, SC21-8299.

| | | |

– To ensure the devices you add or you replace will auto-configure into the SSP master configuration record, make certain that these devices are powered on when you start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and apply this configuration. – The device you specify at port 0 address 0 of workstation controller 1 will be the SSP system console for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. You should choose some device other than the OS/400 system console to be the SSP system console.

| |

– You may also want to remove any devices from the SSP master configuration record that you removed from the machine's configuration. Note: You use the CNFIGSSP procedure to do this, after you have applied this configuration to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Repeat Technique 2 for all display stations and printers you want to add, change, or delete for this workstation controller. 11. Press Enter. The original Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display appears. 12. If you want to configure other workstation controllers, go back to step 9 on page 31-13. Otherwise, continue with step 13 on page 31-15. 13. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 14. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 15. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 7 on page 31-12.


31-15

Configuration

You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 16. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be saved. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears. The following message appears: Object changed for configuration object-name in library-name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/configuration-name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this.

31-16


Configuration

Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Controller Mapping This section assumes you have physically connected the hardware and defined the printers and display stations to OS/400. SSP supports a maximum of four controllers. For this reason, an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine supports only four controllers. These controllers are logical so you can map any physical AS/400 workstation controllers to them. Mapping a physical workstation controller also maps all the display stations and printers that are cabled to it at the same logical ports and addresses to which they are physically cabled. Note: You can instead choose to map individual devices, rather than entire controllers, to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's workstation controller. This is called device mapping. You might choose to use device mapping to more effectively assign display stations and printers to multiple AS/400 Advanced 36 machines. You would have to do this if you needed to include devices that were cabled to more than four physical workstation controllers. For directions on device mapping, see “Defining Printers and Display Stations Using Device Mapping” on page 31-12.

|

| | | |

Controller mapping maps an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controller to a physical AS/400 workstation controller. When you do controller mapping, you do not map individual devices. The devices are mapped implicitly when the controller is mapped. All of the devices attached to the physical workstation controller will auto-configure into the corresponding mapped workstation controller of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine at the same ports and addresses to which they are physically cabled. Note: To ensure the devices you add or you replace will auto-configure into the SSP master configuration record, make certain that these devices are powered on when you start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and apply this configuration. The SSP system console will be the display station cabled to port 0 address 0 of the AS/400 workstation controller to which workstation controller 1 of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is mapped, unless that device is the OS/400 system console. In that case, there must be a display station cabled at port 0 address 1 of that controller. This display station will appear to SSP to be at port 0 address 0. Therefore, the display station cabled at port 0 address 1 of that controller will be the SSP system console. To add or replace a printer or display station, cable it to the physical workstation controller at the desired port and address. To remove a printer or display station, do the following: 1. Uncable the device from its workstation controller. 2. Delete the OS/400 Device Description for the device, as follows: a. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKCFGSTS \DEV b. Press Enter. The Work with Configuration Status display appears.


31-17

Configuration

c. Find the name of the Device Description for the device you uncabled. You may have to page down to find the name. d. In the Opt field, type 8 to select Work with description. e. Press Enter. The Work with Device Descriptions display appears. f. In the Opt field, type 4 to select Delete. g. Press Enter. The Confirm Delete of Device Descriptions display appears. h. Press Enter three times to delete the device description and to exit from the WRKCFGSTS command. 3. Use the CNFIGSSP procedure in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to remove the device from the master configuration record. To configure workstation controllers with controller mapping, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 2. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 3. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 5. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 6. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 7. In the Selection field, type 2 to select Change M36 display and printer devices. 8. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display appears. 9. To define display stations and printers using controller mapping, do one of the following: To configure the same workstation controllers that would be configured for the SSP operating system if the OS/400 operating system was not installed on your system,

|

a. Press F10.

31-18


Configuration

The list of workstation controllers on this display is filled in with the physical workstation controller names available to SSP. b. Then go to step 10 on page 31-20. To configure a new workstation controller using controller mapping, a. Move the cursor to the blank line that corresponds to the workstation controller number (1-4). Note: If this controller is not configured for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, this line is blank. b. If you know the name of the OS/400 Controller Description for the AS/400 workstation controller you want to map, type the name on the line. c. Otherwise: 1) Press F4 to bring up a list of OS/400 Controller Description names that can be used. 2) Next to the workstation controller you want to map, type 1 3) Press Enter. The list of OS/400 controller description names is replaced by the Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display and the selected name is filled in on the display. d. Go to step 10 on page 31-20. To change a workstation controller from device mapping to controller mapping, or to change the mapping to a different AS/400 workstation controller: a. Move the cursor to the line that corresponds to the workstation controller number (1-4). Note: If the workstation controller is device mapped, the line contains the special value *DEV. If the workstation controller is already mapped to an AS/400 workstation controller, the line contains the OS/400 Controller Description name. b. If you know the name of the OS/400 controller description for the workstation controller you want to map for this controller number, type the OS/400 controller description on the line. c. Otherwise: 1) Press F4 to bring up a list of OS/400 Controller Description names. 2) Beside the OS/400 Controller Description that you want to map to the workstation controller, type 1 3) Press Enter. The list of OS/400 controller description names is replaced by the Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display and the selected name is filled in on the display. d. Go to step 10.


31-19

Configuration

To remove a workstation controller from the configuration: a. Move the cursor to the line that corresponds to the workstation controller number (1-4). Note: If the workstation controller is defined in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, the line contains either the special value *DEV or an OS/400 Controller Description name. b. Space over the name with blanks. c. Go to step 10. 10. Consider the following before you continue: After you change the mapping of a workstation controller and apply the configuration to your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you may want to use the CNFIGSSP procedure to remove any printers or display stations that are no longer in the machine configuration from the master configuration record. To see the OS/400 Device Description names for the display stations and printers that are currently attached to an AS/400 workstation controller that is mapped: a. Move the cursor to the line that corresponds to the workstation controller number. b. Press F21. A grid with rows of ports and columns of addresses is displayed, with the device description names filled in at the appropriate points. Note: You cannot change any values on this display. c. Press Enter to return to the Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display. 11. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 12. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 13. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 7 on page 31-18. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 14. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be saved. c. Press Enter.

31-20


Configuration

The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears. The following message appears: Object changed for configuration object-name in library-name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/configuration-name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this.


31-21

Configuration

Changing a Workstation Controller from Controller Mapping to Device Mapping A switch from controller mapping to device mapping may be required as the challenge to map a fixed number of display stations and printers across several AS/400 Advanced 36 machines prevents you from giving all of a controller's display stations and printers to a single AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The instructions in this chapter assume that:

| |

You want to map your AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controller with device mapping. You want the display stations and printers you have chosen to have the same configuration attributes they currently have under controller mapping. By changing from controller mapping to device mapping, you lose the ability to auto-configure a new device simply by cabling it to the controller. Instead, you must do as follows:

| | |

|

1. Use the CHGM36CFG command to add the device to a logical port and address on your device-mapped controller using the OS/400 device name.

|

2. Power off the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

|

3. Start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine again using the APYM36CFG parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration.

|

| |

Before you begin, you must find out the workstation controller number for the controller you want to change. For directions, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295. To change the workstation controller to device mapping from controller mapping, do the following: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 2. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 3. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 5. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 6. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 7. Determine whether there are any display stations or printers whose attributes are something other than the default values and make note of any of these that are different from the default values. To do this, do the following: a. In the Opt field, type 3

31-22


Configuration

to select Change M36 display and printer device attributes. b. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears. c. Type the desired workstation controller number in the M36 Controller field. d. Press Enter. The display changes to show you a list of information in the following columns:

Port Address AS/400 Device Display M36 signon at IPL Spooling Attribute

e. Make a list of all the lines which have an AS/400 device name and either: An N in the Display M36 signon at IPL column Or, A value other than *S36 in the Spooling Attribute column. Note: It is not necessary to change any of the entries. For each line, copy the information from all the columns into your list. You may need to page down to reach the bottom of the display. f. Press F12 twice to return to the Change M36 Configuration display. 8. In the Opt field, type 2 to select Change M36 display and printer devices 9. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display appears. 10. Move the cursor to the line that corresponds to the workstation controller number. Write down the name of the workstation controller. You will need it later. 11. Over the workstation controller name, type the special value \DEV 12. Press F21. The display changes to show a grid with rows of ports and columns of addresses. 13. Press F16 (Autofill from controller). The Select AS/400 Work Station Ctlr display overlays the display. 14. Move the cursor to the line which has the name of the workstation controller you wrote down in step 10. 15. In the Opt field, type 1 16. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display returns.


31-23

Configuration

The names of device descriptions for display stations and printers are now in the port and address fields that correspond to how they are physically cabled. 17. Press Enter twice. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 18. If you did not list any information in step 7e on page 31-23, go to step 25 on page 31-24. Otherwise, go to step 19. 19. In the Opt field, type 3 to select Change M36 display and printer device attributes. 20. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears. 21. In the M36 Controller field, type the workstation controller number. 22. Press Enter. The display changes to show you a list of devices defined on the workstation controller. The following columns appear on the display:

Port Address AS/400 Device Display M36 signon at IPL Spooling Attribute

23. For each item in the list you created in step 7e on page 31-23: a. Find the line on the display that has the port and address of an entry in the list. Note: You may need to page down to find it. b. Change the Display M36 signon at IPL field or the Spooling Attribute on the display to the value in the list. c. Repeat step 23 on page 31-24 for each remaining item in your list. 24. Press Enter twice. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 25. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 26. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 7 on page 31-22 or step 19 on page 31-24. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 27. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field.

31-24


Configuration

Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be made. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears with the following message at the bottom of the display: Object changed for configuration_name in library_name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/Configuration_name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this.


31-25

Configuration

Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls SSP Printer Output You can use the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object to give control of your printer output either to SSP or to OS/400. The default is to give control to SSP. You do this on an individual basis, for printers defined to the SSP. If you give control of the printer output for a printer to: SSP, then any printer output created within the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for that printer prints directly or goes into the SSP Spool File for later printing. In either case, the printer output is printed on the printer whose OS/400 Device Description is mapped to the SSP printer for which the output was created. You can give control to SSP regardless of whether you use controller mapping or device mapping. For information on printing with SSP, see Chapter 20, “Printing with SSP.” OS/400, then any printer output created within the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine for that printer is placed in an OS/400 output queue and is only visible through OS/400. You can specify the particular output queue in the configuration object, in any of the following ways: – You can choose the output queue with the same name as the OS/400 Device Description for the printer to which the SSP operating system's printer is mapped. You can do this regardless of whether you used controller mapping or device mapping. – You may choose any output queue by specifying its fully qualified name and using it to override the OS/400 Device Description for the printer to which the SSP's printer is mapped. You can do this regardless of whether you used controller mapping or device mapping. – If you used device mapping, you can also specify the fully qualified name of any output queue and map it directly to an SSP printer without associating it with an OS/400 printer Device Description. This is a way of configuring an output queue as a printer without having to base it on a printer device description.

|

You would use OS/400 print spooling to print any output which is placed in an output queue regardless of whether the output came from an SSP program or an OS/400 program. Note: You can also use the OUTQ parameter on the // PRINTER OCL statement to send the printer output to any OS/400 output queue that you specify. This overrides the SSP's normal mode of spooling the printer output or printing it directly. For information on the // PRINTER OCL statement, see the General Information for SSP Operating System book, SC21-8299.

Giving SSP Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output This section assumes you have physically connected the hardware and defined the printer to OS/400. It also assumes you have added the printer to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. To give the SSP operating system control of AS/400 Advanced 36 machine printer output, do as follows: 1. Find out the controller number, port number, and address of the printer as defined in the SSP configuration object using the CNFIGSSP procedure from an SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

31-26


Configuration

For directions, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295. 2. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 3. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 4. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 5. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 6. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 7. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 8. In the Selection field, type 3 to select Change M36 display and printer device attributes. 9. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears. 10. In the M36 Controller field, type the identification number of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine controller that the SSP printer is attached to. The identification number can only be: 1, 2, 3, or 4. 11. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display changes to show the attributes of the display stations and printers on the specified controller. The following columns are displayed: Port

This column displays the logical AS/400 Advanced 36 machine port.

Addr

This column displays the logical AS/400 Advanced 36 machine address.

AS/400 Device

This column displays: The AS/400 device name that is mapped to the port and address listed on the same line *OUTQ if you are mapping an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine printer at this port and address to an OS/400 output queue but you are not associating it with a physical printer.

Display M36 Sign-on at IPL

This column only applies to display stations. The two options for display stations are:


31-27

Configuration

Y

Assigns the display station to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The SSP Sign-On display is automatically shown on the display station when the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started. Note: If someone is already signed-on to OS/400 at the display station before the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started, the SSP Sign-On display appears after that person signs off of OS/400.

N

Spooling Attributes

Causes the OS/400 Sign-On display to remain on the display station when the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started. Once you sign on to the OS/400, you can use the TFRM36 command to transfer to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine from this display station.

This column only applies to printers. There are three spooling options. *S36

Specifies that no spooling is done by the OS/400 operating system. *S36 is the default. If there is a printer device-name in the AS/400 device column, and *S36 is specified, the printer is acquired by SSP when a request is made to send output to this printer. Printer output prints real time as it is sent to the printer. OS/400 can use the printer when the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is no longer using the printer.

*DEV

Specifies the AS/400 printer device output queue that is in library QUSRSYS. Anytime SSP prints to that printer, the output goes to the output queue in library QUSRSYS that has the same name as the printer in the AS/400 Device field.

qualified output queue name Specifies the output queue name that is to be used for spooled files. This must be specified if the AS/400 Device is specified as *OUTQ.

31-28


Configuration

You are only interested in the printers in the AS/400 Device column. 12. Search through the list to find the entry corresponding to the printer's port number and address. You might need to page down to find it on the display. 13. When you have found the desired entry, move the cursor to the Spooling Attribute column for that entry. 14. In the Spooling Attribute column, beside the desired printer, type \S36 to give control of printed output to the SSP operating system. Note: You cannot choose this option if the name in the AS/400 Device column is *OUTQ. In this case, there is no printer mapped to that port and address. See “Giving OS/400 Control of Printer Output When There Is No Physical Printer” on page 31-32. 15. To change other printers on this workstation controller, return to step 12 on page 31-29. 16. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears showing the M36 controller field. 17. If you want to change the Spooling Attributes on other AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controllers, return to step 10 on page 31-27. 18. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 19. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 20. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 8 on page 31-27. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 21. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be made. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears with the following message at the bottom of the display: Object changed for configuration_name in library_name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration

31-29

Configuration

Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/Configuration_name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this.

Giving OS/400 Control of AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Printer Output To give the OS/400 operating system control of AS/400 Advanced 36 machine printer output, do as follows: 1. Find out the controller number, port number, and address of the printer as defined in the SSP configuration object using the CNFIGSSP procedure from an SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295. 2. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 3. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 4. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 5. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 6. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 7. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 8. In the Selection field, type 3 to select Change M36 display and printer device attributes. 9. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears. 10. In the M36 Controller field, type the identification number of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine controller that the SSP printer is attached to. The identification number can only be: 1, 2, 3, or 4. 11. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display changes to show the attributes of the display stations and printers on the specified controller. You are only interested in the printers in the AS/400 Device column. For information on which printer attributes you can choose, see step 11 on page 31-27 and then return here. 12. Search through the list to find the entry corresponding to the printer's port number and address. You might need to page down to find it on the display. 13. When you have found the desired entry, move the cursor to the Spooling Attribute column for that entry. Do one of the following:

31-30


Configuration

a. Type *DEV if you want to send the output to the output queue that has the same name as the device description for the printer mapped at this port and address. Note: You cannot choose this option if the name in the AS/400 Device column is *OUTQ. In this case, there is no printer mapped to the port and address. See “Giving OS/400 Control of Printer Output When There Is No Physical Printer” on page 31-32. b. Type a fully qualified name of the output queue if you want to give control of the printer output to OS/400 but override the printer device description and send it to a specified output queue. A fully qualified name contains: The name of the library where the output queue is found A slash The name of the output queue you want to use For example, MYLIB/MYOUTQ. 14. To change other printers on this workstation controller, return to step 12 on page 31-30. 15. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears showing the M36 controller field. 16. If you want to change the Spooling Attributes on other AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controllers, return to step 10 on page 31-30. 17. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 18. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 19. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 8 on page 31-30. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 20. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be made. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears with the following message at the bottom of the display: Object changed for configuration_name in library_name type \M36CFG.


31-31

Configuration

where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/Configuration_name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this. Note: An OS/400 Output Queue defined in the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration will not auto-configure printers into the SSP master configuration record. To configure printers into the master configuration record at the ports and addresses where you defined OS/400 Output Queues, you use the CNFIGSSP procedure. For directions on using the CNFIGSSP procedure, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295.

| | | | | |

Giving OS/400 Control of Printer Output When There Is No Physical Printer You can send your output to OS/400 even if there is no physical printer. Note: This can only be done for AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controllers which are configured with device mapping. To specify which OS/400 output queue will receive the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine printer output, do as follows: 1. Find out the controller number, port number, and address of the printer as defined in the SSP configuration object using the CNFIGSSP procedure from an SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For directions, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295. 2. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 3. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 4. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 5. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 6. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 7. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 8. In the Selection field, type 2 to select Change M36 display and printer devices. 9. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display appears.

31-32


Configuration

10. Position the cursor on the AS/400 Work Station Controller field of the controller for which you want to define the output queue for your printer output. Note: The controller you choose must use device mapping (*DEV) to define display stations and printers. 11. Press F21. The Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display changes to show the devices defined for the selected controller. 12. Find the port and address for which you want to define the output queue. There may already be a printer defined at that port and address. 13. Do one of the following:

| |

|

a. To configure an output queue at a particular port and address, type *OUTQ in the field corresponding to that port and address. If the field was empty, then you are adding a new printer to the configuration. If the field was not empty, then you are reconfiguring an existing device as a printer. Because output queues do not auto-configure into the SSP master configuration record, you may later want to use the CNFIGSSP procedure to configure the printer at the desired port and address. b. To remove an output queue from a particular port and address, space over the *OUTQ at that port and address with blanks. You may later want to use the CNFIGSSP procedure to remove the printer at that port and address from the SSP master configuration record. 14. To change other printers on this workstation controller, return to step 12 on page 31-33. 15. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Display and Printer Dev display appears. 16. If you want to change another controller, return to step 10. 17. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. Each *OUTQ you added is associated with the OS/400 output queue that is QGPL/QPRINT. 18. If you want to change the library name or the output queue name: a. In the Selection field, type 3 to select Change M36 display and printer device attributes. b. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears. c. In the M36 Controller field, type the identification number of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controller where you defined the *OUTQ special value. The identification number can only be: 1, 2, 3, or 4. d. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display changes to show the attributes of the display stations and printers on the specified controller.


31-33

Configuration

You are only interested in the special value *OUTQ in the AS/400 Device column. For information on which printer attributes you can specify, see step 11 on page 31-27 and then return here. e. Verify *OUTQ is specified for the correct port and address. You may need to page down to see the port and address. f. In the Spooling Attribute field for that entry, you will find QGPL/QPRINT. Type over this library and output queue name with the qualified name of the output queue where printer output is to go for that printer. A fully qualified name contains: The name of the library where the output queue is found A slash The name of the output queue you want to use For example, MYLIB/MYOUTQ. g. To change another printer on this workstation controller, return to step 18e. h. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears showing the M36 controller field. i. If you want to change the Spooling Attributes on other AS/400 Advanced 36 machine workstation controllers, return to step 18c on page 31-33. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 19. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 20. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 8 on page 31-32 or step 18 on page 31-33. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 21. To save and exit. a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be made. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears with the following message at the bottom of the display: Object changed for configuration_name in library_name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration.

31-34


Configuration

Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library_name/Configuration_name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes. | |

Note: An output queue defined in the configuration object will not auto-configure into the SSP master configuration record. Additionally, devices you remove from the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration are not automatically removed from the master configuration record. If the changes you make require updates to the master configuration record, use the CNFIGSSP procedure to make the changes. For directions on using the CNFIGSSP procedure, see the Changing Your System Configuration–SSP book, SC21-8295.


31-35

Configuration

Defining Whether SSP or OS/400 Controls the Display Station This section assumes you have physically connected and defined the display station to OS/400. It also assumes you have added the display station to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine's configuration. You can specify whether the SSP operating system or the OS/400 operating system controls the display station.

| |

If SSP controls the display station: When the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started, the OS/400 sign-on display is blanked out. Then, the SSP sign-on display appears. If the OS/400 sign-on display is not shown when the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started, when the user signs off the SSP sign-on display appears. If OS/400 controls the display station: When the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started, the OS/400 sign-on display continues to be shown. To the SSP operating system, the display station appears to be powered off until one of the following occurs:

| | |

– The Transfer AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (TFRM36) command is used to transfer the display station to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine.

|

– The Start AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Procedure (STRM36PRC) command is used to run an SSP procedure.

|

To specify whether a display station controlled by SSP or OS/400, do as follows: 1. Find out the controller number, port number, and address of the display station as defined in the SSP configuration object using the CNFIGSSP procedure from an SSP command line on the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 2. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGM36CFG 3. Press F4. The Change Machine Configuration (CHGM36CFG) display appears. 4. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 5. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 6. Press Enter. The rest of the parameters for the command appear on the display. 7. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 8. In the Selection field, type 3 to select Change M36 display and printer device attributes. 9. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears. 10. In the M36 Controller field, type the identification number of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine controller.

31-36


Configuration

The identification number can only be: 1, 2, 3, or 4. 11. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears with different information displayed. |

12. Search the list and find the entry that corresponds to the port and address of the display station. You may need to page down to find the entry. 13. Look at the Display M36 signon at IPL column. If there is a Y in this field, the display station is controlled by SSP. The SSP Sign-On display is automatically shown on the display station when the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started. Note: If there is a Y in this field, it is ignored for the display station that is the OS/400 console.

| | | |

If there is an N in this field, the display station is controlled by OS/400. An OS/400 sign-on display remains on this display station when the system is started. You use the OS/400 TFRM36 CL command to transfer to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine when you want to use it. You can also use the OS/400 STRM36PRC command to run an SSP procedure from it. Note: You should not transfer the OS/400 console to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. 14. If you want OS/400 to control the display station, make sure there is an N in the Display M36 signon at IPL column. 15. If you want SSP to control the display station, make sure there is a Y in the Display M36 signon at IPL column. 16. If you want to change the attributes of other display stations, go back to step 12 on page 31-37. 17. Press Enter. The Chg M36 Dsp and Prt Dev Attr display appears. 18. If you want to change display stations on other workstation controllers, return to step 10 on page 31-36. 19. Press Enter. The Change M36 Configuration display appears. 20. Press F19 to validate your changes. Note: For information on how to handle warnings and errors, go to “Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 31-39 and then return here. 21. If you need to make any configuration changes, return to step 8 on page 31-36. You may choose to make other changes as described in other sections of this chapter before exiting. 22. To save and exit, a. Press F3. The Exit M36 Configuration display appears. b. Make sure a 1 is in the Option field. Chapter 31. Changing Your AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration

31-37

Configuration

Note: If a 2 is in the Option field, and you proceed, the changes will not be saved. c. Press Enter. The configuration changes are saved and the display with the OS/400 command line where you typed CHGM36CFG appears. The following message appears: Object changed for configuration object-name in library-name type \M36CFG. where configuration_name is the name of the configuration you just changed and library_name is the name of the library that contains the configuration. Note: Use the APYM36CFG (library-name/configuration-name) parameter on the STRM36 command to apply the configuration changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes will not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until you do this.

31-38


Configuration

Validating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration To validate a configuration, before saving and exiting the Change M36 Configuration display, you press F19. You always receive a message. If everything is acceptable, you see a message that indicates the validation completed. If the validation completed with warnings, the configuration can be applied when you start the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, but some devices may not be useable. If the validation completed with errors, the configuration cannot be applied when you start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. If there are warnings or errors, the devices you added are not configured correctly. To determine the cause of any warning or error messages, do the following: 1. Move the cursor down to the error message. 2. Press F1. The Additional Messages Information display appears. 3. Press F10. All the messages between the following message: Validation of machine configuration started and the last displayed message are all problems found in the configuration. Most of the errors that would not allow an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to be started with this configuration contain an (E) in the first-level text. 4. Press Enter twice to return to the Create M36 Configuration display. 5. Return to the step that sent you here.


31-39

Configuration

31-40


Displaying Configuration and Machine

Chapter 32. Displaying Information About an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration and Machine You use the Display AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (DSPM36CFG) command to display information about a specific AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. You use the Display AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (DSPM36) command to display information about the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and the configuration that was last applied to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. When you use the DSPM36CFG and DSPM36 commands, you cannot make any changes to the configuration or to the machine information. This chapter provides instructions on how to display your AS/400 Advanced 36 configuration or machine. The information includes instructions on: “Displaying a Configuration” on page 32-1. “Displaying a Machine” on page 32-2.

Displaying a Configuration To display the configuration for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type DSPM36CFG 2. Press F4. The Display Machine Configuration (DSPM36CFG) display appears. 3. In the Machine configuration field, type the name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration object is stored. 5. Press Enter. The Display M36 Configuration display appears. 6. Type the number of the option that you want to display. 7. Press Enter. The displays that appear are quite similar to the Change displays. Note: You cannot make changes to any of these displays. 8. To display other options: a. Press Enter. The Display M36 Configuration display appears again b. Repeat steps 6 and 7. 9. To exit, press F3.


32-1


Displaying a Machine You can display the following for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine: Status of the machine The attributes of the machine Information on the configuration that was last applied to the machine You would want to look at the configuration information if you have deleted or changed the configuration object and you want to know what the configuration object looked like the last time it was applied to the machine. To display the information for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, do as follows: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type DSPM36 2. Press F4. The Display Machine (DSPM36) display appears. 3. In the Machine field, type the name of the machine. 4. In the Library field, type the name of the library in which the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is stored. 5. Press Enter. The Display M36 Machine display appears. 6. In the Selection field, type 1 to select Display M36 attributes. 7. Press Enter. The Display M36 Attributes display appears. The following information is shown on the display. Machine The name of this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Library

The name of the library where the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine resides.

Console check When there is an SSP console check, the Console check field appears. If it appears, it always has a value of Y. The line that contains this field does not appear if there is not an SSP console check for this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. M36 status The status of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The possible status values are as follows: Incomplete The machine has no configuration applied. This is an empty machine. Damaged The machine is damaged. If you know why the machine is damaged, you can attempt to fix the machine. If you cannot fix the machine, the machine should be deleted. You would then restore the machine and its data from your last backup.

32-2



Job Queue The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is currently on a job queue where it is waiting to start. When you start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, the request is always sent to the QSYSNOMAX batch queue in the QSYSWRK subsystem. Starting

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is starting. An IPL is in progress.

Started

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started and active.

Ending

A request to power off the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in progress. This can be requested using the SSP POWER OFF command or by using the OS/400 ENDM36 command. This status also occurs if the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine session is ending abnormally.

Ended

The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is not started yet or is no longer active.

Abended The AS/400 Advanced 36 machine ended abnormally. Look at the SRC code on the line after M36 status. M36 SRC code The current system reference code (SRC) for this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine M36 Id

A three-character unique identification assigned by the system at the time the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine was created.

M36 fixed disk size The size of the fixed disk reserved for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in megabytes. You can change the size of the fixed disk using the SSP CHGSYSVL command. M36 auto-signon Indicates whether the users can bypass the SSP Sign-On display when they transfer to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Note: The OS/400 STRM36PRC CL command only works if this value is *ENABLE. | | |

| |

M36 applied configuration The name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration that was most recently applied to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. It also shows the library where the listed AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration resided when the configuration was applied. M36 server job The qualified job name of the AS/400 Advanced 36 server job that was most recently associated with this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The qualified job name is: QM36xxx/user-profile/yyyyyy where xxx is the number of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine and yyyyyy is the batch job number. Both of these numbers are assigned by the system. The number of the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is in the M36 Id field on the Display M36 Attributes display. IPL type

Indicates whether the default IPL Type for this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is attended or unattended.

Chapter 32. Displaying Information About an AS/400 Advanced 36 Configuration and Machine

32-3


User profile The name of the default AS/400 user profile associated with this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. This is the user profile used by the AS/400 Advanced 36 server job for handling AS/400 requests from the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Text description The specified user description for this AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Note: You cannot make changes to any of these displays. 8. Press Enter. The Display M36 Machine display appears. 9. To display AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration information, type a number (from 2 through 6) in the Opt field. Note: These options are described in “Displaying a Configuration” on page 32-1. 10. Press Enter to display the display with that configuration information. 11. If you want to see more configuration information, press Enter and return to step 9. 12. To exit, press F3.

32-4


Other Useful Information Appendix A. System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference System/36 Procedures to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference . . . . System/36 Control Commands to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference System/36 OCL Statements to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference . |

. . . .

A-1 A-1 A-27 A-32

Appendix B. Displaying and Setting the IPL Mode For a 9402 Model 436 Displaying the IPL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the IPL Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1 B-1 B-3

Appendix C. Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Server Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Prestart Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Attributes For the AS/400 Advanced 36 Server Job . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Priority of an AS/400 Advanced 36 Server Job — Example Setting attributes for the AS/400 Advanced 36 SLIC Tasks . . . . . . . . . . Setting Attributes for the AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Jobs . . . . . . . . . Changing the Priority and Storage Pool for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Job— Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Job to Immediately Use Changed Values — Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-1 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6

Appendix D. Using Electronic Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting a Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Detected Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Putting User-Detected Problems in the Problem Log . . . . . . . . . . . . What Happens After Submitting a Problem Through Electronic Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Status of an Open Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering PTFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-1 D-1 D-1 D-2

Appendix E. Preparing SSP for Dedicated State


. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

C-6 C-7

.

D-2 D-3 D-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

E-1

. .


Procedures

Appendix A. System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference System/36 procedures, control commands, and OCL statements are listed alphabetically, with cross-references to AS/400* commands, beginning on the following pages. System/36 procedures System/36 control commands System/36 OCL statements

Page A-1 Page A-27 Page A-32

System/36 Procedures to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference The first column lists the System/36 commands in alphabetic order. The second column lists the AS/400 commands with the same (or similar) function followed by a brief description of the AS/400 function. Note: Some of the commands listed in the second column are not part of OS/400. They are part of an AS/400 licensed program. For example, STRPDM and STRSEU are not part of OS/400. System/36 #STRTUP1

AS/400 ADDAJE

AS/400 Function Adds an autostart job entry to an existing subsystem description

WRKSBSD

Allows you to work with a list of subsystem descriptions

ADDAJE

Adds an autostart job entry to an existing subsystem description

WRKSBSD

Allows you to work with a list of subsystem descriptions

ALERT

CHGMSGD

Changes an existing message description stored in a specified message file

ALOCFLDR

RGZDLO

Allows a user to reorganize document library objects

ALOCLIBR

None

Function not supported or no longer required on the AS/400 system

ALTERCOM

GO CFGCMN

Shows the Configure Communications display (more command mapping information can be found in the System/36 Migration book)

APAR

CRTAPAR

Records data on tape, diskette, or a save file on disk to submit with an authorized program analysis report (APAR)

APPNINFO

DSPAPPNINF

Displays or prints APPN* network information

ARCHIVE

SAVDLO

Saves the specified documents or folders to tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

ASM

None


#STRTUP2


A-1

Procedures

System/36 AUTOC

AS/400 CRTRPGPGM

AS/400 Function Creates (compiles) RPG with automatic report specifications

AUTOPTCH

GO CMDPTF

Shows Program Temporary Fix (PTF) command menu

BALPRINT

None


BASIC

STRBAS

Starts a BASIC session

BASICP

STRBASPRC

Starts running a BASIC procedure saved as a source file member

BASICR

CALL

Calls a specified program and passes control to it

BASICS

CRTBASPGM

Creates (compiles) a BASIC program

BGUATTR

STRBGU

Starts the Business Graphics Utility (BGU) licensed program

BGUCHART

DSPCHT

Displays an existing chart defined by the Business Graphics Utility (BGU) licensed program

DSPGDF

Displays, prints, or plots a graphics data file

STRBGU


BGUDATA

STRBGU


BGUGRAPH

DSPGDF


DSPCHT

Displays an existing chart defined by the Business Graphics Utility (BGU) licensed program

STRBGU


CRTPF

Creates a physical file

CRTSRCPF

Creates a database file to contain source statements

CRTGDF

Creates a graphics data file from a chart format and a data file

STRBGU


BLDINDEX

CRTLF

Creates a logical file

BLDLIBR

CRTLIB

Creates a user library

CPYSRCF

Copy Source File

CRTMNU

Creates either a display file or program menu

CRTMSGFMNU

Creates a menu from specified message files

CRTS36MNU

Creates a menu (display file and command message file) from the user's source members

None


BLDFILE

BLDGRAPH

BLDMENU

BUILD

A-2


Procedures

System/36 CACHE

AS/400 None

AS/400 Function Function not supported or no longer required on the AS/400 system

CATALOG

DSPDKT

Displays the volume label and the data file identifier on a diskette

DSPFD

Displays the information retrieved from a file description of a database

DSPFFD

Displays or prints field-level information for one or more files in one library or all libraries that the user can access

DSPFLR

Displays or prints a list of folders and documents, or creates a database file containing the list

DSPLIB

Displays the contents of one or more libraries

DSPOBJD

Displays the names and attributes of specified objects in a specified library

DSPTAP

Displays the volume label and data file label information on a tape

CGU

STRCGU

Starts the Character Generator Utility (CGU) function

CHGSYSVL

CHGSYSVAL

Changes the current value of a system value

CHGXLATE

None


CHNGEMEM

RNMOBJ

Renames a specified object name and object type

RNMM

Renames a specified file member

CLRPF

CLRPFM

Clears data from a physical file member

CNFIGICF

GO CFGCMN


CRTCTLxxxx

Creates a controller description where xxxx is the controller class or type

CRTDEVxxxx

Creates a device description where xxxx is the device class or type

CRTLINxxxx

Creates a line description where xxxx is the line class or type

CHGCTLxxxx

Changes a controller description where xxxx is the controller class or type

CHGDEVxxxx

Changes a device description where xxxx is the device class or type

CHGLINxxxx

Changes a line description where xxxx is the line class or type

CFGRPDS

Configures the RSCS/PROFS* bridge application

DLTCTLD

Deletes a controller description

DLTDEVD

Deletes a device description Appendix A. System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference

A-3

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 DLTLIND

AS/400 Function Deletes a line description

CNFIGSSP

CRTDEVxxxx


CRTPRTF

Creates a printer device file

CHGDEVxxxx


CHGPRTF

Changes one or more of the characteristics of the specified printer device files

DLTDEVD

Deletes a device description

GO LICPGM

Shows the Work with Licensed Program display

CNFIGX25

GO CFGCMN


COBOLC

CRTCBLPGM

Creates (compiles) a COBOL program

CRTRMCPGM

Allows a user to compile an RM/COBOL-85** source program into an program that can be run in the AS/400 environment

COBOLONL

STRPDM

Calls the Programming Development Manager (PDM) utility, which allows you to work with libraries, objects, members, and user-defined options

COBOLP

STRPDM


COBSDA

STRPDM


STRSDA

Starts the screen design aid main menu and allows users to create or change a display format interactively

STRPDM


STRSEU

Calls the source entry utility (SEU) program and displays the main menu

COMPRESS

None


CONDENSE

None

Function not supported or no longer required on the AS/400 system (use RGZDLO to condense a folder)

COBSEU

A-4


Procedures

System/36 COPYDATA

AS/400 CPYF

AS/400 Function Copies all or part of a file from the database or external device to the database or another external device

CRTDUPOBJ

Copies one or a group of objects from one library to another

RGZPFM

Reorganizes a physical file member

COPYDIAG

DUPDKT

Duplicates the contents from one diskette onto one or more other diskettes

COPYI1

DUPDKT

Duplicates the contents from one diskette onto one or more other diskettes

COPYPRT

CPYSPLF

Copies data records in a specified spooled output file to a user-defined physical database file

DSPSPLF

Displays the contents of a specified spooled file

ADDMSGD

Describes a message and stores it in a specified message file

CRTMSGF

Creates a user-defined message file

CRTS36MSGF

Creates a message file from the user's System/36 message source member

CSALL

DSCJOB

Disconnect all interactive jobs

DATE

CHGJOB

Changes the attributes of a job

DEFINEID

GO CFGCMN


DEFINEPN

GO CFGCMN


DEFINLOC

GO CFGCMN


DEFINX21

GO CFGCMN


DEFINX25

GO CFGCMN


DEFSUBD

CRTFLR

Creates a folder

DLTDLO

Deletes one or all documents or folders

DLTDKTLBL

Deletes a data file identifier from a diskette

DLTDLO

Deletes one or all documents or folders

DLTDTADCT

Deletes a data dictionary

DLTF

Deletes a specified database or device files

CREATE

DELETE

Appendix A. System/36 and AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference

A-5

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 DLTLIB

AS/400 Function Deletes a specified library after all objects in the library are deleted or moved

WRKOBJ

Allows a user to work with objects

DELNRD

WRKDDMF

Displays a list of DDM files, which allows you to change, delete, create, and do other work with DDM files

DFA

DMPCLPGM

Dumps all variables declared in a CL program and all messages in the program's message queue to a spooled printer file

DMPDLO

Dumps the contents and/or attributes, or both, of folders, documents, or internal document library system objects to a printer file

DMPJOB

Dumps the basic data structures or specific calls of the current job or the job being serviced

DMPJOBINT

Dumps the machine internal data related to the current job

DMPOBJ

Dumps the contents and/or attributes of a specified object stored in a library to a spooled printer file

DMPSYSOBJ

Dumps the contents, attributes, or both, of any object, a generic group of objects, or all objects to a spooled printer file

DMPTAP

Dumps label information, data blocks, or both, from labeled or unlabeled tapes to a spooled printer file

DMPTRC

Dumps the performance data from the trace table to a database file

PRTINTDTA

Prints the dump file copied from DMPJOBINT command

STRSST

Starts system service tools by showing the System Service Tools main menu

STRDFU

Starts the Data File Utility (DFU) program

STRPGMMNU

Starts the programmer menu

DISABLE

VRYCFG

Varies lines, controllers, or devices on or off, and optionally resets the IOP associated with the specified object

DOCCNV

None


DSPLOCKS

DSPRCDLCK

Show current records lock status

WRKOBJLCK

Work with object locks

DSPMNU

DSPMNUA

Display menu attributes

DSPSYS

WRKHDWPRD

Work with system configuration information

WRKLICINF

Show products and features on the system (Work with Licensed Information)

DFU

A-6


Procedures

System/36

AS/400 WRKSYSSTS

AS/400 Function Work with information about status of system

DSPSYSVL

DSPSYSVAL

Display the current value of a system value

DSU

STRPDM


STRPGMMNU


STRSEU


WRKMBRPDM

Allows you to work with lists of members

DMPCLPGM

Dumps all variables declared in a CL program and all messages in the program's message queue to a spooled printer file

DMPDLO

Dumps the contents and/or attributes, or both, of folders, documents, or internal document library system objects to a printer file

DMPJOB

Dumps the basic data structures or specific calls of the current job or the job being serviced

DMPJOBINT

Dumps the machine internal data related to the current job

DMPOBJ


DMPSYSOBJ


DMPTAP


DMPTRC

Dumps the performance data from the trace table to a database file

PRTINTDTA

Prints the dump file copied from DMPJOBINT command

STRSST


ECSAPTCH

GO CMDPTF

Shows the Program Temporary Fix (PTF) command menu

EDITNRD

CHGDDMF

Changes one or more of the values in the specified DDM file

CRTDDMF

Creates a distributed data management file to define a remote file to the local system

RNMOBJ


WRKDIRE

Work with Directory Entry

ENDPRTEML

Ends printer emulation without ending the job

DUMP

EM3270


A-7

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 STREML3270

AS/400 Function Starts a 3270 device emulation session

STRPRTEML

Starts 3270 printer emulation

ENABLE

VRYCFG

Varies lines, controllers, or devices on or off, and optionally resets the IOP associated with the specified object

ENTER

STRDFU


CHGDTA

Changes, adds, or deletes records in an existing database file

EPDOWNL

STREML3270

Starts a 3270 device emulation session

EPLMRG

None


EP3270

STREML3270


ERAP

STRSST


ERR

SNDBRKMSG

Sends a message to one or more work station message queues

SNDPGMMSG

Sends a message from a program to a user, system operator, user profile message queue, or all active users

SNDUSRMSG

Sends a message from a program to a message queue and receives a reply

STREML3270


STRPRTEML

Starts 3270 printer emulation

CRTDSPF

Creates a device file to define a display station to the system

CHGDSPF

Changes (in the file description) one or more of the attributes of the specified display device file

CRTS36DSPF

Creates a display file from System/36 SFGR source

FORTGO

CALL


FORTONL

STRPDM


FORTP

STRPDM


FORTRANC

CRTFTNPGM

Compiles a FORTRAN/400* source program into an object program

ES3270

FORMAT

A-8


Procedures

System/36 FORTSDA

AS/400 STRPDM

AS/400 Function Calls the Programming Development Manager (PDM) utility, which allows you to work with libraries, objects, members, and user-defined options

STRSDA


STRPDM


STRSEU


CPYF

Copies all or part of a file from the database or external device to the database or another external device

CPYTODKT

Copies a database or device file to diskette

CPYTOTAP

Copies records to a tape file from a physical, logical, or spooled inline file, from tape, or from diskette in a specified block format

SAVOBJ

The Save Object (SAVOBJ) command saves a copy of a single object or a group of objects located in the same library. For job queues, output queues, data queues, message queues, and logical files, only the object descriptions are saved, and the contents of the objects are not saved.

SAVS36LIBM

Saves a copy of source file members on diskette or tape

HELP

Replaced

Replaced by online help information for commands and the F4 prompt key

HISTORY

DSPJOBLOG

Displays commands and related job messages

DSPLOG

Displays the contents of the history log

GO CMDLOG

Displays a menu of commands relating to logs

ICFDEBUG

TRCICF

Traces all ICF functions that occur within the job that entered the command

ICVERIFY

None


IDDU

STRIDD

Starts IDDU

WRKDTADCT

Allows a user to work with the contents of a data dictionary

CRTDTADCT

Creates a data dictionary

WRKDTADCT

Allows a user to work with the contents of a data dictionary

FORTSEU

FROMLIBR

IDDUDCT


A-9

Procedures

System/36 IDDUDFN

AS/400 STRIDD

AS/400 Function Starts IDDU

DSPDTADCT

Displays or prints the contents of a field, record format, or file definition

DSPDBR

Displays or prints relational information about database files, record formats, and libraries

DSPFFD


WRKDTADFN

Allows a user to work with data definitions

CRTPF

Creates a physical file

STRDFU


WRKDBFIDD

Shows the IDDU Work with Database Files display where you can select an option to create physical files or enter data into a file

STRIDD

Starts IDDU

LNKDTADFN

Links or unlinks file definitions in a dictionary and program-described files

STRIDD

Starts IDDU

DSPFFD


DSPDBR

Displays or prints relational information about database files, record formats, and libraries

DSPDTADCT

Displays or prints the contents of a field, record format, or file definition

IDDURBLD

None


IDDUXLAT

None


INIT

CLRDKT

Clears all files from a diskette

INZDKT

Initializes identification information and sets the format on a diskette

RNMDKT

Changes the volume identifier of a diskette or changes the name of its owner

INITDIAG

INZDKT

Initializes identification information and sets the format on a diskette

INIT9332

None


INQUIRY

DSPDTA

Displays the contents of a database physical file under control of a DFU program

STRDFU


PWRDWNSYS

Powers down the system

IDDUDISK

IDDULINK

IDDUPRT

IPL

A-10


Procedures

System/36 ITF

AS/400 STRITF

AS/400 Function Starts sending and receiving data through different applications

JOBSTR

CPYF


RSTS36LIBM

Reads a file containing library members, creates database source or data file members on the AS/400 system, and copies the member data from the file into each restored member

SBMJOB

Allows a job that is running to submit another job to a job queue to be run later as a batch job

CPYFRMDKT

Copies one or more files from diskette to an output file or to a printer

KEYS

GO CMDKBD

Displays a menu of commands relating to keyboards

KEYSORT

None


LIBRLIBR

CPYLIB

Copies a library and all of its objects to another library

CRTDUPOBJ

Copies one or a group of objects from one library to another

CRTSRCPF

Creates a database file to contain source statements

LINES

OVRPRTF

Overrides the file named, overrides certain parameters of that file, or overrides the file named and certain parameters of the file that is processed

LIST

GO CMDQRY

Displays a menu of commands relating to queries

LISTDATA

CPYF


CPYFRMDKT


CPYFRMTAP

Copies records from a tape file to a physical file, diskette, tape, or program-described printer file

CPYSRCF

Copies a database source file to a physical source file

DSPPFM

Displays a physical database file member

CPYF


CPYFRMDKT


LISTFILE


A-11

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 CPYFRMTAP

AS/400 Function Copies records from a tape file to a physical file, diskette, tape, or program-described printer file

CPYSRCF

Copies records from a tape file to a physical file, diskette, tape, or program-described printer file

DMPTAP


DSPDKT

Displays the volume label and the data file identifier on a diskette

DSPTAP

Displays the volume label and data file label information on a tape

CPYF


DSPLIB

Displays the contents of one or more libraries

DSPOBJD

Displays the names and attributes of specified objects in a specified library

STRPDM


DSPDDMF

Displays or prints detailed information about the specified DDM file

WRKDDMF

Displays a list of DDM files, which allows you to change, delete, create, and do other work with DDM files

CHGJOB


CHGSYSVAL

Changes the current value of the specified system value

CHGJOBD

Changes the attributes specified for a job description object

MAINTX25

None


MCSCONV

None


MOVEFLDR

None


MSGFILE

CRTMSGQ

Creates a user-defined message queue

DLTMSGQ

Deletes the specified message queue

DSPMSG

Displays messages received at the specified message queue

GO CMDMSG

Displays a menu of commands relating to messages

LISTLIBR

LISTNRD

LOG

A-12


Procedures

System/36

AS/400 RMVMSG

AS/400 Function Removes the specified message or group of messages from the specified message queue

MSRJE

ENDRJESSN

Ends a remote job entry session for a specified session

GO CMDRJE

Displays a menu of commands relating to remote job entry

SBMRJEJOB

Submits a remote job entry input stream to the host system as a batch job

STRRJESSN

Starts a remote job entry session for a specified session

WRKRJESSN

Allows a user to work with information about an active remote job entry (RJE) session

ADDMSGD


CHGMSGD


CHGRPYLE

Changes the message ID, comparison data, message, or dump attributes of the reply

DSPMSG


DSPMSGD

Displays detailed information about messages in a message file

MONMSG

Monitors the messages sent to the program message queue

WRKRPYLE

Allows a user to work with reply entries currently in the system message reply list

OFCBPRT

STROFC

Starts OfficeVision/400* which allows the user to do office functions interactively

OFCCAL

STROFC


OFCCANCL

ENDSBS

Ends the processing in a specified subsystem or all subsystems

OFCCOMM

None


CFGDSTSRV

Changes the configuration of the distribution network

NOHALT


A-13

Procedures

System/36 OFCDATA

AS/400 SAVOBJ

AS/400 Function The Save Object (SAVOBJ) command saves a copy of a single object or a group of objects located in the same library. The system saves the specified objects by writing a copy of each one on diskettes, tapes, CD-ROM volumes or in a save file. For job queues, output queues, data queues, message queues, and logical files, only the object descriptions are saved, and the contents of the objects are not saved.

SAVLIB

Saves libraries to tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

SAVDLO


RGZPFM


OFCDFLT

STROFC


OFCDIR

WRKDIR

Allows user to work interactively with a set of displays to view, add, change, and remove entries in the system directory

OFCFILE

WRKDOC

Allows a user to work with the word processing function

OFCGRP

WRKDSTL

Allows a user to work with distribution lists

OFCINSTL

RSTLICPGM

Restores an IBM licensed program from tape for initial installation or new release installation

OFCLDF

STROFC


OFCMAIL

STROFC


OFCMAINT

CFGDSTSRV

Changes the configuration of the distribution network

OFCMSG

SNDMSG

Sends a message from one user to one or more message queues

STROFC


WRKDSTQ

Allows the user to work with distribution requests on the distribution queues

WRKDOCPRTQ

Allows the user to work with the word processing function

OFCSRCH

STROFC


OFCSTAT

STROFC


OFCUSER

STROFC


OFCQ

A-14


Procedures

System/36 OLINK

AS/400 None


ORGANIZE

CPYF


RGZPFM


PASSTHRU

STRPASTHR

Starts a pass-through session and allows the user to sign on a remote system as if the user were locally attached

PASSWORD

CHGDSTPWD

Changes the password shipped with the system for the security officer user profile (QSECOFR)

CHGPRF

Changes the values of a user's profile

CHGPWD

Changes a user's password

CHGUSRPRF

Changes the values specified in a user profile

DMPOBJ


DMPSYSOBJ


STRSST


PCEXCH

None


PCEXEC

STRPCCMD

Starts a single PC application or DOS command on the personal computer

PCOPROF

CHGPCOPRF

Allows you to specify if you want to use DisplayWrite* 4 or OfficeVision/400* as your text editor

MENU PCOMNU

GO PCOMNU

Shows the AS/400 PC Support Organizer display

PCU

CVTTOFLR

Converts a virtual disk into a folder and PC documents

CPYFRMPCD

Copies the data from a PC document into a physical database file on the AS/400 system

CPYTOPCD

Copies the contents of a member from a physical database file on the AS/400 system to a PC document in a folder

POST

GO CMDCPY

Displays a menu of commands relating to copying

PRINT

CHGDEVxxxx


CHGJOB


CHGUSRPRF


CRTPRTF


PATCH


A-15

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 OVRPRTF

AS/400 Function Overrides the file named, overrides certain parameters of that file, or overrides the file named and certain parameters of the file that is processed

PRINTKEY

CHGDEVxxxx


CHGUSRPRF


CHGJOB


ANZPRB

Shows the Analyze Problems menu, and allows the user to analyze or report problems not detected by the system

DSPPRB

Displays or prints service-related information for hardware or programming

WRKPRB

Allows a user to work with the problems that were detected by the system or by the user

DSPGDF


STRBGU


APYPTF

Applies PTFs to a specified licensed program

DSPPTF

Displays or prints the program temporary fixes for a specified licensed program

LODPTF

Loads program temporary fixes for a specified licensed program from the service support system, tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

RMVPTF

Removes a program temporary fix from a specified licensed program

GO CMDQRY

Displays a menu of commands relating to queries

STRQRY

Starts the Query function by showing the Query main menu

WRKQRY

Allows you to work with a query definition and to run a query

STRDFU


STRQRY


UPDDTA

Creates and runs a temporary data file utility (DFU) program, which allows you to update a database file

RUNQRY

Runs an existing query or a default query if only the file name is specified

STRQRY


WRKQRY

Allows you to work with a query definition and to run a query

PROBLEM

PRTGRAPH

PTF

QRY

QRYDE

QRYRUN

A-16


Procedures

System/36 READINFO

AS/400 DSPDOC

AS/400 Function Allows the user to display a document using the word processing function of the OfficeVision/400 program

REMOVE

DLTF

Deletes a specified database or device files

DLTMSGF

Deletes the specified message file including message descriptions stored in the file

DLTPGM

Deletes a compiled program or group of programs

RMVM

Removes the specified member from a specified physical or logical file

RNMDLO

Changes the name of a document or folder

RNMOBJ


REQUESTX

None


RESPONSE

ADDMSGD


ADDRPYLE

Adds a message entry to the system-wide automatic message reply list

CHGMSGD


CHGRPYLE

Changes the message ID, comparison data, message, or dump attributes of the reply

MONMSG


RMVMSGD

Removes a message description from a specified message file

WRKRPYLE

Allows a user to work with reply entries currently in the system message reply list

RESTEXTN

CPYIGCTBL

Copies part or all of a double-byte character set font table from system storage to tape or diskette, or from tape or diskette into system storage

RESTFLDR

RSTDLO

Restores filed documents, distribution documents, and folders from tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

RSTLIB

Restores user libraries saved to tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

RSTLIB


RSTS36LIBM


RSTLIB


RENAME

RESTLIBR

RESTNRD


A-17

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 RSTOBJ

AS/400 Function Restores objects to a single library saved from tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

RESTORE

RSTOBJ

Restores objects to a single library saved from tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

RSTS36F

Reads a file, (optionally) creates a database physical or logical file (if it does not already exist), and copies any data into the file

RETRIEVE

RSTDLO

Restores filed documents, distribution documents, and folders from tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

RJFILE

CVTRJEDTA

Converts compressed AS/400 system database files to decompressed database files written either to another database or to AS/400 system printer device files

STRRJERDR

Starts reading a remote job entry (RJE) file

ADDFCTE

Adds a forms entry to an existing forms control table

CRTFCT

Creates a forms control table with no entries

CRTFORMDF

Creates a form definition from a physical file

CHGPRF


CHGUSRPRF


SETKBDMAP

Sets new key assignments for the Program Attention (PA) and Program Function (PF) keys

CHGPF

Changes the attributes of a physical file

CPYF

Copies a file including or omitting records

RGZPFM

Removes deleted records from a physical file member

RPGC

CRTRPGPGM

Creates (compiles) an auto report RPG program

RPGONL

STRPGMMNU


STRPDM


STRPDM


STRPGMMNU


STRPDM


RJTABLE

ROLLKEYS

RGZFILE

RPGP

RPGR

A-18


Procedures

System/36 RPGSDA

AS/400 STRPDM

AS/400 Function Calls the Programming Development Manager (PDM) utility, which allows you to work with libraries, objects, members, and user-defined options

STRSDA


STRPDM


STRSEU


RPGX

CRTRPGPGM

Creates (compiles) an auto report RPG program

SAVE

SAVOBJ

The Save Object (SAVOBJ) command saves a copy of a single object or a group of objects located in the same library. For job queues, output queues, data queues, message queues, and logical files, only the object descriptions are saved, and the contents of the objects are not saved.

SAVS36F

Creates a copy of a database physical or logical file to diskette or tape magnetic media that can be restored on a System/36 or to a physical file that can be sent to a System/36

SAVEEXTN

CPYIGCTBL

Copies part or all of a double-byte character set font table from system storage to tape or diskette, or from tape or diskette into system storage

SAVEFLDR

SAVDLO


SAVLIB


SAVSECDTA

Saves all security information to tape, diskette, or save file on disk

SAVLIB


SAVS36LIBM

Saves a copy of source file members on diskette or tape

SAVCHGOBJ

Saves a changed object or group of objects located in the same library to tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

SAVLIB


RPGSEU

SAVELIBR

SAVENRD


A-19

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 SAVOBJ

AS/400 Function The Save Object (SAVOBJ) command saves a copy of a single object or a group of objects located in the same library. For job queues, output queues, data queues, message queues, and logical files, only the object descriptions are saved, and the contents of the objects are not saved.

SAVSTG

Saves the licensed internal code and the contents of auxiliary storage to tape

SDA

STRSDA


SECDEF

CHGSYSVAL


SECEDIT

CHGAUTLE

Changes user's authority or an authorization list

CHGCFGL

Changes a configuration list

CHGDLOAUT

Changes the authority to a document or folder

CHGDLOOWN

Changes ownership of a document or folder from one user to another

CHGDSTPWD

Changes the Dedicated Service Tools (DST) password

CHGOBJOWN

Transfers ownership of an object from one user to another

CHGPRF


CHGPWD

Changes a user's password

CHGUSRPRF


CHKPWD

Checks the password associated with a user's profile

CRTCFGL

Creates a list of remote location names and remote location identifiers for the specified communications type

CRTUSRPRF

Creates a user profile to describe a user to the system

DLTAUTHLR

Deletes an authority holder for an associated resource

DLTCFGL

Deletes a list of remote location names and remote location identifiers for the specified communications type

DLTUSRPRF

Deletes an individual user profile or a group profile from the system

DSPDLOAUT

Displays a list of users and their authorities assigned to a specified document or folder

GRTOBJAUT

Grants specific authority for a named object, a generic group of objects, or all objects

A-20


Procedures

System/36

AS/400 RMVAUTLE

AS/400 Function Removes a user from an authorization list

RMVDLOAUT

Removes a user's specific authority to a document or folder

RVKOBJAUT

Deletes specific authorities to an object for a user

RVKUSRPMN

Revokes the permission from a user to handle documents and folders for another user

WRKOBJOWN

Allows a user to work with a list of objects owned by a specified user profile

WRKUSRPRF

Allows a user to work with a description of an existing user profile

CHGCFGL

Changes a configuration list

CHGDEVxxxx


CRTCFGL

Creates a list of remote location names and remote location identifiers for the specified communications type

CRTDEVxxxx


DSPAUTHLR

Displays all authority holders on the system

DSPAUTLDLO

Displays a list of documents and folders whose security is specified on the specified authorization list

DSPAUTUSR

Displays a list of users and information about those users who are authorized to use the system

DSPDLOAUT

Displays a list of users and their authorities assigned to a specified document or folder

DSPOBJAUT

Displays a list of users assigned to an object

DSPPGMADP

Displays a list of programs that use the authority of a specified (owner) user profile or group profile

DSPSYSVAL

Displays the name and value of a specified system value

DSPUSRPRF

Displays the user profile information

RSTAUT

Restores authorities that were specifically assigned to a user profile

RSTUSRPRF

Restores the basic parts of a user profile or a set of user profiles

SECSAVE

SAVSECDTA

Saves all security information to tape, diskette, or save file on disk

SERVICE

ANZPRB


SECLIST

SECREST


A-21

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 STRSST

AS/400 Function Starts system service tools by showing the System Service Tools main menu

WRKPRB

Work with problem System Service Tools main menu

ANZPRB


WRKPRB

Allows a user to work with the problems that were detected by the system or by the user

CHGDEVxxxx


CHGJOB


OVRPRTF


SETALERT

CHGMSGD


SETCOMM

GO CFGCMN


SETDUMP

ADDBKP

Adds breakpoints in a program being debugged

GO CMDDBG

Displays a menu of commands relating to debugging

GO CMDBKP

Displays a menu of commands relating to breakpoints

RMVBKP

Removes one or more breakpoints from the program being debugged

STRCBLDBG

Starts the debugging statements from a COBOL program

STRDBG

Starts a job in debug mode

SEU

STRSEU


SLIB

ADDLIBLE

Adds a library name to the library list

CHGCURLIB

Changes the current library entry of the library list

SMF

STRPFRT

Starts the Performance Tools licensed program main menu

SMFDATA

DSPPFRDTA

Displays performance data collected

ENDSAM

Ends the running environment defined in the STRSAM command

ENDSAMCOL

Ends sampling data and writes the collected sample data in a database file member

SERVLOG

SET

A-22


Procedures

System/36

AS/400 STRPFRMON

AS/400 Function Starts a collection of performance statistics based on specified values and writes the statistics to system-supplied database files

STRSAM

Periodically samples the machine interface instruction address while running specified programs

STRSAMCOL

Starts sample address monitor data collection and collects sample data defined by the STRSAM command

PRTRSCRPT

Prints a usage report for devices from data collected by the OS/400 performance monitor

PRTSAMDTA

Prints a report of the sampled data collected by the STRSAMCOL command and recorded by the ENDSAMCOL command

STRPFRT

Starts the Performance Tools licensed program main menu

SMFSTART

STRPFRMON

Starts a collection of performance statistics based on specified values and writes the statistics to system-supplied database files

SMFSTOP

ENDPFRMON

Ends collection of performance statistics

SORT

FMTDTA

Formats sort file contents

SRTX

FMTDTA

Formats sort file contents

STARTM

VRYCFG

Varies lines, controllers, or devices on or off, and optimally resets the IOP associated with the specified object

STATEST

VFYCMN

Shows the Verify a Communications Line display

STOPGRP

ENDMOD

Ends a single mode or all active modes for a specific advanced program-to-program communications (APPC) remote location

STOPM

VRYCFG


STRTGRP

STRMOD

Starts a single mode or all modes currently in use for an APPC remote location

VRYCFG


CHGJOB


CHGJOBD


SYSLIST

None


SYSTYPE

None


SMFPRINT

SWITCH


A-23

Procedures

System/36 TAPECOPY

AS/400 CPYFRMTAP

AS/400 Function Copies records from a tape file to a physical file, diskette, tape, or program-described printer file

CPYTOTAP

Copies records to a tape file from a physical, logical, or spooled inline file, from tape, or from diskette in a specified block format

TAPEINIT

INZTAP

Initializes tapes for use on the system

TAPESTAT

None

Function not supported or no longer required on the AS/400 system.

PRTERRLOG

Places a formatted print file of the data in the machine error log in a spooled printer device file named QPCSMPRT and is used by IBM service representatives

TEXTCONV

None


TEXTDCT

CRTSPADCT

Creates a user-defined dictionary

CHKDOC

Checks spelling or performs grade-level analysis of a document

WRKDOC


CRTDOC

Creates a document

DSPDOC

Display a document

EDTDOC

Edits a document using the word processing function of OfficeVision/400

CHKDOC

Checks spelling or performs grade-level analysis of a document

PRTDOC

Prints a document using the word processing function of OfficeVision/400

MRGDOC

Merge a document

PAGDOC

Paginate a document

CRTFLR

Creates a folder

DSPFLR

Displays or prints a list of folders and documents, or creates a database file containing the list

WRKFLR

Allows a user to work with folders

TEXTOBJ

WRKDOC


TEXTPROF

WRKTXTPRF

Allows a user to work with text profiles

TEXTPRTQ

WRKOUTQ

Allows a user to work with the overall status of all output queues

WRKDOC


CHGOUTQ

Changes the attributes of the output queue

TEXTDOC

TEXTFLDR

A-24


Procedures

System/36 TEXTREL

AS/400 RLSOUTQ

AS/400 Function Releases the spooled files that were previously held on the specified output queue

WRKOUTQ


RSTOBJ

Restores objects to a single library saved from tape, diskette, or a save file on disk

RSTS36LIBM


DSPLOG

Displays the contents of the history log

STRJOBTRC

Starts the tracing function to collect performance statistics for a specified job

STRSST


TRCCSP

Traces a CSP/AE application

TRCICF

Traces all ICF functions that occur within the job that entered the command

TRCINT

Traces licensed internal code and writes the data to a spooled printer file, to tape, or to diskette, or holds data in internal storage

TRCJOB

Traces program calls and returns that occur in the current job or in the job being serviced by the Start Service Job command

CPYFRMDKT


CPYTODKT

Copies a database or device file to diskette

CRTLINxxxx

Creates a line description where xxxx is the line class or type

CHGLINxxxx

Changes a line description where xxxx is the line class or type

VRYCFG


CHGDTA

Changes, adds, or deletes records in an existing database file

STRDFU


STRRMTSPT

Creates and varies on all configuration objects needed for remote support

ENDRMTSPT

Ends remote support

WRKSPL

WRKSPLF

Displays a list of all spool files on the system

WRKUSER

WRKACTJOB

Work with all active jobs on the system

TOLIBR

TRACE

TRANSFER

TRNMGR

UPDATE


A-25

Procedures

System/36

AS/400 WRKUSRJOB

AS/400 Function Work with a list of user jobs

WSU

None


WSUTXCR

None


WSUTXEX

None


WSUTXRV

None


WKSTYPE

None


A-26


Control Commands

System/36 Control Commands to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference System/36 ASSIGN(A)

AS/400 None


CANCEL(C) job name

ENDJOB

Ends the specified job

CANCEL(C) JOBQ(J)

ENDJOB


CLRJOBQ

Clears all batch jobs that are not active from the specified job queue

WRKJOBQ

Allows a user to work with the overall status of all job queues

DLTSPLF

Deletes a specified spooled file from the output queue

CLROUTQ

Clears spooled files from specified queue

ENDJOB


WRKUSRJOB

Allows a user to work with a list of all jobs and provides a release option to start a held job

CHGSPLFA

Changes the characteristics of a spooled output file while it is on the output queue

WRKOUTQ


CHGSPLFA


WRKOUTQ


CHGSPLFA


WRKOUTQ


CHGSPLFA


WRKOUTQ


CHGJOB


WRKJOBQ


CHANGE(G) JOBS

CHGJOBQE

Changes an existing job queue entry in the specified subsystem description

CHANGE(G) PRT(P)

CHGSPLFA


CHANGE(G) PRTY

CHGJOB


CANCEL(C) PRT(P)

CANCEL(C) SESSION(S)

CHANGE(G) COPIES

CHANGE(G) DEFER

CHANGE(G) FORMS

CHANGE(G) ID

CHANGE(G) JOBQ(J)


A-27

Control Commands

System/36 CHANGE(G) SEP

AS/400 CHGSPLFA

AS/400 Function Changes the characteristics of a spooled output file while it is on the output queue

CHGWTR

Changes the form type, number of file separators, and output queue attributes of an active printer writer

CHGMSGQ

Changes the characteristics of a specified message queue

DSPMSG


WRKMSGQ

Allows a user to work with message queues

CHGJOB


CHGMSGQ


HOLD JOBQ(J)

HLDJOB

Holds a job and prevents it from being processed

HOLD PRT(P)

HLDSPLF

Holds the specified output file from additional processing by a spooling writer

HLDWTR

Holds activity of the specified spooling writer at the end of a record, a spooled file, or a printed page

SBMDBJOB

Submits from a job that is currently running batch jobs read from a database

SBMDKTJOB

Submits from a job that is currently running batch jobs read from diskette

SBMFNCJOB

Submits a batch job to allow finance application programs to communicate with 4701 or 4702 controller application programs

SBMJOB


SBMNETJOB

Submits a batch job stream to a user on another system in the network

SBMRJEJOB

Submits a remote job entry input stream to the host system as a batch job

MENU

GO xxxx

Immediately displays a menu showing a group of commands (where xxxx is the name of a specific group of commands; for example, GO CMDCRT displays a menu of all create commands)

MODE

None


MSG

DSPMSG


SNDMSG


SNDNETMSG

Sends a message to a user on a remote system

CONSOLE

INFOMSG

JOBQ(J)

A-28


Control Commands

System/36

AS/400 SNDPGMMSG

AS/400 Function Sends a message from a program to a user, system operator, user profile message queue, or all active users

RCVMSG

Receives a message sent to a message queue

SNDBRKMSG


SNDUSRMSG


OFF

SIGNOFF

Ends all interactive jobs or causes all jobs in a group to end

POWER

PWRDWNSYS


ENDSYS

Ends all activity on the system and leaves only the console active

CHGJOB


WRKUSRJOB


RLSJOB

Releases a job for processing after the job was held on the job queue or was submitted to the job queue as a held job

WRKJOBQ


WRKUSRJOB


RLSSPLF

Releases a specified spooled file being held on an output queue for processing by a spooling writer

WRKOUTQ


WRKWTR

Allows a user to work with the status of all printers, all writers, or a specified writer

REPLY

DSPMSG


RESTART

STRPRTWTR

Starts a spooling writer that sends output to a specified printer

ENDWTR

Ends the processing by the specified spooling writer

RLSJOB

Releases a job for processing after the job was held on the job queue or was submitted to the job queue as a held job

WRKUSRJOB


CHGJOBQE


PRTY

RELEASE(L) JOBQ(J)

RELEASE(L) PRT(P)

START JOB

START JOBQ(J)


A-29

Control Commands

System/36

START PRT(P)

START SERVICE START SESSION(N)

AS/400 DSPSBSD

AS/400 Function Displays subsystem description information

RLSJOBQ

Releases for processing the jobs previously held

STRPRTWTR


RLSWTR

Releases a spooling writer that was previously held

RLSOUTQ

Releases the spooled files that were previously held on the specified output queue

GO CMDPRBMGT

Displays a menu of commands relating to problem management

RLSCMNDEV

Releases the communications capability of a specified device that is being held

START SYSTEM(S)

STRSBS

Starts the subsystem activity

START WORKSTN(W)

WRKCFGSTS

Allows a user to work with line, controller, and device configuration descriptions

STATUS(D) ALERT

WRKALR

Allows a user to work interactively with alerts created by the local system or received from another system

STATUS(D) APPC(A)

DSPAPPNINFO

Displays or prints APPN* network information

DSPMODSTS

Displays the status of the APPC device

WRKCFGSTS


STATUS(D) COMM(C)

WRKCFGSTS


STATUS(D) COMCNFIG(H)

WRKCFGSTS


STATUS(D) JOBQ(J)

WRKJOBQ


WRKSBMJOB

Allows a user to work with the status of all jobs submitted at a work station

STATUS(D) LINE(L)

WRKCFGSTS


STATUS(D) MESSAGE(G)

DSPMSG


STATUS(D) MSRJE(M)

GO CMDRJE

Displays a menu of commands relating to remote job entry

WRKRJESSN

Allows a user to work with information about an active remote job entry (RJE) session

STATUS(D) PRT(P)

WRKOUTQ


STATUS(D) SESSION(S)

DSPJOB

Displays information about job status

A-30


Control Commands

System/36

AS/400 WRKJOB

AS/400 Function Allows you to work with or change information concerning a job

STATUS(D) SUBSESS(N)

WRKCFGSTS


WRKACTJOB

Allows a user to work interactively with performance and status information for active jobs in a specified subsystem or all subsystems

STATUS(D) SUBSYS(I)

WRKCFGSTS


STATUS(D) SYSTASK(T)

WRKACTJOB


WRKUSRJOB


WRKACTJOB


WRKUSRJOB


STATUS(D) WORKSTN(W)

WRKCFGSTS


STATUS(D) WRT

WRKWTR

Allows a user to work with the status of all printers, all writers, or a specified writer

STATUSF(DF) JOBQ(J)

WRKJOBQ


WRKSBMJOB

Allows a user to work with the status of all jobs submitted at a work station

STATUSF(DF) PRT(P)

WRKOUTQ


STATUSF(DF) USERS(U)

WRKACTJOB


WRKUSRJOB


STATUSF(DF) WORKSTN(W)

WRKCFGSTS


STOP JOB NAME

HLDJOB

Holds a job and prevents it from being processed

STOP JOBQ(J)

CHGJOBQE


DSPSBSD

Displays subsystem description information

HLDJOBQ

Holds processing of all jobs on the job queue or added to the queue

STATUS(D) USERS(U)


A-31

OCL Statements

System/36 STOP PRT(P)

AS/400 ENDWTR

AS/400 Function Ends the processing by the specified spooling writer

HLDWTR


HLDOUTQ

Holds all currently waiting spooled files and all spooled files added to the queue from being processed by a spooling writer

STOP SERVICE

GO CMDPRBMGT

Displays a menu of commands relating to problem management

STOP SESSION(N)

HLDCMNDEV

Holds communications to a remote display station, printer, or system

STOP SYSTEM(S)

ENDSBS

Ends the processing in a specified subsystem or all subsystems

ENDSYS

Ends all activity on the system and leaves only the console active

ENDWTR


STOP WORKSTN(W)

HLDCMNDEV

Holds communications to a remote display station, printer, or system

TIME

DSPSYSVAL

Displays the name and value of a specified system value

VARY

VRYCFG


WRKCFGSTS


System/36 OCL Statements to AS/400 Commands Cross-Reference System/36 // ABEND

AS/400 None


// ALLOCATE

ALCOBJ

Allocates an object or list of objects in a routing step for later use in the routing step

// ATTR

CHGJOB


// CHANGE

CHGSPLFA


// CANCEL

DLTSPLF

Deletes a specified spooled file from the output queue

A-32


OCL Statements

System/36 // COMM

AS/400 OVRICFDEVE

AS/400 Function Temporarily adds the program device entry and the remote location name to the ICF file, or overrides a program device with the specified remote location name and attributes for an ICF file

// COMPILE

CRTxxxPGM

Creates a program using the correct compiler where xxx could be BAS (BASIC), CBL (COBOL), FTN (FORTRAN), or RPG.

// DATE

CHGJOB


CHGSYSVAL


// DEALLOC

DLCOBJ

Releases the allocations of specified objects for the specified lock status

// DEBUG

STRDBG

Starts a job in debug mode

// EVOKE

SBMJOB


// FILE (Disk)

ALCOBJ

Allocates an object or list of objects in a routing step for later use in the routing step

OVRDBF


// FILE Diskette

OVRDKTF


// FILE (Tape)

OVRTAPF


// FILELIB

ADDLIBLE

Adds a library name to the library list

CHGCURLIB


CRTPRTF


OVRPRTF


// IMAGE

None


// INCLUDE

None


// INFOMSG

CHGJOB


CHGMSGQ


// JOBQ

SBMJOB


// LIBRARY

CHGCURLIB


// FORMS


A-33

OCL Statements

System/36

AS/400 CHGJOBD

AS/400 Function Changes the attributes specified for a job description object

CHGLIBL

Changes the user portion of the current job's library list by replacing it with the list of user-specified libraries

CHGPRF


CHGUSRPRF


// LOAD

None


// LOCAL

CHGDTAARA

Changes the value of the local data area, group data area, or specified data area stored in a library

CHGVAR

Changes the value of a CL variable

CHGJOB


CHGJOBD


ADDMSGD


CRTMSGF

Creates a user-defined message file

OVRMSGF

Overrides a message file used in a program

SNDPGMMSG


// MENU xxxx

GO xxxx

Immediately displays a menu showing a group of commands (where xxxx is the name of a specific group of commands; for example, GO CMDCRT displays a menu of all create commands)

// MSG

SNDBRKMSG


SNDMSG


SNDNETMSG

Sends a message to a user on a remote system

SNDPGMMSG


SNDUSRMSG


// NOHALT

MONMSG


// OFF

SIGNOFF

Ends all interactive jobs or causes all jobs in a group to end

// POWER

PWRDWNSYS


// LOG

// MEMBER

A-34


OCL Statements

System/36 // PRINTER

AS/400 OVRPRTF

AS/400 Function Overrides the file named, overrides certain parameters of that file, or overrides the file named and certain parameters of the file that is processed

CHGPRTF

Changes one or more of the characteristics of the specified printer device files

DCLF

Declares one file to a CL program

RCVF

Used in a CL program to receive data from a display device or database file

SNDF

Used (in a CL program) to send a record to a display device

SNDRCVF

Used (in a CL program) to send and receive data from a device being used interactively by a user

// REGION

None


// RESERVE

None


// RUN

CALL xxxx


// RUN400

None

Function not needed on the AS/400 system.

// SESSION

OVRICFDEVE

Temporarily adds the program device entry and the remote location name to the ICF file, or overrides a program device with the specified remote location name and attributes for an ICF file

// START PRT(P)

STRPRTWTR


RLSWTR

Releases a spooling writer that was previously held

RLSOUTQ

Releases the spooled files that were previously held on the specified output queue

ENDWTR


HLDWTR


HLDOUTQ

Holds all currently waiting spooled files and all spooled files added to the queue from being processed by a spooling writer

CHGJOB


CHGJOBD


// SYSLIST

None


// VARY

VRYCFG


// PROMPT

// STOP PRT(P)

// SWITCH


A-35

OCL Statements

System/36

AS/400 WRKCFGSTS

AS/400 Function Allows a user to work with line, controller, and device configuration descriptions

// WAIT

DLYJOB

Allows your current job to wait for a specified number of seconds, or until a specified time of day, before running resumes

// WORKSTN

OVRDSPF

Overrides the file named in the program, overrides certain parameters of a file used by the program, or overrides the file named in the program and certain parameters of the file processed

A-36


OCL Statements

| |

| | | |

Appendix B. Displaying and Setting the IPL Mode For a 9402 Model 436 This appendix contains the instructions on how to display and set the IPL mode on the control panel of the 9402 Model 436. For directions on how to display and set the IPL mode for other models, see the System Startup and Problem Handling book, SC41-4206.

Displaying the IPL Mode To display the IPL mode, do the following: 1. Open the control panel cover to access the control panel. If the control panel cover has a Keylock feature, unlock and open the cover using the control panel cover key. 2. Press the left or right Select pushbutton (F) until 01 is displayed in the Function/Data display (E).

B

Function/Data

E

Enter

F


G

RTSP039-1

B-1

OCL Statements

3. Press the Enter pushbutton (G). A code similar to the following is shown:

B

Function/Data

E

Enter

F

G

RTSP040-2

Use the following to determine the meaning of each code: B N–The mode is set to perform a normal IPL from the B side of the disk. This mode is normally used to start the system by doing an unattended IPL. B M–The mode is set to perform a manual IPL from the B side of the disk. This mode is normally used to start the system by doing an attended IPL. D M–The mode is set to perform a manual IPL from tape or CD-ROM. This mode is normally used to do an attended install of the Licensed Internal Code and operating system and to restore the Licensed Internal Code. D N–The mode is set to perform a normal IPL from tape or CD-ROM. This mode is used to do an unattended install of the Licensed Internal Code and the operating system. A M–The mode is set to perform a normal IPL from the A side of the disk. This mode is used when applying PTFs. Use only under the direction of your support personnel. A N–The mode is set to perform a manual IPL from the A side of the disk. This mode is used when an IPL from the B side cannot be performed. Use only under the direction of your support personnel.

B-2


OCL Statements

Setting the IPL Mode This section provides instructions for setting the IPL mode on the control panel. Verify the current mode setting (see “Displaying the IPL Mode” on page B-1). If the mode is not set to the desired mode, do the following: 1. If it is not already open, open the control panel cover to access the control panel. If the control panel cover has a Keylock feature, unlock and open the cover using the control panel cover key. 2. Press the left or right Select pushbutton (F) until 02 is displayed in the Function/Data display (E). A

B

D

C

Function/Data

E

Enter

F

G

RTSP032-1

3. Press the Enter pushbutton (G).

Appendix B. Displaying and Setting the IPL Mode For a 9402 Model 436

B-3

OCL Statements

4. Press the left or right Select pushbutton (F) to display the mode you want in the Function/Data display (E) to select the IPL mode.

B

B

Function/Data

Function/Data

E

Enter

G

F

E

Enter

F

G

RTSP046-1

Figure B-1. Normal mode (Left) and Manual mode (Right)

5. Press the Enter pushbutton (G). 6. Press the left Select pushbutton (F) until 01 is displayed in the Function/Data display (E). 7. Press the Enter pushbutton (G).

B-4


Performance

Appendix C. Performance Considerations This appendix provides helpful hints on improving performance for an installed AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Notes: 1. Use the System Management Facilities (SMF) to find application problems. SMF tracks such things as: Locking conflicts, OCL statements processed File opens and closes CPU usage rates 2. Avoid running batch jobs during high usage periods. Consider moving batch jobs or some of your batch jobs out of peak periods. You can use the DSPSYS command to dynamically view the three highest CPU jobs currently running. 3. Consider performing keysorts before powering off the system. This should only be done if IPLs are taking much longer than they did previously. If you are not running twenty-four hour operations, consider using the stop system command with keysort. This should speed up the next IPL. 4. When you are running both OS/400 and SSP on the same AS/400 system, the QPFRADJ parameter that you use on the CHGSYSVAL CL command should be 3. 5. Add additional main storage or DASD. For general system performance improvements, it may be necessary to add additional main storage or DASD. This can be determined by using SMF. When the system is running more slowly, use SMF to check CPU and DASD use. If DASD use is high, more DASD will improve performance. If DASD use is high and User Area Disk Activity (UADA) count is high, more main storage (memory) will improve performance.

Understanding Server Jobs When you start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine with the STRM36 command, OS/400 starts up what is known as an AS/400 Advanced 36 server job, which runs as an OS/400 batch job under the user profile associated with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. A single server job is associated with each AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. When it is started, the server job performs an initial program load (IPL) of the specified AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. After performing the IPL, the server job handles requests for OS/400 functions coming from SSP batch jobs and from display stations associated with the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. (Those are the display stations acquired for use by SSP when the machine is started.) Examples of functions handled by the server job are: Processing IPL SSP procedure requests A portion of DSPSYSVL SSP procedure requests Processing CHGSYSVL DEVMAP SSP procedure requests  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

C-1

Performance

Creating and destroying OS/400 communication objects Processing POWER OFF SSP control command requests

Understanding Prestart Jobs Because the server job is responsible for responding to the requirements of all acquired display stations and batch jobs on an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, it passes requests for functions that might take significant processor time to one of a set of prestart jobs. The set of prestart jobs accept requests from any AS/400 Advanced 36 server job running on the system. Tasks run by a prestart job, run under the user profile associated with the requesting server job. Examples of tasks run by prestart jobs include: Processing RUN400 OCL statement requests for display stations that are assigned to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Processing requests to open and put data into OS/400 spool files for display stations that are assigned to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Allocating and deallocating AS/400 devices

|

Figure C-1 illustrates these concepts.

Interactive OS/400 Jobs

OS/400 Job STRM36 CL command ENDM36 CL command

AS/400 Advanced 36 Server Job

Machine Interface Queue

TFRM36 CL command STRM36PRC CL command

AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Jobs



Machine Interface Boundary

IBM-supplied licensed internal code

RTSP077-0

Figure C-1. AS/400 Advanced 36 Server Jobs and Prestart Jobs. A server job handles requests for OS/400 functions from display stations assigned to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Requests for functions that might require significant time are passed to prestart jobs.

C-2


Performance

Setting Attributes For the AS/400 Advanced 36 Server Job The server job runs in the QSYSWRK system-supplied subsystem and handles requests from the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to allocate devices, create printed output, and so forth. The Attribute display of the Display M36 Machine (DSPM36) command can be used to find the OS/400 job name of the server job. You can use the Work with Job (WRKJOB) or the Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) commands to display information about the server job. Some of the things these commands display are the: Run priority of the job Storage pool used by the job Number of CPU seconds used by the job You can use the Change Job (CHGJOB) CL command to make temporary changes to the AS/400 Advanced 36 server job. The changes are lost when the AS/400 Advanced 36 server job ends or another CHGJOB command is used to change these attributes. When you start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, you can specify a user profile on the STRM36 command or allow the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to use the user profile that was in the last AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration that was applied to the machine. This user profile is used for the server job. In addition to controlling object security, the user profile defines the job description (OS/400 *JOBD) that is used for the job. The job description defines attributes like: Output queue for the job logs and for the server job Message logging level for messages in the server's job log Routing data for the server job The value specified in the routing data is compared to the routing entries in the QSYSWRK subsystem to choose the job class (OS/400 *CLS) that is used for the job. The performance attributes like run priority and storage pool are defined within the job class. There are three routing entries defined in the QSYSWRK subsystem for the AS/400 Advanced 36 system: QM36HIGH This corresponds to an OS/400 run priority of 10. (High interactive job priority level) QM36MEDIUM This corresponds to an OS/400 run priority of 20. (Normal interactive job priority level) QM36LOW This corresponds to an OS/400 run priority of 50. (Normal Batch priority level) The IBM-supplied default for the run priority of the server job is 50. The default for the storage pool for the server job is storage pool 1 as defined in the QSYSWRK subsystem (*BASE pool). Appendix C. Performance Considerations

C-3

Performance

Changing the Priority of an AS/400 Advanced 36 Server Job — Example In this example, you change the priority of an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named M36ð1 in library M36 to run at priority 20: 1. Create a job description that will be used for the server job with routing data of QM36MEDIUM as follows: a. On an OS/400 command line, type CRTJOBD JOBD(M36/M36ð1JOBD) RTGDTA(QM36MEDIUM) AUT(\USE) b. Press Enter. 2. Create a new user profile for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to use for the AS/400 Advanced 36 Server job. In this example, the default *USER is used for the User Class (USRCLS keyword). *NONE is specified for the User Password because this prevents anyone from signing onto the system with this user profile. The job description specified is M36ð1JOBD which is in library M36. To create this user profile: a. Type CRTUSRPRF USRPRF(M36ð1USER) PASSWORD() JOBD(M36/M36ð1JOBD) b. Press Enter. Security Information You need to be careful with the special authority and object access authority that you give to this user profile. Users that have signed onto an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine without signing on to OS/400 can submit System/36 RUN400 OCL statements using this user profile's authority. You may want to restrict access to certain functions from authorized System/36 users. For example, if you define the new user profile to have *ALLOBJ special authority, any authorized System/36 user can run any batch OS/400 command against any OS/400 system object. 3. Change the user profile for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. In this example, the user profile for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is changed to M36ð1USER for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named M36ð1 in library M36L. a. On an OS/400 command prompt, type CHGM36CFG M36CFG(M36/M36ð1) b. Press Enter. Notes: a. After the system is set up to run under a specific user profile, you only need to change the routing data in the job description for the user profile to select a new routing entry in the QSYSWRK subsystem. b. You can use the Display AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine (DSPM36) command to determine the name and the library of the last configuration applied to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. For more information on using the DSPM36 command, see “Displaying a Machine” on page 32-2.

C-4


Performance

c. If the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration no longer exists, you can create one using the Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (WRKM36CFG) command. For more information on using the WRKM36CFG command to create a new AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, see “Creating an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration” on page 30-9. 4. Apply the changes to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. The changes are applied to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine named M36ð1 that is in library M36. The configuration applied is also named M36ð1 and is also stored in library M36. Changes to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration, do not affect an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine until the changes are applied to the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Note: If the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started, you must stop the machine. To stop the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine, follow the directions in Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine” on page 16-1. To apply the configuration, after you stop the machine: a. On an OS/400 command line, type STRM36 M36(M36/M36ð1) APYM36CFG(M36/M36ð1) b. Press Enter. For more information about setting the attributes for OS/400 jobs, and job descriptions, see the Work Management book, SC41-4306.

Setting attributes for the AS/400 Advanced 36 SLIC Tasks When the AS/400 Advanced 36 Server job is started, it creates some System Licensed Internal Code (SLIC) tasks that are used to emulate the System/36 instructions and to communicate with the various I/O devices (disks, workstations, communications lines, tapes, CD-ROMs, and diskettes). Since these SLIC tasks are not OS/400 jobs, the Work with Active Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command does not display these tasks. However, the Work with System Activity (WRKSYSACT) command, which is part of the Performance Tools/400 licensed program, can be used to display the CPU usage and priority of SLIC tasks. The priority of the SLIC task that is emulating the System/36 instructions and the storage pool used by all AS/400 Advanced 36 SLIC tasks are set based on the priority and storage pool of the AS/400 Advanced 36 Server job. If the server job is defined to run at priority 20, the SLIC task emulating the System/36 instructions for the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine will also run around priority 20. If the server job is running in the *BASE storage pool, the SLIC tasks will bring data into the *BASE storage pool.

Appendix C. Performance Considerations

C-5

Performance

Setting Attributes for the AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Jobs The AS/400 Advanced 36 prestart jobs are used by an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine to run certain requests for the SSP operating system. For example, when the RUN400 OCL statement is processed from a display that is assigned to SSP (For example, the user does not have to sign on to OS/400 before signing on to the SSP), the OS/400 request in the RUN400 OCL statement is run in an AS/400 Advanced 36 prestart job. In the QSYSWRK subsystem there are three prestart job entries for AS/400 Advanced 36 processing: QNURHHGH QNURHMED QNURHLOW The priority of the request from the SSP job determines which routing entry is used for the request. For example, if the priority of the SSP job is set to HIGH with the ATTR OCL statement, the QNURHHGH entry will be used for the request. QNURHMED is defined for normal SSP priority requests. QMHRHLOW is defined for low priority requests. You can use the Change Prestart Job Entry (CHGPJE) command to set the job description, the storage pool and the class used for the request. The class defines the priority for the request. Prestart job entry QNURHHGH defaults to class QSYSCLS10 (priority 10). QNURHMED defaults to class QSYSCLS20 (priority 20). QNURHLOW defaults to QSYSCLS50 (priority 50).

Changing the Priority and Storage Pool for an AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Job— Example The following steps can be used to change the priority of the low priority jobs from priority 50 and storage pool 1 to priority 40 storage pool 2. 1. Use the Create Class (CRTCLS) command to create a new class specifying priority 40. a. On an OS/400 command line, type CRTCLS CLS(M36/NEWLOWPRTY) RUNPTY(4ð) b. Press Enter. 2. Use the Change Prestart Job Entry (CHGPJE) command to change the QNURHLOW prestart job entry specifying the new class and storage pool 2. a. On an OS/400 command line, type CHGPJE SBSD(QSYSWRK) PGM(QM36/QNURHLOW) POOLID(2) CLS(M36/NEWLOWPRTY) b. Press Enter.

C-6


Performance

Notes: 1. There is a user profile value on the prestart job entry. This is the default user profile that is used if the request for the prestart job does not specify a user profile. All SSP requests for the AS/400 Advanced 36 server job specify a user profile so the value you specify in the prestart job entry is not used when determining if a job has the proper security authorization for a function. 2. In addition to changing the storage pool and class for a prestart job, you can also use the Change Prestart Job Entry CL command to change the initial, additional and total number of prestart job. For more information about changing these parameters, see the Work Management book, SC41-4306. 3. The changes specified with the Change Prestart Job Entry command will be in effect for any new prestarted jobs that are created. The Change Prestart Job Entry command will not change any prestart jobs that are already active.

Changing the AS/400 Advanced 36 Prestart Job to Immediately Use Changed Values — Example You can use the following steps to cause all AS/400 Advanced 36 prestart jobs to immediately use any changed values. 1. Stop all AS/400 Advanced 36 machines. For directions, see Chapter 16, “Stopping an AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine” on page 16-1. 2. Check to be sure the AS/400 Advanced 36 machines are all stopped. a. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKM36 \ALL/\ALL b. Press Enter. The Work with M36 Machines display appears. Wait until all machines are inactive before proceeding with the next step. Inactive machines have a status of Incomplete, Damaged, Ended or Abended. Note: You will need to press F5 periodically to refresh the Status column. c. End prestart jobs that run under the QSYSWRK subsystem for the benefit of AS/400 Advanced 36 server jobs. Note: These prestart jobs restart when any AS/400 Advanced 36 machine is started. 1) On an OS/400 command line, type ENDPJ SBS(QSYSWRK) PGM(QM36/QNURHHGH) OPTION(\IMMED) 2) Press Enter. 3) On an OS/400 command line, type ENDPJ SBS(QSYSWRK) PGM(QM36/QNURHLOW) OPTION(\IMMED) 4) Press Enter. 5) On an OS/400 command line, type ENDPJ SBS(QSYSWRK) PGM(QM36/QNURHMED) OPTION(\IMMED) 6) Press Enter. As each set of prestart jobs (QNURHHGH, QNURHLOW and QNURHMED) ends, a copy of the completion message CPC0905 will be logged in the Appendix C. Performance Considerations

C-7

Performance

QSYSOPR message queue. For information on how to check messages in the QSYSOPR message queue, see “Displaying OS/400 System Operator Messages” on page 5-7. Once these prestart jobs have ended, the new values for the prestarted jobs will be used for any AS/400 Advanced 36 machines that you start.

C-8


Using Electronic Customer Support

Appendix D. Using Electronic Customer Support OS/400 has an integrated set of functions that are designed to help service your system. These functions are contained in what is referred to as Electronic Customer Support. Electronic Customer Support allows you to: Report problems Review status of an open problem Order PTFs Your access to these functions is subject to the terms and conditions of service contracts that you have with IBM (for example, warranty or maintenance agreements). |

For hardware requirements and software setup directions, see Appendix D of the Fastpath Installation of Your Advanced 36 book, SA41-4138.

Reporting a Problem For hardware failures that do not disable system operations, Electronic Customer Support provides a fast, electronic method for requesting the service of an IBM service representative. Using Electronic Customer Support, you may report failures on your system and selected input or output devices. For software or Licensed Internal Code problems, notification of the failure and related symptoms can be sent to the IBM service system. A file of known problems is searched and, if available, a program temporary fix (PTF) is sent to your system for installation. If the reported problem is new, a problem management record (PMR) is created by the IBM service system. The PMR number is returned to your system through Electronic Customer Support. IBM service personnel, using the problem management record, respond to your reported problem.

System Detected Problems The system problem log allows you to display a list of the problems that were recorded on your system. You can also display detailed information about a specific problem, such as: The product type and serial number of the device that had the problem The date and time of the problem The hardware part or software program that failed Where the hardware part is found The problem status To report a problem which has an entry created in the problem log: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type WRKPRB 2. Press Enter.  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

D-1


3. In the OPT field beside the problem you want to work with, type 8 4. Press Enter. 5. In the Selection field, type 2 to select Report problem. 6. Press Enter. The Verify Contact Information display appears. 7. Make any changes you want to make (if any). 8. Press Enter to accept the information. 9. Select a problem severity level that closely relates to the severity of your problem. 10. Select who should receive and process your service request. 11. Select when and how you want to send the service request. 12. Press Enter. Note: If you want to permanently change the contact information, you would use the WRKCNTINF command.

Putting User-Detected Problems in the Problem Log A user-detected problem is one that has not automatically recorded in the problem log. To analyze a user-detected problem: 1. On an OS/400 command line, type ANZPRB 2. Press Enter. 3. Select the options that most closely describe your problem. As you progress through problem analysis, a symptom string is being built based on your responses. 4. When you complete problem analysis, the collected information is placed in the problem log. 5. Go to step 1 on page D-1 and follow the same steps as you would to report a system detected problem.

What Happens After Submitting a Problem Through Electronic Customer Support Reporting a problem to the IBM product support center results in a problem record being opened in the IBM problem management system. Electronic Customer Support, using information contained in this newly created problem record, searches a database of known problems. Known problem fixes are either sent electronically (if size permits) or an order for the PTF is placed. Unknown problems or problems without a fix are routed to the product support center. The product support center, using information contained within the problem record, investigates the problem. If the problem is with the software, the center provides feedback within the problem record. If the problem is with the hardware, the center responds with a call or they dispatch a service representative.

D-2



Reviewing Status of an Open Problem To review text added to the problem record by the product support center during its investigation of a software problem: 1. On any OS/400 command line, type WRKPRB 2. Press Enter. 3. In the OPT field, beside the problem you want to work with, type 8 4. Press Enter. The Work with Problems display appears. 5. Check the Problem Description column for the status of the problem you want to check. Note: Status of problems that have Fix request specified cannot be obtained. 6. If the status of the problem is Answered or Sent, start the query as follows: a. In the Option field next to the query problem status text, type 41 b. Press Enter. Electronic Customer Support establishes a connection and the results are displayed.

Ordering PTFs One of the more popular functions of Electronic Customer Support is the electronic ordering and delivery of PTFs. Corrective PTFs – Delivered electronically if size permits – Delivered on CD-ROM if size is too big (In this case, Electronic Customer Support places the order for you.) Latest cumulative PTF preventive service package – Electronic Customer Support places the order to deliver on CD-ROM Preventive service information – Delivered electronically The following table shows how to use the SNDPTFORD command to order PTFs and PTF information. Figure D-1 (Page 1 of 2). How to Use the SNDPTFORD Command to Order PTFs and PTF Information PTF Information

Command

Specific PTFs and cover letters

SNDPTFORD nnnnnnn .1/

PTF cover letter only

SNDPTFORD nnnnnnn .1/ PTFPART(*CVRLTR)

Appendix D. Using Electronic Customer Support

D-3


Figure D-1 (Page 2 of 2). How to Use the SNDPTFORD Command to Order PTFs and PTF Information PTF Information

Command

Cumulative PTF package

SNDPTFORD SF99vrm .2/

PSP Information: OS/400, SSP and LPPs

SNDPTFORD SF98vrm .2/

Licensed Internal Code

SNDPTFORD MF98vrm .2/ SNDPTFORD SF97vrm .2/

PTF Summary List

Notes: 1. The nnnnnnn by the .1/ is the PTF identifier. You can order up to 20 PTFs at a time. 2. The vrm by the .2/ is 360 for version 3 release 6. The v is for version. The r is for release. The m is for the modification level of the system. For more information about Electronic Customer Support, see the CL Reference book, SC41-4722.

D-4



Appendix E. Preparing SSP for Dedicated State Note: While you are performing the following steps, you will be asked to switch back and forth between the command display and the console display of the display station designated as the SSP system console. The console display has CONSOLE in the upper right corner. The command display has a line that says Ready for option number or command. For information on switching between the command display and the console display, see “Using the Console display” in the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297. By performing the following steps, you can ensure the AS/400 Advanced 36 machine can be put in a dedicated state. 1. Sending a message to all users You should inform all users you are going to put the system in dedicated state and ask them to sign off. This can be done using the MSG control command. a. On the command display of the display station designated as the system console, type MSG ALL,SYSTEM BEING PLACED IN DEDICATED STATE, PLEASE SIGN OFF NOW b. Press Enter. c. Review any replies sent by the users. A critical job may need to be completed before you stop the system. After answering all replies, continue with the preparation. 2. Verify all users have signed off. a. On the command display of the display station designated as the system console, type STATUS WORKSTN (or D W) b. Press Enter. This control command allows you to see if anyone else is using the system. If users are still signed on, you can use the MSG control command again to send a message to the user. You can also use option 9 (Cancel a session) on the DEVICES menu to sign off the user. c. Press Cmd3 to end the display. d. If you used option 9 to sign users off the system, press Cmd3 again. 3. Verify no jobs are running on the job queue. a. On the command display of the display station designated as the system console, type STATUS JOBQ (or D J) b. Press Enter. This control command allows you to see if any batch jobs are running. If the job queue is started, use option 7 (Stop the job queue) on the JOBQUEUE menu to stop any more jobs from starting. If there are batch jobs running, use the options on the JOBQUEUE menu to display, change or cancel these jobs.  Copyright IBM Corp. 1995, 1996

E-1


c. Press Cmd3 to end the display. d. If you used any of the options on the JOBQUEUE menu, press Cmd3 again to return to the JOBQUEUE menu. 4. Verify no spool writers are active. a. On the command display of the display station designated as the system console, type STATUS WRT (or D WRT) b. Press Enter. This control command allows you to see if any spool writers are active. If there are spool writers active, use option 4 (Stop spool writer) on the SPOOL menu to stop all spool writers. c. Press Cmd3 to end the display. d. If you used option 4 to stop all spool writers, press Cmd3 again. 5. Verify no communications subsystems are active. a. On the command display of the display station designated as the system console, type STATUS SUBSYS (or D I) b. Press Enter. This control command allows you to see if any communications subsystems are active. If there are communications subsystems active, use option 2 (Stop a subsystem) on the CNTLLINE menu to stop each active subsystem. c. Press Cmd3 to end the display. d. If you used option 2 to stop each active subsystem, press Cmd3 again. 6. Verify Object Distribution Facility (ODF) tasks are not active. a. On the command display of the display station designated as the SSP system console, type STATUS SYSTASK (or D T) b. Press Enter. This control command displays the active tasks. In the DESCRIPTION field, look for any of the following tasks: 00AD-ODF LOGF 00A5-ODF LOCK 00A9-ODF QMGR If none of these tasks were found, go to step 6e. c. On the command line under the SYSACT menu, type ODFCANCL d. Press Enter. This procedure cancels all the ODF tasks. e. Press Cmd3 to end the display. 7. Verify Personal Services/36 jobs are not active.

E-2



a. On the command display of the display station designated as the system console, type STATUS USERS (or D U) b. Press Enter. This control command displays the user jobs that are active. In the PROC and PROGRAM fields, look for any of the following: PROC #cb003 #cb001 OSULOCK OFCC001 OFCSTART

PROGRAM #OUBR #OUSV #OUXI #ODQY #OUQS

If none of these Personal Services/36 jobs were found, go to step 7f. c. On the command line under the JOBS menu, type OFCCANCL d. Press Enter. This procedure will cancel all the Personal Services/36 jobs. e. If there are other user jobs active, use option 5 (Cancel a job) on the JOBS menu to cancel each of these jobs. f. Press Cmd3 to end the display. g. If you used option 5 to cancel jobs, press Cmd3 again. 8. Reply to all messages on the system console. a. On the console display of the display station designated as the SSP system console, type REPLY I (or R I) b. Press Enter. c. On the console display of the display station designated as the system console, type REPLY C (or R C) d. Press Enter. e. Reply to any remaining messages on the system console. See “Replying to messages at the Console or Subconsole” in the Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System book, SC21-8297. 9. Check for other activity on the system. a. On the command display of the display station designated as the system console, type STATUS SYSTASK (or D T) b. Press Enter. This control command allows you to see if there is any other activity on your system. The only tasks that should be active are: Command Processor (Cmd Proc) Error Recovery (Err Recov)

Appendix E. Preparing SSP for Dedicated State

E-3


The following tasks may also be active: – Autocall – Gaiji – Remote Work Station (RWS) If there are tasks active other than those mentioned above, the task was started after you started putting the system in dedicated state or you skipped one of the previous steps. Perform step 9c and start over with step 2 on page E-1. c. Press Cmd3 to end the display. 10. Completing the dedication of the system. a. On the console display of the display station designated as the SSP system console, type STOP SYSTEM (or P S) b. Press Enter. You will immediately receive the following message at the system console: SYS-5676 STOP SYSTEM command in progress After a few minutes the following message should be shown at the system console: SYS-5677 STOP SYSTEM command has completed c. If the SYS-5677 message is not shown, type START SYSTEM (or S S) on the system console display. d. Press Enter. e. Go to step 2 on page E-1 and repeat all the steps again. If Message SYS-5677 message is shown at this time, you have prepared the system for being placed in dedicated state. 11. Return to the task that sent you here.

E-4


Bibliography You may need to refer to other IBM manuals for more specific information about a particular topic. The following IBM AS/400 manuals contain information that you may need.

S/36 3270 Device Emulation Guide, SC21-7912, which has information about configuring and using 3270 device emulation. For information about personal computers:

SSP Related Information For general information about SSP: General Information for SSP Operating System, SC21-8299, which includes the concepts you need for using an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine. Information Directory, SC21-8292, which includes a list of the 9402 Model 236 publications. Planning Information – Advanced 36, SA21-9638. This manual contains a planning guide and a set of forms in addition to information on planning the installation of the 9402 Model 236. Advanced 36 Installation, SA21-8290. This manual describes the steps for setting up and checking out 9402 Model 236. Performing the First System Configuration for Your System–SSP, SC21-8298. This manual describes the steps for completing the first system configuration for a 9402 Model 236. Using Your Display Station – Advanced 36, SC21-0209, which describes how to use a 9402 Model 236 display station. Operating Your Computer–SSP Operating System, SC21-8297. This manual describes how to operate and manage a 9402 Model 236 after completing the system configuration process. S/36 System Security Guide, SC21-9042, which describes system security procedures. S/36 System Reference, SC21-9020, which describes the procedures used for some of the tasks in this manual. S/36 System Messages, SC21-7938, which describes the error messages that could occur while doing some of the tasks. System Messages–SSP Addendum, SC21-8291, which describes the new error messages that could occur while using the 9402 Model 236 S/36 Procedures and Commands Summary, SC21-9024, which summarizes System/36 procedures, control commands, operation control language statements, and procedure control expressions.


S/36 PC Support/36 User’s Guide, SC21-9088, which describes how to use PC Support/36 with an IBM Personal Computer attached to an IBM AS/400 Advanced 36. S/36 PC Support/36 Technical Reference, SC21-9097, which describes how to install PC Support/36 S/36 PC Support/36 Workstation Feature User’s Guide, SC21-9695, which describes how to use the work station feature. S/36 PC Support/36 Workstation Feature Technical Reference, SC21-9569, which describes how to tailor the work station feature. 3278 Emulation via IBM Personal Computer User's Guide, SC09-1086, which describes how to configure and use 3278/9 device emulation. Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.1 User's Guide, which describes how to use the emulation program with an IBM Personal Computer attached to your AS/400 Advanced 36. Enhanced 5250 Emulation Program Version 2.1 Technical Reference Manual, which describes how to customize the emulation program for an IBM Personal Computer attached to your AS/400 Advanced 36. For information about programming: S/36 Data File Utility (DFU) Guide, SC21-7900, which describes the Data File Utility of the utilities program product. S/36 Work Station Utility (WSU) Introduction, SC21-7904, which introduces the Work Station Utility of the utilities program product. S/36 Source Entry Utility (SEU) Guide, SC21-7901, which describes the Source Entry Utility of the utilities program product. S/36 Business Graphic Utilities/36 User’s Guide, SC21-7985, which describes how to use the Business Graphics Utilities/36 to create business graphs and charts. S/36 Development Support Utility Guide, SC09-1085, which describes the Development Support Utility.

H-1

S/36 Creating Displays: Screen Design Aid (SDA) and SSP, SC21-7902, which describes the Screen Design Aid of the utilities program product. S/36 Character Graphic Utility Guide (Japan only), SC09-1055, which describes the ideographic Character Generator Utility (CGU). S/36 Ideographic Sort Guide (Japan only), SC09-1054, which describes the Ideographic (IGC) Sort Utility. For information about communications: S/36 Using System/36 Communications, SC21-9082, which explains communications capabilities. S/36 Distributed Data Management Guide, SC21-8011, which describes DDM, a communications feature of the SSP. S/36 Using the Asynchronous Communications Support, SC21-9143, which contains information about the Asynchronous subsystem, the Interactive Terminal Facility, and the file transfer subroutines. S/36 SSP-ICF Programming for Subsystems and Intra Subsystem Reference, SC21-9533, which describes the Interactive Communications Feature (SSP-ICF), provides information for programming SSP-ICF subsystems with Assembler, BASIC, COBOL, and RPG II languages, and describes the subsystem. S/36 SSP-ICF Upline Subsystems Reference, SC21-9532, which describes the customer information control system (CICS), information management system (IMS), and SNA upline facility (SNUF) subsystems of the ICF. S/36 SSP-ICF Finance Subsystems Reference, SC21-9531, which describes the finance subsystem of the ICF. S/36 SSP-ICF Guide and Examples, SC21-7911, which describes how to perform subsystem configuration for the Interactive Communications Feature. S/36 Multiple Session Remote Job Entry Guide, SC21-7909, which describes MSRJE, a feature of the SSP. S/36 3270 Device Emulation Guide, SC21-7912, which describes BSC and SNA 3270 Device Emulation, a feature of the SSP. S/36 Distributed Disk File Facility Reference Manual, SC21-7869, which describes DDFF, a feature of the SSP. S/36 Communications and Systems Management Guide, SC21-8010, which describes the change management, remote management, and alert functions of C & SM, a feature of the SSP.

H-2


S/36 Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking (APPN) Guide, SC21-9471, which describes the extended networking capabilities of APPC. For information about office support: System/36 in the Office, GC21-8002, which gives an overview of the capabilities of the OFFICE/36 program products and how they relate to each other. S/36 Getting Started with DisplayWrite/36, SC21-8005, which describes DisplayWrite/36, an OFFICE/36 Program Product. S/36 Getting Started with Personal Services/36, SC09-1061, which describes Personal Services/36, an OFFICE/36 Program Product. S/36 Administering Personal Services/36 in the Office, SC09-1062, which describes how to install and tailor the Personal Services/36 program product. S/36 Getting Started with Query/36, SC21-8004, which describes Query/36, an OFFICE/36 Program Product. S/36 Getting Started with IDDU, SC21-8003, which describes IDDU, an option of the SSP.

OS/400 Related Information For information not covered in this book on starting the system unit and handling problems: System Startup and Problem Handling, SC41-4206. For information about planning, installation, and migration: Local Device Configuration, SC41-4121, provides information about how to do an initial configuration and how to change that configuration. It also contains conceptual information about device configuration. Software Installation, SC41-4120, provides step-bystep procedures for initial install, installing licensed programs, program temporary fixes (PTFs), and secondary languages from IBM. ASCII Work Station Reference, SA41-3130, provides information on how to use ASCII work stations attached to the AS/400 system. It describes how to adjust the settings of ASCII work stations and provides information on keyboard mappings and character code mappings. This manual also describes the process of ASCII device setup and provides examples about ASCII device setting adjustments. It also contains information on special considerations for personal computer setting adjustments, and auxiliary printer setting adjustments.

For information about system use: Getting Started with AS/400, SC41-4204, is for new or novice AS/400 users to help them get started on the AS/400 system. The booklet shows how to perform simple tasks on the system in a short time (2 or 3 hours) and introduces them to key functions on the AS/400. System Operation for New Users, SC41-3200, provides beginner information about how to sign on and off; send and receive messages; respond to keyboard error messages; use function keys; use display, command, and help information; and control and manage jobs. System Operation, SC41-4203, provides information about handling messages, working with jobs and printer output, devices communications, working with support functions, cleaning up your system, and so on. Managing OfficeVision/400, SH21-0699, provides information on how to manage the day-to-day activities of OfficeVision. It also includes information on maintaining office enrollment and creating and managing office objects. Q & A Database Coordinator's Guide, SC41-8088, describes how to use Question-and-Answer (Q & A) to search through questions and answers stored in a Q & A database on the system. This manual also includes information about creating a Q & A database. For information about system management Security – Basic, SC41-4301, explains why security is necessary, defines major concepts, and provides information on planning, implementing, and monitoring basic security on the AS/400 system. Backup and Recovery – Basic, SC41-4304, contains information about planning a backup and recovery strategy, the different types of media available to save and restore system data, save and restore procedures, and disk recovery procedures. It also describes how to install the system again from backup. Backup and Recovery – Advanced, SC41-4305, describes how to plan for and set up user auxiliary storage pools (ASPs), mirrored protection, and checksums, along with other availability recovery topics. It also provides information about journaling and save-while-active. Work Management, SC41-4306, provides information about how to create and change a work management environment. Other topics include a description of tuning the system, collecting performance data including information on record formats and contents of the data being collected, working with system values to control or change the overall operation of the system, and a description of how to

gather data to determine who is using the system and what resources are being used. System Manager Use, SC41-3321, provides information about the commands and functions available when the SystemView System Manager/400 licensed program is installed on one or more AS/400 systems in a network. This manual also provides setup procedures and information for maintaining a network of AS/400 systems. Performance Tools/400, SC41-4340, provides information about what Performance Tools/400 are, gives an overview of the tools, and tells how the tools can be used to help manage system performance. The manual gives instructions on how to approach the analysis of system performance and how to do system performance measurement, reporting, capacity planning, and application analysis. This manual also includes information about additional functions and related commands for further analysis. provides information on AS/400 Performance Tools and how they can help manage system performance. For more information about communications and connectivity: SNA Distribution Services, SC41-3410, provides information about administering data communications applications on an AS/400 system. Communications Management, SC41-3406, provides information on how to start, stop, verify, and test communications, handle communications errors, and work with communications status. Communications Configuration, SC41-3401, provides information on how to configure the communications functions available with the OS/400 licensed program, including detailed descriptions of network interface, line, controller, device, mode, and class-of-service descriptions; configuration lists; and connection lists. For information about program enablers Printer Device Programming, SC41-4713, provides information on printing elements and concepts of the AS/400 system, printer file and print spooling support for printing operation, and printer connectivity. System/36 Environment Programming, SC41-4730, provides information identifying the differences in the applications process in the System/36 environment on the AS/400 system. It helps the user understand the functional and operational differences (from a System/36 perspective) when processing in the System/36 environment on the AS/400 system. This includes an environment functional overview, considerations for migration, programming, communications, security, and coexistence. Bibliography

H-3

System/36 Environment Reference, SC41-4731, provides information about using System/36 procedure control expressions, procedures, operation control language (OCL) statements, control commands, and utilities on the AS/400 system. For information about program interfaces:

H-4


System API Reference, SC41-4801, provides information on how to create, use, and delete objects that help manage system performance, use spooling efficiently, and maintain database files efficiently. This manual also includes information on creating and maintaining the programs for system objects and retrieving OS/400 information by working with objects, database files, jobs, and spooling.

Index Special Characters *NULL 22-3 user ID 22-3 *QUTQ special value to direct printer output to output queue

A abnormal end message definition 5-5 accessing Operational Assistant 6-3 activating communications line 11-4 controller 11-4 device 11-1 diskette device 11-1 display device 11-1 printer device 11-1 tape device 11-1 active job changing 10-16, 10-17 activity log, product hardware problems 28-1 Add Job Queue Entry (ADDJOBQE) command 10-12 adding by using controller mapping printers 31-17 workstations 31-17 CD-ROM device 31-10 communications line 31-4 diskette device 31-8 job queue entry 10-12 job schedule entry 10-4 local area network (LAN) 31-4 tape 31-10 using device mapping printers 31-12 workstations 31-12 ADDJOBQE (Add Job Queue Entry) command 10-12 address printing local device 11-3 Advanced 36 procedure running example 14-7 starting 14-6 advanced assistance level 6-3 Advanced Function Printing (AFP) See Printer Device Programming


31-32

AFP (Advanced Function Printing) See Printer Device Programming ALCOBJ 28-1 ALRCTLD 11-5 alternative SSP console 17-1 becomes SSP console 17-2 making into SSP console 17-3 transferring function to 17-3 ANSLIN 11-7 answering call communications line 11-7 manually 11-7 outside United States 11-7 ANZPRB 13-1 APPC 22-2 APYM36CFG parameter using 15-3 AS/400 Advanced 36 prestart jobs setting attributes C-6 server job C-1 setting attributes C-3 SLIC Tasks setting attributes C-5 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine adding to configuration communications line or a LAN 31-4 diskette device 31-8 display station 31-12 printer 31-12 tape or CD-ROM device 31-10 workstation controller 31-17 changing attributes 30-3, 30-10 configuration description 30-13 configuration details 30-10 description of 30-6 changing configuration communications line or a LAN 31-4 diskette device 31-8 display station 31-12 printer 31-12 tape or CD-ROM device 31-10 workstation controller 31-17 changing from controller mapping to device mapping 31-22 configuration object saving 25-1 creating another 30-2, 30-9 defining whether SSP or OS/400 controls SSP printer output 31-26

X-1

AS/400 Advanced 36 machine (continued) defining (continued) whether SSP or OS/400 controls the display station 31-36 deleting 30-4 configuration 30-11 display stations 31-36 displaying 30-4 configuration 30-11, 32-1 information 32-2 dump 16-3 ending 30-7 handling error codes 28-9 library restoring 25-1, 25-2 saving 25-1 object saving 25-1 operations management 30-1 printer output 31-26 printing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration information 30-5 configuration 30-12 putting in dedicated state 16-1 removing from configuration communications line or a LAN 31-4 diskette device 31-8 display station 31-12 printer 31-12 tape or CD-ROM device 31-10 workstation controller 31-17 renaming 30-5 configuration 30-12 restoring 12-6, 25-1, 25-2 library 25-2 saving 12-4, 25-1 starting 10-5, 15-1, 30-6 automatically 15-5 stopping 16-1 from SSP system console 16-2 summary of CL commands 30-13 transferring procedure to 14-6 STRM36PRC 14-6 transferring to 14-1, 14-3, 14-7, 30-7 transferring to with automatic sign-on 14-5 AS/400 Advanced 36 Program corrective service SSP PTFs 26-2 installing cumulative SSP PTF packages 26-5 maintenance strategy corrective service 26-1, 26-2 cumulative PTF package 26-1 preventative service 26-1, 26-2 ordering SSP PTF information 26-3 SSP PTFs 26-3

X-2


AS/400 and System/36 command cross-reference A-1 AS/400 system See system ASSIGN 20-8 assigning job to a different output queue 10-18 printer output to a different printer 7-8 to a printer 7-9 system printer 20-8 assistance level advanced 6-3 basic 6-3 changing 6-4 changing in user profile 6-7 changing temporarily 6-4 definition 6-3 intermediate 6-3 using 6-3 attended IPL changing B-3 setting B-3 authority working with other user jobs 10-6 automatic signon to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 14-5 automatic startup, disabling 29-7 automatically starting AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 15-5 automatically starting ILAN subsystem 29-6

B badge security 22-2 general description 22-2 magnetic stripe reader 22-2 balancing spooled output using procedure 20-6 BALPRINT 20-6 basic assistance level 6-3 batch job 10-9 definition 10-1 deleting printer output 10-9 displaying all 10-6 by status 10-7 other user 10-6 ending 10-9 holding method 10-8 printer output 10-8 printing a job log for 10-19 releasing 10-9 scheduling 10-2, 10-4

batch job (continued) scheduling to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 10-5 submit to run immediately 10-2 viewing 10-6 working with 10-1, 10-5 blinking 4-digit number 18-1, 18-11 blinking 4-digit number and input inhibited light on keyboard message 18-11 break message handling 5-7 sending 5-17

C calendar saving 12-4 call stack displaying 10-15 calling manual dial 11-6 CANCEL PRT 20-5 caution notice changing job description 10-20 CD-ROM device adding 31-10 deleting 31-10 replacing 31-10 CD-ROM drive changing to tape cartridge drive 26-17 installing corrective SSP PTFs 26-5 mapping devices to it 26-16 changed object saving in a library 12-4 changed objects restoring 12-6 changing active job 10-17 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine attributes 30-10 configuration 30-13 configuration details 30-10 assistance level 6-4 assistance level temporarily 6-4 attributes for AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-3 CD-ROM drive to tape cartridge drive 26-17 configuration 31-1 description of AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-6 device description 11-3 name 11-2 status 11-1 diskette device name 11-2 status 11-1 display device name 11-2

changing (continued) display device (continued) status 11-1 form type for printer output 7-9 IPL mode B-3 job how run 10-16 print priority 10-18 priority on a job queue 10-16 job description caution notice 10-20 job schedule entry 10-5 level, assistance 6-4 logging level for job 10-20 message queue 5-12 name diskette device 11-2 display device 11-2 printer device 11-2 tape device 11-2 password 9-2 printer attributes 31-27 printer device forms 7-13 name 11-2 status 11-1 printer file 10-21 printer options 20-8 printer output copies 7-8 using Control Command 20-4 using display option 20-4 using menu option 20-4 QAUTOVRT value 29-15 spooled file priority 10-18 status device 10-18 display device 10-18 printer device 10-18 tape unit 10-18 tape device name 11-2 status 11-1 temporary password 9-2 to a command display 17-4 workstation attributes 31-27 changing configuration for an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine that starts automatically 15-5 checklist electronic PTF installation 26-9 CHGCTLAPPC 29-7 CHGJOB 10-15, 10-16 CHGJOBD 10-20

15-5

Index

X-3

CHGM36 14-5, 30-3, 30-13 CHGM36CFG 30-10, 30-13, 31-4, 31-8, 31-10, 31-12, 31-18, 31-22, 31-27, 31-30, 31-32, 31-36, C-4 CHGMSGQ 5-12 CHGNETA 11-5 CHGPRTF 10-21 CHGSYSVAL 29-15 CL command ADDJOBQE 10-12 ALCOBJ 28-1 ALRCTLD 11-5 ANSLIN 11-7 ANZPRB 13-1 CHGCTLAPPC 29-7 CHGJOB 10-15, 10-16 CHGJOBD 10-20 CHGM36 14-5, 30-3, 30-13 CHGM36CFG 30-10, 30-13, 31-4, 31-8, 31-10, 31-12, 31-18, 31-22, 31-27, 31-30, 31-32, 31-36 CHGMSGQ 5-12 CHGNETA 11-5 CHGPRTF 10-21 CHGSYSVAL 29-15 CRTDUPOBJ 10-12 CRTM36 30-2, 30-13 CRTM36CFG 30-9, 30-14 DLTM36 30-4, 30-14 DLTM36CFG 30-14 DSPJOBLOG 10-19 DSPM36 30-14, 32-1, 32-2 DSPM36CFG 30-14, 32-1 DSPMSG 5-2, 11-7, 29-13 DSPNETA 11-5, 26-7, 29-8 ENDM36 16-3, 30-14 GO 3-2, 6-2, 6-8, 6-9, 7-3, 9-2, 10-5, 11-3, 11-5, 12-1 overview 6-1 RSTAUT 12-7 RSTCFG 12-6 RSTCHGOBJ 12-6 RSTDLO 12-6 RSTLIB 12-6, 25-2 RSTOBJ 12-7, 25-2 RSTUSRPRF 12-7 SAVCFG 12-2 SAVCHGOBJ 12-4 SAVDLO 12-4 SAVLIB 12-4, 25-1 SAVOBJ 12-5 SAVSECDTA 12-2 SAVSTG 12-3 SAVSYS 12-2 SBMJOB 10-2 STRM36 15-1, 30-14 STRM36PRC 14-1, 14-6, 14-7, 30-14 STRPASTHR 29-15

X-4


CL command (continued) STRREXPRC 10-2 summary for managing AS/400 Advanced 36 machines 30-13 TFRM36 14-1, 14-3, 30-14 VRYCFG 29-4, 29-8, 29-9, 29-14 Work with AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine Configuration (WRKM36CFG) Command 30-15 WRKCFGSTS 28-8 WRKJOBQ 10-10 WRKJOBSCDE 10-3 WRKM36 30-1, 30-14 WRKM36CFG 30-8 WRKMSG 5-2 WRKOBJLCK 28-8 WRKPRB 5-15, 13-1, D-1, D-3 WRKSPLF 7-13 WRKUSRJOB 10-5, 10-12, 10-13 WRKWTR 7-10 clearing messages from a display SSP console 18-6 subconsole 18-6 code, system reference 18-4 command 3-2 GO POWER 3-2 PWRDWNSYS 3-3 using help 19-1, 19-4 using the help key 19-1, 19-4 WRKOUTQ 7-14 command cross-reference System/36 and AS/400 A-1 command display stations 17-1 command display, returning to 17-4 command summary managing printer output 20-3 communications answering from outside United States 11-7 automatically starting ILAN 29-6 ILAN for OS/400 29-6 ILAN for SSP 29-6 controllers activating 11-4 determining why ILAN is inactive 29-13 why ILAN is varied off 29-13 ILAN system-to-system 29-1 link establishing 27-1 establishing for problem determination 27-1 establishing for remote work station support 27-1 manual answer 11-7 dial 11-6 manually starting ILAN 29-3, 29-4, 29-5 OS/400 side 29-3

communications (continued) manually starting ILAN (continued) SSP side, all connections 29-4 SSP side, one connection 29-5 problem determination 27-1 setting up ILAN 29-3 switched line 11-6 using 27-1 verifying ILAN 29-10 working with OS/400 11-1 Communications Configuration menu displaying 11-5 communications line activating 11-4 adding 31-4 answering 11-7 deleting 31-4 replacing 31-4 switched 11-6 communications security 22-2 general description 22-2 comparing print commands 7-15 System/36 to OS/400 7-15 configuration See also Local Device Configuration after installation 31-2 after OS/400 added to SSP-only system 31-2 changing 31-1 displaying 32-1 error 31-39 for OS/400 and SSP preloaded system 31-3 status 11-1 warning 31-39 configuration object restoring AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 25-2 saving 12-4 configuring remote communications 11-5 OS/400 11-5 console 4-1 OS/400 4-1 requesting help menu 17-5 SSP 17-1 system 4-1 CONSOLE control command, SSP 17-2 console display requesting 17-4 requesting a help menu 17-4 SSP 17-4 using 17-4 CONSOLE GIVE control command 17-3 console roll area 18-7 CONSOLE TAKE control command 17-3

control command CONSOLE GIVE 17-3 CONSOLE TAKE 17-3 CONSOLE, SSP 17-2 INFOMSG 18-5 REPLY 18-7 using help 19-4 help key 19-1, 19-4 to change printer output 20-4 to hold printer output 20-4 to release printer output 20-4 to restart spool writer 20-7 to start spool writer 20-6 VARY 27-1, 27-2 control panel 1-2 opening cover 1-1 system unit 1-1 control point name determining 29-8 finding 29-8 controller activating communications 11-4 controlling device 11-1 job 10-1 SSP jobs 23-1 copies changing number of printer output 7-8 copying printer output using menu option 20-5 using procedure 20-5 COPYPRT 20-5 corrective service definition 13-1 CPFACE0 28-9 creating another AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-2, 30-9 customized 10-12 WRKUSRJOB command 10-12 IPL start-up program 15-5 procedure for restoring other SSP system files 25-35 procedure to restore licensed program products 25-27 QSYSMSG 5-14 CRTDUPOBJ 10-12 CRTM36 30-2, 30-13 CRTM36CFG 30-9, 30-14 cumulative PTF package content 13-1 definition 13-1 ordering 13-1 receiving 13-1

Index

X-5

customer support electronic 26-7 customizing WRKUSRJOB command

10-12

D D I 21-2 D J 23-1 D L 24-1 D U 23-2 D W 24-1 D WRT 20-6 data restoring 12-1 overview 12-1 data display stations 17-1 data security 22-1, 22-2, 22-3 badge security 22-2 communications security 22-2 menu security 22-1 resource security 22-3 SSP password security 22-1 DDM using for PTFs 26-7 sent electronically 26-7 Dedicated Service Tools (DST) 12-3 dedicated state putting AS/400 Advanced 36 machine in 16-1 default startup setting understanding 29-3 defining remote communications 11-5 OS/400 11-5 whether SSP or OS/400 controls display station 31-36 definition abnormal end message 5-5 batch job 10-1 corrective service 13-1 cumulative PTF package 13-1 device integrity message 5-5 error message 5-5 informational message 5-1, 5-5 inquiry message 5-1 interactive job 10-1, 10-12 job 10-1 long wait 10-17 preventive service 13-1 qualified job name 10-2 severe error message 5-5 subsystem 8-1, 21-1 system alert message 5-5 system integrity message 5-5 system status message 5-5

X-6


deleting AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-4 configuration 30-11 authority required 7-7 CD-ROM device 31-10 communications line 31-4 diskette device 31-8 job log 10-21 local area network (LAN) 31-4 printer output batch job 10-9 using control command 20-5 using display option 20-5 using menu option 20-5 tape 31-10 determination, problem communications 27-1 determining device name system console 4-1 device owner 28-1 if message has been sent to you 18-1 ILAN communications are inactive 29-13 OS/400 control point name 29-8 device See also diskette unit See also display device See also printer device See also tape unit controlling OS/400 11-1 description changing 11-3 displaying 11-3 determining which SSP jobs owns it 28-5 integrity message 5-5 printing address (local) 11-3 renaming 11-2 status changing 11-1 displaying 11-1 varied off 28-8 varied on 28-8 working with 11-1 device owner finding 28-1 device status restrictions 11-2 Device Status Tasks menu displaying 11-3 Work with diskette devices option 11-1 Work with display devices option 11-1 Work with printer devices option 11-1 Work with tape devices option 11-1 DICTLOAD 25-26, 25-28 DICTSAVE 25-6, 25-8

directions pass-through 29-15 DISABLE 21-2, 29-14 disabling ILAN after configuration 29-7 diskette device adding 31-8 deleting 31-8 replacing 31-8 diskette unit See also diskette device changing name 11-2 renaming 11-3 status changing 11-1 displaying 11-1 display 17-1 error message 5-15 subconsole 17-5 display device changing name 11-2 status changing 11-1 displaying 11-1 display option using to change printer output 20-4 to delete printer output 20-5 to display printer output 20-5 to hold printer output 20-4 to release printer output 20-5 display station See also display device changing attributes 31-27 renaming 11-2 whether SSP or OS/400 controls it 31-36, 32-1 display station pass-through 29-15 virtual devices 11-2 displaying 18-11 additional information for a message 18-5 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-4, 32-1 configuration 30-11 information 32-2 batch job all 10-6 by status 10-7 other users 10-6 call stack 10-15 Communications Configuration menu 11-5 configuration configuration of AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 32-1 cumulative PTF information 26-3 device description 11-3 Device Status Tasks menu 11-3 interactive jobs 10-12 IPL mode B-1

displaying (continued) job information 10-14 log 10-19 priority 10-10 status characteristics 10-15 job log 10-19 job queue assignment 10-15 priority 10-15 submitted jobs 10-10 keyboard messages 18-11 machine 32-1 menu list 6-9 menus 6-9 message queue 5-1 SSP console 18-6 subconsole 18-6 that are waiting 18-6 Work with Messages display 5-2 open file 10-15 Operational Assistant menu 6-2, 7-3, 9-2, 10-5, 11-3 OS/400 console messages 29-13 output queue assignment 10-15 priority 10-15 Power On and Off Tasks (POWER) menu 3-2 printer output using display option 20-5 printer status 11-1 priority 10-15 PTF information 26-3 qysopr message queue 11-7 Restore menu 12-1 Save menu 12-1 signed-on users 10-12 SSP PTF information 26-14 status device 11-1 diskette device 11-1 display device 11-1 system operator message 5-7 tape device status 11-1 DLTM36 30-4, 30-14 DLTM36CFG 30-14 document restoring 12-6 saving 12-4 doing a task using help when you do not know the command 19-4 procedure 19-4 using help when you know the command 19-1

Index

X-7

doing a task (continued) using help when you know the (continued) procedure 19-1 DSPJOBLOG 10-19 DSPM36 30-14, 32-1, 32-2 DSPM36CFG 30-14, 32-1 DSPMSG 5-2, 11-7, 29-13 DSPNETA 11-5, 26-7, 29-8 DST (Dedicated Service Tools) 12-3 dump 16-3 dumping error message information 18-3

E Electronic Customer Support 26-7 using D-1 electronic PTF installation checklist 26-9 installing 26-9 saved PTF 26-13 ENABLE 21-2, 29-5, 29-6, 29-8, 29-14 ending See also stopping AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-7 batch job 10-9 interactive job 10-13 user job 10-9 ENDM36 16-3, 30-14 Enter pushbutton (system unit) 1-4 entry working with job schedule 10-3 entry lines console display 18-7 subconsole display 18-7 error keyboard 5-15, 18-10 error codes CPFACEO 28-9 what do they mean 28-9 error messages definition 5-5 description 18-3 display 5-15 dump option 18-3 handling 5-14 help for errors messages 18-3 help option 18-3 menu 5-15 options 18-3 that instruct you to perform an action 18-2 that require a response 18-2 using the help key for an explanation 18-3 using the help key 18-11 Error Reset key using to unlock keyboard 18-10

X-8


example calling 10-2 program 10-2 changing 6-5, 6-6, 15-5, 15-7, 17-3, 31-22, C-4, C-6, C-7 AS/400 Advanced 36 prestart job to immediately use changed values C-7 assistance levels temporarily 6-5, 6-6 from controller mapping to device mapping 31-22 priority and storage pool of AS/400 Advanced 36 prestart job C-6 priority of an AS/400 Advanced 36 server job C-4 startup program to automatically start AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 15-5, 15-7 to an alternative SSP console 17-3 defining 31-4, 31-8, 31-10, 31-12, 31-17, 31-26, 31-36 CD-ROM device 31-10 communications line 31-4 diskette device 31-8 display stations using controller mapping 31-17 display stations using device mapping 31-12 printers using controller mapping 31-17 printers using device mapping 31-12 tape device 31-10 whether SSP or OS/400 controls display stations 31-36 whether SSP or OS/400 controls SSP printer output 31-26 displaying 10-15 job attributes 10-15 job status 10-15 ending 16-4 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 16-4 informational messages 18-5 job 19-5 putting on the job queue 19-5 message 5-5, 5-15, 18-2, 18-5, 18-8, 18-9, 18-10 additional information 18-5 ID 5-5 replying to 18-8 requiring a response 18-2 running the Work with Problems command 5-15 sending to everyone on AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 18-9, 18-10 renaming 11-2 device 11-2 display station 11-2 running SSP procedure from Operating System/400 14-7 sending 16-1 message to all users 16-1 SRC code 1-3 starting 15-4 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 15-4

example (continued) stopping 16-2 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 16-2 submitting 10-2 job to run immediately 10-2 transferring 14-4, 14-8 display station to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 14-4 using STRPASTHR 14-8 using 19-2, 19-3, 19-4, 19-5 MAIN menu 19-5 POWER command 19-3 RENAME procedure 19-4 STATUS command 19-2 validating 31-39 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration 31-39 viewing 10-6 jobs 10-6 working with 11-4 OS/400 workstation controllers and lines 11-4

F file displaying open 10-15 spooled 7-1, 20-1 See also spooled file filtering messages from the job log 10-20 finding additional information about signed-on users device owner 28-1 menus 6-9 message information 5-3 OS/400 control point name 29-8 output 7-4 printer output 7-3 SSP printer output 20-2 users signed on to the system 10-14 folder restoring 12-6 saving 12-4 form changing on a printer 7-13 function/data display 1-3

G getting to Work with Printer Output Display using Operational Assistant 7-3 GO 3-2, 6-2, 6-8, 6-9, 7-3, 9-2, 11-3, 11-5, 12-1 GO POWER 3-2

10-14

H handling AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine error codes 28-9 break messages 5-7 error message 5-14 message 5-1 hardware problem handling 28-1 hardware problems product activity log 28-1 help for keyboard messages 18-11 Help key 5-16 commands 19-1, 19-4 control command 19-1, 19-4 error messages 18-3 explanations 18-11 parameters 19-1 procedures 19-1, 19-4 Help menu 19-1, 19-4 displaying 19-4 requesting from SSP console display 17-4 HIST menu 23-3 history file working with 23-2 HOLD PRT 20-4 holding batch job 10-8 job queue 10-11 job schedule entry 10-5 printer output batch job 7-7, 10-8 using control command 20-4 using display option 20-4 using menu option 20-4

I ID, reply 18-7 identifier, message 18-2 identifying message from the system 5-5 ILAN communications automatically starting 29-6 automatically starting for OS/400 29-6 automatically starting for SSP 29-6 communications problems 29-13 determining why inactive 29-13 why varied off 29-13 disabling after configuration 29-7 manually starting 29-3, 29-4, 29-5 OS/400 side 29-3 SSP side, all connections 29-4 SSP side, one connection 29-5

Index

X-9

ILAN communications (continued) recovery if not disabled before stopping AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-14 setting up 29-3 stopping 29-8, 29-9 OS/400 side 29-8 SSP side, all connections 29-9 SSP side, one connection 29-9 system-to-system 29-1 verifying 29-10, 29-11, 29-12, 29-13 for first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-10 for second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-10 for third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-11 OS/400 29-12 SSP 29-13 ILAN subsystem, automatically starting 29-6 individual object restoring 12-7 saving 12-5 INFOMSG control command 18-5 information displaying about job 10-14 finding about messages 5-3 OS/400 related H-2 printing 7-1 restoring 12-1 saving 12-1 SSP related H-1 informational message 5-1, 5-5 example of 18-5 not to be displayed at the SSP console 18-6 initializing system 2-1 tapes for saving files 25-2 input inhibited light on and blinking 4-digit number keyboard message 18-11 inquiry message definition 5-1 installing corrective SSP PTFs from CD-ROM or tape 26-5 sent electronically 26-7 interactive job definition 10-1, 10-12 disconnecting 10-13 displaying 10-12 ending 10-13 printing a job log for 10-19 working with 10-12 intermediate assistance level definition 6-3 IPL mode changing B-3 code A M B-2 A N B-2 B M B-2

X-10


IPL mode (continued) code (continued) B N B-2 D M B-2 D N B-2 displaying B-1 setting B-3 type attended B-2 attended from CD-ROM B-2 attended from tape B-2 manual B-2 normal B-2 unattended B-2 IPL modes 1-5 IPL start-up program creating 15-5 IPL types 1-5 IPLTYPE parameter using 15-2

J job See also active job See also batch job See also interactive job See also job queue See also Work Management assigning to a different output queue authority to work with 10-6 changing attributes 10-16 definition attributes 10-15 how run 10-16 print priority 10-18 priority on a queue 10-16 changing, active 10-17 controlling 10-1 definition 10-1 displaying batch 10-6, 10-7 information 10-14 open file 10-15 priority 10-15 status characteristics 10-15 ending batch 10-9 interactive 10-13 logging level 10-20 moving to a different queue 10-17 open file displaying 10-15 performance 10-7 printing a job log for 10-19 priority changing job queue 10-16

10-18

job (continued) priority (continued) status 10-9 processing overview 10-1 qualified name 10-2 queue 10-9 scheduling 10-4 batch 10-2 using the Change Job (CHGJOB) command 10-3 job description changing 10-20 job log See also Work Management assigning to a separate output queue 10-21 definition 10-19 deleting 10-21 displaying 10-19 filtering messages 10-20 performance 10-21 printing 10-19 sending output file to a separate output queue 10-21 viewing 10-19 working with 10-19 Job priority (on JOBQ) field 10-16 job processing overview 10-1 job queue assigned 10-9 assigning to a subsystem 10-12 changing priority on 10-16 displaying assignment 10-15 job priority within 10-10 jobs 10-10 priority 10-15 holding 10-11 moving job to a different 10-17 jobs on 10-11 priority of a job 10-9 releasing while system running 10-11 status 10-9 subsystem 10-11 viewing 10-10 working with 10-10 empty 10-10 unassigned 10-11 job schedule entry adding 10-4 canceling 10-4 changing 10-5

job schedule entry (continued) holding 10-5 releasing 10-5 saving 10-4 working with 10-3

K key Help error message 5-16 keyboard 17-1 blinking 4-digit number and input inhibited light on 18-11 error 5-15, 18-10 messages keystroke mistake 5-15, 18-10

L LAN (local area network) adding 31-4 deleting 31-4 replacing 31-4 learning about messages 18-1 level, assistance changing 6-4 library restoring AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 12-6, 25-2 user 12-6, 25-2 saving AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 12-4, 25-1 changed objects 12-4 licensed program products creating procedure to restore restoring 25-24 from procedure 25-29 interactively 25-25 saving 25-3 creating procedure for 25-7 interactively 25-5 using procedure 25-8 using the RESTLIBR procedure to restore 25-19 light 5-3 attention 5-12 error, printer 11-2 input inhibited 18-1 keyboard message 18-1 message 11-6 message waiting 5-3, 5-11, 5-12, 18-1, 18-11 power 3-4 power on 1-2 power, printer 11-2 processor active 1-3 ready, printer 11-2

Index

X-11

light (continued) system attention 1-3, 3-4 line entry 18-7 message 18-7 line, communications See communications line link, establishing a communications local area network (LAN) adding 31-4 deleting 31-4 replacing 31-4 local device address printing 11-3 locating printer output 7-3 log See also job log job filtering messages from 10-20 product activity 28-1 hardware problems 28-1 logging level changing for job 10-20 long wait 10-17 loop See program loop

27-1

M machine (M36) restoring 12-6, 25-2 saving 12-4, 25-1 machine prestart jobs C-2 machine server job C-1 magnetic stripe reader 22-2 mail restoring 12-6 saving 12-4 main Help menu 19-1, 19-4 main menu 19-4, 19-5 maintaining licensed program corrective service 13-1 preventive service 13-1 making alternative SSP console the SSP console managing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine operation 30-1 printer output command summary 20-3 details 20-3 manual dial 11-6 manual initial program load (IPL) modes 1-5

X-12

17-3


manual initial program load (IPL) (continued) types 1-5 manual IPL (initial program load) modes 1-5 types 1-5 Manual mode (system unit) 1-6 mapping device to CD-ROM drive 26-16 menu error message 5-15 finding 6-9 SSP security general description 22-1 system operations 6-9 menu list displaying 6-9 menu option using to change printer output 20-4 to copy printer output 20-5 to delete printer output 20-5 to hold printer output 20-4 to release printer output 20-5 to restart spool writer 20-7 to start spool writer 20-7 to stop spool writer 20-7 menu, main Help 19-1, 19-4 menus displaying 6-9 message 5-3 See also error message additional information 5-3, 18-5 answering printer device 7-11 critical QSYSMSG 5-14 determining if has been sent to you 18-1 display 5-1 displaying command 5-2 keyboard message 18-11 message queue 5-1 SSP console 18-6 subconsole 18-6 system operator 5-7 error 5-16 handling 5-1 identifier 5-5 identifier description 18-2 identifying 5-5 informational 18-5 definition 5-1 inquiry definition 5-1 job log filtering 10-20 keyboard 18-11

message (continued) keyboard error 5-15, 18-10 learning about 18-1 lines on console display 18-7 subconsole display 18-7 MSG Control Command 18-9 MSG OCL statement 18-10 OFCMSG procedure 18-10 option for responding to 18-3 OS/400 types 5-1 printing 5-3 replying to 18-7 responding to 5-9 sending 5-16 break 5-17 SSP 18-9 to signed-on users 10-14 sent to OS/400 28-1 hardware problem 28-1 sent to SSP 28-1 hardware problem 28-1 severity code 5-5 that are waiting 18-6 that instruct you to perform an action that require a response 18-2 type abnormal end 5-5 device integrity 5-5 error 5-5 informational 5-5 severe error 5-5 system alert 5-5 system integrity 5-5 system status 5-5 types 18-2 SSP 18-2 understanding the types 18-11 validation 31-39 waiting 5-3 working with 5-2 message queue changing 5-12 defined in user profile 5-8 displaying message in 5-1 working with 5-10 message waiting light 5-3 mistake keystroke 5-15, 18-10 mode Manual 1-6 Normal 1-5 moving job to different job queue 10-17 printer output to print sooner 7-9

MSG 18-9 MSG OCL statement

18-10

N

18-2

normal initial program load (IPL) electronic installation checklist 26-9 from tape to restore the SSP Operating System 25-21 installing a saved electronically sent SSP PTF 26-13 installing electronically sent SSP PTFs 26-9 removing corrective SSP PTFs 26-15 transferring SSP console function during an IPL 17-2 normal IPL (initial program load) electronic installation checklist 26-9 from tape to restore the SSP Operating System 25-21 installing a saved electronically sent SSP PTF 26-13 installing electronically sent SSP PTFs 26-9 removing corrective SSP PTFs 26-15 transferring SSP console function during an IPL 17-2 Normal mode (system unit) 1-5

O object restoring 12-1 individual 12-7 saving 12-1 changed 12-4 individual 12-5 objects in directories restoring 12-5 saving 12-4 OFCMSG procedure 18-10 OFF 29-15 online help commands 19-1, 19-4 control command 19-1, 19-4 procedures 19-1, 19-4 open file displaying 10-15 open, control panel cover 1-1 operation managing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine Operational Assistant accessing methods 6-3 user 6-3 introduction 6-2

30-1

Index

X-13

Operational Assistant menu displaying 6-2, 7-3, 9-2, 10-5, 11-3 operator tasks quick reference 1-7 option for error messages 18-3 for responding to messages 18-3 ordering program temporary fix (PTF) electronically 13-2 OS/400 defining if it controls display station 31-36 giving control to printer output 31-30 message types 5-1 related information H-2 restoring operating system 12-3 security 9-1 OS/400 console displaying messages 29-13 output file sending job log to separate output queue 10-21 output queue 7-1, 20-1 assigning a job to a different 10-18 displaying assignment 10-15 priority 10-15 sending job log output file to a separate 10-21 output, printer See printer output overview CL commands 6-1 job processing 10-1 Operational Assistant 6-2 owner communication line 28-8 communication port 28-4 device 28-1, 28-3 determining 28-1 display station 28-6 media device 28-5 printer 28-6

P P P 20-7 page start printing on 7-8 parameters, using the help key 19-1 pass-through directions 29-15 Passing through from OS/400 to SSP 29-15 from SSP to OS/400 29-16 PASSTHRU 29-16

X-14


password changing 9-2 security 22-1 SSP 22-1 patches installing corrective SSP PTFs from CD-ROM or tape 26-5 sent electronically 26-7 performance considerations sending job log output file to a separate queue 10-21 job 10-7 performing IPL from tape to restore the SSP Operating System 25-21 Post Telephone and Telegraph Administration (PTT) 11-7 power 19-3 pushbutton 1-2 Power On and Off Tasks (POWER) menu displaying 3-2 Power On light 1-2 Power pushbutton 3-4 stopping the system 3-4 power system 1-6 powering down the system 3-1 powering off 3-1 immediate 3-2 powering off system See stopping powering on system See starting system prestart jobs C-2, C-6 preventative service 26-1 preventive service definition 13-1 maintenance strategy 13-1 PTF 13-1 print, SSP 20-8 file 20-8 printer 7-2, 20-1 See also printer device See also printer output See also printer writer adding using device mapping 31-12 assigning as system printer 20-8 output to a different 7-8 changing attributes 31-27 handling OS/400 and SSP printer conflicts 28-8 using controller mapping to add printers 31-17 printer device assigning output to 7-9 changing forms 7-13

printer device (continued) changing (continued) name 11-2 message answering 7-11 renaming 11-2 restarting 7-11 starting Work with Printer Output display 7-10 status changing 11-1 displaying 11-1 stopping 7-11 working with 7-10 printer device support See Printer Device Programming printer elements See Printer Device Programming printer file changing 10-21 printer options changing 20-8 printer output assigning to a different printer 7-8 to a printer 7-9 authority required 7-7 batch job 7-7 changing characteristics 7-7 number of copies 7-8 using Control Command 20-4 using display option 20-4 using menu option 20-4 command summary 20-3 copying using menu option 20-5 using procedure 20-5 defining whether SSP or OS/400 controls 31-26 deleting authority required 7-7 batch job 10-9 using control command 20-5 using display option 20-5 using menu option 20-5 displaying using display option 20-5 form type 7-9 giving control OS/400 OUTQ 31-32 to the OS/400 operating system 31-30, 31-32 to the SSP operating system 31-26 when no printer 31-32 holding batch job 10-8 using control command 20-4

printer output (continued) holding (continued) using display option 20-4 using menu option 20-4 locating 7-3 managing 7-7 details 20-3 moving to print sooner 7-9 releasing 7-7 using control command 20-4 using display option 20-5 using menu option 20-5 saving 7-9 specify page to start on 7-8 using *QUTQ to direct to output queue 31-32 printer spooling support See Printer Device Programming printer writer 7-1, 20-1 printing AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration 30-5, 30-12 changing priority of a job 10-18 contents of libraries on disk 20-8 diskette 20-8 tape 20-8 cumulative PTF information 26-3 files saved on tape 20-8 information 7-1 about AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-5 about IBM-supplied PTFs 26-3 job log 10-19 job priority 10-18 local device address 11-3 message 5-3 moving printer output to print sooner 7-9 names of files on disk 20-8 diskette 20-8 tape 20-8 names of libraries on disk 20-8 diskette 20-8 tape 20-8 priorities 7-6 priority changing 10-18 PTF information 26-3 SSP PTF information 26-14 understanding problems 7-5 using *QUTQ to direct to output queue 31-32 priorities printing 7-6

Index

X-15

priority changing job on queue 10-16 job’s print 10-18 description 10-9 displaying job 10-15 job queue 10-9 problem ILAN communications 29-13 working with 5-15, 13-1, D-1, D-3 problem analysis running 5-15 problem determination for communications 27-1 problem handling hardware 28-1 Processor Active light 1-3 System Attention light 1-3 problems hardware 28-1 product activity log 28-1 procedure restoring SSP Operating System and licensed program products, using the RESTLIBR 25-19 using help 19-1, 19-4 processing changing job 10-16 Processor Active light 1-3 product activity log hardware problems 28-1 program loop detecting 10-15 program maintenance strategy 13-1 program products creating procedure to restore restoring 25-24 from procedure 25-29 interactively 25-25 saving 25-3 creating procedure for 25-7 interactively 25-5 using procedure 25-8 program temporary fix (PTF) cumulative package 13-1 information receiving 13-2 installing cumulative SSP PTF packages 26-5 maintenance strategy 13-1 ordering electronically 13-2 SSP PTF information 26-3 SSP PTFs 26-3 receiving electronically 13-2 using 13-1

X-16


program temporary fix (PTF) (continued) working with SSP 26-1 corrective service 26-2 cumulative PTF package 26-1 program, sample QSYS/QSTRUP start-up PTF (program temporary fix) cumulative package 13-1 information receiving 13-2 installing cumulative SSP PTF packages 26-5 maintenance strategy 13-1 ordering electronically 13-2 SSP PTF information 26-3 SSP PTFs 26-3 receiving electronically 13-2 using 13-1 working with SSP 26-1 corrective service 26-2 cumulative PTF package 26-1 PTF cumulative package content 13-1 ordering 13-1 receiving 13-1 PTF information, SSP displaying 26-14 printing 26-14 PTT (Post Telephone and Telegraph Administration) 11-7 PTYLMT (priority limit) parameter 10-16 pushbutton 1-2 PWRDWNSYS 3-3

15-7

Q QAUTOVRT value changing 29-15 QIPLDATTIM system value 3-3 QSYS/QSTRUP start-up program, sample QSYSMSG creating 5-14 system message critical 5-14 qsysopr message queue displaying 11-7 qualified job name definition 10-2 queue See also job queue See also message queue See also output queue job displaying 10-10 working with unassigned 10-11

15-7

queue (continued) output 7-1, 20-1 quick reference operator tasks 1-7

R receiving program temporary fix (PTF) information 13-2 recovery See also problem determination communications not disabled 29-14 before stopping AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-14 reference operator tasks 1-7 reference code, system 18-9 related information OS/400 H-2 SSP H-1 RELEASE PRT 20-4 releasing job 10-9 job queue 10-11 job schedule entry 10-5 printer output 7-7 using control command 20-4 using display option 20-5 using menu option 20-5 remote work station signing on 27-1 removing corrective SSP PTFs 26-15 job schedule entry 10-4 RENAME 19-4 renaming AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-5 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine configuration devices 11-2 diskette device 11-3 display station 11-2 printer device 11-2 tape device 11-3 replacing CD-ROM device 31-10 communications line 31-4 diskette device 31-8 local area network (LAN) 31-4 tape 31-10 REPLY control command 18-7 reply ID of a message 18-7 replying to messages at SSP console 18-7 subconsole 18-7

30-12

requesting console display, SSP 17-4 help menu from console 17-5 from subconsole 17-6 subconsole display 17-5 requirements for using STRM36 15-1 resource security 22-3 general description 22-3 responding message 5-9, 18-3 RESTART PRT 20-7 restarting printer device 7-11 spool writer using control command 20-7 using menu option 20-7 RESTEXTN 25-34, 25-36 RESTFLDR 25-26, 25-28 RESTLIBR 25-19, 25-26, 25-28, 25-35, 25-36 RESTLIBR procedure restore the SSP Operating System and licensed program products, using 25-19 RESTNRD 25-34, 25-36 RESTORE 25-25, 25-28 Restore menu displaying 12-1 restoring AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 25-1 configuration object 25-2 library 25-2 object 25-2 changed objects 12-6 documents 12-6 folders 12-6 individual objects 12-7 information 12-1 licensed program products 25-24 from procedure 25-29 interactively 25-25 mail 12-6 object 12-1 in directories 12-5 Operating System/400 operating system 12-3 other SSP system file creating a procedure for 25-35 from created procedure 25-37 other SSP system files 25-32, 25-33 from procedure 25-37 interactively 25-33 SSP Operating System 25-21 storage 12-3 system 12-2 user library 12-6, 25-2

Index

X-17

restoring (reloading) SSP Operating System 25-18 restrictions device status 11-2 STRM36PRC 14-6 transfers 14-1 STRM36PRC 14-1 TFRM36 14-1 returning to a command display roll area, console 18-7 RSTAUT 12-7 RSTCFG 12-6 RSTCHGOBJ 12-6 RSTDLO 12-6 RSTLIB 12-6, 25-2 RSTOBJ 12-7, 25-2 RSTUSRPRF 12-7 run priority 10-17 running job See active job

17-4

S S P 20-6 sample QSYS/QSTRUP start-up program 15-7 SAVCFG 12-2, 12-4 SAVCHGOBJ 12-4 SAVDLO 12-4 SAVE 25-5, 25-7 Save menu displaying 12-1 Save Security Data (SAVSECDTA) command 12-5 SAVEEXTN 25-14, 25-15, 25-17 SAVEFDLR 25-7 SAVEFLDR 25-5 SAVELIBR 25-3, 25-6, 25-8, 25-15, 25-17 SAVENRD 25-14, 25-16 saving AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 12-4, 25-1 configuration object 25-1 library 25-1 object 25-1 calendar 12-4 changed objects in a library 12-4 documents 12-4 folders 12-4 individual objects 12-5 information 12-1 job schedule entry 10-4 licensed program products 25-3 creating procedure to 25-7 interactively 25-5 using procedure 25-8 mail 12-4 object 12-1

X-18


saving (continued) objects in directories 12-4 printer output 7-9 SSP Operating System using SAVELIBR procedure 25-3 SSP system files 25-12 creating procedure to save 25-16 interactively 25-13 using created procedure to save 25-18 system 12-1 user library 12-4, 25-1 SAVLIB 12-4, 25-1 SAVOBJ 12-5 SAVSECDTA 12-2 SAVSECDTA (Save Security Data) command SAVSTG 12-3 SAVSYS command 12-2 SBMJOB 10-2 schedule adding job entries 10-4 canceling job entry 10-4 changing job entries 10-5 holding job entries 10-5 releasing job entries 10-5 saving job entries 10-4 schedule entry working with job 10-3 scheduling batch job to start an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 10-5 batch jobs 10-2 job batch 10-4 using job schedule entries 10-3 using the Change Job (CHGJOB) command 10-3 SECREST 25-33, 25-36 SECSAVE 25-13, 25-16 security 22-1, 22-2, 22-3 badge 22-2 changing levels 9-1 communications 22-2 level 9-1 definition 9-1 levels, OS/400 9-1 menu 22-1 on Operating System/400 9-1 resource 22-3 SSP password 22-1 user profile 9-1 select pushbutton 1-3 selecting option from error messages 18-3 to respond to a message 18-3

12-5

sending break message 5-17 job log output file to a separate output queue 10-21 message 5-16, 18-10 signed-on users 10-14 SSP 18-9 server job C-1, C-3 service corrective 13-1 preventative 26-1 preventive 13-1 setting IPL mode B-3 setting attributes prestart jobs C-6 server job C-3 SLIC tasks C-5 setting up ILAN communications 29-3 severe error message definition 5-5 Sign On display 22-2 signed-on users displaying 10-12 finding additional information about 10-14 sending messages to 10-14 sorting the list 10-14 working with 10-12 signing on OS/400 system 2-3 signing user off the system 10-13 signon to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine automatic 14-5 SLIB 25-4, 25-8, 25-12, 25-18, 25-24, 25-29, 25-32, 25-37 SLIC tasks C-5 sorting sign-on user list 10-14 SPOOL menu 19-2, 20-6 spool writer restarting using control command 20-7 using menu option 20-7 starting using menu option 20-7 with control command 20-6 stopping using menu option 20-7 working with 20-6 spooled file 7-1, 20-1 changing priority 10-18 spooled output balancing 20-6 SPOOLJOB menu 20-2

SRC code example 1-3 SSP communications working with 24-1 console informational messages 18-5 defining if it controls display station 31-36 devices working with 24-1 giving control to printer output 31-26 help support using 20-2 installing SSP PTF packages 26-5 message determining if has been sent to you 18-1 ordering SSP program temporary fixes (PTFs) 26-3 related information H-1 security working with 22-3 subconsole 17-1 system preloaded configuration 31-3 work with program temporary fixes (PTFs) 26-1 corrective service 26-2 cumulative PTF package 26-1 SSP console displaying messages 18-6 making alternative SSP console it 17-3 method of operating the system 17-1 replying to messages 18-7 transferring to alternative SSP console 17-3 when SSP console is in operation 17-3 when SSP console is not in operation 17-4 SSP control command ASSIGN 20-8 BALPRINT 20-6 CANCEL PRT 20-5 CONSOLE 17-3 CONSOLE TAKE 17-3 D I 21-2 D J 23-1 D L 24-1 D U 23-2 D W 24-1 D WRT 20-6 HOLD PRT 20-4 OFF 29-15 P P 20-7 POWER 19-3 RELEASE PRT 20-4 RESTART PRT 20-7 S P 20-6 START PRT 20-6 START SYSTEM 25-3, 25-9, 25-16, 25-18

Index

X-19

SSP control command (continued) STATUS 19-2 STATUS JOBQ 23-1 STATUS LINE 24-1 STATUS SUBSYS 21-2 STATUS USERS 23-2 STATUS WORKSTN 24-1 STATUS WRT 19-2, 20-6 STOP PRT 20-7 T P 20-7 SSP job controlling 23-1 determining which job owns a device 28-5 working with 23-2 SSP menu HIST 23-3 MAIN 19-5 SECURITY 22-3 SPOOL 19-2, 20-6 SPOOLJOB 20-2 SSP Operating System performing an IPL from tape to restore 25-21 restoring (reloading) 25-18 saving using the SAVELIBR procedure 25-3 using the RESTLIBR procedure to restore 25-19 SSP printer output finding 20-2 SSP procedure COPYPRT 20-5 DICTLOAD 25-26, 25-28 DICTSAVE 25-6, 25-8 DISABLE 21-2, 29-14 ENABLE 21-2, 29-5, 29-6, 29-8, 29-14 PASSTHRU 29-16 RENAME 19-4 RESTEXTN 25-34, 25-36 RESTFLDR 25-26, 25-28 RESTLIBR 25-19, 25-26, 25-28, 25-35, 25-36 RESTNRD 25-34, 25-36 RESTORE 25-25, 25-28 SAVE 25-5, 25-7 SAVEEXTN 25-14, 25-15, 25-17 SAVEFDLR 25-7 SAVEFLDR 25-5 SAVELIBR 25-3, 25-6, 25-8, 25-15, 25-17 SAVENRD 25-14, 25-16 SECREST 25-33, 25-36 SECSAVE 25-13, 25-16 SLIB 25-4, 25-8, 25-12, 25-18, 25-24, 25-29, 25-32, 25-37 table 25-30 for licensed program product restores 25-30 TAPEINIT 25-2 WRKSPL 20-2 SSP PTF installing electronically sent 26-9

X-20


SSP PTF (continued) installing a saved electronically sent PTF 26-13 removing corrective PTFs 26-15 SSP PTF information displaying 26-14 printing 26-14 SSP subsystem starting 21-2 SSP system file creating procedure for saving 25-16 restoring other files 25-32 saving 25-12 interactively 25-13 using created procedure for saving 25-18 START PRT 20-6 START SYSTEM 25-3, 25-9, 25-16, 25-18 start-up program, sample QSYS/QSTRUP 15-7 starting Advanced 36 procedure 14-6 AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 15-1, 30-6 AS/400 Advanced 36 Machine automatically 15-5 automatically ILAN communications 29-6 ILAN communications for OS/400 29-6 ILAN communications for SSP 29-6 ILAN subsystem 29-6 manually ILAN communications 29-3 ILAN communications on OS/400 side 29-3 ILAN communications on SSP side, all connections 29-4 ILAN communications on SSP side, one connection 29-5 printer device Work with Printer Output display 7-10 spool writer using control command 20-6 using menu option 20-7 SSP subsystem 21-2 system methods 2-1 Starting an SSP Procedure from OS/400 STRM36PRC 14-1 starting AS/400 Advanced 36 machine automatically 15-5 statement MSG OCL 18-10 status 19-2 job displaying 10-15 list 10-9 job queue 10-9 selecting batch jobs according to 10-7 STATUS JOBQ 23-1 STATUS LINE 24-1

STATUS SUBSYS 21-2 STATUS USERS 23-2 STATUS WORKSTN 24-1 STATUS WRT 19-2, 20-6 STOP PRT 20-7 stopping AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 16-1 from system console 16-2 batch job 10-9 ILAN communications 29-8, 29-9 OS/400 side 29-8 SSP side, all connections 29-9 SSP side, one connection 29-9 interactive job 10-13 printer device 7-11 spool writer using menu option 20-7 SSP subsystem 21-2 system considerations 3-1 immediately 3-2 methods 3-1 power pushbutton 3-4 PWRDWNSYS command 3-3 storage restore 12-3 STRM36 15-1, 30-14 requirements for using 15-1 STRM36PRC 14-1, 14-6, 14-7, 30-14 restrictions 14-6 STRPASTHR 29-15 STRREXPRC 10-2 subconsole display using 17-5 displaying messages 18-6 replying to messages 18-7 requesting help menu 17-6 SSP 17-1 submitting batch job 10-2 batch job that runs immediately 10-2 job, batch 10-2 subsystem automatically starting ILAN 29-6 description working with 8-2 ending SSP 21-2 SSP 8-1, 21-1 working with 8-1, 8-2, 21-1 switched communications line 11-6 switching to a command display 17-4 system console 4-1 finding who is signed on 10-14

system (continued) identifying message from 5-5 message alert 5-5 critical 5-14 integrity 5-5 QSYSMSG 5-14 status 5-5 operations menus 6-9 power, uninterrupted 1-6 reference code, description 18-4, 18-9 restoring 12-2 saving 12-1 signing on OS/400 2-3 signing users off 10-13 starting 2-1 stopping 3-1 using the SSP console 17-1 System Attention light 1-3 system console determining device name 4-1 differences from other displays 4-1 system operator message displaying 5-7 system printer assigning 20-8 system value QIPLDATTIM 3-3 System/36 command and AS/400 command crossreference A-1

T T P 20-7 tape adding 31-10 deleting 31-10 initializing for saving files 25-2 replacing 31-10 restore the SSP Operating System by doing an IPL 25-21 tape cartridge drive changing to from CD-ROM drive 26-17 installing corrective SSP PTFs 26-5 tape device See also tape unit changing name 11-2 displaying status 11-1 renaming 11-3 status changing 11-1 displaying 11-1

Index

X-21

TAPEINIT 25-2 tasks using commands to do 19-1 procedures to do 19-1 temporary password changing 9-2 TFRM36 14-1, 14-3, 30-14 time slice 10-17 transferring important information 14-1 procedure to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 14-6 to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 14-3, 14-7 to an AS/400 Advanced 36 machine with automatic sign-on 14-5 to AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 30-7 using 14-3, 14-6, 14-7 STRPASTHR 14-7 TFRM36 14-3 transferring SSP console function during IPL 17-2 to alternative SSP console 17-3 to an alternative SSP console 17-2 when SSP console is in operation 17-3 when SSP console is not in operation 17-4 transferring to AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 14-1 transfers restrictions 14-1 STRM36PRC 14-1 TFRM36 14-1 turning off system See stopping

U unattended IPL changing B-3 setting B-3 unit See diskette unit See tape unit unlocking keyboard Error Reset key 18-10 user finding those signed on to the system 10-14 library restoring 12-6, 25-2 saving 12-4, 25-1 signed-on finding additional information about 10-14 signing off the system 10-13 working with signed-on 10-12

X-22


user job ending 10-9, 10-13 working with 10-5 batch 10-5 user profile 14-5 changing assistance level in 6-7 message queue defined in 5-8 user profile message queue 5-8 using APYM36CFG parameter 15-3 commands to do tasks 19-1 communications 27-1 console display, SSP 17-4 Electronic Customer Support D-1 Help for keyboard messages 18-11 to do a task 19-1 Help key for error messages explanations 18-11 Help key for parameters 19-1 help when you do not know the command 19-4 procedure 19-4 help when you know the command 19-1 procedure 19-1 IPLTYPE parameter 15-2 keyboard messages 18-11 pass-through 29-15 procedures to do tasks 19-1 RESTLIBR procedure to restore the SSP Operating System and licensed program products 25-19 SSP console 17-1 SSP help support 20-2 subconsole display 17-5 USRPRF parameter 15-2 WRKSPL command 20-2 USRPRF parameter using 15-2

V validating configuration of AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 31-39 validation message 31-39 varied off device 28-8 varied on device 28-8 VARY control command 27-1, 27-2 verifying ILAN communications 29-10, 29-11, 29-12, 29-13 for first AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-10 for second AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-10 for third AS/400 Advanced 36 machine 29-11 OS/400 29-12 SSP 29-13

VRYCFG

29-4, 29-8, 29-9, 29-14

W

WRKSPL procedure 20-8 WRKSPLF 7-13 WRKUSRJOB 10-5, 10-12, 10-13 WRKWTR 7-10

waiting messages 18-6 warning message definition 5-5 Work with diskette devices option Device Status Tasks menu 11-1 Work with display devices option Device Status Tasks menu 11-1 Work with jobs option Operational Assistant menu 10-5 Work with Printer Output Display using CL command to get to 7-3 Operational Assistant to get to 7-3 to find output 7-4 Work with tape devices option Device Status Tasks menu 11-1 working with history file 23-2 job queue 10-10 job schedule entry 10-3 messages 5-2 problem 5-15, 13-1, D-1, D-3 spool writers 20-6 SSP communications 24-1 SSP devices 24-1 SSP jobs 23-2 SSP program temporary fixes (PTFs) 26-1 SSP security 22-3 subsystem 8-2 subsystem description 8-2 user job 10-5, 10-13 writers 7-10 workstation adding using device mapping 31-12 using controller mapping to add workstations 31-17 remote support 27-1 writer printer 7-1, 20-1 writers working with 7-10 WRKCFGSTS 28-8 WRKJOBQ 10-10 WRKJOBSCDE 10-3 WRKM36 30-1, 30-14 WRKM36CFG 30-8 WRKMSG 5-2 WRKOBJLCK 28-8 WRKPRB 5-15, 13-1, D-1, D-3 WRKSPL 20-2 WRKSPL command using 20-2

Index

X-23

Reader Comments—We'd Like to Hear from You! AS/400 Advanced Series Operator Tasks – Multiple Operating Systems Publication No. SC21-8384-01 Overall, how would you rate this manual? Very Satisfied

Satisfied

Overall satisfaction

How satisfied are you that the information in this manual is: Accurate Complete Easy to find Easy to understand Well organized Applicable to your tasks THANK

YOU!

Please tell us how we can improve this manual:

May we contact you to discuss your responses? __ Yes __ No Phone: (____) ___________ Fax: (____) ___________ Internet: ___________ To return this form: Mail it Fax it United States and Canada: 800+937-3430 Other countries: (+1)+507+253-5192 Hand it to your IBM representative. Note that IBM may use or distribute the responses to this form without obligation.

Name

Company or Organization

Phone No.

Address

Dissatisfied

Very Dissatisfied

Cut or Fold Along Line

Reader Comments—We'd Like to Hear from You! SC21-8384-01



IBM

Fold and Tape

Please do not staple

Fold and Tape

NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST-CLASS MAIL

PERMIT NO. 40

ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

ATTN DEPT 542 IDCLERK IBM CORPORATION 3605 HWY 52 N ROCHESTER MN 55901-9986

Fold and Tape

SC21-8384-01

Please do not staple

Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold Along Line



IBM

Printed in the United States of America on recycled paper containing 10% recovered post-consumer fiber.

SC21-8384-ð1

Spine information:

IBM



AS400 Operations Basic

Recommend Documents